Welcom me to Play thee Game, a co ompendium  of  Paage 24  Advance  to  Kuut!    An  ITLS  scenario 
articles,  scenarios  and  rule  su uggestions  ffor  in Iraq 1915 
gaming  the  Great  War  usingg  one  of  t he   
TooFatLLardies rule sets for the p period.    Paage 29  No
ot  Another  Bloody  Poet.    An 
  overview of thhe Great War for the 
Over  thee  years  thatt  we  have  beeen  publishi ng  gamer 
our  Summmer  and  Ch hristmas  Spe ecials  we  haave   
produceed  a  whole  raft 
r of  mate erial  which  hhas  Paage 34  Things  are  aa  Bit  ‘Ard.    ITLSU 
never  bbefore  been  brought  together  in  o ne  mendments fo
am for East Africa  
place  aand  which,  collectivelyy,  provide  an   
insight  into  what  was 
w a  perio od  of  intennse  Paage 40  Tanga, Day Onne. An ITLSU  scenario 
change aand innovatiion.    in East Africa 11914 
   
The  main  rules  covered  here  are a If  the  Loord  Paage 44  Tanga,  Day Tw wo, An ITLSU scenario 
Spares  Us,  one  of  our  earliestt  publicationns,  in East Africa 11914 
and Thro ough the Mu ud & the Blo ood.  Howeveer,   
the  articles  also  coover  the  use e  of  Chain  of  Paage 48  The Other Mbooto Gorge.  A An ITLSU 
Comman nd  for  the  period  and  include  othher  sce
enario in Easst Africa 1916
6 
articles  on  map  kriiegsspiels  fo or  the  confl ict   
and  terrrain  making  from  Sidneyy,  our  resideent  Paage 51  In  Jordan’s  Hoot  Valley.    An 
A ITLSU 
artistic d
director.    Sce
enario in Pal estine 1918 
   
As  all  o
of  these  arrticles  have  been  cherrry‐ Paage 59  A  Tight 
T Ring.    An  ITLS  sce
enario  in 
picked  ffrom  old  Sppecials,  you  will  note  thhat  Syrria 1918 
the  pagee  numbers  shown 
s at  the  foot  of  eaach   
page  reelate  to  theeir  original  publication  in  Paage 65  Corps  Blimey.    Some  Great  War 
which  they  appeareed.    We  havve  added  neew  kriegsspiel  ideeas  and  a  sample 
numbers  at  the  top p  right  had  corner  whiich  ndenburg Linne scenario ffor 1917 
Hin
relate too the following list of con ntents.   
  Paage 79  Sid
d’s  Trenchess.    A  trench
h  terrain 

Con
ntents  
pro
oject from thhe master bu uilder. 

  Paage 85  Atttack on Cam
mp el Juba.  A
An ITLSU 
Page43  If  the  Lord  Spa ares  Us,  an  sce
enario in Meesopotamia 1
1915 
introducttion to the ru
ules   
  Paage 88  Ils  Ne  Passerront  Pas.    Mud  &  
Page 11  ar,  A  Palesti ne 
Attack  on  El  Mugha Bloood scenarioo at Verdun 1
1916 
1917 scenario for ITLSU   
  Paage 91  Somme  Encha nted  Evenin ng.    Mud 
Page 16  Square  Hill,  A  Paalestine  19 18  &  Blood  scenaario  on  the  Somme 
scenario for ITLSU  1916 
   
Page 20  A  Differeent  Kettle  of 
o Fish.    Usi ng  Paage 95  The  Game  to  End  all  Ga ames.    A 
machine guns in ITLSU  weestern  front  scenario  for  Mud  & 
  Blo
ood 
 
 3

Page 98  Revenge  at  Camp  El  Juba,  An  ITLS  Page 200  More  Sturmabteilung  Vor!  
scenario in Mesopotamia 1915  Stormtrooper tactics examined and 
  expanded for Mud & Blood 
Page 102  Last Chance on the Tigris.  An ITLSU   
scenario in Iraq 1916  Page 210  Stosstrupptaktik!    A  Pre‐Game 
  System for Mud & Blood 
Page 109  The  Disturbance  of  an  Antheap.    
An  Amiens  1918  scenario  for  Mud  Page 214  The Green Fields Beyond.  Training 
& Blood  Troops  for  the  long  anticipated 
  break  out.    1917  to  1918.    Three 
Page 114  Winter  Sports.    A  trench  raiding  scenarios for Mud & Blood 
game generator for Mud & Blood   
  Page 228  In  Flanders  Field.    A  look  at  early 
Page 120  Rolling  into  Action.    Representing  war  British  and  German  fire  and 
the  Tank  Corps  at  Third  Ypres,  movement tactics.   
1917, some ideas for Mud & Blood   
  Page 235  In  the  Last  Ditch  Again.    A  Retreat 
Page 124  Rolling In to Action:  The Scenarios.   from  Mons  1914  rearguard  action 
Two tank action scenarios for Third  with Mud & Blood. 
Ypres 1917   
  Page 238  Cocking  Up  Mud  &  Blood.  
Page 135  Midnight at the Oasis.  A Lawrence  Thoughts  on  blending  Chain  of 
of Arabia scenario for Mud & Blood  Command with Mud & Blood.  Rule 
  amendments,  Army  Lists  and 
Page 138  Insurrection is Mesopotamia.  Two  scenario adaptations 
scenarios for Iraq in the 1920s with   
Mud & Blood  Page 255  Kaiserschlacht  1918.    A  Pint‐Sized 
  campaign  for  the  Spring  Offensive 
 Page 144  Storm of Dice.  Using ITLSU on the  of  1918.    Six  Scenarios  for  Mud  & 
Western Front  Blood and Chain of Command  
   
Page 150  Sidney  Gets  Woods.    Building  Page 268  Handgranaten!  A look at bombing 
shattered  woods  for  the  Western  and  grenade  tactics  through  the 
Front  Great War 
   
Page 156  A  Brief  Affair.    Invading  the  Page 275  Loos,  At  your  Convenience.      A 
German  colony  of  Rabaul  in  1914  Pint‐Sized  campaign  for  this  1915 
with Mud & Blood  battle with four scenarios. 
   
Page 160  Passchendaele,  The  Bitter  Victory.     
Reflecting  on  this  1917  battle  in    
the mud  
 
Page 170  In the Salient.  Three Scenarios for 
Passchendaele  1917  for  Mud  & 
Blood  
 
Page 190  Just  the  Right  Sort  of  Chap.  
Creating  characters  for  Mud  & 
Blood. 
 

• • •• • •• ••• •••• • • • •• ••• •• ••• ••• • • • •• •
•• • • ••• • • • • • ••• •• • ••••• •• • • • • •• • •
• • • •• •• •• •• • •• •• • • • •• • • • ••• • •• ••
• •• •• • • • ••• • • • ••••• • • ••• • • •• •• •
• •• • •• • • ••• • • ••• •• •• • ••• •• ••• • •
•••• • •• • • •• • • •• •••• • • • • ••• • • • • •••
• • • ••• • • • • • •• • •• • • • • • •• •• • • •• • ••
• ••• •• • • • • • • • • • • • •••• • ••• •• • • • • • •
•• ••••• •• • •• • • • •• •• •• • • •• • • • • •••
• • • • •••• • •• • • • •• ••
• • •• • • • •• •• • • •• •• • • •• • • • ••••
• •• •• ••• • • • • ••• • •• •••• • •••
4
T
urkey declared war on Great Britain on 30th
October 1914. It was hardly a surprise,
especially to the Germans, who had
manipulated the diplomatic strings to ensure that
Turkey’s entry into the war became inevitable. For
the Germans, Turkish involvement threatened to
further isolate the Russians by closing off the Black
Sea and also provide a threat to the Suez Canal, the
jugular vein of the British Empire.
But Turkey was tired. After their experiences in the
Balkans a few years previously the Turks were
hardly desperate to fight, but fight they did, and
Johnny Turk’s resilience and bravery is a recurring
theme in accounts of actions from all theatres in
the Great War in which Turkish soldiers saw action.
If the Lord Spares Us, the new rule set from
Toofatlardies, enables gamers to recreate actions
from across the Middle East in WW1, games in which
more often than not, the enemy was a Turk. What I
hope to provide here is some background on the
main theatres of the Great War in the Middle East,
and to discuss the key principles behind our new
offering.

Why ITLSU?
L/Sgt Albert Skinner (see photo) of the 2/4th
Queen’s Own Royal West Kent Regiment was killed
fighting against the Turks in a fierce engagement at
Khuweilfe, north east of Beersheba, on 4th
November 1917. Albert’s battalion formed part of
the 53rd Division and had fought on the Gallipoli
peninsular before being evacuated to Egypt in
December 1915. After a brief period in the Western
desert during 1916, the battalion took part in the
advance across Sinai and in 1917 saw action again in
the first and second battles of Gaza, most notably in
the second action where it was fiercely engaged on
Samson’s Ridge.
Albert was wounded somewhere
along the way (we think at second
Gaza) and whilst in an Australian
Field Hospital was able to send a
letter back to his parents in Great
Chart, near Ashford, Kent. Apart
from his medals, a photo and a
couple of postcards from India, this
letter is all that survives of my Great
Uncle. It reads:
11th June 1917
Dear Father, Mother, Sister,
Brother,
Just a few lines to let you know
that I am getting on quite fine
and I expect I shall soon be out of hospital. I have
not heard from you for quite a long time, nor
have I heard from Douglas or Jim lets hope they
are getting on alright. Tell them when you write
to them that I am still alive and kicking.
Remember me to all the boys of Chart …
…Tell the girls I am still in the pink. I suppose
you have heard about me getting wounded and
where it was. I can’t make it out that I don’t get
any letters from you or any parcels have not had
one for about 6 weeks. … Well, I have not much
more to say this time.
Good Luck till we meet again, if the Lord spares
us.
From your loving Son, Albert”.
It was this poignant letter that set me off
investigating Albert’s contribution to the war and it
is his signing off “If the Lord Spares Us” that for me
represents what the war was about to the ordinary
soldier, and is the reason the rules are so titled.
Albert is buried in the Commonwealth graveyard in
Beersheba, and commemorated on the war
memorial in his home village.
5
So much for the family history, but what does this
period offer the wargamer? Let’s look at each
theatre in turn:
Egypt
S
trategically crucial due to the Suez Canal –
Britain’s lifeline to the East – Egypt had a
strong military garrison early in the war.
Egypt provided the location for Turkey’s initial
aggressive moves in the Middle East. Early in 1915, a
column of troops was despatched to attempt to
cross the Suez Canal, in the hope that their advance
would create a swell of pro-Turkish Arab sentiment
in Cairo that would led to military
unrest and ultimately the collapse of
British authority in the region. This
may sound like a far fetched dream,
and so it turned out. The attack on
Suez was a disaster for the Turks, but
provides great potential for ITLSU.
Turks attempted to cross the canal in
an assortment of boats and pontoons
that they had dragged with them
across the Sinai peninsular, watched
all the way by British Aerial
reconnaissance aircraft. British and
Indian troops were manning defensive
positions along the canal and drove
the Turkish attack back, assisted by
gunfire from naval vessels on the
canal. Defeated, the Turks retired
back towards Gaza. Murray, the
British General in charge, had a defensive brief, and
with only a handful of cavalry available, was unable
to pursue.
Turkish hopes of insurrection however were not
totally dashed, and in 1916 Arab tribesmen in the
Western Desert who were loyal to the Senussi
movement were coerced by the Turks into
rebellion. General Maxwell, in charge of the British
forces in Egypt, went about subduing the rebellion
with regular troops including yeomanry, armoured
cars and camel mounted troops. The Senussi proved
hard to track down, and were able to bloody the
nose of the British at Wadi Majid on Christmas Day
1915 and at Halazin a month later. Maxwell was
only able to bring the situation under control once
Jaffa Pasha, the leader of the revolt, was captured
in February 1916. Some of the actions against the
Senussi would make small, but interesting, games
for ITLSU (and would be great for an IABSM WW1
bolt on supplement too!)
Gallipoli
M
ost famous as Churchill’s brainchild and the
place where Mel Gibson first saw active
combat before going to Vietnam. A mere 10
miles wide, the Gallipoli peninsular in the
Dardanells was the scene of a bloody campaign for
nine months in 1915. An invasion force for this
second front was gathered and troops landed on the
 6

GALLIPOLI PALESTINE
Churchill’s Only after two
brainchild that cost bloody failures at
so dear. From Gaza and the arrival
amphibious of Allenby were the
landings under fire British able to break
to rugged hilltop the Turkish line in
trench fighting. October 1917. This
Initial Landings in theatre was the
April 1915 were scene of a host of
soon followed by mounted actions and
nightmarish gritty defences, as
conditions and the well as infantry
ultimate fighting in hard
withdrawal 9 terrain. The final
months later. This drive to Aleppo was
Turkish victory the culmination of
buoyed morale one of the greatest
across the Ottoman campaigns of WW.1.
Empire.
This theatre has it
all; pitched battles,
EGYPT massed barrages,
Arabs, camels,
The Turks tanks, armoured
attempted to cross cars, gas, cavalry
the Suez Canal in charges & river
early 1915 but crossings in what
were beaten back was truly a biblical
in one of the most landscape.
disastrous river
crossings ever. Also
site of the Senussi
uprising which saw
MESOPOTAMIA
many units in
1914 - 1918
action against
Early British
Arabs in the
advances reversed
Western Desert
at Kut in 1916.
Appeals include
THE SINAI PENINSULAR ARABIA Brigade Actions,
local Arabs (both
An inhospitable peninsular across which the Egyptian Home of Lawrence of Arabia and the arab sides), diverse
Expeditionary Force advanced in 1916. Fierce mobile clashes soon revolt. Smaller scale actions including famous troop types, river
proved the value of units like the Australian Light Horse and clashes at Akaba and later at Tafila as well as gunboats,
Camel Brigade. Scene of surprise counter attacks by Kress von numerous local actions. Time to get out that armoured cars and
Kressenstein at Katia and Romani armoured train! flotillas.

peninsular in April, with 35,000 men under
Lieutenant General Hunter Weston landing at Cape
Helles and the 17,000 ANZACs going in just further
north at what was to become known as Anzac cove.
These opposed landings themselves make for a
superb scenario.
Defiant resistance from the Turks, under the
command of future Turkish President Mustapha
Kemal (with significant input from German General
Liman von Sandars) kept British and ANZAC troops
from making any headway.
the peninsular in December 1915, which pulled back
the surviving troops to Egypt.
As well as the landings and attacks inland to secure
high points, this campaign also provides the
backdrop to the ‘disappearance’ of men of the 5th
Norfolks, many of whom were recruited from the
King’s Sandringham Estate in Norfolk, who charged
Turkish positions on 12th August 1915 and were
never seen again.
Sinai

Further landings at Suvla Bay in August provided
early hope but delivered little in reality and by late
in the year it was clear no progress would be made
and that the Turks had held firm. British senior
commanders – particularly General Hamilton – took
much of the blame. One of the few acts that were
made skilfully by the British was the evacuation of
W
ith Egypt full of troops recovered from
Gallipoli, and with the Arab revolt in the
Hejaz looking more promising (to the British
at least), General Murray was authorised to advance
from Egypt across the Sinai peninsular and into
Palestine. Progress of what was by now termed the
Egyptian Expeditionary Force was slow, as Murray
took time to build the railway line and road way
that would be his vital supply line for all things,

including water, for which a pipeline was built. As
he advanced, engineers worked ahead of the
column to sink wells, on Easter Day 1916 a body of
the Worcestershire Yeomanry protecting these
engineers at the oasis Oghratina and Katia were
caught out by a surprise attack by 3,000 Turks as
von Kressenstein pushed troops forward. In August,
as the British pushed further east von Kressenstein
attacked again – with excellent local success at first
– in what was to be known as the Battle of Romani.
Ultimately however the Turks could not prevent the
British advance, and the campaign closed with the
mounted troops of the Light Horse and Camel
Brigades delivering attacks on redoubted positions
at Rafa and Magdhaba, which ultimately forced the
Turks back to Gaza, and enabled the British to seize
El Arish on the Palestinian border.
Palestine
B
y the spring of 1917 Murray and his troops
were poised at Gaza, the gateway to the
fertile lands of Palestine. The first attack on
the town took place in March 1917 and was a fine
mess. Whilst some of the infantry wandered around
in the fog, others plunged manfully on. The cavalry
advanced right round to the rear of the Turkish
positions, before Murray, uncertain because of poor
communications about exactly how well his men had
progressed, ordered a withdrawal and let Johnny
Turk hold his ground. Another attack followed a
month later, but the Mehmetciks had used their
time carefully and, even though the British brigades
– now with some Tanks in support - made some
headway, the Turkish defences again stood firm.
The British sat back, consolidated their positions
and bided their time. For a few months static
trench warfare was the order of the day,
interspersed with raids to keep the enemy on his
toes.
The appointment of General Edmund Allenby in
June 1917 to replace Murray brought with it a new
impetus and crucially, additional troops. By
October, Allenby had devised a plan to break the
left flank of the Turkish Gaza-Beersheba defences,
and at the end of the month the plan was put into
action. By now Allenby commanded three mounted
7
divisions, the XX Corps of four infantry divisions
(10th, 53rd, 60th and 74th), the XXI Corps of three
divisions (52nd, 54th and 75th) plus attached support.
The attack by the Desert Mounted Corps was
successful and included the famous charge of the
Australian Light Horse at Beersheba. Outflanked,
the Gaza position was then driven in by XXI Corps,
who began a campaign that was to see the British
reach Jerusalem by Christmas. This eight week
period includes numerous encounters that are great
for gaming, including infantry and cavalry actions at
Mughar, the yeomanry charge to seize the guns at
Huj, bloody engagements by the Camel Corps in the
hills NW of Beersheba, plus a number of local
Turkish counter attacks around Khuweilfe, Nebi
Samweil, across the river Auja and then again to
retake Jerusalem.
From February to May 1918 Allenby conducted a
series of operations in the extreme climate
conditions of the Jordan Valley, which saw tough
fighting around places such as Es Salt, where again
Turkish counter-attacks gained local success, and
for the middle part of the year Allenby was forced
to re-evaluate as troops were called to Europe to
secure the lines against major German offensives,
but by September, Allenby had devised another
attack that would ultimately see British troops
reach Damascus, and ultimately Aleppo, within
three months. The Megiddo (or Armageddon)
campaign was the culmination of the war in this
theatre and provided another period of mobile
warfare that was never achieved on the Western
Front. Great action for ITLSU include actions at
Haifa, Samakh, Irbid and around Kuneitra
Arabia
T
urkish influence extended through its Empire
to the holy cities of Medina and Mecca in
Arabia and many men serving in the Ottoman
army were of ‘Arab’ origin. With war on their
doorstep, the Turks pressured local Arab leaders to
declare jihad against the British – a move which
could have dramatic consequences across the
Moslem lands of the British Empire. Sharif Hussein,
the head of the Hasemite arabs, refused to oblige,

and in fact was more sympathetic towards the
British than he was to the Turks.
Initially the British offered every support short of
actual help, but before long the British realised the
potential of the Arabs to offer them key support in
pinning down larger Turkish formations, and slowly,
the Arab army was formed. With key figures like
T.E Lawrence leading the way, the Arabs attacked
Mecca and Akaba, sabotaged the Hejaz railway
between Mecca and Damascus and won a pitched
battle at Tafila against formed Turkish troops. As
the end of the war closed, the irregular force was
becoming reinforced with detachments of regular
troops and eventually, acting alongside Allenby’s
advancing army in Palestine, captured Damascus,
where they were able to setup an Arab government
in Damascus under King Faisal I, the son of Sharif
Hussein.
Mesopotamia
I
n November of 1914 Indian Expeditionary Force D
arrived at Abadan - near Basra in modern day Iraq
- in the Persian Gulf. The objective for this
reinforced brigade which included both Indian and
British troops was to secure the BP oil pipeline, but
before long the expedition was encountering and
defeating Turkish troops in a series of engagements
up the Tigris. This campaign has some excellent
appeals for the wargamer, with brigade sized
actions taking place supported by naval gunfire from
gunboats acting in concert with the infantry and
supported by a flotilla of steamships that served as
both troop transports, hospital ships and supply
ferries. Great actions for wargaming include Saihan,
Shaiba, Qurna and Al Nasiriyeh. One Division under
Major general Charles Townshend advanced along
the Tigris, while another, under Nixon, went up the
Euphrates to Nasiriya. On 28 September 1915,
having inflicted heavy losses on the Turks,
Townshend’s Division, entered the town of Kut Al
Amarah, situated on a large horseshoe bend on the
Tigris, and by mid November he was only 25 miles
from Baghdad.
8
Pushing North again, Townshend won an almost
pyrrhic victory against the Turks at Ctestiphon, from
which the British were forced to fall back to Kut,
where they were duly surrounded, and where they
eventually surrendered the following April before
the relief column- two Indian Divisions known as the
Tigris Corps - could fight it’s way through.
In mid 1916, as the British military digested the
slaughter on the Somme, Nixon was replaced by
General Frederick Maude who, with additional
reinforcements bolstering his ranks, was able to
again begin offensive operations, leading to success
at Kut in February 1917 and the capture of the
prized city of Baghdad two weeks later. Advancing
on again up the Euphrates, Maude won again at
Ramadi in September, before dying of Cholera and
being replaced by General Marshall. Their empire
crumbling, the Turks were unable to counter British
advances, which led to the capture of Mosul and it’s
oilfields in November 1918 – after the war had
ended.
The armies involved
T
here is perhaps a surprising variety in the
types of troops deployed in these theatres
(and I’m principally talking about Palestine,
Gallipoli, Arabia and Mesopotamia here). For the
British and Empire forces, the inexperienced
territorial units thrust into action on Gallipoli
alongside the ANZAC units were a mile away from
the hardened infantry that pushed through the Holy
Land two and a half years later. Aside from the
British infantry, troops from across the Empire were
employed, with deployments to Mesopotamia and
Africa coming initially from the Indian Army, which,
at the time contained perhaps the cream of the
British Army’s officer class. Indian regiments were
deployed across the region, and were part of the
force defending the Suez Canal in 1915. Whilst
Allenby’s aggressive infantry of 1917 comprised
primarily British divisions, by 1918 many of these
had been transferred to France and replaced with
more Indian units. The multi-cultural make up of
the British Army of this period is nicely captured by
the Camel Brigade, which included two Australian
battalions, one New Zealand battalion and one
British battalion. Artillery support for the brigade
came from the Hong Kong and Singapore Mountain
Battery. The Australian Light Horse emerged to be
crack mounted troops during Allenby’s campaigns,
and the war of movement that was the Megiddo
campaign truly gave them plenty of opportunity to
prove this. The British Yeomanry also proved
themselves, and the units that left the region in
1918 were a considerable improvement on what
they had been two years previously. The French also
had a small detachment of troops in the region, and
this could be used to add a little je ne sais pas to
games.
Their principle enemy was the Turkish infantryman,
who proved himself on numerous occasions to be a
resourceful tough fighter who was hard to dislodge.

At Gallipoli the Turkish resolve and fighting abilities
completely neutralised every British attempt to
breakthrough their defences. The success at
Gallipoli ensured the Turkish army could boast some
veteran units in 1916, but within 12 months many of
these had been whittled away, either by enemy
action, poor supply or desertion, which gradually
became more and more of a problem as the defeats
became more frequent and the Arab revolt took
hold. The Turks were bolstered here and there by
German and Austrian influence. It was Djemal
Pasha, for instance who lead the Turks across Sinai
to attack Suez, but the logistical mastermind behind
the manoeuvres, and the hit-and-run attacks in
Sinai the following year, was the Bavarian officer
Kress von Kressenstein. With von Falkenhayn and
von Sandars all playing lead command roles in the
Turkish army at various stages during the war in
Palestine the extent of German influence in the
command structure is obvious. At the front line
however, limited numbers of German and Austrian
Troops were deployed. Most notably these took the
form of machine-gunners and artillery units,
although German infantry battalions did attack and
overwhelm Australian Light Horse defenders in an
attack at Abu Tellul in the Jordan Valley.
Infinite variety of Arab irregulars saw action in
Arabia and parts of Mesopotamia, where early in the
war they were probably more likely to be fighting
for the Turks than against them. By 1917 however
the Arab revolt was well underway and allegiances
were more favourable towards the British.
One of the key features of the war in the Middle
East was that artillery was not available in the same
numbers as was seen in the Western Front. Moving
such heavy pieces was not an easy task in the
difficult terrain of the region and, indeed, once
main line static positions were broken artillery
could not always keep pace with the moving troops.
Again, because of the generally more fluid nature of
the fighting, the massive machine gun barrages of
the Western Front were seldom achieved, although
careful positioning and groupings of machine guns
can make a big difference in brigade level actions
like those we are covering in ITLSU.
Africa
W
hilst not covered explicitly in the core
rules, and not shown on the ITLSU map
above, ITLSU can be used for gaming WW1
in East Africa, especially some of the larger actions
like the debacle seen at Tanga in 1914. Certain
tweaking to cover troop types may be needed, but
the core principles will be well suited to recreating
the campaigns of von Lettow-Vorbeck. There is
little doubt that this would make for an excellent
campaign.
ITLSU vs TOTW: A whole new war!
G
amers with WW1 Turkish armies for ITLSU, or
WW1 Russian Armies for TOTW can suddenly
find they have another war to game as the
9
Turks and Russians engaged in awful and bloody
actions in the Caucasus. Long term adversaries,
Turkey and Russia leapt at each other in a series of
vicious actions in 1914. Initially the Russians drove
in Turkish positions, but the Turks quickly rallied
and were able to regain some ground before being
defeated at the battle of Sarikamish (halfway
between Kars and Erzerum) over the New Year
period – a battle which saw the Turks lose 30,000
men. In a theatre perhaps most famous for the
Armenian genocide, 1915 saw static warfare in
similar style to the rest of Europe.
In January 1916 the Russians launched attacks which
enabled them to make deep advances into Turkish
territory, capturing the port of Trebizond. Despite
being buoyed from their victories in Gallipoli, the
Turks were unable to counter attack effectively,
and the situation looked bleak.
During this period the Russian army in the region
was led by Nikolai Yudenich, who secured victories
over the Turks at Malazgirt in August, 1915, Erzurum
in February 1916, Trabzon in April 1916 and
Erzincan two months.
The outbreak of the RCW enabled the Turks to
consolidate against a weakened foe and a fragile
armistice was signed in November 1917. However,
the Turks took advantage of turmoil within Russia to
retake lost ground, and during 1918 they took the
offensive once again, driving as far as the rich oil
producing areas around Baku, on the Caspian Sea.
By now the Russian General Yudenich had gone off
to fight for the Whites, and in October 1918 he led
troops in action to capture Gatchina, near
Petrograd. While Russia was in disarray, Turkey was
by now faring little better. Faced with defeat in
other theatres, the Turks were unable to retain
their newly conquered territories and, as part of the
peace settlement, were forced to revert to earlier
borders.
Whilst not tested, there is no reason why ITLSU
could not be expanded to cover actions on the
Russian Front.
Concepts within the rules
W
e decided early on in the development of
ITSLU that we would be aiming the rules
primarily at brigade sized actions, thinking
at first that we could just build on the principles of
Triumph of the Will. This was also the scale of
action that, we felt, placed significant emphasis on
the command and control networks, with brigades
(or equivalent sized commands) being assigned
particular objectives to achieve as a unit. It soon
became obvious, as we discovered more about the
nature of the fighting, the troop types and the
command structures specific to the theatre that this
would be no simple TOTW bolt-on.
At the heart of the rules is the infantry brigade,
whose overall effectiveness is driven both by the

quality of the troops who make up the individual
units, but also by the quality of their commander.
Good commanders with good troops historically
were able to take the initiative and dominate the
battlefield, and this is reflected in ITLSU. Each
brigade commander has a quality rating, and this
affects his ability to keep troops in order. In
addition, a simple system of signal bases is used to
replicate communications networks, and provide
example of how difficult it can be to take effective
command of a body of troops dispersed over a wide
are of difficult ground.
WW1 gaming at this level takes some getting used
to. One of the first things you notice is that the
firepower of the basic infantry unit seems pathetic
when compared to the potentially devastating
influence of the machine gun. The MG thus becomes
the main weapon of destruction, and it is
interesting to game a period where massed
deployment of MG barrages can really create a
killing zone through which advancing infantry are
simply shredded. And so it should be. These
weapons, along with concentrated artillery fire,
become the major factors on the battlefield and
must be handled with expertise.
ITLSU is a card driven rule set. Each unit or
commander is activated on the turn of it’s card, and
unspotted units are represented as ‘blinds’. To add
friction to a battlefield where local terrain and
command problems often led to delay and
confusion, the Tea Break card remains, although
unlike IABSM, an MG (within effective range) or
artillery piece that has not been activated in that
turn may get to fire, further emphasising the
importance of these weapons in the commanders
armoury. A number of other specific cards help to
give flavour to the period, and many of these will
be familiar concepts that gamers will already have
encountered in IABSM.
As battle progresses, the combat units (of which the
basic unit is the infantry company), sustain damage
in the form of ‘kills’ (i.e. figure removal) and
‘suppression points’. This too will be a familiar
concept. The ability of a unit to retain cohesion and
fighting ability in the face of enemy fire is covered
by what we have charmingly called its ‘spunk
rating’. Fine fellows with plenty of spunk are soon
able to shake off the effects of a little fire that
would see lesser men flee the field.
Play testing for ITLSU seems to have been going on
for years, and we probably played our first game
back in 2002. It seems reasonable therefore to
extend a few words of thanks to the regulars at Lard
Island for being such good sports who have been
keen to contribute to the development of the rules
and put up with some bizarre fictional scenarios
designed simply for play testing. I should also thank
my co-author, Mr Clarke, for his input which, he
tells me, was substantial.
10
I am pleased that we are able to include two starter
scenarios of ITLSU in this Christmas Cracker, and
look forward to including more – and there are
plenty of them – in our coming publications. I hope
too that others will contribute to discussions and
developments via the group and future specials.
Reference Materials
C
onsidering the vast volumes available on the
Great War on the Western Front the war out
East is less well covered, with the notable
exception of the Gallipoli campaign which is the
subject of many excellent texts. For Palestine and
Mesopotamia I recommend the Official Histories,
which are most readily available from Naval and
Military Press, but other good texts include: The
Last Crusade by Anthony Bruce, The Palestine
Campaigns by Lt General AP Wavell, and Allenby’s
War by David Bullock. A good general book on the
war against Turkey is in Lord Carver’s book The
Turkish Front.
If you want to look at the action form the other side
of the hill, Liman von Sandars classic Five Years in
Turkey is essential reading.
Osprey have campaign books on Gallipoli and
Megiddo (1918). These are probably better value
than the standard Osprey Men-at-Arms books for
this theatre; The Ottoman Army and The British
Army in the Great War (3) East, which, although
they have nice drawings, are a bit sketchy on some
of the detail that wargamers like to see. A better
option on the Turks is the 1916 British intelligence
Handbook of the Turkish Army, which gives detail
on theoretical strengths and unit types.
For details on Arabia, look no further than TE
Lawrence’s own Seven Pillars of Wisdom,
accompanied again by the official histories. The
Osprey book Lawrence and the Arab revolts also
gives some detail on the Senussi uprisings in Egypt.
So, what are you waiting for? Don your solar topee,
mount your camel and set off into the arid lands of
the Middle East, where we’ll meet again, If the Lord
Spares Us.
 11

O
ur first ITLSU scenario takes
as its subject a fairly typical
infantry assault during the
fighting of 1917 in Palestine.

After two failed attempts to seize

the town of Gaza in March and April
of 1917, General Murray was
replaced by General Allenby.
Allenby, “The Bull” had a solid
track record as a cavalry
commander in France and was
expected to add a new
determination to the war out east.

One of his first acts as commander

of the British forces in Palestine was
to move his headquarters from
Cairo – where Murray had left it –
right up to the front, with obvious
consequences for the focus of the
command team! As a new man in a
new job, Allenby had also been able
to lobby successfully for additional
forces and during the summer
months of 1917 more units began to
move to the theatre, increasing
Allenby’s options, and enabling him
to mass troops for his attack on the
Gaza - Beersheba front which
eventually took place at the end of
October.

W
hilst British infantry initially
pinned Turkish positions in
Gaza, Allenby utilised his
mounted troops and executed a
right hook on Turkish positions near
Beersheba (scene of the famous
charge of the Australian Light
Horse). This breakthrough
outflanked the by now impressive Turkish positions pushed the enemy - in this case the Turkish 7th
at Gaza and the Turks there were soon driven from Division - out of the small village of Beshshit. Now
their positions once Allenby moved his infantry though, the enemy held good defensive positions
against them. Having succeeded where his around the hilltop village of El Mughar and
predecessor had failed, Allenby continued to push neighbouring Katrah. Keen to maintain momentum,
North and North East, and by the 13th November the the British quickly decided to push on. This
155th Brigade, part of the 53rd Infantry Division ‘brigade-a-side’ scenario is based on the action that
which by now was pushing NW into the hills, had followed…

Officer Commanding 155th
Brigade, 52nd (Lowland) Division
13th November 1917
I
t is two weeks since Allenby broke the Turkish
lines with an outflanking movement at
Beersheba. With the Turkish left flank broken
by the Mounted Corps, the 52nd Division soon
expelled Johnny Turk from his Gaza stronghold
during the first week of November and the
Division has since been moving steadily North
East, meeting pockets of Turkish resistance,
which has, at times, proved stubborn because of
the difficult going of the terrain.
Now it appears the Turks have decided to make
a stand in terrain that is become more hilly and
harsh. Yesterday the Turkish outpost line was
pushed in and RFC patrols confirmed that a large
body of Turks are occupying the ridges and
villages of between Kubeibe and Yabnah, running
approximately north west to south east
Division has decided that an immediate offensive
be launched to push the Turks from this position.
The 155th Brigade has been assigned the task of
driving the Turks from the ridges and villages of
El Mughar, and Katrah, jumping off from a start
line around the village of Beshshit. Intelligence
gathered from prisoners suggests that the
position is held by elements of the 7th Infantry
Division.
The attack is due to commence at 05.30 hrs. To
your right, the 156th Brigade will advance to
attack at the same time as your brigade, whilst
your left flank will be supported by the 5th and
8th Mounted Brigades.
12
Artillery support for your assault will be provided
by C Battery, of CCLXI (II Lowland) Brigade, RFA.
Ideally greater firepower would be available, but
it has not been possible for the artillery to make
good headway in this difficult terrain.
Your force is described below
BRITISH OOB
155th Brigade (South Scottish)
Brigade HQ – Harrow
2 Signals bases, 52nd Divisional Signals Company
Brigade Machine Gun Officer
1/4th Bn, the Royal Scots Fusiliers
Battalion HQ
A Company – (8 figs) Jolly Good Fellows
B Company - (8 figs) Jolly Good Fellows
C Company - (8 figs) Jolly Good Fellows
D Company - (8 figs) Jolly Good Fellows
1/5th Bn, the Royal Scots Fusiliers
Battalion HQ
A Company - (8 figs) Jolly Good Fellows
B Company - (8 figs) Jolly Good Fellows
C Company - (8 figs) Jolly Good Fellows
D Company - (8 figs) Jolly Good Fellows
1/4th (The Border) Bn, the King's Own Scottish
Borderers
Battalion HQ
A Company - (8 figs) Jolly Good Fellows
B Company - (8 figs) Jolly Good Fellows
C Company - (8 figs) Jolly Good Fellows
1/5th (Dumfries and Galloway) Bn, the King's
Own Scottish Borderers
Battalion HQ
A Company - (8 figs) Jolly Good Fellows
B Company – (8 figs) Jolly Good Fellows
C Company – (8 figs) Jolly Good Fellows
155th Brigade Machine Gun Company (5MG’s)**
155th Trench Mortar Battery (Not Present)
Attached
C Battery, CCLXI (II Lowland) Brigade, RFA -
Jolly Good Fellows (4 guns [2 models])
B squadron, Gloucestershire Yeomanry – Jolly
Good Fellows (liaison troops for 5th Mounted
Brigade – must be deployed on your left flank)
** You must decide before the game begins how
you will assign you MG assets. This can either be
assigned to units (in which case they move and
act on the battalion card) or two or more guns
can be deployed as an MG unit.
 13

Two squadrons of cavalry have also been made

available to you.

You must prevent the British breaking through

your position.

Your command is detailed below

TURKISH OOB

7th Division
20th Alay,
Alay HQ – Young Turk
2 signals bases

20th Alay, 1st Tabur

Tabur HQ
Officer Commanding 20th Alay, 7th 1st Boluk (6 figs) Johnny Turk
Division 2nd Boluk (6 figs) Johnny Turk
3rd Boluk (6 figs) Johnny Turk
It is 13th November 1917.
20th Alay, 2nd Tabur
ou are Khardiff Bey, commanding the 20th Tabur HQ

Y Alay (Regiment) of the 7th Division.

At the end of October the British launched a

1st Boluk (6 figs) Pasha Bashers
2nd Boluk (6 figs) Pasha Bashers
3rd Boluk (6 figs) Pasha Bashers
major attack on Beersheba, followed a few days
later by an attack on Gaza that the 53rd Division 21st Alay, 1st Tabur
could not contain. The 53rd Division has broken Tabur HQ
northwards, and the 7th Division has been tasked 1st Boluk (8 figs) Johnny Turk
with holding a defensive line whilst the rest of 2nd Boluk (8 figs) Johnny Turk
the army regroups further north. The defensive
line runs approximately NW to SE.
Attached:
It has been decided that the line of the Wadi Machine Gun Company (6 Mg’s) – Johnny Turk
Jamus, with its villages and ridges of Katrah, 2 squadrons cavalry + HQ – Damned Sodomites
Beshshit and El Mughar will be held by the 20th
Alay. To your right (NE) the 134th Regiment are
holding the line, whilst elements of the 20th Artillery
Regiment are deployed further to the East and 706th Batterie (77mm) 2 guns – Kaisers Bills
South East. Artillery support is provided by a 122nd Artillery (77mm) 4 guns – Pasher Basher
Turkish 77mm Field Gun battery, and a smaller
German battery of the same. You must be sure
to site the artillery carefully, as it is very
difficult to manoeuvre guns in this difficult ** You must decide before the game begins how
ground. you will assign you MG assets. This can either be
assigned to units (in which case they move and
Your men, some of whom were veterans from act on the battalion card) or two or more guns
Gallipoli, have been much harangued by air can be deployed as an MG unit.
attacks and in recent months poor supply and
confusion in the higher command has meant the
few replacements have been available to replace
sick and injured men, and consequently your
command is under strength. However, what it
lacks in manpower it gains in a high ratio of
machine guns. Your men can be deployed in
scrapes in the ground – there has not been
enough time to prepare a substantial entrenched
position and there is no wire available.
 14

Umpires notes The Turks can deploy anywhere inside the

deployment zone shown on the map. Troops can
be in scrapes, and therefore benefiting from

T
he following note from dispatches of the
period sets the scene nicely for the terrain: light cover, but not in trenches. Again, the Turks
should have one blind per command, plus three
“The country over which the attack took dummies.
place is open and rolling, dotted with
small villages surrounded by mud walls,
with plantations of trees outside the
walls. The most prominent feature is the
line of heights on which the villages of
Katrah and Mughar stand out above the
flat ground which separets them from the
rising ground to the west, on which
stands the village of Beshit, about 2,000
yards distant. This Katrah - Mughar line
forms a very strong position, and it was
here that the enemy made his most
determined resistance.

The villages of Mughar, Beshshit and Katrah

should be represented by groups of no more than
two or three small adobe style buildings. Mughar
should be the most elevated position, with The Cards
Katrah and Beshshit a contour lower. None of This scenario will require the following cards:
the villages are fortifications from which guns
can fire from redoubted positions! I suggest that British Cards
each building (which represents a built up area) British Blinds
be allowed to house the equivalent of one British CO (x 2)
infantry company. British Battalion 1
British Battalion 2
Although the hills were a good defensive British Battalion 3
position, there was a negative impact on the British Battalion 4
defenders machine gunners in as much as there British Cavalry 1
is a dead zone at the foot of the ridge into which British MGs*
MG’s and artillery cannot plunge fire. A sensible British Artillery (2 cards, one for each model)
suggestion is that troops that reach 4” of the Water, Water
foot of the hill should count as being in dead Stiff Upper Lip
ground for such firing. Biggles!

The open ground between Beshshit and the other Turkish cards
villages should be around 40 inches wide, Turkish Blinds
through which runs the Wadi Jamus. Turkish CO (x2)
Turkish Battalion (or Tabur) 1
The Wadi should provide some light cover for the Turkish Battalion 2
British as they advance, but this was not a Turkish Battalion 3
particularly prominent position and so be careful Turkish MGs*
not to over-emphasise it. It is certainly not a dry Turkish Artillery (3 cards, one for each gun)
gully along which troop can advance unexposed Turkish Cavalry 1
and is probably best handled as soft cover. Hesitant Troops
Movement uphill should be classed as bad going. They don’t like it up em!
Turkish Delight
The British can deploy anywhere along their
start positions as shown on the map. The only Plus, of course, the Tea Break card
limitation to their deployment is that the cavalry
detachment must be positioned to the left of *Only include separate MG card (or cards) if the
their line, as they represent the link to the commander has decided to group his MG’s
Yeomanry Brigade. The British are allocated one together into one or more units. If he decides to
blind for each battalion or separate command, allocate guns to individual battalions then the
plus one dummy blind. gun acts on the battalion card. If he creates
 15

more than one separate MG unit, then remember Historical Outcome

to include a card in the pack for each.

The Biggles! Card is an aerial reconnaissance
card which, when turned, allows the British to
spot a randomly selected Turkish blind. This
represents a message being dropped from a
passing aircraft warning of the presence of
enemy troop concentrations. In this scenario the
card should be removed after two appearances.
The Water! Water! card is particularly relevant
during this phase of the Palestine campaign as it
was one of the periods of the fighting in which
the supply of water for advancing British troops
became a significant problem. In ITLSU if this
card is followed by a British CO card then the
water shortage is beginning to kick in, reducing
potential movement distances for the remainder
of the game.
The Stiff Upper Lip and Turkish Delight cards
are the ITLSU equivalent of the rally card in
IABSM, and allow any individual unit to attempt
suppression removal. The They Don’t Like it Up
‘Em card (TDLIUE!) is designed to reflect the
unstable nature of some poor quality troops, and
can result in a unit breaking when under fire.
H
istorically the Turks were able to blunt the
advance of the infantry long enough for
the British to call for additional support.
This was given in the form of the 8th Mounted
Brigade of the Yeomanry Division, who were
operating on the left flank of the infantry. In an
aggressive advance and charge that was to
become typical of mounted units from this point
onwards in this theatre, the yeomanry charged
into Turkish defences further along the ridge of
Mughar (off the top of our map), outflanking the
Turkish positions around the villages. Thus
weakened, a subsequent attack by the infantry
was successful and the Turks once again
attempted to retire North and East, although
this was made more difficult by the probing
advances of the yeomanry. As it turned out, the
British captured 1,096 prisoners, 2 guns and 12
machine guns as the Turks pulled back.
The yeomanry action itself - a mounted charge
with artillery and MG support - makes for an
excellent game, but we’ll leave that for another
time!

Tea Break marks the end of a turn, although

MG’s and artillery that have not had the chance
to fire during the turn may now do so.

The Playtest

T
his action was fought twice at Lard Island
as part of the ITLSU playtest programme. I
like it because it provides a good sized bog
standard infantry assault and as such contains
few extremes. On the first occasion Turkish
firepower caused significant damage to the
British, who none the less were able to obtain a
foot hold in Katrah. In the second and most
recent fight, the British pushed hard in the face
of some determined artillery fire and were able
to drive the Turks out of Mughar, but only after
losses which, were this not WW1, would seem
crippling. Lead British units, under intense MG
and artillery fire as they cross open ground,
begin to grind to a halt and it is up to fresh units
moving up and through the hard pressed front
line, to eventually push home the attack. Much
depends on the ability and accuracy of the
British artillery battery to suppress this
withering fire. If the artillery and MG’s are not
in place to support the attack, it will fail.

This scenario has a straight
forward attack/defend brief.
It is set in September 1918,
when Allenby was launching
his famous and final assault
in Holy Land that was to
deliver Damascus, Aleppo and
a final end to the war against
Turkey.
16
Background
Set on the edge of the Judean highlands
during the first phase of the Megiddo
campaign of 1918, this scenario pits
British and Indian troops of the 160th
Brigade against a potentially strong series
of Turkish positions.
The 53rd Infantry division (of which 160th
Brigade was a component) is one of the
consistent players in the war against the
Turks, it being deployed continually in
the region from the landings at Suvla Bay,
Gallipoli in August 1915 right through to
the end of the campaign in Syria. Whilst
the battalions in it came and went (the

Division started off as a British Territorial
Division and ended with a significant
Indian presence) the Division was present
at some of the crucial engagements of
the period.
The engagements of September 1918
were just such encounters. By mid
September the Division was deployed on
the Southern rim of the Samye basin – an
area described by the Official History as
“a big depression, over three miles each
way, on the eastern slope of Judaen
ridge. At it’s eastern end is a steep gorge
through which the river passes to the
Jordan”.
Whilst the British held the southern end
of the basin – and had done all summer -
Johnny Turk held the other where he
occupied a series of defences pushed
forward on the northern slopes defending
local tributaries.
Until that is, the British took the
offensive once more….
17
British Briefing:
Brigadier General VLN Pearson
(Harrow), commanding 160th Brigade,
53rd Division, XX Corps. Judea, 1918.
T
he big push is on all along the
line. Major General Mott, in
charge of the Division, plans to
attack Turkish positions on the north side
of the Samye Basin by advancing against
both sides in a night action. On the left
the 159th Brigade is to attack a series of
Turkish controlled heights whilst 160th
Brigade (that’s you) is tasked with taking
the right hand side of the basin, pushing
up through Keen’s Knoll, Table Hill, Z
Hill, Wye and Severn Wadis and finally
Square Hill. On capturing your objectives
you are to launch a red rocket which will
be the signal for 159th Brigade to push on
to their final objective for the night, a
Turkish position slightly NW of you.
As the game starts your men have moved
into position in the gorge of the Wadi
Samye. It is a bright moonlit night.
Good luck
Your command is as follows:
Brigadier general VLN Pearson, DSO
(Middlesex Regiment), Harrow
2 signals bases
1/7th Royal Welch Fusiliers
4 companies of 8 figures (Jolly Good Fellows)
1/21st Punjabis
4 companies of 8 figures (Havildar Heroes)
1/17th Infantry
4 companies of 8 figures (Havildar Heroes)
1st Cape Corps
3 companies of eight figures (Havildar Heroes)
Elements of 160th Machine Gun Company:
4 gun sections (ie 4 models)
B battery 265th Brigade RFA, 6 x 18pdr (3
models)
 18

Z Hill: Defensive position large enough to

hold two companies.

Square Hill. Defensive position large

enough to hold four companies. Your HQ
is here.

Your force, which is otherwise well dug

in, is as follows:

Colonel Mehmet Ali,

Turkish Briefing
Colonel Mehmet Ali, commanding
remnants of 125th Infantry Regiment.
(command rating: Young Turk)
Remnants of 125th Infantry Regiment:
1st Tabur:
3 companies of infantry – each of 8 figures

T
his time last year you were living 2nd Tabur:
the high life. The British had 3 companies of infantry – each of 8 figures
been unable to repel you from
Gaza, and the men were reasonably well 3rd Tabur
supplied and eager for the fight. A lot 2 companies of infantry – each of 6 figures
has changed in the past twelve months.
The new British commander, Allenby, Support:
5 machine guns
quickly drove through the Gaza- 2 x 75mm field guns (1 model)
Beersheba line and ever since he did it’s All troops are rated ‘Pasha Basha’
been one backward move after another. Three signals bases.
Now what remains of your once excellent
unit occupies a position East of Nablus in
the Samye Basin. You hold the northern
end of the basin whilst the British busy
themselves in the south. High command
suspects the British to launch a push
soon, and increased patrolling activity
has raised your suspicions…

However, your men cannot stand ready

without rest, and you have enough of a
problem spreading your men across the
rocky ground that you have been asked to
defend. But Allah be praised! At last
some barbed wire has arrived and you
have been able to strengthen your The cards
position using some of this rare material. This scenario requires the following cards
However, it’s not enough, and you only
have enough to strengthen one of your Tea Break
four positions. Weak though you may be, Turkish blinds
should the enemy attack you must hold Turkish CO (2 cards)
as much ground as possible, Square Hill Turkish MG (up to 6 cards)
in particular must not fall to the enemy. 1st Tabur
2nd Tabur
Artillery support is available from two 3rd Tabur
75mm guns emplaced on Square Hill. They don’t like it up em!
Hesitant Turks
The positions you can occupy are as Turkish Delight
follows: Turkish Artillery 1
British Blinds
Table Hill: Defensive position large British Battalion 1
enough to hold two companies. British Battalion 2
British Battalion 3
Keen’s Knowle: Defensive position large British Battalion 4
enough to hold two companies British MG’s (up to 6 cards)
British Artillery 1

British Artillery 2
British Artillery 3
Stiff Upper Lip
British CO (2 cards)
Impassable terrain
Blank Card
Umpire’s notes
I
have taken some artistic license with
this scenario. I do not have a good
quality map of the area fought over,
and so have constructed a table top that
gives the British a series of rolling
objectives just as they had historically.
Nor is it clear from the official history
just what unit opposed the 160th Brigade
on that night, so I have picked the 125th
Infantry regiment, pretty much at
random! This makes no real difference to
the wargame, and I only mention it to
defend myself from somebody who has a
more detailed account of the action –
(which incidentally I’d love to read).
The Turkish commander should deploy his
forces across his position as he sees fit.
He can choose to deploy at any point to
the north (above) the line marked X-X in
green on the map. In addition to the
infantry capacities stated in his briefing,
a position may also hold up to two MG’s.
The entrenchments are good quality,
19
although until a day or so ago the Turks
had no wire with which to strengthen
them. As it is they only have enough to
strengthen one of the positions. He may
also choose to deploy units outside the
entrenchments, although the Umpire
should try to persuade him otherwise (it
reflects the cautious nature of the Turks
at this time).
Dummy Blinds: The Turks may have four
‘dummy’ blinds. The British may have
two.
This is a night action taking place in some
difficult terrain. Because of this the
Impassable Terrain card is added to the
pack (see Pg 14 of ITLSU). When this card
is turned the next unit (in this case it
should apply only to British units) whose
card is turned may fire but not move, for
that turn only. This represents difficulties
of navigating treacherous gullies in the
dark!
The attack took place under a bright
moon, and as such all spotting rolls are
subject to a minus one.
This is mountainous, rough terrain. All of
the terrain should count as bad going.
Historical Outcome
I
n truth the attack on the defences of
the Samye Basin by the 53rd Division
was a textbook example of co-
ordination during a night movement. The
160th Brigade moved out at 6.30pm on the
18th September, and slowly drew
increasing amount of enemy MG fire as it
wound it’s way north out of the Wadi.
Turkish advanced posts were soon
overrun but as the British moved up
enemy artillery began to open up. Wye
Hill (or Table Hill as we have it in this
scenario) was taken by 17th Infantry and
the Cape Corps stormed Z Hill. The final
objective, Square Hill, was found to be
strongly held by the enemy and for a
moment the advance was held up. At this
juncture Pearson was able to call upon
his artillery support to help him out and
the defences were broken by a brief
bombardment, after which Square Hill
was assaulted and taken with little
difficulty. Pearson was then able to
launch his red rocket, indicating a
successful attack and setting the way for
159th Brigade to move up on his left and
secure further advances.

A Different Kettle of Fish
Machine guns in ITLSU
By Nick Skinner
W
hen the Lard Island faithful first started
off with ITLSU the early play tests were
characterised with confusion over the
role of machine guns in WW1. The main issue, it
seems, was that in our many years of WW2
gaming we had developed a particular mind set
about the way machine guns should be used on
the battlefield, and how that looked on the
tabletop. When we tried to replicate these
tactics in WW1 though, we found that we
weren’t getting the right feel. What was being
repeatedly overlooked was that the way in which
machine guns were used in the Great War was
very different to the way they were being used
twenty five years later on the battlefields of
WW2, and we needed to change our mindset.
As many gamers setting off with ITLSU are
probably also coming into the period wearing
their WW2 gamers hat we thought it was
probably worthwhile to discuss the use of the
machine gun in the First World War in a way that
would hopefully make gamers reap maximum
benefit from the recreation of realistic tactics
on the tabletop in their next game of ITLSU. The
use of machine guns in WW1 was a specialist
activity and as such there are some particular
20
rules associated with the way they are handled
in ITLSU, with a whole chapter in the rules being
dedicated to this.
The lesson of the Russo-Japanese war.
M
aybe if we had previously wargamed the
Russo-Japanese war those of us resting
our substantial bellies on the table at
Lard Island would have been more attuned to
the different philosophy that surrounded
machine gun usage in the first dozen years of the
twentieth century.
During the Russo-Japanese War, the Russians in
particular employed the machine gun to great
effect, particularly during the siege of Port
Arthur and at the battles of Liaoyang, Sandepu
and Mukden. They were found to be especially
destructive when used as part of a defensive
position and worth the equivalent of fifty men
when firing.
After the Russo-Japanese war all major armies
assessed the machine gun but none of them fully
integrated the weapon into their formations
prior to the Great War and as a result some seem

to have been completely surprised by the
weapon’s impact on the battlefield, particularly
on the Entente side where military were
seemingly unwilling to believe that the machine
gun was reliable enough to effectively nullify the
impact of the cavalry charge or the bayonet push
It still appeared to them that the weapon’s
merits did not outweigh its manifest
deficiencies, which included unreliability, a high
rate of ammunition consumption, a low number
of hits per round and the difficulty of
determining the range from the gun to the
target. The weapon was considered wasteful not
only due to the cost of the ammunition but also
due to the difficulty in re-supplying it at such a
rapid rate.
The impact of the machine gun on the
battlefields that would become the subject of
ITLSU games shouldn’t have been a surprise.
Lieutenant General Sir Ian Hamilton, the British
commander at Gallipoli had acted as an observer
posted to the Japanese side during the Russo-
Japanese war and had seen the devastating
impact the guns had in the battlefields of
Manchuria, where the machine gun had already
proved its worth so noticeably.
Despite the experiences he and others witnessed
in the Russo-Japanese war the British Army
placed greater emphasis on accurate and rapid
rifle fire and offensive tactics. This was to prove
a bloody choice when combating a German army
which, in 1914, was already making proficient
use of machine guns, having taken little time to
incorporate the weapon into both offensive and
defensive roles. In August 1914 the Germans
reported had 12,000 guns available. Over the
next four years that number increased to around
100,000.
In the German Army, where the understanding of
the crucial role of rapid fire artillery and
machine guns was most advanced, doctrine on
the use of machine guns advocated their use as
much as possible as a fire reserve deployed to
cover important avenues of approach.
The Turks, benefiting from the influence of the
German Military Mission in Constantinople,
became well versed in the use of the machine
gun from early on in the war, employing it to
great effect in Gallipoli where “the Turkish
machine-guns were so sited that they were able
to aim almost into the backs of the attackers,
and only by scraping small depressions into the
21
cliff-face were they able to escape the withering
fire” (IWM).
Anyone still in doubt of the effectiveness of well
sited machine guns in the Great War need look
no further than the Thiepval memorial, or read
accounts of the Somme, attacks on the Nek and
Lone Pine on Gallipoli, or countless other
actions!
The differences between ITLSU and
IABSM
The obvious difference between IABSM and ITSU
is scale. While the rules share many mechanics it
is the scale of the action that is most difficult. In
IABSM one figure represents one man, whilst in
ITLSU we have jumped to one figure being worth
around twenty men. IABSM is company level.
ITLSU is brigade level. It sounds obvious but
when you are looking at toys on a table top it
doesn’t always seem that clear. This makes a
difference to unit size, ground scale and must
bring with it a different gaming philosophy.
This is particularly true for machine guns, look
at a machine gun in IABSM and what you have is
one gun, expertly crewed, set up locally to work
alongside the infantry in a fashion that is spot on
– for WW2 gaming. In ITLSU however, look at the
same number of figures and you are seeing
something quite different. Take the infantry for
instance, instead of eight figures representing a
rifle section as they do in IABSM, those eight
figures in ITLSU instead represent a full infantry
company, deployed over something like 150
yards, utilising small platoon tactics as per the
training manual – ie that’s the same as your
whole command in IABSM. Quite likely, the
infantry will be conducting a wave attack in a

style seldom seen in WW2 but common in the
Great War. Likewise it is different for machine
guns. You are not seeing one gun, put rather a
gun section – normally of two guns from a
totally different command. What in fact you are
looking at is a different unit, and it needs to be
considered as such on the tabletop.
Distribution and control of machine
guns.
F
or WW2 gamers the MG is a very useful
asset to have available at the platoon level.
Providing a great base of fire, a well sited
MG stands at the heart of most strong defensive
positions. On the attack, locally controlled and
easily moved guns give the company commander
a flexible iron fist around which to plan his line
of attack.
And to some extent the same is true in ITLSU,
only the guns are not so easily controlled. The
formal command structures of the Great War
mean that the MG is not as easily moved as WW2
gamers might be used to. Rather than a platoon
or even company asset, the ownership of the MG
is held at Brigade or, at its most local, battalion
level.
The brigade level British MG Company that we
see in ITLSU nominally comprised sixteen guns,
under a Brigade Machine-gun Officer - usually a
Lieutenant or a Captain and is represented by
eight machine guns plus a command base. The
command base is important. Think of him as the
battalion CO for the guns and you’re thinking on
the right track. Without him and his network of
NCO’s etc the guns become hard to control.
22
Such companies were often split in action to
serve alongside infantry battalions, but would
not be under their control or formally 'attached'
to them. In some cases this was a cause of
resentment towards the MGC, as quite junior
officers - as specialists - had authority over
seniors on MG matters, e.g. the Lt Col
commanding the infantry battalion in the same
sector as a gun team could not tell the MGC
where to put its guns. When planning games it
should also be remembered that some guns
would be unavailable either for mechanical
reasons, or because they may be attached to
other units not represented on the battlefield.
Units occupying quieter sectors often didn't get
as many MGs, recruits etc. In model terms,
attaching 6 gun models to a brigade would be
about right for most games. See Section 3 of the
rules for more details on this in ITLSU.
Despite the mental adjustments that gamers
need to make this issue of scale itself isn’t
actually that great a problem however, as in
general the open terrain of many of the
battlefields were are recreating with ITLSU mean
that commanders can get their machine guns
into action early, and employ long range fire.
Grouped machine guns can serve an important
role here.
For gamers
though this is all
about command
and control.
Whilst the
commander and
his guns remain
together he can
control his asset
smoothly. Once
they start being
parcelled out –
particularly if on
the offensive –
he is less able to
control his unit and the machine guns will start
to suffer from some inertia and not react in the
way that the players wish. This is the cause of
frustration, - but perhaps not of the same
intensity that battalion commanders of the day
truly felt at having such firepower outside their
control.
Barrage Fire
W
hilst dispersed machine guns add
considerably to the firepower of a
defensive position, grouped Machine

Guns can be particularly effective in offensive
actions. During the war, the tactic of the
machine gun barrage saw massed guns deployed
tin such a fashion that they could lay down
blanket barrages against enemy positions. When
on the offensive, this tactic was developed by
the British Machine Gun Corps (and their German
counterparts) to such an art that rolling barrages
of fire could be utilised during attacks. Very
often the fire would be concentrated in enemy
support areas to prevent reinforcements from
reaching the enemy line. Such barrages were
very carefully planned, timed and were
predominantly see on the Western Front. There
is evidence to suggest limited use of such tactics
in the Middle Eastern theatres during 1917 and
later, but it was apparently not as prevalent as
was seen in France. Terrain, availability of guns,
ease of supply and enemy dispositions all, I
suspect, add to the reasons as to why this was
not so common. However, they remain possible,
and to encourage gamers to handle their MG’s in
a realistic way, and to reflect the suppressive
benefits of grouped machine guns, where more
than two machine guns are grouped together
then the firer receives a plus modifier on his
firing dice.
23
What you will find is that big groups of machine
guns can cause severe disruption in the enemy
ranks – but just be careful you don’t leave
yourself over exposed in other areas!
O
ne thing is for sure, simply having loads of
machine guns is not a guaranteed route to
success. At the famous (and only) Arab
versus Turks set piece battle at Tafila in 1918
the Arabs, under the command of Lawrence,
were faced – on paper – with about 1000 Turks
and as many as 27 machine guns, but it was the
shrewd Lawrence carried the day with some ease
against what was clearly a pretty disjointed and
poorly led assemblage of Turks.
As Hamid Fakhri Pasha found out a Tafila, poorly
handled machine guns are a sure path to defeat.
Hopefully this short piece will encourage gamers
new to the period to change the way they think
about their MG assets, and reap rewards from
playing the period, not the rules.
***
Below: An ITLSU game in progress. The British
are attacking a Turkish position which is
strengthened by the presence of a central MG.

By Nick Skinner
B
y mid September 1915 the British Army, in
the form of Indian Expeditionary Force D was
advancing through Mesopotamia astride the
Tigris and Euphrates Rivers. The important towns
of Basra, Qurna and Nasiriyah had already fallen to
their advance and Yusuf Nur-ud-Din’s hard
stretched Turkish Army now lay in a defensive
position astride the mighty Tigris river seven miles
north east and downstream of the small town of
Kut-al-Amara, just over 240 miles from Baghdad.
Eight miles further downriver, the advanced
combat elements of Indian Expeditionary Force D –
principally the 6th (Poona) Division, lay at Abu
Rammanah, near Sannaiyat, under the command
of Major-General C. V. F. Townshend, C.B.,
D..S.O.
On the 26th September the British were ready to
continue their advance against the strong Turkish
position they knew was ahead. On that day
Townshend’s troops advanced to within 4 miles of
the Turkish position. After an evaluation of the
Turkish defences, based primarily on reports from
air reconnaissance and some limited staff officer
patrols, a plan was developed that would attempt
to deceive the enemy into thinking an attack
would come of the right bank of the river (the
Turkish right flank), whilst in fact he planned to
launch a decisive attack on the left bank with the
aim of enveloping the Turkish positions there.
On the 27th September the British advanced again
along both banks, edging ever closer to the Turkish
lines, and part of 17th Brigade (the Oxfords, the
119th , one troop of the 7th Lancers and two field
guns) made a demonstration in front of the
enemy’s position on the right bank that met with
no opposition. A floating bridge across the Tigris
was constructed – although not in an ideal position
as it had to be sited on a sharp bend in the river
where it could not be observed by enemy artillery,
www.toofatlardies.co.uk Festive Sack Full 2006
24
and under cover of night the main force crossed
from the right bank and deployed opposite the
enemy's left flank. The troops on the right bank
then made themselves busy by presenting a show
of strength aimed at causing the enemy to believe
this was the main British force. Large
encampments were erected and visible and
frequent troop movements were used to give the
impression that troops were present in some
numbers.
Nixon’s description of what happened next is as
clear as it could be written and so I present it
unedited from his despatch
“On the morning of the 28th
September a general attack was
made against the enemy on the
left bank. The 18th Infantry
Brigade, under Major-General Fry,
with its left on the line of the
river, made a pinning attack, while
Brigadier-General Delamain,
commanding the 16th and 17th
Infantry Brigades, advanced in two
columns against the enemy's left,
one column being directed
frontally against the flank
entrenchments while the other
moved wide round the flank and
attacked in rear. General
Delamain's right flank was
protected by the Cavalry Brigade”
While the overall tone of the despatch suggests a
precise manoeuvre, the reality was somewhat
different.
General Delamain, wishing to pin with one
element of his force and turn with the other,
Page 103
 25

divided his command into two columns, one under southwards along some mounds
his control and the other a reinforced brigade which commanded an extensive
under Brigadier-General Hoghton. Hoghton’s brief field of fire. The river was
was to turn the Turkish left from the North East blocked by a boom composed of
whilst Delamain pushed from the front. Further barges and wire cables
south still (closer to the river) General Fry’s commanded at close range by
brigade would launch a pinning attack to maintain guns and fire trenches. On the
pressure on the whole Turkish line. left bank the entrenchments
extended for seven miles, linking
The Turkish defences had been well prepared, and up the gaps between the river
were described by Nixon as follows: and three marshes which
stretched away to the north. The
defences were well designed and
“[The Turks] occupied a line concealed, commanding flat and
naturally favourable for defence, open approaches. They were
which, during three or four elaborately constructed with a
months of preparation, had been thoroughness that missed no
converted into a formidable detail. In front of the trenches
position. On the right bank the were barbed wire entanglements,
defences extended for five miles military pits, and land mines”

www.toofatlardies.co.uk Festive Sack Full 2006 Page 104


The ensuing action on the Northern side of the
field makes for a cracking ITLSU scenario, with the
British taking on the role of Delamain as he tries
to turn the northern flank. This will not be easy,
the Turkish defenders are in well prepared
positions, and have artillery support whilst the
British artillery is distant and impeded by the
difficulties associated with the mirage. As the day
wears on, water problems will also begin to kick in
and further slow the British advance.
Set the table up as shown below and brief the
players.
British Briefing One:
(Player One)
You are Brigadier General W.S. Delamain, CB,
commander of the 16th (Poona) Infantry Brigade.
Your orders from General Townsend are to attack
the Turkish positions north of the Suwada Marsh.
To this end, a detached brigade under Brigadier
General Hoghton has been despatched northwards,
around the Ataba Marsh, with the aim of his
turning the Turkish position.
Whilst this turning movement takes place, General
Fry will attack closer to the river to pin the
enemy. Your Brigade is tasked with attacking and
clearing the Northern, Central and Southern
Redoubts in front of you. This is no easy task,
especially with a reduced brigade (half of your
men have been attached to Hoghton’s column).
However, there’s nothing like a British bayonet to
get Johnny Turk on the run!
Your attack should be co-ordinated with the
arrival of Hoghton, but you cannot wait too long –
the sun is already high in the sky and the
temperatures are beginning to soar…
Your force is as follows:
16th (Poona) Brigade
(Brigadier General W.S. Delamain, CB (Harrow)
www.toofatlardies.co.uk Festive Sack Full 2006
26
2 signals bases
2nd Bn, the Dorsets (Jolly Good Fellows)
117th Mahrattas (two companies - Havildar heroes)
22nd Sappers (one company) (Jolly Good Fellows)
2 guns from the Maxim battery (one model – Jolly
Good Fellows).
British Briefing Two:
(Optional – you can play with just one British
player)
You are Brigadier General Hoghton, commander of
the 17th (Ahmednagar) Brigade, about to lead a
flank march that will put you behind the Turkish
positions on the Tigris and within a few days of
Kut-al-Amar and beyond that, Baghdad!
Your reinforced Brigade has wheeled to the north
around the Ataba Marsh and is now heading back
south and the rear of the Turkish line. Progress has
been slow. This was partially caused by the
discovery of a Turkish redoubt that you had to
flush out with the 104th Rifles, and partially by the
difficulties of navigation around the edge of the
swamp. Your command is somewhat strung out,
and knowing that time is of the essence you have
rushed your leading battalions forwards, Delamain
will control them until you can come up. The
Turkish positions must be outflanked and
destroyed.
Your force is as follows:
17th (Ahmednagar) Brigade
Brigadier General Hoghton – Harrow
One signals bases
103rd Mahratta Light Infantry (Havildar heroes)
119th Infantry (The Mooltan Regiment) (Havildar
Heroes)
1st Bn, the Ox & Bucks LI (Jolly Good Fellows)
22nd Punjabis (Havildar Heroes)
20th Infantry (Brownlow's Punjabis) (Havildar
heroes)
Turkish Briefing:
You are Yusuf Nur-ud-Din, former chief of police in
Basra and now commanding Turkish troops
deployed in defensive positions near the Es Sinn
canal line near the town of Kut-Al-Amara. You
have created a strong position here astride the
river, but the British seem intent on pushing on up
river all the same. You have little to defend such a
large area, but promises of fresh troops arrive
daily. Nonetheless, you must hold this position
else the army will be forced to fall back a
considerable distance towards Baghdad. This may
be no bad thing, at least it would ease some of
your supply problems and increase those of the
enemy.
Page 105
 27

Despite a demonstration on your right flank, you Note that until Hoghton’s HQ arrives, his units will
are receiving indications today that an enemy be controlled by Delamain.
column is moving into contact with your left flank.
If you still had your cavalry you could confirm Order of Arrival: 17th Brigade:
these reports with some aggressive
reconnaissance, but the only cavalry at your Turn of Unit arriving
disposal was sent south some time ago to raid in blank
the Sheikh Sa’ad area and hasn’t been heard of card
since.
3 103rd Mahratta
Still, your northern defences should be secure, - 4 119th Infantry
an area of extensive fortification with strong
redoubts and with marshy areas in between that 5 Nothing
will funnel any attack into a number of killing 6 Nothing
zones. 7 Ox and Bucks
8 Hoghton HQ
Your force: 9 22nd Punjabis
Elements of Turkish 38th Division:
10 Bronlows Punjabi’s
112th Regiment
Cards:
st
1 Battalion (4 companies of 3 bases)
Water, Water
Johnny Turks
Mirage
They Don’t like it up ‘em
2nd Battalion (3 companies of 3 bases)
Tea Break
Johnny Turks
Turkish Battalions 1 – 3
Turkish MGs
113th Regiment (4 companies of 3 bases)
British Battalions 1 – 8
Johnny Turks
Maxim Guns
Turkish Artillery (2 cards)
3 Machine Guns
Delamain (2 cards)
Hoghton (2 cards once he deploys)
2 x 77mm Artillery
Nur-ud-din (2 cards)
(Johnny Turks)
British Blinds
Turkish Blinds
Stiff Upper Lip
Turkish Delight
You may deploy anywhere within the entrenched
Biggles!
position marked on the map. In addition, you have
The Blank card
36” of barbed wire defences that you may site
anywhere within 6” of your front.
Historical Outcome
Delamain’s columns manoeuvred around the
northern region during the small hours, although
his attack on the northern redoubt did not fully
get going until 0845. Hoghton’s troops were
Umpires Notes:
delayed by the fact that they found an additional
redoubt to the North that had to be dealt with,
Although I have written Hoghton in as a British
and they found the marshy area difficult to
player he doesn’t arrive on table until late into
circumnavigate. Turkish resistance of Delamian’s
the game and Delamain is the key player. The
attack was tough but the men of the Poona
Biggles card also needs to be added to the pack as
Division – led by the 2nd Battalion, Dorsetshire
the British used seaplane reconnaissance to keep
Regiment and the 117th Mahrattas, carried the
track of the enemy movements at this time. Water
position at the point of the bayonet. Many of the
supply was also a problem and so this card is also
Turks fled (They don’t like it up –em!).
added to the pack.
Once the Northern redoubt was secure, the British
Hoghton’s lead units will arrive on the third turn
and Indian troops pushed on to the Centre
of the blank card and then the arrival of Hoghton’s
Redoubt, and carried that position too. Delamain
units will be dictated by the table shown below.
moved his HQ up to the Northern Redoubt to keep
in close contact withy his advance units – many of

www.toofatlardies.co.uk Festive Sack Full 2006 Page 106


his contemporaries would not have done this. Still
the British pushed on, much of the time
unsupported by the artillery whose firing was
affected by a strong mirage that made accurate
gunfire exceedingly difficult (and for this reason
the British have no artillery available to them in
this game). Delamain’s troops captured all
redoubts, and by 1400 the whole of the northern
sector was in British hands. After a brief rest
Delamain moved his column southwards to assist
Fry’s 18th Infantry Brigade (which was attacking
further south) by continuing to harass and attack
the rear of the enemies defensive line closer to
the river. The Turks continued to break and by the
end of the day the British and Indian troops, by
now suffering acutely from water shortage, had
pushed the enemy out of this defensive positions
and the victory was assured.
According to official British sources, 1,233 British
troops were killed or wounded, with Turkish losses
during the action put at around 4,000 (including
1500 prisoners). Defeated on the field, the Turks
were once again obliged to withdraw, and did so
during the hours of darkness, leaving a rearguard
strong enough to keep any weak British pursuit at
a distance.
Despite a token effort by four weakened squadrons
of cavalry that that had operated on the British
right during the action, continued pursuit of the
www.toofatlardies.co.uk Festive Sack Full 2006
28
enemy was not possible, depending as it did on the
support from the river where no progress could be
made due to shifting shallows. The troops were
also tired and supply problems persisted. The
delay enabled the enemy to withdraw in relative
good order to another location up river that would
soon become infamous – Ctesiphon.
The decision to advance from the Basra-Qurna-
Nasiriyeh area was not fully backed by the Indian
and British Governments and history has laid the
blame for the overstreching of British troops and
the subsequent disaster that befell them squarely
at the feet of Nixon and Townshend. The defeat of
the Turks, remarkable though it was, and the
capture of Kut had no strategic impact; tactically,
it took the troops further from supplies and wore
them out. But all that was still to come. According
to Nixon’s official despatch on the battle: “The
defeat of Nur-ed-Din Bey completed the expulsion
of Turkish troops from the Basrah Vilayet. Apart
from material gains won at Kut-al-Amarah, our
troops once again proved their irresistible
gallantry in attack, and added another victory to
British arms in Mesopotamia”
Little did he know what lay ahead.
Below: Part of Townsend’s Regatta heads upstream
Page 107

The Great War offers more to the gamer
than many think. From his Chateau
behind the front Big Rich takes a view
that some might find controversial.
What’s new?
The Great War has for many years been
something of a wargaming wilderness. Perceived
wisdom has been that one can possibly nibble at
the edges of the conflict, either in terms of time
frame – the very early or very (very) late war in
its more fluid stages is seen as viable - or
geography, with the minor theatres being
workable. The vast bulk of the fighting which
took place on the Western Front, however, has
been a no-go area.
There are reasons for that. In the United
Kingdom the Great War has left more of a scar
on our national psyche than any other conflict.
A look at the memorials in every town, village
and even street (here in St Albans each of the
older streets has a wall plaque listing residents
who died) will show that the list of names for
the period 1914-1918 is significantly longer than
for 1939-1945, where the smaller list is generally
a minor addendum.
Despite a gap of ninety and more years most
Britons can still tell you which members of their
family were killed in the “War to end all wars”,
with pretty much no family untouched by loss.
It is this apparent, but illusory, closeness that
can still put some gamers off the period.
Lions Led by Donkeys
29
Added to that we have the
fact that our school children
are taught that the Great War
was a slaughterhouse, where
serried ranks of civilian
soldiers and sensitive poets
were sent, cattle-like, “over
the top” into the teeth of
machine guns. The Generals
who sent these brave men to
their deaths were firmly
ensconced in comfortable
Chateaux many miles behind
the trenches (trenches that
they would not deign to visit
for fear of dirtying their
highly polished boots)
sufficiently far away from the
carnage that they
orchestrated. It is small
wonder that the gamer
chooses not to take on the
role of such men.
This is, of course, complete and utter drivel. It
is unfortunate that the attitude of a few
contemporary poets and, more importantly, the
anti-war movement of the 1960’s has coloured
the way in which the Great War has been
generally presented. The play, and then film,
“Oh What a Lovely War” is a case in point. First
performed just six months after the Cuban
Missile Crisis it was primarily a contemporary
political comment rather than an historical
work. The “military advisor” on the project was
a socialist Member of Parliament who was to
state that the content was “one part me, one
part Liddell Hart, the rest Lenin”. He was well
placed to comment on the last aspect as 1962,
the year the show launched, was also the year
he was recruited by the KGB as an agent. And
yet the play, and subsequently the film, is today
viewed as a truthful representation of the First
World War.
It is certainly true that the conduct of the Great
War was called into question by a raft of writers
almost as soon as it ended. It is natural that
such an horrific level of loss was shocking to
everyone, on all sides, and naturally people
sought to apportion blame. With the advantage
of hindsight it was easy to see where lessons
should have been learnt more quickly, however
the Generals who made the decisions at the time
did not have that luxury.
More insidious were the self-serving writings of
some authors who sought to promote their
theories on the backs of other men. The
aforementioned Liddell Hart is a classic case in

point. Hugely critical of the old school Generals
who, he ventured, had been so set in their ways
that a million Britons had died as a result. In
essence his argument was that had the Generals
used armour as he was now proposing then the
casualties could have been, to a degree,
avoided. More on him later.
Myths & Reality
Fortunately for us there is an active school of
modern historians who are now doing much to
rebalance our view of the 1914-18 conflict, and
the absurd “Lions led by donkeys” myth in
particular.
In 1994 well known veteran military writer (and
wargamer) Paddy Griffith published his classic
work “Battle Tactics of the Western Front”
which specifically looked at the development of
the British army’s method of attack during this
period. At the time it was without doubt one of
the most thought provoking books I had ever
read. Griffith’s thorough demolition of so many
myths was utterly comprehensive, and in their
30
place he expounded on how the period had seen
a tremendous development in tactics.
Since then there have been many more works of
a similar vein. Examination of these shows how
the Great War as a whole was a period of intense
technological development which, far from being
stifled by stuck-in-the-mud neo-Victorian
Generals, was actually promoted by them. In
1914 artillery commanders were loathe to fire at
anything they could not see. Not only did this
change but advancements in application allowed
the “creeping barrage” to be introduced in 1915
and developed to a point where Allied artillery
totally dominated the battlefield, with the most
complex fire plans, covering protective curtains,
delivery of gas shells, interdiction of enemy
communication routes, all techniques where the
Germans either lagged hopelessly behind or
never developed at all.
The same goes for the Machine Gun Corps which
was to develop from simply providing a direct
fire weapon to the point where it would operate
in a similar vein to artillery, with batteries of
guns firing indirectly to deny the enemy key
areas of ground, or saturate their positions. In
this respect the machine gun was used in a far
more advanced fashion that it has ever been
since.
The RFC in the air was immediately put to use by
the British High Command. In 1914 it was aerial
reconnaissance that identified a change in
direction by the advancing German forces and
allowed British ground forces to react to this. As
the war progressed aerial reconnaissance
became increasingly important, with
photographic techniques developed to the point
where footprints could be identified from
thousands of feet up. Ground attack techniques
were also developed, and proved extremely
useful during the 100 days period at the end of
the war where the Allies were advancing.
Break in, Break out
Most memorably, and controversially, by 1916
Britain had developed the tank. We have
already mentioned Lidell-Hart and his free
criticism of Douglas Haig for not using this more
fully to afford not just a “break in” into enemy
lines but also the “break out” beyond it. This is
a key point in considering First World War
tactics.
All of the forces fighting on the Western Front
were capable of launching an attack that could
break into the enemy’s positions and seize some
ground, this was especially the case with the
development of artillery techniques. What was

more difficult, and in the end proved near
impossible, was the achievement of the next
phase of battle, the break out. By which I mean
breaking through the enemy lines and into open
countryside beyond. Without this clear point of
victory we have a situation where battles are not
a matter of hours, as they had been in previous
European wars, but lasted for weeks at a time,
with front lines shuffling a few hundred yards
this way and that, but without the final
breakthrough that signifies victory.
In the Great War the means of communication
were severely lacking by modern standards,
especially for units conducting mobile
operations, i.e. those attacking. An attack on an
initial objective was relatively straight-forward.
You knew where the enemy was, your artillery
knew where the enemy was, he shelled them
like mad, then you moved in behind the barrage
to clear the enemy out. Contrary to popular
views this even worked on the first day of the
Somme.
The problem is that once you have advanced
across no-mans land your artillery no longer
knows where the enemy is and you can’t tell
him. What is worse is that the enemy now know
where you are, and so do their guns. They also
know pretty quickly whether your attack is
significant enough for them to commit reserves,
something they can do pretty quickly. This is
compounded by the fact that if you achieve
notable success early on you are likely to be
advancing out of the range of your guns, so will
have no support if, or more to the point when,
the enemy launches his counter-attack. So, we
can see how such battles see-sawed their way
across a very small area, and how, with no break
out to provide a “real” victory the only measure
of success in such battles is number of
casualties. “We killed more Germans than they
killed of us, so we won”. Without the break out
a horrible war of attrition was unavoidable.
Naturally both sides were consequently
committed to find a means of converting the
break in battle into a break out. The unofficial
motto of the Royal Tank Regiment, “Through
Mud and Blood to the Green Fields Beyond”, is
surely the most telling representations of that
aspiration. Indeed this is just what Liddell-Hart
was proposing that they should be used for, with
an armada of tanks breaking through German
lines to achieve a victory.
Interestingly Liddell Hart was wrong and right.
He was proved right in 1940 when the German
Panzer Divisons’ succeeded in such a
breakthrough, in 1918 he was categorically
31
wrong. The tank of the Great war was in no way
a weapon of break out. It was too slow, a
whacking 4 miles per hour on good roads was
more than halved on anything else, and in heavy
terrain they were prone to becoming bogged
down. This is not to mention mechanical
breakdowns and the fact that the crew were
operating in the compartment of the tank along
side an internal combustion engine with no
exhaust system. The consequences were
predictable.
Whilst the British produced thousands of tanks in
the last two years of the war, the Germans were
less keen on the tank. Indeed they produced
less than twenty of the A7V (one of the men who
served in them was Sepp Dietrich), instead
relying on development of infantry tactics to
achieved the break out.
There is much legend surrounding the troops who
undertook this role, the Stormtroopers.
Interestingly much of that is interwoven with the
widely accepted view that the Germans were far
more technically proficient and effective than
their Allied opponents. Quite where this “truth”
comes from I am unsure, it ranks along side all
those other Teutonic myths of Aryan superiority
that Hitler liked to spout, especially the one
about the German Army not having been
defeated in the Great War, but stabbed in the
back by politicians.
Unfortunately the view of German tactical
superiority is still popular (see Mosiers 2002
“classic” The Myth of the Great War, or more
to the point DON’T see it!), however it is
misguided. In some areas the Germans were
undoubtedly very innovative in developing
infantry tactics. The emphasis on
Auftragstaktik within the German system
allowed Divisional commanders to develop their
own ideas on how war should be fought. This led
to some commanders, such as Oscar von Hutier,
being very pro-active in developing tactical ideas
whilst others did very little. This lack of
homogeneity of though meant that the Germans
were slow to apply the idea through their Armies
as a whole. Nevertheless the idea of having a
Company sized Sturmabteilung, and then, later,
a whole Sturmbattallione within a Division
became the norm.
But what were these new tactics? There is an
expression that say if you ask ten scientists a
question you’ll get a dozen different opinions,
and so it is with this question. Some say that
the emphasis was on infiltration, but German
training manuals make no mention of the word.
In essence Stormtrooper tactics were the shift

towards an all arms battle at the lowest level.
Small units with a wide range of weapons, cut
down field guns, flamethrowers, light machine
guns and, the most important of all weapons to
their thinking, the hand grenade, would break
into the enemy front line, overcoming
immediate resistance before pushing on as
rapidly as possible. This small unit was followed
up very quickly by their regular infantry
comrades who would then mop up any further
resistance.
The stormtroopers were specifically tasked with
pushing onwards as rapidly as possible, to get
into the enemy’s rear areas, taking out gun
batteries and unit headquarters. This would
force a collapse of enemy command and control
and allow the infantry following on the seize
ground rapidly. The emphasis was on narrow
corridors of attack at what were thought to be
weak points in the enemy line.
This, of course, was a million miles from the
formal skirmish lines of 1914 that would have
looked no different to the troops fighting at St
Privat or Froeschwiller in the Franco-Prussian
War. However the question remains, was this a
revolution in tactics where the Germans were
streets ahead of their enemies? The answer is
no. Unsurprisingly when you consider that since
1915 it had been the Allies who had done most
of the attacking, while the Germans sat on the
defensive.
Contrary to popular belief the British Army was
much more joined up in its approach to tactical
development. From early on in the war major
attacks were routinely followed up by a series of
debriefings and questionnaires (to all ranks, not
just the officer class) that sought to established
what new ideas were coming through at grass
roots level. Much of the ideas came from
experiences in trench raiding that allowed the
British to develop small unit tactics between one
and two years earlier than the Germans. The
latest ideas were circulated regularly in
pamphlet form to keep all ranks abreast of
developments. What was more training schools
were established behind the front an units were
regularly rotated so as to benefit from these.
The British soldier on the Western Front spent
more time training than he did actually in the
front line. Unlike the Germans these ideas were
rolled out not just to a small elite but en masse
across the board.
By late 1916, less than six months after the
Somme, the British had developed small unit
tactics that were every bit as exciting as the
Germans, and they were applying them across
32
the board much earlier. Manual SS143,
Instructions for the Training of Platoons for
Offensive Action, had, as the name suggests, the
platoon as the basic independent tactical unit.
There was a distinct bombing section of nine
men (the Grenadier Guards objected to these
being called Grenadier Sections, which is why we
had Mills bombs not Mills grenades), a Lewis gun
section of nine men with two of these light
machine guns, a rifle section of nine men, a rifle
bomb section of nine men with four rifle grenade
launchers, and finally a Platoon HQ of four men.
What was more the manual stresses initiative at
a low level: “…every platoon and section leader
must be able to act without waiting for orders.
All men must be confident in their own skills at
arms and understand the need to co-ordinate
the use of weapons within the platoon and
display good discipline, morale and esprit de
corps”.
Unlike the German stormtrooper with his
grenade the British were very clear that the
grenade, despite the numbers of them in the
platoon, was the secondary weapon when
deciding an encounter, the weapon of victory
was the bayonet.
Victory & It’s Cause
Where the Germans failed and the Allies
ultimately succeeded was to recognise that
current technology would not allow the ultimate
end-game break out battle to happen. The net
result of this was that the Germans launched the
Kaiserschlacht offensive in 1918, Operation
Michael, in the hope of achieving a final victory.
In the event the sum total of their achievements
was to drive the Allies back at the cost of
sacrificing the cream of their troops. Whilst
many commentators hold up this operation as
being tremendously successful - the advance was
measured in distances that had not been seen
since 1914 – it ultimately failed to provide the
breakthrough that was needed.
The concept of gathering the army’s best
soldiers together in elite forces is fine if they
can gain a speedy victory. If they fail, as did the
Germans, the weakness of the system becomes
apparent. Disproportionate losses amongst the
best troops left their army with little of its
former backbone. Rather than seizing victory
the operation was the beginning of the end for
the Germans.
With the Germans exhausted the Entente powers
moved onto the front foot. Foch was keen on
launching a fresh offensive, Haig pressed for
something bigger; he wanted to deliver a knock-
 33

out blow. In essence he recognised that whilst
they had the capability to break into the German
positions they did not have the capability to
break out the other side. This recognition led to
a change in policy that was, in no uncertain
terms, to win the war.
Aware of the fact that the Germans were now
numerically weaker (the Germans had had more
men than the Allies at the start of the spring
offensive but their losses and the arrival of the
US AEF had tipped the scales) Haig pushed for a
broad front attack, with a constant succession of
limited objective “snatch and hold” offensives
all along the line. There is a distinct parallel
here between the broad front versus
schwerpunkt discussion that the Allies were
having in late summer 1944. In this case the
Germans were attacked at so many points that
their ability to transfer reserves, what had
previously ensured that the breakout battle was
impossible, was simply overwhelmed. During the
100 days campaign the Germans were obliged to
continually fall back under a reign of blows.
Allied casualties were, by comparison with
earlier years, light, as they kept their attacking
forces within the range of their guns,
consolidated quickly where they gained ground
and beat off German counter-attacks with heavy
losses.
limitations and the development of a strategy
that operated within those parameters. It is
interesting to see how each component national
Army, be they French, British, American or
German, needed to go through its own individual
learning curve. The British in 1917 were far
advanced from where they had been on the 1st of
July 1916 when they launched their offensive on
the Somme. By 1918 they were a different army
again. The German dynamic tactics, albeit only
utilised by an elite proportion of their army,
were the seeds that would germinate with the
arrival of blitzkrieg. The US forces of 1918 were
in the process of learning the lessons that, had
the war continued into 1919 as was expected,
would have seen them mature into much the
same way. Despite national variations it is
notable how the net results were very similar.
Modern infantry tactics had arrived.

By November 1918 the German Army was on the

verge of collapse. It had been totally defeated
in the field irrespective of the domestic political
unrest that came after, and not before, the
Allies had started their war winning offensive.

It is instructive when condemning the Generals

of the Great War to consider the opinions of
General Pershing, one General who emerged
with his reputation intact. Before he committed
US troops to battle he was quite clear; trench
warfare needed to be broken, the enemy forced
into a more open mobile warfare where his
troops, “taught how to shoot, how to take
advantage of the terrain, and how to rely on
hasty entrenchment, shall retain the ability to
drive the enemy from his trenches and by the
same tactics defeat him in the open”. Yet when
Pershing did unleash his troops in a major
offensive the casualties suffered were more in
proportion to those that the British suffered on
the first day of the Somme. The Germans, he
discovered to his disappointment, were not keen
on being driven from their trenches and refused
to fall in with his plan. Rather as they has
disappointed the French and British in the past.

In the end the key tactical development that

won the Great War was the recognition of
 34

By Nigel Brough,
Dave Parker and Conrad Cairns

“We don't mind the German fire, but with most of our officers and NCOs down and a bloody crowd
of n*****s firing into our backs and bees stinging our backsides, things are a bit 'ard.”
– A soldier of the Loyal North Lancashire Regt., Tanga 1914.

INTRODUCTION German East Africa itself being equivalent to

In their introduction to their 2005 edition of
‘If The Lord Spare Us’, a set of rules for the
First World War in the Middle East, the
authors noted that “with some tweaking, the
rules could also be used to game actions in
East Africa”. This mini supplement supplies
the tweaks, at least for the first two years of
fighting in the “German East”. These
adaptations have been devised by members
of the Durham Wargames Group with the dual
aims of trying to reflect the different
conditions in the fighting in the East African
theatre compared to the Middle East, whilst
retaining as much of the core of the ITLSU
rules as possible. We intend to develop and
extend the ideas over the next few months to
cover the entire 1914-18 period in East Africa
and offer them for publication in a more
complete form in late 2007.
Just as the Middle East theatres give games
that are more open and flowing than those
set in the trenches of France and Flanders, so
the East African games take the process a
stage further – or at least they have the
potential to do so. The territory was vast,
modern Tanzania (less Zanzibar), with
fighting also taking place in neighbouring
colonies, not all of them British. Even by the
standards of the Great War in the Middle East
the forces were tiny, the largest actions
involving only a few brigades at most on the
British Empire side, fewer for the Germans.
The fighting in Europe saw gargantuan
(mainly conscript) armies squeezed into a
small part of France and a much larger
proportion of Belgium; Africa witnessed small
forces, often recruited voluntarily, in theory
free to wander around a huge arena.
In fact, not all battles were fast-moving as
might have been anticipated. The first major
clash of the campaign, the British and
Imperial assault on Tanga in November 1914,
displays some of the factors that narrowed
and constrained the fighting. Generals could
be just as unimaginative as their counterparts
on the western front, regarding an advance in
overwhelming numbers as a sound tactic.
Artillery was weak both in numbers and
effect compared to the guns in Europe, but
machine guns could be just as deadly, and
able to “pin” large numbers of troops,
 35

especially unenthusiastic ones. The very
shortage of European infrastructure
sometimes had the perverse effect of
concentrating an action, and making it seem
all the more important to capture what little
there was, Tanga being an important
railhead. Bush and other terrain features
could reduce both tactical and strategic
movement as much as the mires of Flanders
and could restrict visibility even more so.
Nor was this a cheerful “ice-cream war”1 as
some more innocent writers might believe.
Those who have read William Boye’s novel of
this title will not accuse him of an over-
romantic view of the African campaign.
Military casualties were not great when
compared to losses in the war as a whole, but
soldiers were only a small minority of the
people affected. The death toll among the
civilian or semi-militarised carriers (without
whom no force could move, fight or eat) and
the incidental (or deliberate) destruction of
the indigenous population’s subsistence
meant that, like more modern African
conflicts, the worst suffering was inflicted on
those who were unarmed.
GENERIC EAST AFRICA RULES – Amended Tables
Thankfully, such horrors should be absent
from our game.
So, too, are many of the types of fighting
man who took part in the campaigns before
von Lettow-Vorbeck surrendered in November
1918. We have deliberately concentrated on
the first half of the war, and not only
because that invaluable source of maps and
orders of battle, the Official History, only
covers the period 1914-16. The British
Imperial forces underwent considerable
changes in the four years, and this
supplement is for the periods when they
relied mainly on Indian and white African
troops. The Africanisation of the “British”
army must await another publication, as must
the colonial forces of Belgium and Portugal.
NEW TROOP MORALE STATUS
Shaky troops
Some troops count as shaky and may well
break and run when the firing begins. Shaky
troops are subject to an immediate TDLIUE
test when first fired upon. The test will use 2
D6 rather than 1, to allow for them normally

REVISED TROOP CLASSIFICATIONS FOR EAST AFRICA

The Forces of the Kaiser

Spunk
Unit Classification Description
Rating
Veteran Schütztruppe - well trained and motivated earning a
Kaiser Bills 0
reputation as crack troops by both friend and foes.
Plucky Colonials Schütztruppe Schützenkompagnie 1
Loyal Askari Schütztruppe Feldkompagnie 1
Rugga - Rugga African native troops 3

The Forces of the British Empire

Spunk
Unit Classification Description
Rating
Jolly Good Fellows British regular battalions. 0
Saturday Boys British territorial battalions 1
Farm Boys Most early war South African Infantry and Cavalry Units 1
Kukri Killers Very good or veteran Indians, Indian Mountain batteries 1
Havildar Heroes Good Indian Battalions. 2
Poor Indian Battalions eg: Indian troops supplied by Indian rulers.
Skittish Sepoys 3
Normally will count as hesitant troops.
Very poor Indian Battalions, usually troops that were not
Bloomin’ Badmashers 4
intended to be used as front line troops, such as pioneers.

New Spotting Table

Range
Terrain Up to 9” Up to 12” Up to 18” Up to 24” Up to 36” Up to 42” Up to 60”
Open auto auto auto auto 3 5 7
Low auto auto 3 5 7 8 9
Medium auto 3 5 8 0 n/a n/a
High auto 3 7 0 n/a n/a n/a

having received few casualties, but will
otherwise follow the normal TDLIUE
procedure. The shaky troops test is applied
only once, when first fired upon, but the unit
concerned may still be subject to the normal
TDLIUE test if required by the cards.
NEW NAMES FOR GERMAN COMMANDERS
We suggest that the ‘Prussian’ name and
characteristics are retained and that the
ITLSU names of Young Turk, Old Turk and
Poor Pasha are replaced by Heidelburg,
Marburg and Kindergarten respectively.
SPOTTING
Whilst none of the authors can claim to have
seen East Africa first hand (no, but we did watch
Daktari – Ed) , it is readily apparent that East
African terrain is fundamentally different
from the core Middle Eastern regions, for
which ITLSU was originally designed. Tanzania
(formerly German East Africa) varies
enormously from dry savannah, with open
plains and scattered thorn scrub in the north,
to large swamps and wooded areas in the
west. However, over much of the areas we
are concerned with, the prevailing vegetation
in the semi-arid conditions is either thorn
scrub or thorn savannah.
Savannah is predominantly grassland, often
very tall, with a scattering of acacia and
baobab trees. The tree coverage varies from
quite a low density to something resembling
an open wood, with visibility range dropping
off quite quickly. Thorn scrub consists of
thorny acacia bushes which can vary in height
from a few feet to eighteen feet. This not
only seriously impedes visibility but also
forms a significant barrier to mobility. An
account of the Indian Army in East Africa
claims the visibility in thorn scrub to be
between 5 and 200 yards (The Indian Army
and the King’s Enemies 1900 – 1947, C
Chenevix Trench).
In these conditions, it is little surprise that
the fighting during 1914-18 in East Africa was
often at close quarters. Thick grass, dense
thorn scrub, high elephant grass, all had their
special bearing on the type of combats
fought.
“Close-quarter engagements were the rule;
dirty fighting in the jungle, ambushes, patrol
encounters; and the deadly machine-gun that
enfiladed or swept every open space.”, Capt.
R. V. Dolbey, R.A.M.C.; Sketches of the East
African Campaign, 1918.
36
New Spotting Table
The limitations imposed by the East African
terrain, discussed above, means that an
amended spotting table is required. This may
be found with the amended table section
above. Definitions of terrain are below.
Open Terrain: flat terrain with low
grasslands
Low Terrain: Hedges, walls, low crops,
behind troops, or in trenches.
Medium Terrain: High grass, crops or scrub
interspersed with trees or open plantations.
Includes bush/bundu, thorn scrub etc.
High Terrain: Buildings, forests, dense
plantations.
The above terrain types should only be
regarded as generalisations and much will
depend upon individual circumstances. For
instance savannah may be mainly long grass
with the odd tree, counting as low terrain, or
conversely it may have a higher density of
tree coverage, counting as medium terrain.
As a general rule, scrub should be classed as
bad going and soft cover.
African Wildlife
The presence of aggressive forms of wildlife
in Africa will be well known to all who grew
up watching Tarzan and Daktari in the 1960s
and 1970s. The effects from a wargaming
perspective will be very limited but there are
instances when African wildlife did influence
the course of actions during 1914-18. Perhaps
the most famous example is at Tanga in 1914
when angry swarms of bees attacked German
and British Empire forces alike.

NEW CARD DEFINITIONS
British Bush Fighters
Any predominantly native African unit (King’s
African Rifles etc) may take an additional
turn over and above its normal card, moving
or spotting, but not firing or charging.
British Naval Units
May move and fire on this card as per the
rules in ITLSU.
German Bush Fighters
Any predominantly native African unit
(German Askaris, Feldkompagnie etc.) may
take an additional turn over and above its
normal card, moving or spotting, but not
firing or charging.
German Gunboat
Exact equivalent of the British Naval Units
card.
Teutonic Order!
An exact equivalent of the British Stiff Upper
Lip card.
Killer Bees!
When the Killer Bees card is drawn, one
‘hive’ (chosen randomly) is ‘angry’. A D12 is
thrown to determine the direction the swarm
will move (’12 o’clock’ being straight ahead
from the nearest table edge to the swarm).
The swarm is then moved 2D6 in inches in the
direction indicated. Any unit or blind within
6” of the new position is attacked and each
company, MG or blind is given 1 suppression
point.
Water, Water
The activation of the effects of the Water,
Water card is the same as in standard ITLSU
but the base move for infantry is reduced to
8” from which deductions are made applied.
Ditto for cavalry but with a 12” base move.
This will not only affect the movement
allowance but troops will also start to retire
when 9 suppression points or above are
accumulated (13 for cavalry).
Advice on card deck
It will depend upon the scenario but we have
found that placing two impassable terrain
cards in the deck is entirely plausible and
makes it more difficult to carry out co-
ordinated attacks in heavy bush. Placing more
than 1 Water, Water card in the deck may
also be justifiable given its importance in
many actions.
37
MOVEMENT MODIFERS
Infantry units composed of native Africans
were able to move much faster through the
than bush than other units. To simulate this
they ignore the 1DAV deduction when moving
in bad going.
OPTIONAL ITLSU HOUSE RULES USED BY
DURHAM WARGAMES GROUP
(a) MG kills / suppression
When apportioning kills and suppressions
between a rifle company and an attached
machine gun, we use a simplified procedure.
For kills, roll one D10. If the die roll is equal
or less than the number of kills on the unit
then one kill is applied to the machine gun
and the remainder to the rifle company. Do
the same for apportioning suppression points
between the MG and rifle company using the
same method. Do not forget to roll a separate
D10 for officer casualties.
When rallying, the first suppression point
must be removed from the rifle company and
subsequent suppression removals are applied
alternately to the MG and rifle company.
Example:
A Company of a South African Infantry
Battalion consisting of 4 rifle companies and
an attached machine gun receives 3 kills and
seven suppressions. A D10 for the kills is
rolled and a 3 is scored so one kill is applied
to the machine gun and 2 to the rifle
company (removing a base). As a kill has
been applied to the MG then it will also
automatically receive a suppression point
and the remainder will be given to the rifle
company.
The next card turned is Stiff Upper Lip so the
South Africans can remove 3 suppression
points. The first has to be on the rifle
company, the second can be on the machine
gun and the third will be on the rifle
company. The net effect is that 2
suppressions are removed from the 3
remaining rifle companies, leaving 4
suppressions on them and the machine gun
has no suppressions remaining, but is of
course damaged by the kill.
(b) Removal of Badly Damaged Units
We have adopted a convention whereby rifle
companies reduced by kills to a single figure
 38

or a single base with a large number of
suppressions (normally over 10) are not given
the optional morale test but are simply
removed from play. This seems a simpler
solution rather than cluttering the table with
units of negligible fighting value.
(c) Fighting in large towns
The battle of Tanga was unusual as it
involved an attack upon a town and featured
heavy street fighting as the British broke into
the town's outskirts. Built up areas of this size
are not envisaged in the core ITLSU rules, so
we suggest the following rules for street
fighting.
Towns consist of a number of sectors made
up of 4” square templates with model
buildings placed on top. Each sector may
contain a single company plus an attached
MG and/or command stand. The unit is
placed anywhere within the sector as the
exact position within the sector is irrelevant.
Moving into towns: a unit simply needs
enough movement allowance to cross the
edge of the sector at which point it is placed
anywhere within the sector template.
Movement out of towns: units may leave
from any side measuring from the template
edge.
Movement within towns: units may always
move up to 1 sector per move. Blinds may
move 2 sectors.
Deploying from blinds: the standard sized
blind will usually cover more than one sector.
In these circumstances the troops may be
deployed in any sector covered by the blind
plus the adjacent sectors to the rear. The
maximum sector capacity, of one company
plus an attached MG per sector, must be
followed. If this is not possible, troops should
spread out to adjacent sectors as soon as
possible, counting as a dense target until
redeployed.
Firing within towns: is restricted to firing
between adjacent sectors. This always counts
as effective range and may be a soft or hard
target depending upon building type. Any
adjacent sector may be fired upon.
To assault a town sector from outside a town,
simply use the standard rules for attacking
buildings. A winning attacker will occupy the
vacated sector. To carry out an assault within
a town sector the unit simply declares that it
is assaulting the adjacent sector. A unit may
fire or assault but not both. Adjudicate the
combat using the table below:

Town Close Combat Calculator

Start with 1 die per base and amend in the following order:
Aggressive troops +50% more dice (rounded up)
In cover +50% more dice (rounded up)
Enemy are without officers +2 dice (only if both figures are dead)
Every two suppression points -1 dice
Each supported sector (see below) + half strength of supporting unit (bases)
Attacker with ‘Attack’ orders +1 dice
Defender with ‘Hold’ orders +1 dice
Opponent’s spunk rating + opponent’s spunk rating

A supported sector is an adjacent sector that is itself not involved in combat or firing. There may be a
maximum of 3 supporting sectors (2 'flanks' and one 'rear').

Town Close Combat Result Chart

Score Outcome
Draw Attacker withdraws back into own sector.
Defeated by 1 Beaten attacker withdraws into own sector. A beaten defender withdraws into any
unoccupied adjacent sector, may not advance next turn. Receive number of
suppression points equal to difference in spunk rating if that difference is negative.
Defeated by 2 Beaten attacker withdraws into own sector. A beaten defender withdraws into any
unoccupied adjacent sector, may perform any action next turn. Receive suppression
points as above. Winner may occupy vacated sector.
Defeated by 3 Retire 2 sectors (i.e. there must be an empty sector between defeated unit and
enemy sector) or out of town if at town edge. No action until contacted by an officer.
Receive double suppression points as above. Winner may occupy vacated sector.
Defeated by 4+ Unit is trapped in town and surrenders. Winner may occupy vacated sector.
 39

Roll call of Honour

Thanks must go to the following members of
Durham Wargames Group who have helped in
play testing these rules and scenarios over
the last few months:

Conrad Cairns
Dave Sweet
Dave Parker
Jim Catchpole
Neil Whitmore
Nigel Brough
Nigel Gould

Select Bibliography
Abbott, Peter, Armies in East Africa, 1914-
18, Botley, 2002, Osprey Men at Arms #379

Abbott, Peter, Colonial Armies – Africa 1850 -

1918, Nottingham, 2006.

Anderson, Ross, The Battle of Tanga 1914,

Tempus Publishing, 2002.

Farwell, Byron, The Great War in Africa,

Harmondsworth, 1987.

Fendall, Brigadier C.P., The East African

Force 1915-19, 1921, [reprinted by the
Battery Press,
Nashville, 1992]

Gardner, Brian, German East, London, 1963.

Hordern, Lt. Col. Charles, Military Operations

in East Africa I, 1914 – 16, HMSO, 1941. [being
part of the Official History of the Great War.
Reprinted by the Battery Press, Nashville,
1990]

Lettow-Vorbeck, Paul von, My Reminiscences

of East Africa, London, 1920 [reprinted by the
Battery Press, Nasville, n.d.]

Mosley, Leonard, Duel for Kilimanjaro,

London, 1963.

Paice, Edward, Tip and Run: the Untold

Tragedy of the Great War in Africa, London,
2007.

Sibley, J.R., Tanganyikan Guerrilla, London,

1971.

IF THE LORD SPARES US

Wargames Rules for the First World War in the Middle East
are available from
www.toofatlardies.co.uk

The Durham Gang present the first of
three scenarios for “TABA” with this
classic encounter from 1914.
This historical scenario covers the rather hasty
attempt by the British Forces to occupy the vital
port of Tanga, following the unexpected German
refusal to surrender. No real opposition was
expected by the British: how wrong they were.
Background
In September 1914, Indian Expeditionary Force
‘B’ was despatched to East Africa to capture the
ports in German East Africa. IEF ‘B’ accordingly
arrived outside Tanga at 4.50 am on 2nd
November and demanded that the port be
surrendered. Rather unexpectedly, the local
German official, Dr. Auracher refused so the
British made some hasty arrangements to occupy
Tanga, carrying out a leisurely landing on a
narrow beach at the end of a peninsular two
miles due east of Tanga. The Imperial Service
Brigade commanded by Brigadier Tighe was
ashore by the early hours of 3rd November. Two
Indian Battalions, with support from 4 companies
of Pioneers were considered more than sufficient
for the task and were in position to advance at
7am on the morning of 3rd November.
The British were correct in assuming that Tanga
was lightly held but what they did not
appreciate was how quickly the Gerrmans had
reacted to reinforce the town via the single-
track Usamambara railway.
The scenario presented is more of a 'what if?' as
we have allowed the British to also use the
2nd Battalion Loyal North Lancashire Regiment to
allow better play balance.
BRITISH BRIEFING
OPERATION ORDER No. 2
Maj. Gen. Aitken
40
Commanding I.E.F. ‘B’
H.T. Karmala
2.11.14
1. Owing to the necessity for sweeping for mines
in Tanga Bay the convoy (or part of it) will
anchor tonight 2-3 miles east of Tanga.
2. The covering party will now consist of the
13th Rajputs and 61st Pioneers, all under the
command of Brigadier-General M.J.Tighe, C.B.,
C.I.E., D.S.O.
The town of Tanga is to be seized tonight.
3. 300 porters will be landed for the carriage of
1st Line equipment, telegraph, stores etc.
4. A visual station will be established on the
shore, west of the anchored convoy, and a cable
run to Tanga.
5. Reports to Karmala.
S.H. Sheppard, Lieut.-Colonel,
G.S.O. 1, I.E.F. ‘B’.
Indian Expeditionary Force B - Major-General
Arthur Aitken (Not represented)
Initial Force:
Imperial Service Brigade
Brigadier-General M.J. Tighe (Eton)
1 signal base
13th Rajputs (The Shekhawati Regiment)
4 companies of 4 bases
1 MG
Havildar Heroes
Attached:
61st King George's Own Pioneers
3 companies of 3 bases
1 MG
Skittish Sepoys
Plus one dummy blind
Arrive on one of the roads from beachhead
after 4th appearance of blank card:
2nd Bn. Loyal North Lancashire Regt
4 companies of 5 bases
1 MG
Jolly Good Fellows
Plus one dummy blind
Ratings
Tighe had a reputation as an aggressive
commander which seems to fit the rulebook
definition of an Eton type. The nature of the
ground and the circumstances of the battle
precluded the effective use of signals by the

British. If a commander wanted to find out what
was happening then they would have to carry out
their own reconnaissance. This could be a
dangerous business as the commander of the 13th
Rajput’s discovered, being shot when he climbed
a low knoll to try and get a better view of the
action.
The Rajputs get a poor deal in some accounts
but they held up well during prolonged firefight
and in the teeth of entrenched MGs. The 61st
Pioneers broke, along with the Rajputs, during
the attack but it must be said that they were
never meant to fight in the front line and were
present to establish the beachhead;
furthermore, service regulations recommended
such troops only be used in the front line in dire
emergencies. The Rajputs are classed as
Hesitant troops; the Pioneers are classed as both
Hesitant and Shaky troops.
Organisation
We assume the standard ITLSU organisation of 4
companies of 8 figures to the battalion. This
field strength can be rationalised on the basis of
some units being under strength through sickness
41
after their long voyage.
There is also the question of MG allocation. Prior
to the war, the regular Indian battalions that
were later to become part of IEF ‘B’ were those
that were considered unlikely to be needed for
field service. Consequently, only the 101st
Grenadiers and the 61st KGO Pioneers possessed
machine guns. However, it appears that the 13th
Rajputs, 63rd Palamcottahs and the 98th
Infantry were issued machine guns shortly before
embarkation; although they were unfamiliar with
these weapons and had to improvise their own
MG detachments.
Anderson (The Forgotten Front) claims that,
when raised, Imperial Service Brigade had none.
However, it appears from the accounts in Paice
(Tip and Run) that most battalions (even the
Pioneers) had machine guns and the Official
History mentions the Rajputs being supported by
a MG section.
GERMAN BRIEFING
After receiving a telegraph from Dr. Auracher at
Tanga in the late morning of 2nd November you
have ordered the movement of a large part of

your available force of 14 companies to Tanga.
You have hurried ahead to organize the defence
of Tanga by the one company present, 17th
Feldkompanie. With reinforcements due to
arrive by around 7am you are quite confident of
holding the enemy until they arrive. It is now
5.30am and your scouting parties indicate that a
large British force is advancing towards Tanga.
Schutzentruppen Oberst Paul von Lettow-
Vorbeck (Prussian) 2 signal bases
Initial Forces:
17th Feldkompanie 6 bases
(includes 1 platoon of 1st FK)
1 MG
(Kaiser Bills)
2 Dummy blinds
Arrive on western table edge by railway on 5th
appearance of blank card.
Abteilung von Merensky
Von Merensky (Heidelburg) 1 signal base
6th Feldkompanie 5 bases
(Loyal Askaris)
6th Schützenkompanie 5 bases
(Plucky Colonials)
2MGs
Dummy Blind
Ratings
We have assumed the reservists are equivalent
to British Territorials, hence Plucky Colonials.
The Feldkompanies we have rated as equivalent
to Territorials but as native troops they have
swifter movement in bad going (see below).
There appears to be some post-war
mythologising as far as the Schütztruppen are
concerned. During the two-day battle the Askaris
were close to collapsing but for the intervention
of von Lettow-Vorbeck and other officers. The
exceptions are 17th FK who are described as
crack troops and are rated as Kaiser Bills.
The infantry Feldkompanies are composed of
native troops with German officers and so can
take advantage of the German Bush Fighters
card and move normally through the bad going.
Organisation
The defence of German East Africa was in the
hands of the German Defence Force or
Kaiserliche Schütztruppe. This was organised
into independent regular companies, termed
Feldkompanie. Each company acted as a self
42
contained tactical unit consisting of 16 - 20
German officers and NCOs, about 200 Askaris
with 2 or more machine guns and had its own
supply and transport organisation including
about 250 carriers. When in the field, a
Feldkompanie was augmented by a fluctuating
number of irregular native auxiliaries (Ruga-
Ruga) armed with firearms or spears.
For the Tanga campaign a second type of unit
was available to the Germans, namely the
Sharpshooter Companies or Schützenkompanie.
These companies, which varied greatly in
strength, were composed almost entirely of
Europeans, being formed from local German
reservists and volunteers. On a tactical level the
Feldkompanie were independent units and there
was no permanent higher organisation. For
operations it became usual for several
companies to be temporarily grouped together
under a named commander. The group or
Abteilung would then be designated by the
commander's name, Abteilung Kraut, Abteilung
Schulz etc.
We suggest that individual companies are
represented by 4 – 5 bases plus a MG model.
Abteilung are represented by several companies
grouped together with an HQ base and act as
pseudo battalions for gaming purposes.
UMPIRE NOTES
Historical Deployment
The action commences at 05.30 on 3rd,
November 1914.
The initial British forces deploy on blinds at the
eastern table edge.
The initial German blinds deploy anywhere from
the western table edge up to the railway cutting
or in the African quarter.
Terrain Features
The town area is represented by a number of
town sectors, each 4" square. These are divided
into European (north) and African (south)
quarters. The European quarter is high terrain
and hard cover, whilst the African quarter,
consisting of flimsy buildings and workshops, is
high terrain and soft cover. There are 2 roads,
named the Hospital and Askari road, running
from Tanga to the point of the peninsular at Ras
Kanone. Several tracks run parallel with these
roads but are not represented. Other buildings,
such as the German hospital and native dwellings
scattered throughout the plantation area, may
be added for colour but have no effect in the
scenario.
 43

The railway runs through a cutting that skirts the TANGA DAY 1 CARDS
eastern edge of the town. This was used as a This scenario will require the following cards:
defensive position by the Germans and hence
counts as a trench in the scenario. The western Tea Break Card
edge of the plantation area was defined by a TDLIUE
substantial drainage ditch that runs down to the Blank Card for reinforcements
harbour area; this should be counted as hard 2 x Impassable Terrain
cover (not a trench). There should be an area of 2 x Killer Bees!
open ground between the ditch and the railway Water, Water.
cutting; the ditch should be no closer than 4" to
the railway cutting. British Cards
British Blinds
The peninsula east of the town was heavily British Brigade HQ (x2)
cultivated and consisted of rubber, sisal, cocoa British Battalion 1
and maize plantations. These proved to be a British Battalion 2
significant limitation upon visibility. The British Battalion 3
plantation should count as high terrain, bad Stiff Upper Lip
going and soft cover. Also note that in line with Hesitant British Troops
rule 7.2 'spotting troops in woods or plantations',
troops outside the plantation will only spot units German Cards
that are within 3" of the edge. German Blinds
German Bush Fighters
The area south of the plantations consisted of German CO (x2) Von Lettow-Vorbeck
bee farms; 4 bee hive markers will be scattered German CO (x1) Von Merensky
in this area (see Killers Bees! card definition in German Force 1
the scenario specific rules section). The German Force 2
remaining terrain consists of bush or thorn scrub; German Force 3
this is medium terrain, bad going and counts as German Rally
soft cover. It is unlikely that the thorn scrub
abutted the town directly and we suggest that
the town is surrounded by a strip of open ground
of about 4" on the tabletop.

Impassable terrain: British reconnaissance on

both days of the action at Tanga was exceedingly
poor and hence all areas of the table will be
subject to the effects of the Impassable Terrain
card. German Askari and Feldkompanie (but not
the Schützenkompanie) are assumed to be more
proficient at bush fighting and are not affected
by the Impassable Terrain card whilst in the
thorn scrub areas.

It take two to Tanga, and the Durham
lads are back for more with a second
offering for “Things Are a Bit ‘Ard”.
This historical scenario covers the second
attempt by the British to capture Tanga
following the sharp repulse suffered the day
before. This time nothing would be left to
chance and the entire expeditionary force was to
be committed to the attack.
Background
The attack by Tighe’s Indian Service Brigade had
been heavily repulsed on 3rd, November 1914.
Much of the blame for this reverse was directed
towards the Indian troops of the 61st Pioneers
and the 13th Rajputs. The second assault was to
be made by also using the troops of the 27th
Infantry Brigade. Combined with artillery
support from HMS Fox and the mountain guns
deployed on the deck of SS Bharata, these forces
are deemed to be more than sufficient to
capture Tanga. .
BRITISH BRIEFINGS
It is 4th, November 1914. You are in command of
an expedition that has been despatched to
capture and occupy the port of Tanga. An initial
attempt to take over the port yesterday was
beaten back with heavy losses. More worryingly,
it has been reported to you that two of the
Indian service battalions behaved quite
disgracefully in their retreat back to the
beachhead. You have accordingly issued the
following orders for the second attack on Tanga.
OPERATION ORDER No. 3
Maj. Gen. Aitken
Commanding I.E.F. ‘B’
Near Tanga
4.11.14
44
1. The enemy is reported to be in
considerable force west of the German
Hospital.
2. The G.O.C. intends to attack them,
and occupy Tanga tonight.
3. The Imperial Service Brigade, under
General Tighe, will advance on a front
of about 500yds (i.e. 2 companies),
with their right on Tanga Bay.
The 27th Brigade, under General
Wapshare, will continue the line to the
left – his left flank battalion being
echeloned to the left rear.
The right of the 27th Brigade will
maintain contact with the Imperial
Service Brigade.
4. General Reserve, 61st Pioneers, under G.O.C.
Force.
6. Bayonets will be fixed, as the country to be
operated in is thick.
7. The advance will commence at noon, and will
be covered, as far as possible, by the guns of
H.M.S. Fox, and No. 28 Mountain Battery on S.S.
Bharata.
S.H. Sheppard, Lieut.-Colonel,
G.S.O. 1, I.E.F. ‘B’.
Indian Expeditionary Force B - Major-General
Arthur Aitken (Not represented)
27th (Bangalore) Infantry Brigade
Brig.-General R. Wapshare (Harrow)
1 signal base
2nd Bn. Loyal North Lancashire Regt
1 HQ base
4 companies of 5 bases + 1 MG
Jolly Good Fellows
63rd Palamcottah Light Infantry
1 HQ base
4 companies of 4 bases + 1 MG
Bloomin’ Badmashers
98th Infantry
1 HQ base
4 companies of 4 bases + 1 MG
Skittish Sepoys
101st Grenadiers
1 HQ base
4 companies of 4 bases + 1 MG
Havildar Heroes
Imperial Service Brigade
Brigadier-General M.J. Tighe (Eton)
1 signal base
13th Rajputs (The Shekhawati Regiment)
1 HQ base
 45

4 companies of 4 bases + 1 MG ‘Harrow’.

Havildar Heroes
The nature of the ground and the circumstances
2nd Kashmir Rifles of the battle effectively precluded the effective
1 HQ base use of signals by the British. A signal station was
4 companies of 4 bases established in the signal tower, (off table) on
Kukri Killers the 3rd November. This was in lamp
communication with the ships and connected by
3rd Kashmir Rifles (half battalion) cable with the Red House. During the course of
1 HQ base the action, on the 4th, a cable was laid forward
2 companies of 4 bases from the signal tower and Red House to Force
Kukri Killers HQ and Imperial Service Brigade HQ, near the
cemetery on the central ‘Askari’ road, and 27th
General Reserve: Brigade HQ on the left flank. However, the
61st King George's Own Pioneers cables were frequently broken during the course
1 HQ base of the action and units could only keep in touch
4 companies of 3 bases + 1 MG
Skittish Sepoys in the dense bush by the use of runners. We
therefore suggest one signal base for each
brigade HQ.
Ratings
Of the troops themselves, the Loyal North Lancs,
Of the British Generals, Aitken was very Grenadiers and Kashmiris all fought well; forcing
ineffectual so for this scenario he is not actually the German defences and breaking into the town
represented other than via his orders in the itself. The Rajputs were regarded with suspicion
player briefing. Two Brigades were in action so as they had broken on the previous day, hence
we have opted to represent this using two the downgrading to Skittish Sepoys. The 101st
separate Brigade HQs. Tighe is an ‘Eton’ type, Grenadiers, veterans of the Somaliland campaign
leaving the less dynamic Wapshare as a a decade previously, also fought well and only
 46

pulled back after a stiff fight in which they lost patrols indicate that the British advance is now
nearly all their officers and a third of their other beginning.
ranks.
Schutzentruppen Oberst Paul von Lettow-
The 63rd Palamcottahs, the 98th infantry and the Vorbeck (Prussian) 2 signal bases
61st Pioneers were regarded as ‘suspect’ from
the outset as they were recruited from the less Abteilung Baumstark
martial peoples of India. Some of this, however, 1 HQ base
may be simple prejudice; particularly as Aitken 16th Feldkompanie 5 bases
and others later tried to justify their defeat by 17th Feldkompanie 6 bases (includes 1 platoon of
blaming the poor material making up IEF B. The 1st FK)
61st Pioneers broke, along with the Rajputs, 2 MGs
during the previous day’s attack but this was Kaiser Bills
only after a long firefight. The same cannot be
said for the Palamcottahs who apparently broke Abteilung Bahnschutz
at the first sound of machine guns. However, the 1 HQ base
attached machine gun crews were made of 4th Schützenkompanie 5 bases
sterner stuff and remained to support the 101st 1 MG
Grenadiers. The 98th infantry apparently also Plucky Colonials
broke after seeing the Palamcottahs flee.
Abteilung Kepler
All Indian troops, except the Kashmiris, count as 1 HQ base
Hesitant. The Palamcottahs, 61st Pioneers and 4th Feldkompanie 5 bases
98th Infantry also count as Shaky. 13th Feldkompanie 5 bases
2 MGs
Organisation Kaiser Bills

We assume the standard ITLSU organisation of 4 Abteilung von Merensky

companies of 8 figures to the battalion. 1 HQ base
However, the 61st Pioneers and the Rajputs will 6th Feldkompanie 5 bases
be understrength due to losses on the previous 6th Schützenkompanie 5 bases
day, hence companies of 6 rather than 8 figures. 2 MGs

Naval Support Abteilung von Prince

This scenario does not allow any artillery support
from HMS Fox and the deck mounted mountain
guns. This is because the dense bush made
observation of targets impossible and this had
been compounded by the decision by Aitken not
to land any forward observers (Anderson). The
lack of effective communication with British
ground forces meant that the naval units were
not able to carry out their intended role and can
be omitted.
GERMAN BRIEFING
You have inflicted a sharp reverse on the
attacking British forces yesterday. However,
your position remains critical as you have only
935 riflemen plus 15 machine guns to try and
prevent the capture of Tanga by the vastly
superior British forces. You have spent the night
organizing the defensive positions of your troops
and raising their morale. You expect to receive
only minor reinforcements during the day so you
will have to make the most of the troops you
have and the defensive positions you occupy.
You have been given a respite this morning but
1 HQ base
7th Schützenkompanie 5 bases
8th Schützenkompanie 5 bases
2 MGs
Plucky Colonials
Plus two dummy blinds
Ratings
We have assumed the reservists are equivalent
to British Territorials and Kings African Rifles,
hence Plucky Colonials and Loyal Askaris
respectively. There appears to be some post-war
mythologising as far as the Schütztruppen are
concerned. During the battle the Askaris were
close to collapsing but for the intervention of
Von Lettow-Vorbeck and other officers. The
exceptions are 13th FK and 17th FK who are
described as crack troops and are rated as Kaiser
Bills.
The infantry Feldkompanies are composed of
native troops with German officers and so can
take advantage of the German Bush Fighters
card and move normally through the bad going.
 47

UMPIRE NOTES TANGA DAY 2 CARDS

This scenario will require the following cards:
The terrain is the same as for Tanga Day 1
scenario. Tea Break Card
TDLIUE (x2)
Impassable terrain: British reconnaissance on Impassable Terrain
both days of the action at Tanga was exceedingly Killer Bees! (x2)
poor and hence all areas of the table will be Water, Water
subject to the effects of the Impassable Terrain
card. German Feldkompanies (but not the British Cards
Schützenkompanies) are assumed to be more British Blinds
proficient at bush fighting and are not affected British Brigade HQ Number 1 (x2)
by the Impassable Terrain card whilst in the British Brigade HQ Number 2 (x2)
thorn scrub areas. British Unit 1
British Unit 2
Deployment British Unit 3
British Unit 4
The action commences at 12.30 on 4th, British Unit 5
November 1914. British Unit 6
British Unit 7
British & Empire Forces: British Unit 8
The British deploy on the eastern table edge, as Stiff Upper Lip
per the player brief, with the Imperial Service Hesitant British Troops
Brigade on the right and the Bangalore Brigade
on the left. The British briefing is based upon German Cards
Aitken's actual orders for the battle and should German Blinds
encourage a narrow frontage for the British German Bush Fighters
force. German HQ (x3)
German Force 1
The 61st Pioneers, acting as the force reserve, German Force 2
are off table at the commencement of the German Force 3
action. The Pioneers may be deployed at the German Force 4
table edge, on a blind, on the turn of any Tea German Force 5
Break card chosen by the British player. The German Rally
Pioneers will at that point be assigned to one of
the two British brigades. It will, of course, take
no further action until given orders by the
appropriate brigade HQ.

German Forces:
A single company, and attached MG, may deploy
in the railway cutting. No troops may deploy
farther east, i.e. towards the British, than the
railway cutting. No troops may begin in the
European quarter and a maximum of 2
companies may begin deployed within the
African quarter.

4th Feldkompanie will arrive, on a blind, on the

rail line at the western table edge after the 5th
turn of the blank card. It must then be given
orders before taking further action.

Captain Darling: “Mboto Gorge? Wasn’t
that where we massacred the peace-
loving pygmies of the Upper Volta and
stole all their fruit?”
Captain Blackadder: “No, a totally
different Mboto Gorge”.
from ‘Blackadder Goes Forth’. BBC,
1989
This is another Mboto Gorge, a fictional scenario
loosely based on a real action. It is set in
western German East Africa and pits a small but
well led German force against a much larger
force composed largely of raw South African
troops. This scenario, devised by Durham
Wargames Group stalwart Conrad Cairns, gave an
excellent game and provided the inspiration to
develop “Things are a Bit ‘Ard”.
Terrain
The vast majority of the battlefield although
looking open terrain is best treated as being low
terrain for spotting purposes but does not count
as bad going or offering any cover. The town is
represented by two sectors of European style
brick and stone houses and counts as hard cover.
The village is a typical African village arranged
in a circle and counts as high terrain and soft
cover.
The cultivated land in the centre of the
battlefield is fields etc and is best classed as
medium terrain, bad going and soft cover. The
woods represent dense bush and so is treated as
high terrain, bad going and soft cover. The hills
are all low rises that do not affect movement
but do block line of sight.
48
British Briefing
OFFICER COMMANDING
BRITISH & EMPIRE
FORCES
BRIGADIER GENERAL
RUUD FOKKER
It is April 1916.
Despite never admitting
this to your British staff
officers, you realise that
your South Africans are
raw troops and their
ability to withstand even
moderate losses is very
uncertain. However, you
know that the enemy is
far inferior in numbers,
so you feel confident in
taking the offensive. The
objective is to inflict as many casualties as
possible on the enemy and not merely taking
territory. You must ensure that the Germans are
not able to slip away from the battlefield to
continue their war of attrition and movement.
You will therefore win a victory if you can inflict
heavy casualties on the German led forces. You
may not be able to sustain heavy losses to your
own forces due to their suspect morale.
British Empire Forces OOB
Brigade HQ – Harrow
2 signals bases, Divisional Signals Company
1st South African Battalion
Battalion HQ
A Company – (8 figs) Farm Boys
B Company – (8 figs) Farm Boys
C Company – (8 figs) Farm Boys
D Company – (8 figs) Farm Boys
Attached Machine Gun
2nd South African Battalion
Battalion HQ
A Company – (8 figs) Farm Boys
B Company – (8 figs) Farm Boys
C Company – (8 figs) Farm Boys
D Company – (8 figs) Farm Boys
Attached Machine Gun
West African Frontier Force
Battalion HQ
A Company – (8 figs) Saturday Boys
B Company – (8 figs) Saturday Boys
C Company – (8 figs) Saturday Boys
D Company – (8 figs) Saturday Boys
Attached Machine Gun

Indian Battalion
Battalion HQ
A Company – (8 figs) Havildar Heroes
B Company – (8 figs) Havildar Heroes
C Company – (8 figs) Havildar Heroes
D Company – (8 figs) Havildar Heroes
Attached Machine Gun
Attached
1st Battery South African Light Artillery
1st section (2 gun models) Farm Boys
2nd section (2 gun models) Farm Boys
5th South African Horse
Regimental HQ
7 bases – (14 figs) Farm Boys
Attached Machine Gun
Deployment
Commence with 9 blinds which includes 2
dummy blinds. Blinds may set up anywhere up to
18” from eastern (right) table edge.
All units are subject to the Hesitant British
Troops card but no unit counts as shaky troops.
The Frontier Defence battalion is composed of
native troops with British officers and so can
take advantage of the British Bush Fighters card
49
and move at normal speed through the bad
going.
German Briefing
OFFICER COMMANDING GERMAN FORCES –
OBERSTLEUTNANT PAUL VON LETTOW-
VORBECK
You command the main part of a German force
facing the South African attack. You know the
enemy is in overwhelming strength, but you are
confident enough of your troops to consider
taking the tactical offensive if the situation
presents itself. Your aim is to inflict heavy losses
on the enemy to force their withdrawal. The
territory you are holding is of no particular
strategic value so you are free to withdraw at
any point.
German Forces OOB
Brigade HQ – Prussian
2 signals bases
1st Feldkompanie
1 Command base
6 Rifle Bases – Kaiser Bills
1 attached Machine Gun
 50

2nd Feldkompanie some fashion. Effective deployment of the South

1 Command base African artillery is likely to be the key to victory.
6 Rifle Bases – Kaiser Bills However, the British player must try keep up the
1 attached Machine Gun pressure on the Germans to ensure that they are
not able to slip away from the field of battle.
3rd Feldkompanie
1 Command base The Cards
6 Rifle Bases – Loyal Askari
1 attached Machine Gun This scenario will require the following cards:

4th Feldkompanie Tea Break Card

1 Command base TDLIUE
6 Rifle Bases – Loyal Askari Impassable Terrain
1 attached Machine Gun Water, Water

5th Feldkompanie British Cards

1 Command base British Blinds
6 Rifle Bases – Loyal Askari British Bush Fighters
1 attached Machine Gun British CO (x2)
British Battalion 1
Mounted Feldkompanie British Battalion 2
1 Command base British Battalion 3
4 Rifle Bases – Kaiser Bills British Battalion 4
1 attached Machine Gun British Cavalry 1
British Artillery (x2) 1 per section of two models
Attached Stiff Upper Lip
SMS Königen-Luisa (armoured gunboat armed Hesitant British Troops
with 2 Light Field Guns) Biggles! - The Biggles! card is played once and
then discarded from the pack.
Deployment
German Cards
Commence with 9 blinds and set up on anywhere German Blinds
on western half of the table (apart from the German Bush Fighters
Königen-Luisa of course). German CO (x3)
German force 1
The infantry Feldkompanies are composed of German force 2
native troops with German officers and so can German force 3
take advantage of the German Bush Fighters German force 4
card and move normally through the bad going. German force 5
German Cavalry 1
Umpire Notes German Gun Boat
German Rally
The British & Empire forces will lose the battle if
they sustain losses equal to one third of their
original infantry and cavalry bases. The German
forces will lose the battle if they sustain losses
equal to one half of their original infantry and
cavalry bases

The victory conditions are designed to make it

possible for the greatly outnumbered German
forces to win a tactical victory. Ideally, the
actual break points for each side should be kept
secret from both players.

It is likely that the British forces will take heavy

losses if they launch uncoordinated attacks
across the open (bush) terrain. In addition, SMS
Königen-Luisa can be a major headache for the
attacking forces, so needs to be neutralised in

An ITLSU Scenario and After Action Report
by
Nick Skinner
n the 14th of July 1918 the German
O
Asia Korps launched its one and only
offensive in the Palestine theatre.
Over the course of that morning over 1,000
Germans assaulted Australian Light Horse
positions near Abu Tellul in the Jordan
valley. As the morning wore on, ALH
outposts were driven in amidst some fierce
fighting and only the promptest of responses
from the Australian Command averted what
might otherwise have been a disastrous
outcome.
That the Australians were able to contain
the attack was partly because the Turkish
troops that were due to attack alongside the
Germans mysteriously failed to push
51
forwards, well, why shouldn’t they let the
Germans do some of the fighting for a
change?
This scenario, although fictional as a set
piece, is drafted against the background of
the Abu Tellul attacks. What if the Turks had
pushed forward on either side of the German
assault? Would they have forced the British
Empire troops to commit reserves to their
sector thereby securing victory in another?
This article provides maps and briefings for
this relatively small game, and concludes
with an after action report explaining just
what happened when this game was played
at Lard Island in the Spring of this year.

BRITISH EMPIRE BRIEFING
Major Rick E. Ponting
5th Australian Light Horse Regiment
Jordan Valley
July 1918
Since the fall of Jerusalem in December
1917 and the establishment of the main
battle line to its north, the campaign in
Palestine has slowed. Many units have
been rotated to the Western Front to
counter massive German offensives, their
places being taken by more dominion
troops. Now, in searing heat, Allied
Mounted Brigades are holding defensive
positions in the Jordan Valley near Abu
Tellul. The physical conditions here are
52
some of the most extreme on the planet.
Rugged, arid plateaus and spurs are criss-
crossed by rocky gullies and dry river
beds. At this time of year the temperature
regularly reaches 120 degrees.
Intelligence reports suggest that the enemy
is assembling men for an attack on this
part of the line. If so they have done their
research well because the line here is weak
and communications difficult. In recent
days additional artillery has been brought
in to strengthen the defences but the
outpost line remains relatively poorly
defended and it’s ability to stand in the
face of a co-ordinated attack is
questionable.
However, this section of the line must be
held, and the men of the 5th Australian
Light Horse under your command are
deployed in a series of defensive sangars
and outposts along the ridges and hills in a
line generally running East –West.
Your brief, if attacked, is to hold off any
enemy advance for as long as possible and
to buy as much time as possible for the
Division to organise and launch a counter
attack. Immediate support is provided by a
battalion of Camel Corps, deployed near
the village of Es Daiariyah a few miles to
your rear, but they will take a time to
organise and even longer to deploy in the
rugged terrain. Given that they are the
only support troops for many miles you
need to be in dire straits before you call
them up. For the moment at least you are
on your own. However, if the need is
desperate you may call for the
reinforcements anytime your command
card is played. Your command therefore
begins on HOLD orders.
Your force is as follows:
5th Australian Light Horse Regiment (Diggers)
Regimental HQ (Wellington)
2 signal bases
A Squadron (6 figs)
B Squadron (6 figs)
C Squadron (6 figs)
Reinforced MG Company (3 guns)
LXXII Battery RHA (2 models)*
*The artillery must start deployed. No limbers are
currently available

TURKISH BRIEFING
Colonel Ibrahim Bey
7th Infantry Division
Jordan Valley
July 1918
It has been six months since the British
captured Jerusalem and pushed
Ottoman forces north. After the initial
counter attacks failed activities on the
front quietened whilst wounds were
licked and plans drawn up for the next
phase. Rebuilding has not been easy.
The flow of supplies to the front has
dried up considerably, support from
Istanbul seems increasingly weak, and
desertion is becoming a major
concern, particularly in some of the
arab regiments.
Now it appears that the high command
wishes to launch a further offensive
with the aim of pushing the enemy out
of the Jordan Valley. It is a mad place
to fight. Your men moved here a month
ago and already disease is causing
gaps to appear in the ranks.
Conditions are extremely harsh and
morale is beginning to suffer.
Considering this, it was a great boost
to morale to see German troops of the
Asia Korps finally make their way to
the front this week, their superior
uniforms matched only by their
superior attitude. For the last four
years brave Turkish men have been
fighting and dying under the
leadership of these westerners. It’s
about time they joined to take a role in
the real fighting.
Today they, and you, will launch an
attack on enemy positions near Abu
Tellul. The Germans, operating on
your right, will carry out the main
offensive. Your objective is to push
south, crushing the enemy outposts
before you and advance towards the
village of Es Daiariyah. Easily said,
but you know that the outposts to your
front are held by the tough men of the
53
Australian Light Horse, and their
defensive positions are well
constructed and will surely be
tenaciously held. Against them your
men, weakened, in poor supply and
with limited artillery support (the
Germans have commandeered most of
the available artillery to assist their
attack), will struggle in the heat to
maintain contact with the German
troops on your flank.
Your orders are to drive in the enemy
outposts in the Es Daiariyah area,
forcing the enemy to commit his
reserve, thus paving the way for a
successful attack by the Germans on
your right, with whom you must keep a
line of communication open as you
advance. Your command therefore
begins on ATTACK orders:
Your force:Divisional HQ – (Poor
Pasha)
1 signals base
3rd regiment, 1st Tabur
Company (Boluk) 1: 6 figures
Company (Boluk) 2: 6 figures
1 x MG
3rd regiment, 2nd Tabur
Company (Boluk) 1: 6 figures
Company (Boluk) 2: 6 figures
Company (Boluk) 3: 8 figures
2 x MG
44th Regiment, 1st Tabur
Company (Boluk) 1: 8 figures
Company (Boluk) 2: 8 figures
1 x MG
99th Regiment
Company (Boluk) 1: 6 figures
Company (Boluk) 2: 8 figures
1 x MG
Artillery:
1 battery Field Artillery. (2 models) Limited
Ammunition
All troops are classified as Pasha Bashers with
a spunk rating of 3

UMPIRE’S NOTES
The table should be set up as shown on the map
above. Terrain is an important aspect of this
game. In my experience the best way to
represent this type of rugged terrain is simply to
spread a sandy coloured sheet over a series of
books and other items to give a rugged, elevated
terrain. For added feel, sprinkle the table top
generously with sharp sand or gravel – you’ll find
that it adds considerably to the visual appeal.
The British Empire forces hold a section of
spurred ridge across the top half of the table.
The Turkish side also includes some high ground,
but this is not as high as the British ridge.
Turkish forces are compelled to enter via two
gaps in the terrain on their side. These gaps
should not be more than 12” in width to ensure
there is some restriction on deployment.
The British Empire forces troops are considered
to be entrenched in simple trenches but without
any barbed wire. The British player may elect to
divide his MG’s among his squadrons. This is
perfectly acceptable.
Because they are entrenched the ALH horses have
been sent to the rear. They may be summoned up
54
by the unit on the turn of their card following
this sequence:
1st turn of unit card: Horses are sent for.
2nd turn of unit card: Horses are on their way.
3rd turn of unit card: Horses arrive.
4thturn of unit card: Unit may operate as
cavalry.
Clearly units that are operating as mounted
cavalry cannot claim to be entrenched.
All ground should count as Bad Going.
You will need to take a view on dead ground, and
modify spotting and firing possibilities as
necessary.
VICTORY CONDITIONS
This is about as straightforward as you can get.
The Turks win if the British Empire player is
forced to commit his off table reserve.
The British Empire player wins if the attack is
thwarted without the need to commit the Camel
Battalion.
 55

CARDS

This scenario will require the following cards:

At the start of the game:

Tea Break
Turkish Blinds
British Blinds
Turkish Delight
British Rally
Hesitant Turks
They Don’t Like It Up ‘Em
Hun in the Sun (discard after one use)
Water, Water
Biggles (discard after one use)

To be added as units are deployed/spotted:

Turkish Commander (x1)

Turkish Artillery One
Turkish Artillery Two
Turkish Off Table Artillery
Turkish Battalion One
Turkish Battalion Two
Turkish Battalion Three
Turkish Battalion Four
British Cavalry One
British Cavalry Two
British Cavalry Three
British MG [ see note ]
British Artillery One
British Artillery Two
British Commander (x3)
Camel Battalion One

Note: The British MG card is only added to the pack

if the British MGs are deployed as a separate unit. If
the MG’s are distributed among the cavalry
squadrons then the individual guns will activate on
the turn of the squadron’s card.

IN JORDAN’S HOT VALLEY… how the game went at Lard Island
Initial deployment and the Turkish Plan
The battle develops
56
Top: The British Empire player
deployed first. Having no idea of
where the enemy would attack from,
and having a wide area to cover, he
chose a fairly linear deployment, with
his blinds deployed in front of his
main line of resistance both to assist
his own spotting and to confuse the
enemy. His three cavalry squadrons
were deployed in entrenched positions
atop the high ground, as were the
combined MGs. By concentrating his
machine guns in one dominating
redoubt he created a tough position to
break, but also weakened the firing
and defensive capabilities of each of
the other positions.
The Turkish force was compelled to
enter the table on the gaps between
the spurs, and with no more than
three blinds at each entry point. He
was allowed no dummy blinds. He
chose to have two infantry units and
the artillery enter via the gulley on
his right, with the other two units
and his commander entering on the
left. His plan was to attack the enemy
left whilst ignoring the right, thereby
achieving (he hoped) a local
superiority that would enable him to
easily maintain contact with the
German force attacking on his right.
Left: Situation after about four
turns. The British Empire blinds on
the left of their line have been spotted
and removed, and with the full mass
of Turkish arms coming into action
against two defensive positions held
by the ALH the situation is already
looking tense. The two battalions of
the Turkish 3rd Regiment have been
spotted and are under fire from the
18pdrs on the high ground that were
(voluntarily deployed on the turn of
the British Blinds card) and MG fire
is ripping into the advancing Turks.
Turkish guns have begun to deploy
and are placing the ALH MG
redoubt under fire.
The remaining Turkish units are still
sheltered by terrain and have not yet
been spotted.
 57
IN JORDAN’S HOT VALLEY… continued

Light Horse under pressure, but Turks struggle to maintain momentum

Right: The situation after

about eight turns.

Well directed Turkish artillery

fire is beginning to take a
heavy toll on the machine gun
redoubt, allowing the II/3
Regiment to reorganise and
deploy it’s own machine guns
to support their advance
towards the entrenched C
Squadron. Before long the
Light Horsemen in the
entrenchments find themselves
under heavy fire and
suppression points begin to
mount steadily. Initially the
ALH are able to recover these,
but as the fire intensifies their
ability to shake off this
suppression becomes weaker
and the Turks edge forward.

At this point in the game the Turkish
commander – himself rated poorly - was
battling hard to keep his lower quality troops
going forward. His units, weary, poorly
motivated and under heavy MG and artillery
fire were finding it increasingly hard to remove
suppression under fire and keep their forward
momentum and as the distance between his lead
units and the Headquarters grew, this problem
became even greater.
The fire from the British 18pdrs and off table
artillery continued to cause heavy casualties to
the Turkish I/3 Regiment caught in an exposed
position on the valley floor and lead elements
first slow, stop and then start to fall back. The
battalion commander is killed and one company
breaks under the withering bombardment whilst
the other, though badly shot up, holds tight –
for the moment at least.
In the centre the somewhat bedraggled Turkish 99th
Regiment – effectively only two companies strong –
pushes on towards the MG redoubt which,
suppressed under the Turkish barrage, is unable to
lay down enough fire to stop the advance.
With the Turks pushing forward the British Empire
commander, now fully cognisant of the fact that he
faces a significant attack and having previously
called his mounts forward, orders B Squadron to
move at once to reinforce the MG redoubt, but the
troops find the going difficult in bad terrain. A short
distance away Johnny Turk is steadily ascending the
spur with the same objective, his pace slowed by the
suppression received during his advance. The race
for the redoubt is on.
To slow the Turkish advance, the ALH order A
Squadron on his right to advance along the spur in a
feint attack on the Turkish left. This move forces the
Turks to deploy MGs and a company of infantry to
face off the threat.
 58
IN JORDAN’S HOT VALLEY… conclusion

The Final Position

Right: The situation at

the end of the game.

On the Turkish left troops

of the II/3 Regiment are
poised to attack the
position held by C
Squadron. Their artillery
lifted, the Turks need to
assault quickly before the
Diggers can recover their
suppression. On the
neighbouring spur, B
squadron has won the race
to the redoubt and despite
their casualties look set to
repel the Turks with the
assistance of direct fire
support from the RHA.

In the ground in between the two

spurs, a lone Turkish company
nervously eyes the gap in the
Australian line, ready to advance
through provided the attack on the
position held by C Squadron is
successful.
For the British Empire commander
the situation is grave. With C
Squadron looking like it’s about to
be overrun, and with no other units
available, the commander has no
option but to call up the Camel
Corps battalion from the rear to
plug the gap.
This move hands victory to the
Turks, whose objective it was to
ensure this supporting attack drew
reserves away from the main
German attack off to their right.
But the Turks have shot their bolt.
Most units have suffered casualties
and are pretty beaten up.
Many companies are carrying large
amounts of suppression and the
command network is overstretched
attempting to recover them.
Reorganisation is a slow process, and
it is unlikely that they will be able to
push forward again to take advantage
of their breakthrough before the Camel
Battalion deploy.
And so ended the game. It had been a
close run thing. Large numbers of
poor quality troops launched what
was a spirited and effective local
assault against a well dug in superior
(though numerically inferior) enemy.
Predictably, it was the MGs and
artillery that dictated the outcome.
Key issues in the game were the prime
siting of the MG redoubt, the
concentrated fire of which threatened
to stop dead the initial Turkish attack
before it had even got underway.
So effective was this defensive fire,
especially when combined with the
artillery support, that at the end of
the game Turkish units were still
recovering suppression incurred
during those rounds, and this was a
key factor in the Turkish inability to
complete a complete victory.
Turkish artillery was crucial in
silencing the redoubt. No attack could
have been pushed had the MGs not
been subdued. This allowed the Turks
time to set up their own MGs to
support their assault, crucially
suppressing C Squadron’s redoubt
and enabling the Turks to move
forward.
A good game, which took three hours
to complete.
Thanks are due to Richard Clarke
(British Empire), and the fez toting
Rug Doctor, Marvin Parvin, and
Tricky Dicky Ansell (Turks).
 59

T
his historical action
covers the events of the
23rd September 1918 in
Palestine, when General
Allenby’s Megiddo campaign was
at its height. Heralded as the
last great cavalry victory,
Megiddo was the name given to
the breakthrough by Allenby’s
army that finally crushed
Turkish resistance in the holy
land and culminated in the
seizure of Damascus.

You’ll find this action in the

history books as the action at
Abu Naj.

Let’s get straight into the

briefings….

77
 60

British Empire Briefing:

Brigadier General Gregory
11th Cavalry Brigade
Your force is as follows:

G
entlemen, these are historic times.
We are entering the final stages of
the War in the East. The Ottoman
Empire is beaten. There’s no doubt about
it, Johnny Turk has been whipped and the
final moment of victory is upon us. We
have broken through all along the front
and, as you know, in the past three days
we have covered over seventy miles. It
can only be a matter of time now before
the whole lot throw down their arms.
What a mess they are. Even now
elements of the Turkish VIIth Army are
retreating Eastwards to escape our
clutches. All along the front the enemy is
in confusion. The whole Army is now little
more than a rag tag assortment and is
pouring towards the Jordan in an attempt
to make good an escape. We cannot allow
this to happen. If they are allowed to
escape in any strength then there is a
danger that they may attempt to reform
for a last and desperate throw of the
dice, which, with no chance of success,
would serve only to extend the war.
11th Cavalry Brigade
Brigade HQ: (Eton)
3 signals bases
36th (Jacob’s) Horse
(3 squadrons, all Kukri killers)
29th Lancers (Deccan Horse)
(3 squadrons, all kukri killers)
Middlesex Yeomanry
(3 squadrons, all Jolly Good
fellows)
The Hampshire battery RHA
(2 models all Jolly Good fellows)
Brigade HQ, the 29th Lancers, the
Middlesex Yeomanry and the artillery are
all on the west bank. The 36th Horse are
advancing on the West Bank. Your signal
bases may operate across the river, but
the river counts as double distance.

Aerial Reconnaissance has revealed a hole All troops start with engage orders.
in our net now being thrown around the
enemy west of the Jordan. South of
Beisan there is a 20 mile gap along the
Jordan over which the enemy is escaping.
11th Cavalry Brigade will plug this gap.
Your principal objective is the ford at
Makhadet Abu Naj, half a dozen miles
south of Beisan on the Jordan river. You
will move out at 6am. The Hampshire
Battery will accompany you and will act
in support. Good luck and ride hard.

78

Ottoman Empire Briefing:
Colonel Jekhan el Humaideh
Commanding remnants of 16th Division
T
he last few days have been as
though all the evil in the world has
been unleashed on you. The British
forces have launched a crushing attack,
and at all points the line is broken. All
co-ordination and control within the
VIIIth Army has vanished, along with the
supposedly unshakeable Germans of the
Asia Korps. Your men are in retreat.
Equipment is being left on the roadsides,
and the journey is made more harrowing
by strafing attacks from enemy aircraft.
Hearing that enemy cavalry have taken
the town of Beisan the 16th Division has
made a break for the fords over the
Jordan ay Abu Naj. The 19th Division is on
the road behind you. If these fords can be
held open then more of your forces will
be able to retreat to safety and can
rebuild east of the river. Keeping the
fords open will not be easy. The moral of
the men is at its lowest ebb. Your Division
is in slightly better shape than many, but
the 19th Division, following on behind, is
little more than a division in rags.
Your objective is to keep the crossing
open whilst enabling as many troops as
possible to escape to the safety of the
eastern shore.
79
61
Your force comprises the following:
Remaining elements of 16th Division:
Divisional HQ: (Old Turk) No signal bases
47th Regiment
(2 companies of 3 bases) + 1 MG
48th Regiment
(3 companies of 3 bases) +1 MG
133rd Regiment
(1 company of 3 bases) + 1 MG
All troops are rated Pasha Basher and you
start with Hold orders. Your men can be
deployed in basic entrenchments in the
area shown on the map. You may deploy
either side of the ford – the British
control the crossing points further
downstream.
A detachment of Asia Korps Artillery (4
guns, two models) (Kaiser Bills) is located
East of the River, they may be able to
support you if necessary.
The 19th Division is approaching from the
SW. They are in no state to assist with
the defence. You must buy them time to
pull back across the river.
Good luck, and may Allah’s light guide
you to victory.

I
n terms of numbers of fighting troops
this is a relatively small engagement
for ITLSU. The British, with a few good
troops start with the upper hand but they
lack MG support. The Turks on the other
hand are dug in – and don’t forget that
Turks in defensive positions increase their
spunk rating by one, so they will count as
Johnny Turks – and will not be easily
shifted. For the British to win they must
use their greater manoeuvrability to
encircle the enemy, who will be slow to
react. The initial deployment will be
crucial to determining the Turkish
player’s chances of success.
The Turks have no signal bases, the
British have 3. The British signal bases
may operate across the river, but every
inch of the river counts double distance.
80
62
The Turks, in some disorder, may not
group their MG’s, which in this scenario
form part of the regiment and fire on the
turn of that unit’s card. The defences are
light trenches and troops do not count as
fully dug in.
The Turkish/German guns are located at
the position indicated on the map, which
may be marked with a blind but treated
as a well dug in target for spotting
purposes. Once in action – ie after the
British artillery has opened up, they can
come into action, however, in this
scenario they MUST fire counter battery.
The only exception to this is if they have
an open line of sight to the Jacob’s Horse
on the Eastern Bank. Even then they will
only fire on the cavalry provided the
cavalry advanced in their last turn. If
they did not advance then either the guns
will not fire, or they will fire counter
battery.
 63

The Turkish player can attempt to Historical Outcome

withdraw the guns if they are threatened
by British Cavalry, but he will need to use 11th Cavalry Brigade was ordered to close
his command points to do so. the tight ring around the retreating Turks
and marched out at 6am on 23rd
The Turkish 19th Division will appear at September. Jacob's Horse moved south on
the SW corner of the table on the second the on east bank of the Jordan whilst the
turn of the Blank Card. They must head Middlesex Yeomanry and 29th Lancers
towards the ford at maximum speed. The took the west. Within two and a half
following special rules apply: hours they had closed on the ford, which
was protected by a Turkish rearguard of
19th Division: around 200 men with supporting machine
No command element guns in light entrenchments on a small
57th Regiment hill on the west side of the river. Other
(2 companies of three bases) Turks appear to have been positioned to
77th Regiment the SW and East. The Turkish machine
(3 companies of 3 bases) guns opened up a heavy fire on the
148th Regiment advancing troops but the British Empire
(2 companies of 3 bases) horsemen pushed on, with two squadrons
of the 29th Lancers under Capt. M.H.
These troops are in no condition to fight, Jackson leading the attack and taking the
and will surrender to British troops if the bulk of the casualties. The bold action by
British manage to take the ford. The will the cavalrymen was enough to break the
not move within 18” of British troops. If position. Ressaidar Badlu Singh of the
British troops close to within 12” they 14th (Murray's Jat) Lancers attached 29th
will automatically surrender. Lancers, was posthumously awarded the
VC (last VC of the Palestine campaign) for
Cards his action in the final assault – taking out
one of the machine gun positions. The
This scenario will use the following cards London Gazette recorded the events as
follows “On nearing the position
(remember that the Turkish MG’s will Ressaidar Badlu Singh realised that the
operate on the battalion card) squadron was suffering casualties from a
small hill on the left front occupied by
machine guns and 200 infantry. Without
British Brigade HQ (x2)
the slightest hesitation he collected six
Empire Cavalry 1
other ranks and with the greatest dash
Empire Cavalry 2
and utter disregard of danger charged
Empire Cavalry 3
and captured the position, thereby saving
British Artillery (x2)
very heavy casualties to the squadron. He
British Blinds Move
was mortally wounded on the very top of
Stiff Upper Lip
the hill when capturing one of the
Turkish Battalion 1
machine guns single-handed, but the
Turkish Battalion 2
machine guns and infantry had
Turkish Battalion 3
surrendered before he died. His valour
Turkish Battalion 4
and initiative were of the highest order”.
Turkish HQ (x1)
Turkish Blinds Move
Turkish Artillery (x2) On the East bank things went less
Hesitant Turks smoothly for the British. Here the 36th
Empire Cavalry Reconnaissance Jacob’s Horse were moving south and, on
Turkish Delight sighting the enemy column pulling
Water Water Eastwards moved two troops under
They Don’t Like It Up ‘em Captain Braithwaite further east in an
Tea Break attempt to block their route and enfilade
Biggles the position. Unfortunately the cavalry
advanced too far and were on the verge
of being cut off by the enemy (which
included some Asia Korps). Enemy
artillery also opened up from a position
1500m south east of the ford, firing
counter-battery against the Hampshire

81
 64

Battery which had moved up on the West

Bank to provide supporting fire to the
Jacob’s Horse. The counter battery fire
was effective. By now Jacob’s Horse were
having a rough time of it. Captain
Braithwaite was killed and only a few
men managed to escape back before
dark. Most of those deployed on the
flanking mission were initially listed as
missing.

In the meantime, back on the West Bank,

the Middlesex Yeomanry had made better
progress, reaching a ford at Makhadet
Fath Allah about a mile further south
from where it subsequently attacked and
captured four enemy guns (believed to be
the 5.9mm howitzers that had been in
action earlier in the day).

y the early afternoon the 29th

B Lancers had been able to cross the

river, enabling them to link up with
Jacob’s Horse, which had also been able
to edge forward. Together the remaining
cavalrymen broke the Turkish positions on
the east bank. One account I have of the
action states that 800 prisoner were
taken on the west bank. Allenby’s
despatch also states that about 3,500
Turks and 25 machine guns were captured
– although exactly how many of these had
been active combatants in the days
events is hard to pin down.

82

Perhaps a more appropriate title for this piece
would be “Corps Blimey, haven’t you got these
rules finished yet?” as, without doubt, Corps
Blimey! are a work in progress. That said, I think
it likely that the rules will always be incomplete
to some degree or other, as in a war where
technology developed at such a rapid pace, and
tactical evolution galloped along behind, there is
always going to be some need for elbow space
that allows an umpire room to amend and adjust
for each specific battle, or, in some cases, each
month of the war to reflect the innovations of
the moment.
Before launching into the dry aspect of the rules
themselves, I thought it best to discuss some of
the key points and to highlight the thinking
behind the system. This will, I hope, allow
others to take it and develop it for their own
usage. Finally I will finish off with a look at a
scenario that the gamer can play out on just one
page of map and which I hope will serve to
illustrate how the rules work in application.
Siege Warfare
I have no great desire to launch into a potted
history of the Great War, suffice to say that for
much of the conflict the conditions that existed
were probably best considered as siege warfare.
The failure of the initial German offensive saw
them dig in on French and Belgian soil and await
the time when circumstances, be they political
or military, allowed them to achieve the
ultimate victory. For France and her allies the
79
65
front line became on massive besiegement of the
German invaders and their increasingly
sophisticated defences.
In simple, but I hope not simplistic, terms it
would not be wrong to think of each assault on
the German lines as a huge breech action. The
technical arms attempted to weaken the
defences at a particular point; the infantry then
had the bloody task of forcing the breech and
storming through. This was the pattern followed
for the bulk of the war, indeed it is true to say
that neither the Germans with their much
celebrated Spring Offensives, nor the Entente
and Associated powers during the Hundred Days
in late 1918 ever truly broke through to gain that
illusive victory.
It is entirely understandable that most attempts
to game the Great War concentrate on the very
early and very late periods where some degree
of movement had been restored to the
battlefield, however to my mind it is something
of a cop out. At present I am involved in
developing three sets of Great War rules, all at
different levels of action. What I want to
achieve with Corps Blimey is give the gamer the
opportunity to see the bigger picture, to
experience the siege dynamic of the conflict and
reflect the huge variation in tactics that were
used.

Sheer Bloody Murder
The recent ninetieth anniversary of the 1918
Armistice produced a raft of programmes in
Britain which illustrated, once again, how this
conflict is etched onto our national psyche in an
indelible manner. Words such as ‘murder’ and
‘slaughter’ were, unsurprisingly, pained up with
others such as ‘senseless’, ‘wasteful’ and
‘pointless’. Once again “Chateau Generals”
were derided, whilst simple Tommy was hailed
as a hero, not so much for facing up to the
Germans, but for putting up with the shambolic
Generals who ran the war in a cold, heartless
and, worst of all, incompetent fashion.
Yet does this truly represent the Great War? I
would suggest that it is actually a gross
misrepresentation that utterly ignores reality.
In 1914 aircraft were primitive in the extreme,
however it was British aviators who identified
the German change in their route of advance and
allowed what had seemed like an unstoppable
steamroller to be halted. During the next four
years the air forces of all nations took on totally
new roles. Aerial photography was pioneered
and developed to a sophisticated art; artillery
spotting from the air became the norm. Ground
attack techniques were pioneered, not just
against front line targets, but the RFC was
specifically credited with initiating the concept
of the “Deep Battle” that is still bread and
butter to the military today, with interdiction
attacks on lines of communication to the
enemy’s front line and the neutralisation of their
support arms from the air, be that artillery
positions or enemy airfields.
On the ground the development of infantry
tactics was astounding. In 1914 the German
army went to war with their training manuals
telling their men to advance with “cloth
touching cloth”. In other words the arms of
their tunics should be in contact with the men
either side of them. This was clearly disastrous
in the face of modern weaponry, but it was not
attempted again and again, with disregards for
casualties. Very rapidly infantry formations
changed, and with it their tactics.
Reading the training material of all the Armies
present it is clear that the development of
tactics between 1914 and 1918 proceeded at an
astronomical pace. Yet this was no constantly
upward sweeping “learning curve”, rather it was
a series of ever climbing steps, each step up
being the result of the last battle where new
ideas and theories were tested on the
battlefield. Those ideas that worked in practice
were take up, those that failed were abandoned.
80
66
Yet the upward trend was unmistakable and by
the war’s end the tactics of both sides, albeit
with some differences, had advanced to the
point where they were quite clearly the fire and
movement based tactics of today. Indeed a
modern soldier would certainly instantly
recognise the British Army’s tactics of 1918 as
the basis for his current training. The German
Stormtrooper tactics of 1918 were the very ones
that when, just over twenty years later, they
were accompanies by reliable armour would
conquer most of Europe.
From massed ranks in 1914, the troops of 1918
now moved in smaller groups, the platoon for the
British, the squad for the Germans, with
formations described in terms such as ‘worms’
and ‘blobs’. In the German front lines
continuous trench lines no longer existed, rather
a succession of Widerstandnest – resistance
nests – positions created for all-round defence
with fields of fire interlocking with neighbouring
positions. Exactly the format used along the
Atlantic Wall in 1944.
In 1914 the artillery of all forces anticipated a
role very much akin to that of their Napoleonic
counterparts. They would deploy on the
battlefield and fire at targets that they could
see. Larger siege guns were present, but it was
anticipated that they would be used in their
traditional role, to reduce strongly defended
towns and cities. In the event the four years of
war saw tremendous changes in the way artillery
was used.
Again this was a stairway of learning, with the
results of the last battle being used to discard
poor theories and develop good ones. Indirect
fire techniques were developed, eventually with
fire being predicted from maps rather than
requiring the tell-tale ranging in of guns on the
actual enemy positions soon to be attacked.
Rolling barrages were developed in various
forms, some advancing gradually, but later,
when it was discovered that ground that had
been churned into a morass by shell fire, leaping
from one line of enemy resistance to the next.
Shells were developed beyond recognition. In
1914 the emphasis on shrapnel to scythe down
the enemy in the open was found to be wishful
thinking, however it was retained as a means of
destroying barbed wire as the standard HE shell
would bury itself in the earth before detonation
and churn up the ground rather than damage
wire. By 1917 instant detonation fuses meant
that rather than explode in the ground HE shells
would now burst above it, cutting the wire and
allowing infantry to move onwards.

Counter battery techniques were developed,
with complex flash recognition systems
developed, and then the use of basic
microphones to identify an enemy gun position
by triangulation techniques. This developed to
the point where by 1918 the British could
identify the position of German batteries to with
twenty yards without line of sight. As we have
seen this was supplemented by aerial
reconnaissance, something that saw the
development of camouflage techniques to hide
gun positions from the air.
There were, of course, other developments. In
1915 when the Germans first used gas it caused
panic within French lines. Yet the tactics used
then were rudimentary in the extreme. Large
canisters were transported to the front and then
they waited until the wind was in the right
direction before opening the valves. By 1918
this had developed to the point where gas was
delivered by shell with great accuracy.
Tanks were introduced to warfare and much
lauded for their potential, however their results
were questionable other than as being the most
reliable method of removing barbed wire.
Mechanically they were unreliable, they were
very slow and susceptible to anti-tank fire from
German artillery batteries if they did break
through that far, but equipped with anchor like
grappling hooks they could strip out whole areas
of wire, continuing until the sheer weight of the
wire became so much that the tank could no
longer move and had to cut its grapple loose.
In the attack tanks could simply squash a line
through the German wire, allowing the infantry
advancing in worms behind them to walk through
unimpeded on flat ground.
The Machine Gun, despite all technological
developments since, reached its zenith in terms
of application during the Great War. For most
participants the Machine Gun was used in a
direct fire role, yet the British Machine Gun
Corps took it far further than that, training their
men in indirect fire and the use of meticulously
planned machine gun barrages with guns firing
on fixed lines at an unseen target. These were
especially useful in applying the concepts of the
deep battle, denying the enemy large areas of
ground and stopping the bringing up of their
reserve to support a sector being attacked.
In essence the war began in 1914 with the chief
protagonists using the tactics of 1870 or, at best,
1905. By 1918 modern infantry tactics had
emerged, what was more, the support arms had
81
67
developed their practices to the point where
they were capable of conducting a co-ordinated
all-arms deep battle as would be recognised
today. The tank had been born, but in its infant
state was unable to truly influence the course of
the conflict, however that particular flower
would blossom given time and more wars in
future.
In fact the only factor that served as a brake on
even greater efficiency was C2, Command and
Control. Indeed by 1918 it had been found that
whilst offensive operations could be conducted
with relatively light casualties so long as the
component elements retained their ability to
communicate, those casualties increased steeply
once communication was broken and support
consequently lost. This was equally true for all
the participants. Indeed the German emphasis
on deep penetration using their stormtrooper
infiltration tactics was what ultimately saw those
elite units decimated. It was this realisation
that led to the use of limited objective attacks
that ensured the participating forces could
retain communication with their supports that
ultimately led to victory. It is also a clear
indicator that in the Second World War it was
the radio, as much as the tank, which
transformed warfare and allowed troops to
actually move through the mud and blood to the
green fields beyond.
Getting Dirty
So, let us now leap into the mud and get
cracking with the rules.
My starting point was that I wanted to create a
set of rules that could be used for a Great War
Kriegsspiel, however over and above that I
wanted to have a system that ultimately will
allow two players to face each other across a
single map, rather like a board game. Whether
that is actually achievable is questionable, as in
play testing we found that much of the
enjoyment of the game was the planning aspect,
and that whilst in the same room our German
and British teams were huddled around their own
copy of the map developing their plans and
managing their resources. Once combat resulted
they were very much in the position of the
General and his staff in the Chateau rather than
actually doing the fighting, so the results of the
action were fed back to them, but once the
plans were made and the orders sent their
influence on the outcome was nil.
In terms of scale I was keen to see large battles
being fought. This could either be using the
Brigade or Division as the basic unit of
manoeuvre. Personally I prefer that latter as it

seems to me that this was how units were
committed to battle, with Divisions being
ordered to achieve specific objectives rather
than Brigades being employed independently.
Indeed this emphasis on the Division also makes
management of resources easier too, as each
Division would have its own dedicated artillery
component, whereas a Brigade would not.
In terms of rating the troops and assessing their
combat abilities I wanted to keep things simple.
Clausewitz states that a force’s combat power is
equal to the numbers of men, adjusted for their
quality and the variable factors that influence
the battle. Using that as a starting point I
decided to rate my Divisions according to their
Firepower (which seems more relevant than
purely numbers in the modern age), their
Training and their Cohesion. The latter two
were, I felt, an appropriate summation of
Clauswitz’s ‘Quality’ but which would allow
greater flexibility in assessing their state at any
point in time. For example one could have a
high quality formation that had been very badly
mauled in fighting and its overall quality would
therefore be reduced.
To replicate the realities of warfare on the
Western Front I felt it important to have a
variable turn length. During periods where
nothing much was happening at the Front each
turn would represent a week. During that time
players could plan their next offensive, build up
the supply and troop levels required by their
plans, improve their positions and gain
information about their opponent by staging
trench raids or aerial reconnaissance. Once
either side launches an offensive the turns
become half a day each, reflecting a more
intense period of activity. In fact it would be
quite possible to use the rules as they stand to
fight months or years of life along one sector of
the front, with protracted periods of quiet
punctuated by frenetic bursts of activity.
So, this is essentially a staff game, and as we
know much of staff work can be particularly
tedious. In an attempt to avoid that I have tried
to streamline the system as much as possible to
remove the ‘dull bits’. For example, we assume
that a Division holding a stretch of the front will
be self-sufficient in every respect until combat
begins. They will quite happily be rotating their
troops in and out of the line, training will
automatically be taking place, as will provision
of food and ammunition for their usual levels of
activity during quite periods in the line.
Supplies are treated as a generic commodity. In
reality the vast majority of supplies reaching the
82
68
front were ammunition and fodder for horses,
but we don’t need to immerse ourselves in the
nitty-gritty of detail, we can leave that to the
Quartermaster. Supply levels for this workaday
existence are assumed to exist, allowing the
staff, i.e. the players, to concentrate only on the
surplus levels of supplies that they need to
improve their positions or build up for their next
offensive, or as a reserve in case of an enemy
attack. Levels of supply coming from the mother
country will be variable, depending on what
period of the war and which nation we are
looking at. To my mind it really doesn’t matter
that this is abstracted, it is sufficient for the
players to have to come to terms with the idea
of building up reserve of supplies and projecting
usage when making their plans.
Communication is naturally, key within the
game, however once again we assume that this
looks after itself until the point when the front
line changes at which point the communication
network needs to be altered to reflect those
changes.
Movement is undertaken on a highly simplistic
basis. Units in the front line only move as a
result of an attack, in which case the distance
they move depends on the success of any attack.
Units may be moved out of the line or behind the
lines, moving from one Divisional sector to an
adjacent one in a turn. This represents the fact
that during periods of action troops will be
moved much quicker than during quiet times.
Reinforcements from off map may arrive, but
this will take two to three days and is really a
matter for the scenario as they represent
reinforcements coming from elsewhere.
Defences will, of course, vary from place to
place, however for game purposes it if fair to
assume that the classic defensive arrangements
are as follows.
1. The front line is made up of a front line
trench with a support trench to the
rear. Behind that there could be a third
trench providing greater defence in
depth. These tended to be between
seventy and 200 yards apart. Some of
these trenches may have communication
trenches just behind them, but for the
purposes of the game we ignore these;
any gains in ground are expressed in
terms of fighting trenches.
2. The reserve line would then be situated
around 500 to 600 yards behind the
front line positions. For an attack to
reach this would suggest a penetration
 69

of around half a mile. This would again capabilities of artillery and infantry during
be protected by wire and have two earlier and later periods, something that will
trenches, exactly like the front line have a significant impact on adjusting the odds
position. in any given situation

3. The Gun Lines. Around a mile further

back would be the guns, ready to
support the Division in attack or
defence.
4.
5. Communications. At the back would be
the rear echelon positions, things like
hospitals, headquarters staff and the
like. This was where the
communication trenches began that
took men to the front.
Interestingly both sides would often replicate
this arrangement at a distance, usually several
miles, to their rear so that if the enemy broke
through then their opportunity to exploit any
victory would be severely hampered.
Corps Blimey!
The Rules
The Forces
Units
Units are represented as either Divisions for the
Army level game, or Brigades for the Corps level
game. Within that each nationality will have its
own assets which is may apply as it desires.
Units are rated by several criteria. These are
specifically Firepower, Training and Cohesion.
These are assessed as follows.
Firepower
A unit’s Firepower represents both its numbers
and its weapons. Most armies saw the manpower
strengths of their Divisions fall throughout the
war, but their firepower actually increase due to
technological advances. Typical values are
shown here:

French Unit 2-3

British unit 2-3
German Unit 1-3
US Unit 3-4

Training
Training is represented as a figure for the unit’s
capabilities in attack and in defence. In broad
terms these are as follows.

Unit Attack Defence

Assault Formations 5 4
High Quality Formation 4 4
Average Formation 3 3
Inferior Formation 2 2
Firing is simplified, in that only artillery fire is Garrison Formation 1 2
considered. They can undertake three sorts of
fire, Destructive Fire which is undertaken in Cohesion
advance of any attack and is designed to soften A unit’s cohesion represents many of the
up defences and defenders; Support Fire which is intangibles that dictate who effectively it
undertaken in support of an attack, and performs in the field; the casualties it has
Neutralising fire, designed to pin an opponent. suffered, its energy levels and its general war-
weariness.
Deciding on the combat system was easy, I
simply took the Reisswitz Kriegsspiel model and Level 1 Unable to fight, flee if contacted
adjusted that to reflect the conditions of the Level 2 Very badly mauled, defend only
Great War. As it stands the rules are designed Level 3 Badly mauled, defend only
specifically for 1917, however my plan is to Level 4 Reduced efficiency, any action
introduce amendments that will allow other allows
periods of the conflict to be gamed. This is Level 5 Slightly reduced efficiency, any
essentially a case of reflecting the different action allowed

83

Level 6 100% efficiency, any action
allowed
A unit that is removed from the front to a rear
area may have its levels of cohesion increased.
At the end of each day it rolls a D6, on 3-6 it
regains a level of cohesion. A commander may
choose to use an initiative point to automatically
increase a unit’s cohesion by one level. It is only
possible for a unit to regain one level of cohesion
in a day.
Some units may have their cohesion permanently
capped to represent long term fatigue or battle-
weariness. For example, a poor British unit
could be rated 2.5, a basic rating of 2, with its
cohesion capped at 5 to reflect its status. Some
units may have their cohesion permanently
reduced as a result of combat. This is intended
to last for the duration of the current game or,
in real terms, the current battle. It will need to
be removed from the battle zone completely
before it can recover properly.
Players may wish to create a small table on
which to log the cohesion level of each Division.
External Factors
Units may be affected by being out of supply,
having a reduced capability in combat, or out of
communications, stopping them calling for
support from friendly units.
Know Your Enemy
At the start of each game both commanders may
roll 1D6 and add +2. This is the number of
pieces of information that they may ask for
regarding the enemy. Each Division revealed,
unit quality confirmed, each boundary or supply
dump is considered one piece of information.
This can be adapted to suit a specific scenario.
The Game
Turns
A turn represents a week during quiet periods or
half a day during intensive periods of combat. At
the start of each turn the two opposing
commanders will roll their initiative dice, with
the highest roll giving the initiative to that
player. The side with the initiative declares its
moves first in any turn, with the other player
then reacting to that.
Initiative is important as units that are engaged
by the side with the initiative many not be
moved in their own initiative phase.
84
70
Command
In an Army level game the commanders will be
the Army Commander and his Corps
Commanders. In a Corps Level Game this will be
the Corps Commander and his Divisional
Commanders.
Each commander in chief has one D6 initiative
dice which is rolled at the start of each turn to
indicate which side has the initiative and just
how effective he and his staff can be in that
turn. He may “spend” his initiative points as
follows.
x Improve a units defensive position up to
a maximum of level 4 (level 0 is an
empty field, level 4 is concrete bunkers
plus a modern trench system)
x Refreshing Units that have been reduced
by combat.
x Moving a unit
x Creating a supply point
x Creating a communication point
x Launching trench raids
x Undertake aerial actions
x Move supplies from one supply point to
another (up to 12 points)
x Activate a Subordinate commander in
battle (i.e. not during quite times.
Subordinate Commander
Subordinate commanders may only be activated
during periods of action, i.e. when the turns are
occurring every half day. Once activated by his
commander in chief a subordinate commander
will roll his initiative dice, a DAv, and he may
spend those points as follows
x Improve a units defensive position up to
a maximum of level 4 (level 0 is an
empty field, level 4 is concrete bunkers
plus a modern trench system)
x Moving a unit
x Creating a supply point
x Creating a communication point
x Launching trench raids
The Big Push
A commander in chief may automatically seize
the initiative in a turn by declaring a “Big Push”.
During that turn no initiative points are required
for any action. All of his units and subordinate
commanders may be activated at no cost.
When a Big Push is declared the subsequent turns
will automatically be taken at the rate of one
per half day until the point when both sides
agree that the offensive has ended. No

subsequent Big Push (by either side) may be
declared until after this time.
Movement
Troop movement is abstracted. Behind the lines
units may move from one sector to an adjacent
one in a turn or from a reserve position into the
front line. In combat troops may attack an
adjacent enemy, how far they move is dictated
by the success or failure of their attack.
Supply
Units are supplied via supply networks indicated
by depots on the map or tabletop. Units that are
in the line and not involved in combat are
assumed to be in supply as long as they are
within eight scale miles of a supply depot and an
uninterrupted line can be traced from the depot
to the unit that does not come within one scale
mile of the enemy.
Units that are involved in combat use two supply
point from their supply depot per turn. In some
cases this will increase if indicated in a combat
result.
Supply points are used in the following way:
A unit is in combat during a turn 2 points
Per point of artillery support 1 point
Per Machine Gun barrage 4 points
Air support is provided 2 points
Tank support is provided 2 points
Improving Defences 2 points
Each Army or Corps will have a supply depot
within its sector. This is replenished either by
receiving supply from a senior commander, or by
receiving supplies from the home nation. Only
the Army commander receives supplies from the
home nation, which he must then distribute as
required.
Units that are out of supply have a reduced
capability in combat.
It is recommended that the player uses a simple
double entry system to manage their supplies,
noting supplies in, supplies used and the
remaining balance for each day.
Communication
A communication network is assumed to exist
where troops are within their own lines. Any
change in the front line, advance or retreat, will
require fresh cables to be laid by signal troops.
Laying fresh cables is undertaken at night when
up to four miles of cables may be laid by each
Division. Any unit that is not connected by cable
85
71
to the communications network is obliged to rely
on rudimentary forms of communication and is
considered out of communication. Units that are
out of communication may receive no fire
support.
Defences
At the commencement of a game all of each
side’s defences should be described to the
player. The specific location and configuration
of these is not important, however the quality
and depth is. Defences can range from 0 to 4,
with 0 being a bare field with the odd shell
scrape and 4 being a well defended position with
concrete works.
In general there will be three lines of defence in
each belt of defences, the front line, the second
line and the support line. Depending on the
situation there may be numerous belts of
defence, providing defence in depth. Each of
the lines of defence should be given a numerical
value which the players may then choose to
strengthen or attempt to weaken as the game
progresses. Troops defending positions seized
from the enemy may count only half of the
original defensive value until they can spend
time improving the positions that they have
gained.
Trench Raids
These are used try to identify what forces you
are facing and gain information from prisoners.
A Division mounting a trench raid will roll on the
following table.
Dice Result
1,2 Raid fails, no information gained
3 Raid a minor success. Confirm identity
and quality of enemy Division
4 Raid a moderate success. Confirm
identity and quality of enemy Division
opposite and location of one reserve
Division in that sector
5 Raid a significant success. Confirm
identity and quality of enemy Division
opposite and location of one reserve
Divisions in that sector and Corps
boundary
6 Raid a major success. Roll again.
1-4. Confirm identity and quality of
enemy Division opposite and location of
one reserve Divisions in that sector and
Corp boundary. Enemy cohesion
reduced by one.
5-6. Snatch a one mile sector of the
enemy’s front line trench and hold
against counter attack. Enemy cohesion
reduced by one.
 72

Air Support Divisional Artillery (Field Guns, up to four

Each Army Group will have an amount of points of normal fire, six points drumhead fire)
airpower allocated to it ranging from one to
three points. This represents its ability to Close Up to 1 mile
control the skies in its area. During each turn Effective 1 to 2 miles
one aerial task may be undertaken for each point Long 2 to 3 miles
of air support. These tasks are as follows.
x Negate one enemy air support point Corps Artillery (Heavy Artillery, up to six points
(must have the initiative to do this) of normal fire, nine points drumhead fire)
x Aerial recce mission Close Up to 1.5 miles
x Undertake an air raid. Effective 1.5 to 3 miles
Long 3 to 4 miles
Air Reconnaissance Distant 4 miles to 6 miles
The player must indicate an area of the map that
he wishes to spot then roll a dice on the Destructive Fire
following table. This is undertaken in a turn when an attack is
Dice Result not being made, but the guns are firing to
1,2 Recce fails, heavy loses, lose one point attempt to downgrade the enemy. It is known as
of air support for the next turn a barrage.
3 Recce a minor success. No losses but
fails to identify anything of worth. A barrage uses supply points dependant on its
4 Raid a moderate success. Locate any duration and the strength of the gunnery unit.
troops moving in the area To reflect this, a unit may use as many points of
5 Raid a significant success. Locate one supply as its gunnery strength rating. A unit
unit in the area stationary or moving using the maximum supply points available is
6 Raid a major success. Locate two units considered to have been firing through the whole
in the area stationary or moving turn.
Air Raids
Roll a D6 on the following table, adjusting as
These may be attempted specifically to try to
follows:
damage enemy supply dumps. The following
table should be used.
Each point of supply used by the firer +1
Dice Result
Each level of Defensive position -1
1,2 Raid fails, heavy loses, lose air support
Close range +2
for the next turn
Long range -1
3 Raid a minor success. One supply point Distant Range -2
destroyed
4 Raid a moderate success. Two supply 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
points destroyed
- - - - - D D
5 Raid a significant success. Three supply
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
points destroyed
U D/U D/U D/U D/U U2 U3
6 Raid a major success. Four supply points
destroyed.
On a result of D the defences are reduced by one
level. On a result of D/U the defences are
Fire Support
reduced by one level and the unit’s cohesion is
This may be provided by Divisional artillery,
also reduced by one level. If the letter U has a
Corps Artillery or, in the case of the British, by a
number next to it then reduce the Unit’s
Machine Gun Corps Battalion. Types of fire
cohesion by this amount.
support are as follows.
Support Fire
x Destructive Fire. Designed to downgrade Support fire is a combination of various tactics
an opponent prior to an attack employed to reduce the enemy’s effectiveness.
x Support Fire. Designed to provide This includes firing to destroy the wire on the
support for an attack ground that the attacker is due to cross, the fire
x Neutralising Fire. Designed to stop on the trenches to suppress the defenders, the
movement of a unit or in an area. interdiction fire on the lines of communication
to stop reinforcements being brought up to
Fire support takes place at one of the following strengthen the line, and counter-battery fire
ranges against the enemy’s guns to temporarily put
them out of action.

86

There are two sorts of fire, a normal barrage and
an intensive Drumfire barrage with more shells
expended. A normal barrage uses supply points
dependant on its duration and the strength of
the gunnery unit. To reflect this, a unit may use
as many points of supply as its gunnery strength
rating. A unit using the maximum supply points
available is considered to have been firing
through the whole turn.
A unit firing a Drumfire barrage will use double
the supply levels used in a normal barrage. N.B.
the cost in supplies doubles whereas the
effectiveness only increases by 50%.
Neutralising Fire
Batteries and Machine Gun battalions may choose
to fire to suppress a unit in order to stop it
moving, or they may fire to neutralise and area
in order to create a barrier to movement.
To do this costs two supply points per turn. It
does no damage to any unit in a target are, but
does stop them moving, or stops any movement
through that area.
Machine Gun Corps
Due to the vast quantities of ammunition in a
battalion sized machine gun barrage this may
only occur once in a day.
Combat
Combat is undertaken on the basis of combat
odds. This is calculated by establishing the basic
odds based on unit Firepower. The table of
possible odds is shown as Combat Odds on the
Corps Blimey Tables below.
Once you have established the odds this is then
adjusted according to the various contributory
factors in favour of both the attacker and
defender. These are as follows:
Training Level higher Two shifts per level
than opponent
Cohesion Level Below 6 One shift per point below
Defensive Preparation One shift per point
level
Fire support points One shift each 3 points
(round down)
Air support One shift
Tank support One shift
Umpires Discretion Up to two shifts
The umpire’s discretion is really based on any
factors that he considers are important but not
covered above. For example, if an attack was
being conducted in very muddy conditions then
he could apply one shift of the odds, if it was
87
73
being launched across a major obstacle, such as
a canal, then he could apply two shifts.
Once the final odds are established roll a D6 on
the combat table to establish the result. The
result is applies to the side which had the odds
against them except when the result is denoted
with *, in which case they are applied to the side
with the odds in their favour. If the odds are
even, 1:1, the result is applied to the defender
unless a * result is rolled when it is applied to
the attacker.
This result gives details of the damage to the
cohesion of the units involved and the limit of
the advance, if any, that the attackers achieve.
Here it should be noted that Assault Troops gain
a specific bonus, adding one additional trench
line to any positive result. So, an attack that
would normally drive an opponent out of three
lines of trenches will see a formation trained as
Assault troops capture four lines of trenches.
Let’s look at an example.
Two British Divisions (average training, 100%
cohesion, level 6) with armour support plus their
own guns and the Corps heavy artillery is
attacking one German Division (average training,
100% cohesion, level 6) entrenched in the
Hindenburg line. The British have air
superiority however the Germans are occupying
a reverse slope position.
The British Divisions are starved of men thanks
to the interference of Mr Stupid himself, Lloyd
George, so they each have two points of
firepower, a total of four. The Germans are a
pretty average bunch, so they have firepower of
two as well, so that is basic odds of 2:1.
The British benefit from tank support, giving
them one shift on the combat odds, they are
firing a drumfire barrage with their Divisional
guns, so that’s a total of 12 points from the two
Divisions, four shifts in odds. The Corps guns
are also firing drumfire, nine points, a further
three shifts in odds. So, that’s a whopping eight
shifts in their favour (rightly so, they have spent
31 points of supplies on the attack!).
The Germans, however, are in the Siegfried line,
giving them four shifts. They German Divisional
artillery is firing in support with four points,
one more shifts. The umpire decides that as the
Germans have the advantage of a reverse slope
he will give them a further one shift as his
discretion, making a total of six shifts in their
favour.
 74

Playsheet
Combat Odds
In Defender’s Favour In Attacker’s Favour
5:1 4:1 3:1 5:2 2:1 3:2 4:3 1:1 4:3 3:2 2:1 5:2 3:1 4:1 5:1

Combat Table
Dice Roll
1 2 3 4 5 6 Odds
D D S S D* D* 1:1
D S S X S D* 4:3
T D D X S D* 3:2
T D D D S D* 2:1
T T D D D S 5:2
T T X X D S 3:1
T T T X D S 4:1
T T T T T D 5:1

Combat Results Defined

Result Definition
S Stalemate. The units involved in the action have fought themselves to a stalemate. The attacker
fails to hold the enemy’s front line and is thrown back to his start position. Both sides reduce their
cohesion by one point. Roll a D6, the loser reduces his cohesion by a further point
D 1. Defeat. A Defeated attacker is returned to its start position and loses one point of cohesion. A
defeated defender rolls 1D6.
1-4: They attack captures your front line position. Fall back to the next line of defence. The
attacker rolls a D6. He maintains communication with his artillery on 3-6
5-6: The attack captures your first and second lines of defence. Fall back to the next line of
defence. The attacker rolls a D6. He maintains communication with his artillery on 5-6

2. Both sides reduce their cohesion by one point and roll a D6. The loser reduces his cohesion by a
further point.
T 1. Total Defeat. A Totally Defeated attacker is returned to its start position and loses two points
of cohesion. A Totally Defeated defender rolls a D6.
1-4: The attack captures your first and second lines of defence. Fall back to the next line of
defence. The attacker rolls a D6. He maintains communication with his artillery on 5-6
5-6: The attack captures three lines of defence and your Divisional guns are out of action for
the remainder of the day. The attacker rolls a D6. He maintains communication with his
artillery on 6

The loser reduces his cohesion by two points, the victor by one point and then both sides roll a D6.
The side rolling lowest loses an additional cohesion by a point.
X No result, roll again immediately

Assault Troops: Specially trained assault troops will capture one additional line of defence to those noted in
the D and T results.

88

So the British have a net two shifts on the table,
bringing the odds up to 3:1 in their favour.
Looking at the Combat Table the British have a
fifty percent chance of totally defeating the
German Division, a 25% chance of defeating it
and a 25% chance of the action resulting in a
stalemate.
Let us assume the worst for the Germans. They
are totally defeated, they lose their front line
positions and have been forced back into their
reserve trenches. Their guns have been
withdrawn so that they do not fall into British
hands and cannot be used again today. Their
Division loses two cohesion points, which means
that they fight with reduced efficiency, but can
still mount a counter attack in the afternoon if
they desire. The British Divisions have lost one
point of cohesion each (they automatically lost
one point between them, but they also lost the
dice roll for the additional point and have spread
the losses equally). What is more worrying is
that the British have lost the support of their
guns.
Let’s try another example.
In the afternoon the Germans gain the initiative
and stage a counter attack. They throw in one
fresh Division which fights along side the one
pushed back in the morning. They have
supporting fire from the fresh Division’s
batteries which are firing drumfire for maximum
effect. The odds now are equal as we have two
average Divisions with similar levels of training
against each other.
The British are now defending positions that are
less than ideal as they are facing the wrong way
and have no wire to protect them so they count
as Level 2 Defences only. So two shifts for the
Brits. However they have dropped two levels of
cohesion, one each, so that is two negative
shifts for them. The tanks are no longer
supporting them, they are presumed to have
broken down after the exertions of the morning,
and the British are not in contact with their
guns so have no fire support. This results in no
shift at all for the Brits.
The Germans have two negative shifts as they
too lost two cohesion levels in the morning,
however they do have fire support from the guns
of one Division firing drumfire, so six points of
gunnery giving a two level shift in their favour.
So the Germans get no advantage either, leaving
the odds at evens. The umpire can see no
factors that would encourage him to adjust
those odds, so we roll our dice.
89
75
With even chances there is a fifty percent
chance of either side defeating their opponent.
However even if the British lose badly they can
only be thrown out of two lines of defence,
meaning that at worst their offensive has gained
some ground. Of course if they win the Germans
could well be pushed back out of their reserve
trenches onto their second line of defence.
In example one the British used a total of thirty
four points of supplies; twelve for the Corps
artillery, sixteen for the Divisional artillery, two
for tank support and two each for the infantry
Divisions’ being in combat.
The Germans used ten points, two for the
infantry and eight for their guns.
In the second example the British used four
points, the Germans twelve.
Conclusion
So there you have it. I cannot pretend that I
have attempted to cover all bases; in the spirit
of Kriegsspiel I have intentionally left some
elbow room for the umpire to fill in the gaps as
he sees fit. If you come across anything not
covered than just roll a D6 and decide. The
rules are also very much a work in progress, and
consequently I’d be very interested to get
feedback from any one who fancies a dabble
with the rules. It is my hope to reprint a whole
series of 1:100.000 scale British Army maps that I
have in my collection and publish them along
side guides to the battles which will allow the
historian to view the terrain fought over as the
Generals would have seen it, and to re-fight the
battles of 1914 -1918 on them.
Sample Scenario
In November 1917 the British launched an attack
against the German Hindenburg Line, the
Siegfried Stellung, with an all-arms force in the
hope of capturing Cambrai and unleashing a
Corps of Cavalry into the German rear areas.
The ground had been chosen by Major J.F.C
Fuller of the Tank Corps due to its suitability for
massed tanks. This sector of the front had been
quite for a long time; both sides used the area to
recuperate Divisions that had suffered heavy
casualties or were in need of rest and,
consequently, it became known as the Flanders
Sanatorium.
The British plan was to use several new tactical
initiatives to give them success. Firstly their
guns were to fire off plan, having been pre-
registered elsewhere, thereby avoiding warning

the Germans that an attack was planned in that
area.
The RFC was to support the attacks by mounting
Deep Battle attacks against German airfields as
well as strafing the German trenches.
Most interesting of all was the commitment of a
Corps of armour, with nine battalions of tanks,
90
76
476 in all, used to support the infantry Divisions.
The map at left shows the deployment of the
various Divisions along with the Corps
boundaries. The red lines represent the British
front line trenches, the blue lines the German
Hindenburg defences. An unmarked map also
accompanies this article which can be used as a
playing surface. If a higher resolution map is
 77

needed then please contact me via the web site period. This, they judges (rightly) was the time
or Yahoo Group and I can provide one. Suffice to it would take for the Germans to shift their
say that one inch on the unmarked map is just reserves to the area. As such it is possible to
over one mile when printed without adjusting limit the game to just two days once the attack
the scaling (so on A4 sized paper. In the US print is launched. That said operations did still
without scaling and all the relevant bits will still continue around Bourlon Wood for a week, with
fit on Letter sized paper). fresh German Divisions arriving to hold the line.
What is even more interesting is to extend that
For the sake of a playtest game all of the British to cover the entire month of November as the
Divisions have a firepower of 2, whilst the 36th Germans counter-attacked strongly around the
and 51st Divisions are high quality formations, the 30th of the month and into early December. Here
rest Average. The British have an aerial they recaptured most of the British gains using
capability of 3 for both III and IV Corps which are their stormtrooper tactics.
to conduct the attack. The 55th and 56th If this option is used then the Germans should
Divisions are on the flanks of the attacking start getting supplies at a rate of sixteen units a
Divisions and may not attack themselves, week from the moment that the British launch
however their artillery may provide fire support their attack. They will also receive the following
for the attacks. The Tank Corps may provide one reinforcements.
battalion support for each Divisional attack,
having nine battalions in total. Not all of these Unit Gruppe Date
need to be used on the morning of day one, they 3rd Guards Arras D+2
may be fed into the battle as it progresses. For 21 Arras D+2
every three tank battalions committed to an 221 Arras D+3
attack only one serviceable one will remain at 214 Arras D+3
the end of the turn due to breakdown. This will 49 Arras D+4
need one turn to assemble to form an ad hoc 107 Caudry D+2
formation that can be reused. 119 Caudry D+2
28 Caudry D+3
The Cavalry Corps is there to exploit the hoped 20 Caudry D+3
for gap created in the German line. It is not
220 Caudry D+3
necessary to represent it on the tabletop as if
5th Guards Caudry D+4
the British achieve a breakthrough and unleash it
they have won the battle. What’s more I haven’t
Again these units should be pretty average
written any rules for cavalry breakouts yet!
coves, Firepower 2 with average training,
although feel free to make two of the
The Germans have a firepower of 2, the reserve
reinforcement Divisions High Quality and two
or Landwehr designations on their Divisions are
assault formations with a firepower of three.
irrelevant by this stage of the war however the
111th Division is a high quality formation, the rest
As stated, this is very much a playtest game so
Average. The Germans have an aerial capability
do feel free to chop and change things as you
of 1 for both Gruppe Caudry and Gruppe Arras.
will. I am keen to experiment with different
initiative dice for commanders, for example.
All the forces above have their Divisional
This is one of those games which can make a
artillery however the German Gruppe have no
truly enjoyable solo experience, and can be
Corps heavy artillery whereas the British do.
played from one sheet of paper with one D6, so I
Each Corps should mark a supply depot on the
shall expect lots of feed back from people
map. At the start of the game British III and IV
playing on trains, planes and automobiles or,
Corps have forty points each in their respective
God forbid, at work!
depots, whereas the Germans have just twenty
points in each of Gruppe Caudry and Arras.
British supplies arrive with Third Army HQ at a
rate of 21 units per week. The Germans receive
just six units of supply a week in quiet periods,
however once the British attack starts this will
be increased to 21 units per week or 35 units if
the Long Game option below is chosen.

Short or Long Game

The British were very specific in setting their
objectives to be achieved within a two day

91
 78

92
 2
79

3
4

5 6

30

In this practical guide, Sidney demonstrates
how to build a trench network in your garage,
without the need to resort to forced labour or
Russian prisoners of war.
Readers of previous editions of this fine
magazine will be well aware that I have for a
long time attempted to compensate for my
extreme inadequacies as a tabletop general by
enhancing the variety of the terrain in the
TooFatlardies terrain cupboard. As you may well
recall this started out in a modest way....a copse
of trees, an Arabian tent, the odd 17th Century
windmill, an olive grove, and I was expecting
much of the same for 2009. And then came
“Through the Mud and the Blood” and the need
for some trenches......
I don’t quite know how it happened. In the
space of a few short hours last November, I had
somehow managed to agree to have a crack at
producing some trench terrain for Rich’s new
World War One rules. How hard could that be?
Simple, surely? Well, read on, Loyal Readers, as
the journey was indeed simple and
straightforward, at least when we’d got to the
end and looked back. What would have been
really useful at the start of the project was a
guide to what to do, and what to avoid. And
that’s what I’ve tried to produce below.
Part One: Having a Plan and choosing your
audience
Knowing very little about trenches, I started
looking on the net for someone who’d
constructed trench terrain before. There were
not that many who’d tried it. It seemed to be a
“specialised” type of terrain as if there was
some magic about a few boards with trenches
dug into them. Quite a few people posting on
the internet made reference to the fact that
they wanted to build some trenches, but thought
it would be a very inflexible piece of terrain or
that it was almost certain to be a really long
term project lasting a year or so.
This didn’t sound encouraging. So, the first of
my lessons learnt is this: First Lesson Learnt:
Don’t listen to the doubters – JUST HAVE A GO!
Of course, rushing into something is never a
great idea, so you need a plan. The first point to
make is that trench terrain can come in many
different forms, and there is an important choice
to be made before you pick up the chisel or
paintbrush. This is between having free standing
trenches on the one hand, and modular trenches
embedded in a game board on the other.
Neither is right or wrong. There are those who
say free standing Kalistra style trenches look
unrealistic – but then there’s other’s who
31
80
correctly point out that owing to the water-
logged ground almost all the “trenches” in the
Salient around Ypres were built from the ground
up with sandbags. It’s very much a case of what
you are trying to achieve. It’s true that free
standing trenches are very flexible, but also true
that modular terrain is nowhere near as
inflexible as some people make out. In short,
it’s all about deciding what you want, and
planning accordingly.
As a club we decided that we wanted a modular
set of boards which were flexible for club play,
looked good and were suited to being a display
game to take round a number of UK and
European shows in 2009. Several of the chaps
mentioned that they ideally wanted the trenches
built into the table – there were references to
the fact that this “looked right”, and also a
number of members who simply wanted to give
that modular style of terrain a go. As a club we
wanted people to immediately recognise that the
game was set somewhere in First World War
France, but also wanted it to be flexible enough
for the trench network to represent British,
French or German trenches. We also needed
something robust which could cope with gamers’
elbows resting on it with making dimples. And
we wanted the terrain finished by early March, in
time for Salute 2009 and a few practice games,
giving a building period of about 12 weeks. All
this sounded good, and even if the timeframe
seemed tight, I was willing to give it a try.
So after getting the requirements for the
project, the next stage was planning. I confess
that although I had a basic plan, certain key
elements of it were only worked out in a fairly
vague and general sense at the start. Looking
back at the plans in the project book (Photo 1),
the basic framework came through intact, but
lots of ideas we had were evolved or dumped
altogether. Our basic plan was for 12 boards,
each 600mm x 600mm, with four ranks of three
boards across the table. The plan was for two
ranks of trenches (front line and support line),
and two ranks of no-man’s land. Each column of
boards could be swapped with any other.
“Pretty flexible”, I thought when I drafted the
plan, but I didn’t think at that time about how
the plan could be improved. Second lesson
learned: Always look at the plan critically and
talk things through with club members, mates
or old gaming chums.
What we found later was that we could build
extra flexibility into the design by interchanging
the board sections, so the first rank of no-,man’s
land could double up in a different game as an
area behind the support trench. Similarly, the
support trenches could be flipped around

entirely, completely changing the distances
between the trenches and making the defenders
job far easier. I found this out just in time, and
can’t take the credit for a number of brainwaves
that other club members like Rich and Big Al
had, but the lesson is to really stress-test the
plan to get the very best project for your time
and effort. One simple trick, if you want
flexibility for modular terrain, is to just try
moving the pieces around like a jigsaw and see
where you get to.....if something doesn’t fit,
have a go at changing it so it can slot in there.
Part Two: “You want how much Styrofoam?”
Materials......don’t we just love ‘em? My garage
is full of bits of rubbish and offcuts from a
variety of friends, local stores and the dropped
branches from the trees in my garden. It all
comes in handy, but sometimes would do need to
splash out and purchase something for a new
project. We wanted the boards to be robust,
and so I purchased sufficient 6mm MDF sheets
and timber battens for the base boards (Photo
2). This would give the terrain complete rigidity
when transporting. There’s an additional weight
cost, and there’s more space needed to store the
boards in, but in my view that’s repaid by
knowing you’re creating terrain which is really
going to last for decades.
I also purchased 14 sheets of 40mm blue
Styrofoam for the terrain base. This was the
biggest single expense of the project and cost
me £78 plus £10 postage. Not bad when you
stack this against the cost of ready made terrain
tiles and building your own means that you get
the chance to create exactly the terrain layout
you want. This stuff is not that hard to purchase
mail order from Craftfoam in the UK (website
details of which are below). I was tempted to
try and purchase it locally, but the builders
merchants I went to laughed when I said how
little I wanted, and the hobby shops were aghast
I wanted so much. Mail order is therefore the
way to go, and they can achieve precise cutting
of the boards to 600mm x 600mm [in real
measurements this equates to two foot square.
Ed.] every time.
The next stage, after chalking and drawing in the
trenches with a marker pen on the top of the
foam is to cut out the trenches. The Styrofoam
is so dense that it cuts pretty easily with just a
kitchen knife (Photo 3). Don’t try and cut the
foam with a saw unless you want trenches with
bumps and irregular cuts, which would be ideal
for earthen walls but not for trenches with lots
of wooden revetting. If you want to revet your
trenches with wood, corrugated iron and wood-
weave, you are best cutting at a right angle
downwards and keeping everything geometric.
32
81
You should end up with the trenches neatly cut
out. Use a figure and some bases to make sure
that the width of the trenches accommodates all
the troops and weapons you want to use in them.
We generally went for a 50mm width of trench,
with 60mm in the front line, and this has worked
out fine
Part Three: “Here was I, digging a trench...”
Trenches changed during the war. An excellent
resource is Paddy Griffith’s Osprey Fortress book
“Fortifications of the Western Front”. Early war
trenches could be little more than earthen lined
trenches in the ground, narrow and sometimes
even in straight lines. As the war dragged on,
trench systems became more elaborate, with
familiar crenulated lines, curved or zig-zagged
communications trenches and deep bunkers.
The German Siegfried Stellung, to which the
Germans retreated in late 1916, was the epitome
of fixed fortifications for its time. It featured
several different defensive lines, and introduced
elements of flexible defence in depth, although
ultimately it failed in its key objective of
preventing Allied advances. We wanted to try
and loosely model the trench terrain on the
Siegfried Stellung, although not to the extent
that you could only use it for a German defensive
system. The Siegfried Stellung was an
inspiration, but not a blue print.
Accordingly, I wanted the trenches to show
revetting and wood reinforcement, with sections
of wood-weave and corrugated iron where
planking might have been scarce. Ideally, we
should have had a lot more sandbags along the
trenches, but my attempts at moulding these
into the walls were not successful. The sandbags
I did use were made with Milliput and placed on
the trench parapets, but more as a token than as
a recreation of the German line. I decided the
easiest way was to make the revetting in
separate sections and fix this onto the walls of
the Styrofoam trenches (Photo 4). The method
is simple: cut a piece of thin card and glue on a
series of thicker card “boards” and matchstick
“trenchposts”. Some corrugated card can
represent corrugated iron, used extensively in
construction by both sides. You need plenty of
PVA glue, but in the end the finished result
passes muster as a representation of a wooden
revetted trench wall (Photo 5). This process is
pretty cheap as regards cost. I used one bag of
matchsticks for the whole terrain and still have
some left over. The card is just artists mounting
board, or any card you have lying around. The
thin card base is just from old cereal packets.
The industrial quantity of PVA is the main
expense, along with some “No More Nails” to
glue the finished revetted sections to the trench
sides.

The base of the trench is, of course, the MDF on
which the Styrofoam sits. I screwed the
Styrofoam to the MDF for extra strength, and I
recommend you do this. You don’t need special
glue to get a good bond, although there’s a lot of
literature on the internet telling you to purchase
contact adhesive and the like. I used “No More
Nails” which seems to stick most things pretty
well, plus a liberal coating of PVA between the
MDF and the Styrofoam. If you are extensively
screwing the Styrofoam to the MDF (about 8
screw per board does it fine), the Styrofoam is
simply fastened to the MDF and just won’t move,
The glue will eventually set, even thought the
air contact of the PVA glue in the centre of the
board is limited. Drill extra holes in the MDF if
you want to speed the drying time. The “No
More Nails” seems to work really well as an
adhesive sandwiched between the two surfaces.
The base of the trench is a bit of a fiddle. You
are really looking for something representing a
muddy trench with duckboards. You can try and
construct a gutter and build a ladder of
duckboards on top. I tried that, but it was
painstakingly fiddly as the ladders kept falling
apart. Third Lesson Learnt: don’t over-
complicate – THINK MACRO, NOT MICRO. Try
and represent the look of the base of the trench.
I mixed PVA and interior filler (about a 50/50
mix) and spread this on the base of the trench. I
then stuck a series of card duckboards into the
mix, adding assorted gravel and stones along the
edges as trench “spoil” (Photo 6). It’s messy,
but then trenches were a mess for most of the
time. You can also try making areas which can
be flooded with water gel. All this involves is
building up two card mounds in the trench
which then becomes a mini-reservoir for the gel.
Some collapsed trench sides also looks good by
the side of the intended water feature!
Part Four: How green is my valley
At this stage, you’re ready to tackle the surface
of the boards, which is the point when the main
aesthetic dilemma arrives. Do you want a
realistic muddy trench system, or do you want
something which is not just 12 boards painted
interesting shades of brown? My question is a
little loaded, of course, because we chose the
former, not the latter. It was a purely personal
choice, and I agonised over it.
On the one hand, the popular image of the
trenches is a place of misery and suffering with
mud was everywhere, certainly in areas where
the fighting was heavy. Painting the entire
board in interior filler and brown paint would not
be inaccurate, and I was very mindful of not
wanting to suggest that the no-man’s-land of the
Great War was a picturesque, pleasant place.
On the other hand, there were actions fought
33
82
over green fields even in the middle of the war,
notably the early engagements on the Somme in
1916 and the crossing of the Siegfried Stellung at
Cambrai in 1917 (which was not heavily shelled
to facilitate the movement of the tanks). I
reasoned that our trench system could be one of
these locations, where a substantial amount of
grass could remain before a heavy bombardment
had taken place. This would allow for a mix of
muddy shell craters but also some colour in the
green of the surrounding grass fields. It was a
personal choice, and I know some of you like it
and others are less keen. Well, mes braves, one
pays ones money and takes ones choice.
For those of the “brown mud” persuasion, simply
skip the next paragraph and have a ‘Snifter’.
For those of the “green fields” persuasion,
here’s how to add the grass. Before you do, dig
out the craters you want to have in the terrain.
Just use a chisel....go mad, there’s no magic
here. If you want super craters, try building the
edges up using off-cuts of old foam from other
projects, cardboard or anything bulky (photo 7).
Then get some old towelling (basically stuff
you’ve wanted to chuck away for ages), suggest
to your wife/girlfriend/ significant other that it’s
time for some new towels and then take the old
ones and dye them dark green. When dry, cut
them around the areas of the board – such as the
craters and the trench line – where the grass is
going to be absent. You should then have a
pattern of green towelling to be placed on each
board, ready to be glued down.
For the sticking, don’t just use PVA. Try a 50/50
PVA and interior filler mix – this really soaks into
the towelling and dries rock hard. Think of the
consistency of porridge as what you’re aiming
for. Coat this on with a brush across the entire
board’s upper surface, then simply glue the
towelling down.. Hey presto, mud and fields
(Photo 8). While the PVA/ Interior Filler is still
setting/drying, sprinkle a variety of stones,
ballast, sand on the boards fairly liberally. I
started in 2005 with a £5 bag of builders’ sharp
sand and that’s still going strong. Just sieve out
the stones, dry the sand and its ready. You can
also add ballast (such as Talus) from a model
railway shop, which looks great. A later trick we
tried was adding dark grey or brown paint to the
PVA/ Interior filler mix, and this was a good way
of speeding up the painting time by cutting out
the need for a basecoat. Fourth lesson learned
– combine the stages to save time where
possible. Again, this is not something I did at
the start, but learned along the way.

By now you should have reached the stage of
trenches, grass and craters (photo 9). Have a
beer, the hard work’s done!
Part Five – Slotting and Dropping (ooh err
Missus....!)
I mentioned at the start that we wanted
flexibility in our design. You can just drop
bunkers or strongpoints on the boards, but I
wanted to try and integrate these terrain items
into the boards, making them a real feature of
the terrain. For bunkers, try creating an area
which can serve as an MG pit, perhaps an old
crater in the line which has been reinforced. All
you then need to do is slot a bunker on top of
the pit, using the Styrofoam cut away as the
base (Photo 10). The Bunker is locked in place
and won’t move
The same principle is used for creating
“segments” to drop into the game boards. This
takes a bit more work but is really worth it and
adds tremendously to the flexibility of the
boards. On the first rank, I created whole
sections which are cut out from the Sytrofoam
and can be dropped in place (Photo 11). So,
when the board is used as no-man’s-land, the
dropped segment is a reinforced crater for the
attacker’s jump off point. When the board is
reversed to be used as a rear rank board, simply
take out the shell crater segment and drop in a
segment representing a field gun position, a
bunker, a casualty clearing station or an anti-
aircraft MG mounting. Designing each segment
to drop in is good fun, and adds a lot of variety
while still being integrated into the terrain
Part Six – Painting the Town Green
The final stage is the most fun of all. Before you
paint the terrain, it looks like, well, lumps of
card and towelling stuck to blue Styrofoam. The
base coat of paint helps blend everything in, but
it’s when you dry brush the terrain, and the
trenches in particular, that everything starts to
come alive. Remember to try some dark rust/
brown paint washes for the rust on the
corrugated iron.
The towelling should be dyed green already, and
the PVA/ Interior Filler mix will dry hard and
seep into the towelling giving a rock hard base.
All the same, try mixing some neat PVA with a
base dark green paint to cover the towelling.
I’m not sure this is essential, but it makes the
towelling incredibly rigid and durable. Basically,
once it’s glued down and covered with PVA/
paint wash, the towelling is going nowhere for a
decade at least! Dry-brushing with neat green
and ochre shades looks good, especially when
finished off with some poppy scatter.
34
83
Part Seven – super detailing, or “Can you see
my signal rockets?”
Trench terrain is not anymore complicated or
expensive than normal terrain. Basically, at
least in my book, it can be as cheap as chips (I’m
from Yorkshire, after all). But it does take a
while, simply because of the scale. After you’ve
finished the basic trenches, take a break and
play a few games on them....get the feel of the
games and think whether you want any extra
boards or whether you want to make any more
terrain items.
Then, over the next few months you can start
adding some super-detail to your trench
system...all the little items which makes the
terrain come alive. Personally, I think this is
one of the nicest parts of finishing a project –
coming back after a month or so and making just
a small detail to enhance the overall shape and
appearance of the terrain. We’ll be covering
these items, such as signal flares, trench
supplies, barbed wire and explosions, in the next
Christmas Special. But first, get cracking on the
base terrain, and leave the micro details for
now. See you at Christmas!
Part Seven – Helpful people, or “Who ya
gonna call?”
Well, not Ghostbusters, but these guys:
http://www.craftfoam.co.uk - really excellent
supply of custom cut Styrofoam. Very reliable,
pretty fast delivery.
http://www.modelshop.co.uk – these guys have
everything you need for most terrain projects.
Good store of ballasts.
http://www.hobbycraft.co.uk – good place for
card of all shapes and sizes. I got a pack of
corrugated card for £4.99 from there which
lasted the whole project.
Paddy Griffiths - Fortifications of the Western
Front 1914-1918 (Osprey Fortress Series)
Alexander Turner – Cambrai 1917: The Birth of
Armoured Warfare (Osprey Campaign Series)
Some fine photos of late war German trench
systems
Siegfried Stellung -
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hindenburg_Line –
OK, not the most rigorous piece of research ever
done, but the photo on the Wiki site of the
section of trench at Bullecourt influenced our
thinking of how geometric a trench system could
look.
 84

7 8

10
9

11

35
 85

Attack on
Camp El Juba
An ITLSU Scenario
By Nick Skinner

T he fictional Camp El Juba rests not so

peacefully on the banks of the
imaginatively named but rather
brackish El Juba river in the non-fictional land
pushing up river since it secured the customs
house at Basra a few weeks ago. Turkish
forces in the area are still rallying to the
colours, and auxiliary units are being
of Mesopotamia. It is 1915. The British assembled at Camp El Juba, an otherwise non
Army’s Indian Expedition Force has been

77

inspiring assemblage of tents standing near an
old Shrine to Samson.
Senior British planners on the staff of the
Indian Expeditionary force have decided that
the camp at EL Juba cannot be allowed to
remain as a thorn in the side of the advancing
British and Empire Troops. After all, it rests
just two days march from the base at Shaiba,
far too dangerous to allow the enemy the use
of such an advanced position. The British have
therefore decided to send a force, under the
somewhat rotund and sometimes sweaty
General Sir Percival Wobbler, to Camp EL
Juba. His objective is to overrun any Ottoman
Auxillary troops that may be at the Camp, and
to destroy the camp and the wells located
there.
***
M eanwhile, over at El Juba, Hamid
Bey, protector of Juba, is enjoying
a feast. Fresh food, captured from
the British just days ago has been brought into
camp. He’s not too keen on the bully beef, but
is more interested in his prisoner, a native
soldier from an Indian regiment, who tells him
that a fearsome British General is headed this
way with 8,000 men. Hamid Bey must act fast.
He gathers his auxiliaries together, and draws
them up for parade in the camp. What he sees
is a rather rag-tag collection of tired men and
red fresh faced boys. But he knows that
inside each of them is a warrior waiting to
come to life. He tells his men the British are
coming. The men look serious. He shows them
the ridiculous selection of personal grooming
equipment and fruit cakes that his men
captured along with the Indians transporting
them. At the sight of the cake the men laugh.
How can warriors be expected to fight when
78
86
they are fed like dogs? A scout comes in. He
tells Hamid Bey that a dust cloud has been
seen just a few miles off. It must be the cake
eaters. Quickly he orders the ammunition to
be brought up, and the men are told to man
the defences and send the British idiots
packing. He goes to his tent, gathers his
bodyguard and his valuables, just in case.
***
T
his then is the fictional encounter at
Camp El Juba. The objectives for each
side are simple. For the British, they
must drive the auxiliaries out of the camp and
destroy everything there. For Hamid Bey and
his men they must defeat the cake eaters and
hold the camp - at least until Hamid Bey’s tent
can be removed to a point of safety further up
river….
The Table should be set up as shown in the
map on the previous page. This is not a large
game, so can be played on a large dining table
in around two hours at most.
The trenches around El Juba are not a
continuous system but comprise three
separate systems, each of which is large
enough to hold a company plus a machine
gun. The green strips represent cultivated
land which affords some cover, but not a lot.
Most of the rest of the ground should count
as open ground, but the area in the
immediate vicinity of the trenches and the
shrine should be counted as Bad going due to
the poor state of the ground in these areas.
The Shrine makes a perfect location for Sir
Percival’s Brigade HQ. The camp itself has no
defensive capabilities and provides no
restriction to movement or firing.
 87

British Forces Arab Forces

Hamid Bey
General Sir Percival Wobbler
Leadership rating: Old Turk D4
Leadership rating : Eton (D6)
1 signals base
Auxiliary Militia Regiment (Pasha Bashers)
(3 companies each of 3 bases)
112th Mahrattas (Havildar Heroes)
2 x MG’s (Pasha Bashers)
4 x companies (each of 4 bases)
Turkish lancer squadron (Pasha Bashers)
(3 bases, mounted)
2/5th Loamshires (Jolly Good Fellows)
4 x companies (each of 4 bases)
Hamid Bey’s men may start anywhere within
Sadly, Sir Percival has no machine guns with his the general defences of Camp El Juba. They
command, the decision having been made that
have defend orders. The British enter, in
they would not be needed for such a mopping up
column of march, on the first turn of the
operation.
game. They have attack orders.

Victory Conditions:

He who holds the camp at the end of the

game is deemed to be the victor.

Cards required to play the Attack on Camp El Juba

British Cards Arab Cards Other Cards
Blinds Move Blinds Move Tea Break

British Commander (x2) Arab Commander (x1) They Don’t like it Up em!

112th Mahrattas Auxiliary Militia Regiment Blank Card

2/5th Loamshires Arab MGs Mirage

Hesitant Troops Fleet Footed Arabs Water, Water!*

Stiff Upper Lip Turkish Delight

The British ignore the Water, Water card if they overrun any of Hamid Bey’s defensive positions.

79

he title “Through the Mud and the Blood”
is graphic in its imagery of our perception
of the First World War. Poor soldiers,
drowning in pits of mud, hung up on
barbed wire and machine-gunned and
shelled to death by the tens of thousands. It is
evocative of the mass slaughter of the Somme,
the futility of Passchendaele, the Nivelle
Offensive and the horrors of the Argonne. War is
no longer a question of man fighting man, a
struggle in valor, but it becomes man against
material; a struggle in endurance. A year and a
half after the bloodletting began the acceptance
of this reality led to a battle based on the entire
idea of forcing the enemy to stand and bleed
out, and by this crucifixion be defeated. In the
end, it was the designer’s inability to stick to the
plan, overcome by their own desire to surge
forward and win, that led to over-extension and
defeat. But it almost worked and this new
Mount Calvary left its name to represent
squandered courage and the loss of a
generation: Verdun.
The battle of Verdun has been iconic in many
ways, the cry of “Ils ne passeront pas”, “They
shall not pass”, and the Sacred Way, the single
road by which truckloads of supplies and soldiers
snaked its way into the defenses. (The Sacred
Way was a term used by the press, most French
soldiers referred to it simply as “the road”). The
things that made Verdun important to France
also feature heavily into the popular memory.
Verdun, a symbolic fortification for its resistance
to the Germans in earlier wars, had been heavily
fortified, and positions like Forts Vaux and
Douaumont are important parts of the story of
the battle as well as important places to visit for
today’s battlefield tourist. But for the
wargamer, the struggle for these emplacements
can quickly resemble a game of Dungeons and
Dragons, with the underground corridors being
the scene of much fighting. Other important
locales in the struggle were several of the towns
surrounding Verdun, which itself was never
occupied by the Germans, but as the artillery
bombardments carried on over a ten month
struggle, these became mere spots on a map
with nothing left standing. From a wargaming
perspective the opening days of the battle have
some of the best ability to be transferred to the
table top.
80
88
On February 21st, 1916, the battle opened at
0400 hours with an artillery barrage, the first
German infantry going over the top at 0445. The
initial German attacks were not pursued as
aggressively as they might have been, but the
idea was not to break through the French and
end the war in one fell swoop, it was to tie the
French into defending positions and counter-
attacking those that fell, and to be destroyed by
German artillery as they did so. Of course, the
French did not know this, and for that matter
neither did most Germans, and ferocious close
quarters fighting erupted along the line.
The Bois des Caures was defended by two
Battalions de Chasseurs a Pied, the 56th and
59th. Their commander was Colonel Emile
Driant, a French politician who had already
stirred up controversy over the weakened state
of the Verdun defenses. They started off the
morning of the 21st with a strength of about
1,300 men, but were brutally treated by the
German preparatory bombardment which ran
into the afternoon, and estimated 75-80% of the
two units being killed, wounded or missing.
After the shelling ended the Germans sent in
heavily armed recon patrols into the woods,
these bumped into French survivors and
eventually fell back after the French displayed a
strong will to resist, including a small counter-
attack. On the 22nd, following another
bombardment, the Germans struck in numbers,
tackling French positions and clearing the woods,
in the process killing Driant and effectively
wiping out his men.
This opening fight can also appear problematic
for the average wargamer, as it is anything but a
fair fight. But as any soldier knows, if you are in
a fair fight, someone is doing something wrong.
The question, therefore, becomes victory
conditions.
French Briefing
The Bois des Caures, 22 Feb 1916:
The Boche bombardment has been terrible, what
is left your unit of French Chasseurs is now
making ready to defend a strongpoint against the
forthcoming German assault.

You have five escouades, four of which are
infantry and one of which is a Hotchkiss and
crew. Each of these sections will be of five
men. The four infantry sections may have two
bombers and three riflemen each, and one of the
sections may replace a rifleman with a Chauchat
automatic rifle. In addition you French have a
total of four Big Men, as follows.
Lt. Roger de Brie, Status III
Sgt. Emile Gruyere, Status II
Corp. Armand Banon, Status I
Corp. Thomas Mimolette, Status I
The enemy must not break through, they shall
not pass here or anywhere else in the Verdun
sector. You fight for France, and will die rather
than give up one yard of sacred soil.
German Briefing
The bombardments falls silent, and your men are
ready to push home the attack. It is vital that
the French are defeated here at Verdun, this will
be their tomb!
You have two waves in the attack, the first being
made up of six eight man squads. Three of these
sections may have a light flamethrower team of
two men attached to them, making a total of ten
men. Each team may also have three men
designated as bombers.
The first wave has a good ratio of Big Men, seven
in all, giving one per section plus a platoon
leader. This should allow the German player to
be very aggressive, which is needed.
The first wave Big Men are as follows:
Leutnant Handkase, Status III
Feldwebel Obatzda, Status II
Gefreiter Liptauer, Status I
Gefreiter Qvark, Status I
Gefretier Tilsiter, Status I
Gefreiter Weisslacker, Status I
Gefreiter Harzer, Status I.
You must push on and destroy the enemy. A
second wave will be following on but your force
should suffice to break the initial resistance.
Umpire’s Notes
The French position should be made up of a
trench line which is at this point a series of shell
holes that are connected with some barbed wire
strung about. All barbed wire should be tested
as if undergoing four turns of bombardment for
damage when it is reached by German figures.
The French troops may be deployed anywhere
within their own trenches or any shell holes
81
89
within 6” or a section of duck-boarded trench.
There is no need to test to activate French
figures, it may be assumed that the artillery fire
has lifted long enough ago that the troops are in
control. The table should be represented by
shattered woods and LOTS of shellholes.
The French treat all their troops as veterans with
good morale; despite the pasting they received
they put up a spirited resistance. Sadly for them
ammunition shortages mean that they have no
artillery fire in support, there only being around
6,000 rounds of 75mm available in the Verdun
sector on the 21st. However, given the tenacity
of their defence, the deck may contain two
French Rally cards as well as an Heroic Leader
card.
The Germans enter the table anywhere on the
edge A-B. Their first wave can be treated as
veterans with good morale, they are assault
troops. To give some variety to the game, the
second wave will be regular troops with
reasonable morale.
A German Rally card can be added, but without
one it helps bog down the German attack and
helps make up for the disparity in numbers,
which comes about with the second wave. In
addition to the Big Men card, this wave should
have a “Sturmabteilung Vor!” card, which allows
any group to take a free move, but not a free
fire, as well as a German Dynamic Leader and
Heroic Leader.
The second wave requires a German
reinforcement card which should be in the deck
from the start of the game. The fifth time it
appears the following Germans show up on the
table:
Six sections of eight men each along with five Big
Men.
The sections are organized identically, six
riflemen and two bombers. The Big Men are as
follows:
Leutnant Adolph Kolsch, Status III
Feldwebel Matthias Roggenbier, Status II
Gefreiter Ruddiger Marzen, Status I
Gefreiter Heinrich Weizenbock, Status I
Gefreiter Michael Gose, Status I
This wave may add a dynamic leader to the mix,
but may not use the Sturmabteilung Vor card.
Victory Conditions
The Germans are going to win the game, unless
for some bizarre reason they fail to clear the
 90

French out of their holes by the time you quit If you feel the French position is too weak, feel
playing, or take so much damage they can’t free to upgrade the strongpoint to an abris which
carry on. (We have had games end because the is a concrete bunker. This may contain one
attackers are so bogged down with shock points squad or weapon team.
they can’t go on) The French can force a
“Phyrric Victory” by killing twice as many men as Cards
they lose, which is possible. The French player German French
is going to have rough going, especially after the Big Men Big Men
German second wave is on the table and there Sturmabteilung Vor! Rally x 2
are that many more German big man cards than Heroic Leader Heroic Leader
French big man cards in the deck. So good luck. Dynamic Commander
Reinforcements
A note on uniforms.
For the French, feel free to use any troops in
Horizon bleu with Adrian helmets. The BCPs did
wear dark blue trousers, but there is no need to
display this on the tabletop.

As for the Germans, it will be real easy to

differentiate between waves. The initial assault
troops at Verdun wear issued the brand new
stahlhelms, so you can have the first wave in
steel helmets and the support wave in
picklehaube. This gives you an excuse to use
your late war and early war troops on the same
table!

82

Mention the Battle of the Somme to most people
and it is very likely that not only will they have
heard of it, but they will also have fairly strong
views as to what it represented. There can be
no doubt that for Great Britain and those
commonwealth nations that served there the
experience had left an indelible mark on their
national psyche.
By 1916 the British Army had expanded to the
point where it was able to launch its first real
offensive of the war. The results continue to be
the subject of much debate, largely due to the
terrible loss of human life. This was an entirely
new army learning its trade whilst up against
what was probably the most professional army in
the world. What resulted was the greatest
“materialschlacht”, battle of materiel, that the
world had ever seen. The resulting advances
were achieved at with losses that to speak of a
victory is almost impossible. Indeed from a
purely strategic perspective the gains in ground
were of questionable value.
The real victory of the Somme was not the
staggering German losses, largely the result of
Allied artillery fire, but the emergence of the
British Army as a credible fighting force,
tempered by its experiences and vastly more
proficient in their trade than could possibly have
been the case on the 1st of July.
New weapons were available, new tactics
developed, and far from being demoralised, as
were the Germans, the British Army had a sense
of its own ability and the promise for the future.
In many respects the Somme battlefield was as
painful an experience as the stereotypes suggest.
Flanders was a flat, featureless battlefield where
men died in their thousands, but the truth of the
“Battle of the Somme” is that it was, rather like
111
91
the battle for Normandy in 1944, not one great
meat-grinder, but rather a series of smaller
offensives that were prosecuted in the belief
that by continuously attacking the enemy were
being militarily de-graded to the point where
they would ultimately collapse and a
breakthrough could be achieved. As, indeed,
happened in 1944. Whether such a victory was
feasible in 1916 is highly questionable, indeed
the fact of the matter was that even in 1917 it
was never achieved, despite some pretty meaty
attempts.
The net result of all this is that gamers tend to
shy away from the Somme, preferring the early
or later war, seeing them as more interesting. It
is my hope that the following scenario will show
that is a false impression, and that even in the
midst of the greatest slaughter of the war, there
are interesting and varied actions that can be
gamed.
The Battle of Flers – Courcelette
By mid-September the British and
Commonwealth forces were ready to launch yet
another attack major attack in the hope of
bursting through the German lines. This time
they had a card up their sleeve that they were
confident would help secure that victory; the
tank. Here for the first time the men of the
Heavy Branch of the Machine Gun Corps
advanced into battle, and it must be said that
the impact was distinctly mixed. Of the 49 tanks
available only 21 got into action due to
mechanical failure. Numbers were too few to
achieve what had been hoped for, and ultimately
it was down to men, not machines, to push on
with the battle.
As well as the contribution of the tanks Flers-
Courcelette was also well known for the
contribution made by the Canadian Expeditionary
 92

Force. A whole Canadian Corps took part in the made devotion easy and sacrifice of no
battle, along side eleven British Divisions, and it account”.
is from the Charles Robert’s Canada in Flanders
that this scenario draws its inspiration. Yeah, right! A particularly unlikely account by a
man who was not a soldier but a poet (is there
For the “Van Doos”, the French Canadians of the no escaping these dodgy scribblers?), however
22nd Battalion, their objective for the 15th of the fact remains that the French-Canadians of
September was not an attack across open ground the “Van Doos” did indeed fight their way
towards an enemy through the
trench line, rather village, and a
they were tasked damned fine
with clearing and scenario it
capturing the village makes too.
of Courcelette itself.
The scenario
As can be seen on the actually
accompanying map focuses on a
Courcelette was ringed small part of
with trenches, but the the Canadian
village itself was made force that
up of strongpoints attacked from
within the damaged the south and
buildings. Photographs swept up in a
taken immediately left hook to
before the battle show the east,
a relatively intact clearing the
village, albeit with eastern section
around 50% damage to of the village
each of the houses. This and hitting the
presented the Van Doos German trenches where they
with a challenge of ran along the railway line. I should
clearing the houses before point out that there is no railway line in the
moving on to the trenches map; rather than clutter up the table with
on the western and northern excess terrain features I am assuming that it was
edges of the village. obliterated by the shelling. Something of a
fudge, but there you have it.
Roberts eulogises the effectiveness of the
Frenchmen in his account. Canadian Briefing
Your orders demand that you attack and sweep
“This kind of fighting, this battling through through the village of Courcelette and clear if of
the maze of half-ruined cottages, wrecked the enemy. Your platoon is in the vanguard, and
gardens, and tumbled walls was exactly to has been provided with some moppers up to
the taste of these eager and wiry allow you to keep pressing on. Your objective is
Frenchmen. The variety of it, the scope it to move through the village and take the enemy
offered to individual adventure appealed trench on its eastern edge.
to them. Into such adventure they threw
themselves with zest. A fiery sergeant, To achieve this you have the following force:
having captured a store of German bombs,
loaded himself with them and set out to Lieutenant Yvon Ducharme, Status III
put them to the best possible use. He Sergeant Jaques Lafleur, Status III
bombed a dug-out crowded with Huns. He
rushed on to another and cleaned it out Section One
with equal effectiveness. He then, still Corporal Francoise Boulibase, Status II
single handed, attacked a third, but was Rifle section. 8 men, two trench cleaners, two
shot down before he could throw his bomb. bombers, four riflemen
In spite of the heavy casualties which they
suffered from beginning to end of their Section Two
advance, the French-Canadians carried it Corporal “Frenchie” Langoustine , Status I
through at a pitch of enthusiasm which Rifle section. 8 men, two trench cleaners, two
bombers, four riflemen

112

Section Three
Corporal Alain Depardieu, Status I
Bomber section, eight bombers (two of whom
may elect to be trench cleaners.
Section Four
Corporal Charles Trudeau, Status I
Eight men, including one two man Lewis gun
team.
Moppers Up
Sergeant Hugo Ageugeut, Status I
Four bombers, four trench cleaners
German Briefing
The Englanders are attacking again. To the
trenches! Wait a moment; I can smell garlic…
Your force is as follows:
Feldwebel Richard Braumeister, Status III
Gruppe One
Gefreiter Michael Oberspitz, Status I
Four bombers, four riflemen
Gruppe Two
Gefreiter Luca Beimbohler, Status I
Six bombers, two riflemen
113
93
Machinegun Gruppe
Gefreiter Martin Lubeck, Status I
One Maxim HMG, five crew.
The above force is in the main trench on the
eastern edge of the village. The following force
is deployed to the east of the line C-D-E, but
may not be in the trenches.
Three bombers, eight riflemen, one sniper, two
Big Men (Max Oberland, Status II and Christoph
Ostmark, Status I).
These must be deploying in groups of five men at
most (plus any Big Men attached). They may
have 12” of additional trenches which they may
places as desired. The whole force may also
benefit from having two small bunkers with a
five man capacity.
Umpire’s Notes
The Canadian forces begin the game on Blinds
between A and B. The Germans in the trenches
are down in their dugouts, the bombardment
having just ended. Dice as normal for them to
emerge, but NOT for any casualties incurred by
the bombardment, it is assumed that has already
been factored in.
 94

The table here is roughly 6’ by 5’ although

something a bit smaller would not cause any
problems. Equally it would be quite acceptable
to enlarge the table size to say 7’ by 5’ and then
double the number of figures on the table.
There would be no need to change the terrain if
that option is used.

The terrain is a bit cut up, but the bombardment

has been short, so we will not reduce movement,
not are there any shell holes of note for people
to hide in. The buildings are medium cover, as
are the trenches. The bunkers should be hard
cover.

The main roads, shown by the more solid fawn

lines, are still pretty good going, so troops
moving on them can add +1 per dice for
movement.

Cards
German French-Canadians
Big Men Big Men
Heroic Leader Heroic Leader
Dynamic Commander Vive le Roi!
En Avant!
The Vive le Roi! Card is a Rally card, removing
one point of Shock from any single unit of the
player’s choice once it is dealt. The En Avant!
Card is the Storm card.

The Canadians win the game if they clear the

village and establish themselves in at least 30”
of the trench on the eastern edge of the village.
The Germans win if they deny the Canadians
their objectives.

Conclusion
As an aside, this is the type of game where the
Kalistra terrain that Rob Broom has done up
would be absolutely ideal rather than building
any great network yourself. In general the
terrain here is little different from what one
might encounter in late WWII when the Germans
are on the defensive. Hopefully it has shown
that even during the deepest depths of the Great
War there are scenarios that present the gamer
with interesting and diverse challenges.

114
 95

Despite having a close group of wargaming chums, and

regular games, I still find myself enjoying regular solo
games. Sometimes it’s to test new games or periods
before inflicting them on the unsuspecting denizens of
Wally HQ, other times I just fancy a game without too
much preparation.

This “scenario” is one of my favourites, especially as I

can tailor it to reflect the figures I have ready and the
time I have available. I have used it mainly for M&B
Games on the Western Front, but there’s nothing to stop
you amending it for other periods. The Guadia Civil and
the Falange amid the rubble of the Alcazar, German
troops holding part of the Stalingrad perimeter, even an
outpost of the Glorious Gloucesters at Imjin River could
be used in a similar setting.

My game is designed for a 6 x 4 foot table although you

can amend that for whatever you have available. The
map is generic, but the defenders should be placed in
the bottom half of the table with the attackers entering
on the top edge. Add as much, or as little scenery as
you see fit. Essentially the player’s job is to command
the defence with a view to holding out for as long as
possible and prevent as much of the enemy as they are
able from exiting the opposition table edge. As the
defender, you must ensure that all of your defensive
positions are still holding when you decide the game has
ended.

The attackers are pretty well pre-programmed, their

objective is to break through your line in this sector
however you will certainly have to decide what general
tactics they are employing.

23

The Briefing
You are the remnants of the company’s second line,
the first having been seemingly obliterated in the
bombardment. It’s clear that for the present, you
alone must stop the enemy’s advance however you
are hopeful of assitance. The enemy seem to have
spent themselves in the first rush, but if enough
numbers pass you, the whole line will be
threatened. You must hold, at all costs, every
position and every inch of ground must be fought
for!
You can lay 6 foot of wire entanglements where you
see fit, before the action commences. You may
deploy anywhere in the first two thirds of the table.
Note well. This is very general, being suitable for
any nation, indeed two examples of possible forces
are shown below.
The British Game
The British start the game with the remnants of 5th
platoon, as follows:
Lieutenant Carruthers Big Man, Status III
Sergeant Capstan Big Man Status II
Corporal Widget Big Man Status I
One HQ Section; 3 man Lewis Gun Team, 5
Riflemen, 2 man Rifle Bomber Team
One Vickers HMG Team, 5 crewmen, (Note the HMG
may fire on “Fixed Lines” if required).
One sniper
They then roll 1D6 to add some variable “extras” to
their force. This is unnecessary, you can just give
them a fixed force, but I find it make it more
interesting and keeps me on my toes when I don’t
always get the force I want.
So, the D6 is rolled, what do I get?
1-2: One Rifle Section, 6 plus D4 men
3-4: One Support Section, 3 man Lewis Gun Team,
plus D6 riflemen supports
5-6: One mixed section, 4 riflemen, 4 bombers, 2
trench cleaners
The German
th
Game
Remnants of 5 Platoon
Leutnant Rasche Big Man, Status III
Sergeant Verrampt Big Man Status II
Unterofficer Weidiger Big Man Status I
One HQ Section; 3 man MG18 Gun Team, 5 bombers,
2 riflemen
One Maxim HMG Team, 5 crewmen (Note the HMG
may fire on “Fixed Lines” if required).
One sniper
Additional forces:
Roll 1D6
1-2: One Rifle Section, 6 plus D4 men
24
96
3-4: One Support Section, 3 man Lewis Gun or
MG08/15 team, plus D6 bomber or rifle supports
5-6: One mixed section, 4 riflemen, 4 bombers, 2
bayonet-men
Deployment
Whatever side you are controlling, these may be
placed anywhere on the defender’s part of the
table. Troops may be in fixed cover and
entrenchments from the outset. They are assumed
to have emerged from their bunkers and just taken
up firing positions.
The card deck is assembled thus:
One card per Big Man
Initiative Cards
German Blinds
British Blinds
Defender’s Rally Card
Sniper card
Artillery Card added as required
Reinforcements
The Game Begins
The attackers begin with three blinds on the table.
On the Blinds Card being dealt with in any turn, an
additional Blind will be added to the table at the
attackers’ rear table edge. This will then join the
attack. At the outset the attacker’s forces are
unclear. The attackers are randomly generated and
the gamer should only dice for any Blind once it has
been spotted by the defending forces.
Blinds will attempt to move towards the opposite
edge as quickly as possible, taking full use of
available cover. Remember their objective is
primarily to break through, not to get involved in a
slogging match with the defenders, however this is
not the attack of the living dead (unless you want it
to be!), and some tactical thought should be put
into their behaviour. It is reasonable that they will
try to attack and assault the defenders positions
when they can.
As the gamer will note, the scenario has been
designed to reflect the fact that the attack has
already begun to loose its coordination and
attackers are moving up in dribs and drabs, needing
coordination by local leaders before they can mount
an effective assault.
What’s That Coming Over the
Hill?
When the defenders do spot a Blind the gamer then
rolls 2 D6. The contents of the Blind are then
revealed, thus:
2 Nothing! Just getting the jitters.
3 Infantry Section, 4 + D6 troopers
4 Infantry Section, 6 + D4 troopers
5 Stragglers, D6 troopers
6 MMG Team, Roll 1D6: 1-4 LMG, 1 + D4 crew,
5-6 MMG, 1 +D4 crew
7 Big Man, Roll 1 D6: 1-4 Status 1, 5, Status 2,
6, Status 3

8 Vehicle or Weapon (e.g. artillery piece), or
Plane attack. This happens only once per
game, after that a Random Artillery Strike
will occur. The nearest defending unit to
the blind will be attacked by a barrage of 2
x 75mm artillery fire, a 6x6” box. This will
arrive with 2D6” scatter. This depends on
your model availability.
9 Sniper! A sniper card will be added to the
attackers deck. He will operate from the
vicinity of the spotted blind. He will always
aim for the following priorities: Big Men, if
available, then crewed weapons, lastly
infantry.
10 HQ Team: Roll 1D6 for Big Man 1-4 Status 1,
5, Status 2, 6, Status 3, accompanied by 4 +
D6 men.
11 Big Man, Roll 1D6: 1-5 Status 1, 6, Status 2,
+ D6 men
12 Blimey! Multiple Blinds, seems to be a
bigger problem than we imagined – Roll 1
D3 for the number of new Blinds.
Gamers will note that the quality of troops, nor the
ultimate number of blinds hasn’t been set. This is
because you will want to amend this to fit your own
figure availability, and the time you have set aside
to play. In reality if the defender can hold out for a
few hours, then you’ve done really well. This is,
after all, a holding action.
25
97
Help is on its Way
Potential defenders will be reading this with some
concern, looking at what they have and what they
could potentially be up against. But fear not, help
is on its way.
When the Reinforcements Card is dealt a Blind will
appear on their rear table edge. They may move
this immediately and can dice to see what it is on
their next turn.
1-4: sorry, false alarm, nothing happening, you’ll
have to carry on alone!
5: You may call for an SOS Shoot on one of your
designated targets. An artillery card is added
to your deck next turn and if drawn a 2 x
75mm (essentially a 6x6” square) shoot will
fire with a 2D6” scatter on the area chosen.
Once it has fired this card is discarded until its
rolled again. Players may have multiple SOS
Shoots in action at any time.
6: Roll on the “Attackers Table” above with the
resultant troops being your own
reinforcements.
And that’s it. A simple system that can provide
hours of fun and some tactical challenges as well. I
hope you have as much fun with it as I do.

REVENGE
at Camp El Juba
or
“The Cunning Plan of El Rashada”
An ITLSU Scenario
By Nick Skinner
The Summer Special 2009 included an ITLSU
scenario titled “Attack on Camp El Juba”. In
that scenario British troops under the
illustrious, if somewhat rotund, Sir Percival
Wobbler took the offensive against a hastily
prepared Turkish position. Now we shift the
clock forward one week and see what
happens when the boot is on the other foot,
when the Turkish giant awakes from its
slumbers and sets sights on taking its
revenge…
The Story So Far
A
reminder that the fictional Camp El
Juba rests not so peacefully on the
banks of the imaginatively named but
rather brackish El Juba river, just two days
march from the main British base at Shaiba, in
the non-fictional land of Mesopotamia. It is
1915. The British Army’s Indian Expeditionary
Force has been pushing up river since it
secured the customs house at Basra a month
ago. El Juba had been a Turkish camp until
just over a week ago when a force of British
infantry under old campaigner Sir Percival
Wobbler left the Expeditionary Force camp at
91
98
Shaiba, marched upriver and attacked the
camp.
In a fantastic victory won in the old style, Sir
Percival’s men, lacking their machine guns,
pushed the Turks out of the camp in quick
order. Faced with such a determined foe, the
protector of El Juba, Hamid Bey, and most of
his men, were forced to retire to Nu’alla
some ten miles further to the north. The
retreat of this band was little more than blind
panic. However, at Nu’alla they fell in with the
Advance Guard of the Turkish 6th Division,
moving steadily South from Baghdad.
The 6th Division has a fearsome reputation.
Under the leadership of Suleiman Achmid Bey,
otherwise known as “El Rashada”- the
cunning one - the 6th Division has become one
of the best trained units in Mesopotamia and
Persia. Normally billeted in the impressive
Fort El Ma’afa on the Southern outskirts of
Baghdad the Division polices this area of the
lower Juba and its ranks include some
formidable characters. Many of the officers
are from families close to the Sultan himself
and El Rashada is a man of considerable
influence and wealth. He even has his very
own flying machine.

Most recently El Rashada has used his charms
influence on the representatives of the
German Kaiser and this has enabled men of
the 6th to receive some newly imported
German built machine Guns, and instruction
in the use of these new weapons is being
received from a cadre of German officers
attached to the Divisional Staff.
The Flying Ali Baba
S
ir Percival Wobbler, in the meantime,
has been strengthening his position at
El Juba. Without cavalry, Sir Percival
was unable to launch an effective pursuit of
the retiring Turks. Convinced however that
the enemy will not be content to allow him to
sit in their old camp, he has instructed his
men to dig new defences protecting the North
92
99
This is the second in our series of encounters at
the fictional Camp El Juba. The objectives for each
side are simple (and indeed almost the reverse of
the initial scenario). For the Turks, they must drive
the British out of the camp. The British must beat
back any Turkish attack and ensure that their line
of supply Westwards to Shaiba remains intact. The
addition of El Rashada’s own aircraft and the
gunfire of HMS Justice add to the flavour of the
game.
The Table should be set up as shown in the map.
As before, this is not a large game, so can be
played on a large dining table in around two to
three hours. As such it makes a perfect club game.
The trenches around El Juba are not a continuous
system but comprise separate systems, each of
which is large enough to hold a company plus a
machine gun. The green strips represent cultivated
land which affords some cover, but not a lot. Most
of the rest of the ground should count as open
ground, but the area in the immediate vicinity of
the old Turkish trenches counts as Bad Going due
to the poor state of the ground in these areas. As
before, the camp itself has no defensive
capabilities and provides no restriction to
movement or firing.

and North east of the camp, where he plans
to put the machine guns he captured from
Hamid Bey to good use should the Turks
decide to try their hand, as native sources are
suggesting they might .
Wobbler’s men, reinforced by local tribesmen
whose loyalties seem to have switched,
literally overnight to the King, have worked
tirelessly, and have been revitalised by fresh
supplies brought to them by the armed sloop
HMS Justice, which is currently moored
alongside the camp’s rather hastily built jetty.
Yesterday morning Sir Percival was surveying
these latest positions when he heard an
unfamiliar sound. Looking up, he saw a rather
shabby looking flying machine approaching
from the North. Raising his hand to shield his
eyes he watched as the pilot brazenly
swooped low over the camp before turning
back Northwards, hastened on his way by
some pot shots from the sailors onboard the
nearby sloop. “Good God!” exclaimed one
subaltern “It’s Ali Baba!”
But the flying Ali Baba was in fact, no lesser
man than El Rashada himself, taken aloft by a
German aviator to get a first hand view of the
Camp at El Juba. Surveying the land with the
eye of an eagle, the wily warrior began to
draw up a cunning plan that will see the
British dogs ejected from Camp El Juba for
good, and back in Nu’alla he persuades Hamid
Bey over a tray of fresh dates that if they act
in concert, the two of them could be eating
bully beef in El Juba the day after tomorrow…
El Rashada’s Cunning Plan
El Rashada’s plan is simple. Hamid Bey, and
what remains of his original command
augmented with some feisty Marsh arabs, will
93
100
head back to Camp El Juba along the river
road. The thick headed British will surely be
on the lookout for just such a move and their
guard will be directed to an attack from that
direction. So why not give them what they
seek? In the mean time, El Rashada, with his
own men, will circle round through the
swamps to the east of the camp and make a
dawn attack against the British unprotected
flank. With surprise on their side the result
can be nothing short of a complete rout of the
British…
Let Battle Commence
Orders of Battle
British Order of Battle
(Sir Percival’s Camp Defenders)
General Sir Percival Wobbler
Leadership rating : Eton (D6)
1 signals base
th
112 Mahrattas (Havildar Heroes)
4 x companies (each of 4 bases)
th
2/5 Loamshires (Jolly Good Fellows)
4 x companies (each of 4 bases)
1 x captured Turkish MG (Jolly Good Fellows)
1 x Gunboat (HMS Justice) (Saturday Boys)
Naval Depot detachment (Saturday Boys)
3 bases
The British may deploy anywhere within the
general defences of Camp El Juba. They have
‘Hold’ orders. The Naval Depot Detachment
may only be called upon if Turks penetrate
the defence line and may only be used to
defend the camp and jetty area.
 101

Remnants Arab Forces edge. When the combined total reaches

eighteen the rest of his forces appear. They
(Hamid Bey’s Pinning Force)
have attack orders. El Rashada is also able to
Hamid Bey:
make use of the Hun in the Sun card.
Leadership rating: Old Turk D4

Auxiliary Militia Regiment (Pasha Bashers)

(2 companies each of 3 bases) Victory Conditions:

1 x MG’s (Pasha Bashers)

He who holds the camp at the end of the
1 x Arab Guerrillas
game is deemed to be the victor.
8 bases (Damned Sodomites)

Hamid Bey’s force enters the table on turn Cards:

one, and may deploy anywhere on the
northern table east of the river. His men have
This scenario will require the following cards:
engage orders.
British Cards Arab & Turkish Cards
Vanguard of 6th Division Blinds Move Blinds Move
(El Rashada’s Flanking Force) British Commander (x2) Arab Commander (x1)
El Rashada 112th Mahrattas Turkish Commander (x2)
Leadership rating: Young Turk D6-1 2/5th Loamshires Hun in the Sun
1 signals base Hesitant Troops Auxiliary Militia Regt
Stiff Upper Lip Turkish MGs
rd
133 Regiment (Johnny Turk) HMS Justice 133rd Regiment
(3 companies each of 3 bases) Naval Detachment** 136th Regiment
138th Regiment
th
136 Regiment (Johnny Turk) Turkish Delight
(3 companies each of 3 bases) Fleet Footed Arabs
th
138 Regiment (Johnny Turk) Other Cards
(2 companies each of 3 bases) They Don’t like it Up em! Mirage
2 x MG’s (Johnny Turk) Blank Card Water, Water!*
Tea Break
Turkish Lancer Squadron (pasha bashers)
*British ignore the Water, Water card unless
(3 bases) any of their front line trenches are overrun

** The Naval Depot Detachment may only be

On each turn of the Blank Card throw 2d6 and called upon if Turks penetrate the defence
total the number of points. When the line and may only be used to defend the camp
accumulated total reaches twelve El and jetty area
Rashada’s first ‘blind’ appears on the table

94
 102

A last throw of the dice to relieve Kut, 22nd April 1916

By Nick Skinner

T
his scenario for our
WW1 rules “If The Lord
Spares Us” takes us to
the historical action at
Sannaiyat in Mesopotamia on
22nd April 1916. In the boggy
ground alongside the
flooding Tigris a British
Division makes what was to
be its final attempt to break
through the Turkish defences
to relieve Sir Charles
Townshend and his 13,000
men besieged at Kut.

Page 60

T
he campaign in Mesopotamia (modern day
Iraq) began in November 1914 when an
Expeditionary Force of the British Indian
Army was hurried to the shores of the Shatt-al-
Arab waterway in Southern Iraq to protect British
owned oil refineries at Abadan. To begin with
things went well for the Divisional sized British
force under the command of General Delamain.
Resistance offered by the scattered garrisons of the
Turkish 38th Division was light and so the oil
installations were soon secured. Exhibit the poor
co-ordination that satisfied their stereotype in the
eyes of the British, the Turks pulled back,
abandoning Basra and giving the British a firm
supply base for extending their operations.
Desiring to capitalise on their initial successes the
British proceeded to move cautiously up river,
initially to Qurna (Dec 1914) and then, with
reinforcements, again on up the Tigris to Amara
(May 1915). Again, Turkish opposition had been
weak and victories came with a reassuring
frequency. This was in pleasant contrast to
elsewhere. On the Western Front the war was
looking grim, but out east, from the defences of
Amara, the prize of Baghdad glistened. The Turk, it
appeared, was clearly in no state to put up a fight in
Mesopotamia and a rapid advance could bring
glory for the Empire.
And so the die was cast. More reinforcements
arrived and General Sir Charles Townshend at the
head of the 6th (Poona) Division began to leapfrog
his men steadily upstream at the head of the famed
‘Townshend’s Regatta’. By November 1915 the
British were within twenty miles of Baghdad,
outsmarting the Turks along the way by the use of
combined Army and Naval operations. At
Ctesiphon on the 22nd November 1915, the largest
battle of the campaign was waged between two
tired armies. The Turk was beaten, but
Townshend’s losses were so great that he could not
Page 61
103
push on to his prize. In poor supply and health, the
British were forced to retire downstream to Kut-al-
amara, a horseshoe shaped bend in the river about
90 miles upstream from Amara. Turkish troops of
XVIII Corps, buoyed by the salvation of Baghdad
and the British retreat, pushed quickly against
Townshends weary men and by the end of
December the position at Kut was completely
surrounded.
* * * *
I
t was a grim state of affairs. Very grim indeed to
be precise. Desperate to avoid an unparalleled
disaster that could see the worst British
capitulation since Cornwallis’ surrender at
Yorktown in 1781, the British C-in-C in
Mesopotamia, General Sir John Nixon, dispatched
General Sir Fenton Aylmer upriver with the “Tigris
Relief Force”. Aylmer and his hurriedly assembled
force pushed their way along the Tigris, following in
the footsteps of Townshend’s earlier advance from
Amara, fighting actions against the Turkish XIII
corps, which had been pushed down beyond Kut
with the precise aim of preventing any British relief
force from relieving their trapped countrymen.
Aylmer’s men, mindful that every day was essential
in their attempt to break through to Kut, fought
their way boldly upriver, attacking Turkish
positions at Sheikh Sa’ad (6th Jan 1916), the Wadi
(13th Jan 1916), Umm-el-Hannah (21st Jan 1916),
Dujailah Redoubt (8th March 1916). On each
occasion British losses were high, but the Turks
pulled back, receiving reinforcements on the way.
On 12th March General Aylmer was recalled and
General Gorringe took charge. By mid March the
Turks had fallen back to lines at Beit Aissa on the
right bank, and Sannaiyat on the left bank of the
Tigris. Here the British attacked in early April but
the position held firm.
 104

to the edge of the massive and impenetrable

Suwacha Marsh. The Tigris overflowed. Flooding
was widespread and the marsh itself was widening.
In their trenches the men of the 7th (Meerut)
Division watched as the water level in the marsh
visibly rose as strong winds forced the growing
flood waters of the Tigris into their very positions.

But another attempt had to be made. It was

decided that a final attempt to force the
Sannaiyat position would be made in the
morning of the 22nd April. The British planners
decided to attack on the driest part of the 7th
Division front. Even though it was covered in
water it was thought to be only ankle deep and
passable by the two brigades that were to
make the attack, each on a frontage of 300
yards. An artillery bombardment was to
precede the attack. The Turkish position
consisted of three lines of trenches, whilst in
the rear was another short line, the whole

B
y mid April things at Kut were at their
lowest ebb. Supplies, originally estimated to linked by communications trenches. It was
last six weeks, had been eked out for over probable that some of the trenches were
three months. Townshend had somehow been able flooded. In normal circumstances this attack
to hold out for much longer than seemed possible. would not have been attempted, but this was
Attempts to sail supplies to Kut by river through the ignored in the desperate urgency to relieve
Turkish blockade failed. Disease was rife and the Kut. To fail now would be to seal the fate of
men near to starvation. If a breakthrough was to those surrounded further up river.
happen it needed to come now.
It was the last throw of the dice…
But at the Sannaiyat position attack seemed
madness. The Turks held a strong trench line that
stretched from the banks of the Tigris northwards

Page 62
 105

They will fight on for the sake of their colleagues

isolated further upstream.

But they are fighting two enemies. The Turk is a

resolute warrior, but the flood waters of the
Tigris are rising and the river runs deep. As the
snow melts in the mountains hundreds of miles
away the water level steadily increases. Soon
the floods will be at their height, but even in
the past twelve hours the pace of change has
quickened. A change in the wind has pushed
floodwaters closer and closer to your
positions, and overnight men have fought
hard to keep the spread of water under
control. Already it seems likely that those men
charged with attacking on the right of your line will
have a hard time coping with the steadily rising
waters.

Your attack, timed for 0700 will be preceded by an

artillery barrage laid down by Divisional Artillery to
the rear. You may deploy your men anywhere in
your own trench lines (standard arrangement
would be one brigade to the left, one brigade to the
right in a two up, one back formation) In addition,
you may have up to 4 bases at Crofton’s

I
t is 6am on 22nd April 1916. You are Major Observation Post on the right bank of the Tigris.
General G.J. Younghusband, commanding the 7th
(Meerut) Division in its advance up the Tigris as The Turkish position must be seized if the men at
part of the relief column headed for Kut-al-Amara Kut are to be saved. Good Luck and God Save the
and the British troops besieged there. This morning, King.
your Division will attack and seize Turkish
positions on the left bank of the River Tigris at Your forces:
Sannaiyat. It will be the second time this position
Elements of 7th (Meerut) Division:
has been assaulted in the past three weeks.
19th Brigade
Your men are weary. Many of them arrived in Brig General E C Peebles (Eton)
Mesopotamia in January of this year and ever since Unit Strength Type
their arrival the men have been engaged in front Composite Highland Battn* 4coys of 4 bases Jolly Good Fellows
92nd Punjabi Rifles 4coys of 4 bases Havildar Heroes
line activity it some very challenging conditions. 125th Meerut Rifles 3coys of 3 bases Havildar Heroes
Disease and hardship have taken their toll, and your 1 Signals platoon 1 base n/a
*amalgamation of 1st Seaforths and 2nd Black Watch
regular battalions have been badly hit to the extent
that you have been forced to amalgamate them to 21st Brigade
create composite battalions. But the tiredness of Brig General C E Norie (Eton)
your men is nothing compared to the hardships that Unit Strength Type
Composite English Battn* 3coys of 4 bases Saturday Boys
your fellow countrymen are having to bear further 2nd Rajputs 3coys of 3 bases Havildar Heroes
upstream at Kut. General Townshend and his brave 9th Bhopal Infantry 4coys of 4 bases Havildar Heroes
1 Signals platoon 1 base n/a
band have been besieged by Johnny Turk since
*Known as the “Norsets”, an amalgamation of drafts for the 2nd
December. The garrison can barely hold out, and Norfolks and the 2nd Dorsets.
General Lake has informed you that if we cannot
break through the enemy lines in the next few days Attached
Unit Strength Type
that the garrison at Kut will be forced to surrender.
19th MG company 3 bases Saturday Boys
And so your men will fight through their tiredness.

Page 63
 106

Y
ou are Colonel Jemal Ali-Pasha,
commanding the 112th Infantry
regiment. It is 22nd April, 1916. You
are standing ankle deep in mud, not 300
yards from the banks of the River Tigris
near Sannaiyat, Mesopotamia. About 20
miles to the west the British Army is
completely surrounded by the XVIII Corps at
Kut-al-Amara. Your men, part of XIII Corps have
been pushed east to block any attempt to relieve the
beleaguered Englishmen. It is now 0600, and your company commanders
await you in the muddy hole that is your command
Earlier this month your men fought off the most post. You must allocate them to their new positions,
recent British attempt to break through to Kut. positions from which they will, in all probability, be
Now, deployed to the left bank of the Tigris, youyr asked to fight once more before the day is done.
regiment has been tasked with the defence of the
crucial trench system at Sannaiyat. It is a position Your orders are to hold the line and push back any
you have held before, but since you were last here attempted British attack in your sector.
there have been some worrying changes.
Allah be praised.
Firstly, the enemy have inched their line further
forward and seem to have more dept to their 112th Infantry regiment
defences. Additionally, they have obviously brought Colonel Jemal Ali-Pasha (Young Turk)
up more troops to the front line, suggesting that an Unit Strength Type
attack may be imminent. This is consistent with a 1/112th Infantry 3coys of 3 bases Johnny Turks
build up of troops on the opposite bank of the river, 2/112th Infantry 3coys of 3 bases Johnny Turks
MG sections 2 bases Havildar Heroes
where attacks were pressed just last week. Regimental HQ 1 base n/a
Signal Section 1 base n/a
But the enemies activities are nothing compared to
the battle your men are fighting against the
conditions. The floodwaters are rising fast.
Throughout the Turkish positions trenches are
becoming filled with floodwater. The Suwacha
marsh is getting larger, and already large sections of
entrenchments have been made untenable. The
men have fought hard to stem this flow but to no
avail.

Yesterday a large section of your front two trench

positions had to be vacated, and conditions along
the remaining section of the front line remain so
bad that men have had to be pulled back, leaving
only a picket to man the forward positions.

Page 64

T
he overwhelming impression of this battle is
the slog of fighting through flooded ground.
The Impassable Terrain Card should be
included in the pack, and all movement counts as
bad going. The flooding is so bad that no movement
should be allowed on the right hand half of the line.
On the British left, a flooded area extends inwards
from the river for about 500yrds (about 8 inches).
This should leave a dry ‘gap’ in the middle of the
table which extends for about 500 yards (8”). It is
through this gap that the British will have to assault.
Neither side should be aware of this fact at the start
of the game.
The Turks may have no more than 4 bases of
infantry deployed in their first two trench lines (the
remainder having been pulled back to evade the
artillery and the flooding. These troops may only be
deployed in the southern half (ie less badly flooded)
area of the table. The remaining troops may begin in
the rear supply trenches as desired by the Turkish
Commander.
At the very last moment, and just before the first
card is turned, the British player should be handed
the following message from the unit occupying his
right front:
Page 65
107
“Sir, Rising floodwaters moving in
from the marsh make the ground to
our right front impassable and I
regret that we cannot advance.
Furthermore, the rising water levels
have made our foremost defensive
line untenable and will need to be
abandoned. We are falling back to
our second line at once.”
This order affects all British troops in the right hand
half of the British Positions.
Once the British occupy the second Turkish line the
blank card can be used to announce the arrival of
Turkish reinforcements. Historically, the turks
attacked on both sides of the river, so when the
blank card is turned roll a d6 and consult the table
below:
D6 score Result
1-3 No reinforcements
4 One company of infantry
5 Two companies of infantry
6 Roll again:
1-3 1 x MG
4-5: 1 company
6: 2 companies
Note: A HQ group will arrive with each full battalion (ie 3
companies)
All Turkish reinforcements will arrive from
Western table edge, along the communications
trench.
 108

1 19th Brigade launches its assault at

0700hrs under cover of creeping
barrage. The attack is spearheaded
by the Scots and the 92nd Punjabis.

2 On the right the 21st Brigade

report that they are unable to
attack due to the flooded ground.

3 The attack is supported by MG fire from across the Tigris. This helps to suppress enemy
movements in the support trenches as the 19th push forward. The ground proves to be much wetter
than was initially reckoned, and the men are funnelled into a central area.

4 There is some accurate MG fire from the extreme right of the Turkish line, but somehow the 19 th
Brigade make it to the enemies first trench line, although some troops struggle through chest high
muddy waters. They find the enemy front trench is flooded. Reorganising quickly as best they can
amidst the mud, they push on to the second line, which is also flooded and mainly unoccupied.

5 The barrage lifted, and despite the MG fire from across the river, Turkish overall commander
Khalil Pasha commits his men to an all out counter attack from the support trenches, and the 19 th
Brigade are forced back after a bloody battle. The Turks push on, but no ground can be gained.
Battle also rages across the river, where the Turks push against 8th Brigade without success.

AFTERMATH

By nightfall on the 22nd the lines were unchanged. At Sannaiyat the rising floodwaters claimed the lives
of many wounded. Rifles were so clagged up in mud that they would no longer work. One the right bank,
at Beit Aissa, the Turks attacked through the night, eight times coming onto the British front lines and
eight times being beaten back. No further attempt to relieve Kut could be contemplated. The British
could do no more. The Tigris Relief Corps had lost over 10,000men in three weeks, and since January
had lost more men than there were besieged at Kut. The siege of Kut-al-Amara lasted 147 days, before
the 11,800 British and Indian troops inside the garrison town finally surrendered on 29 April 1916. Of
these 4,250 died either on their way to captivity or in the camps that awaited them.

Read the full and original transcript of Lord Kitchener’s

report to the House of Lords announcing the fall of Kut online at the National Archives here:
http://www.nationalarchives.gov.uk/pathways/firstworldwar/battles/p_kut.htm

Page 66

Cavalry and Armour Cooperation in
“Through the Mud and the Blood” Part Two
Following the successes of the Royal Tank Corps
(“RTC”) at Cambrai, a number of RTC officers,
some former cavalrymen, anticipated that a
powerful frontal attack against German lines
could be made by masses of tanks, leading to a
deep penetration of German defences and
culminating in British tanks ravaging German
supply lines and reserve trenches. It was
optimistically proposed that the cavalry would
accompany such a bold penetration, with Lt-
Colonel J.F.C. Fuller first suggesting the
combination of Whippets and cavalry formations
to the British General Staff.
A Cavalry Corps order from 10 November 1917,
predating Cambrai, makes reference to a number
of these aspirations. While acknowledging that
the usefulness of tanks to cavalry formations is
“very great”, there is an emphasis of the relative
merits of the different forces:
“Cavalry must not wait for tanks, but
must push on. They are really moving
MGs heavily armed, and though they have
not the pace of Armoured Motors they
should be used on the same principle.”
Page 114
109
The order concludes, repeating the mantra of
the earlier lessons from earlier campaigns in
1917, that:
“Therefore cavalry use their mobility to
get around the flanks of every village or
position held by the enemy, while tanks
move straight on it.”
Accordingly, while the opportunity for
coordinated action between with tanks and
cavalry was acknowledged by contemporaries,
the process of realising these opportunities
would be challenging. First, there were
practical problems: the Whippet was capable of
8 mph in good going, far slower than even large
cavalry formations. Second, no British tank of
the time was capable of achieving a depth of
penetration in German rear areas which could
match the potential geographical range of the
cavalry. Finally, a number of tactical problems
militated against simple forms of cooperation.
When under fire cavalry instinctively galloped
forward leaving the tanks behind. This situation
was standard practice for the cavalry, which
used its inherent mobility to minimise casualties,
but left the slowly manoeuvring tanks to face the
bulk of German defensive fire which was
increasingly supplemented by field artillery firing
over open sights and purpose designed anti-tank
artillery and anti-tank rifles.

While cavalry would successfully co-operate with
tanks where the terrain was good and there was
adequate room to manoeuvre, the circumstances
of the battlefields of 1918 made successful
collaborations challenging to achieve. To
illustrate this, my second scenario in this
Special, deals with a difficult collaboration on
the “Black Day of the German Army”.
Le Bois de Cayeaux
8th August 1918
To the west of Amiens, British forces are tearing
through German defensive lines and attempting
to cause havoc in rear locations and interdict
German supply columns.
British Briefing One
You are Captain Octavius Wooton of “B”
Squadron, 7th Dragoon Guards, part of the 7th
Cavalry Brigade closing on German defensive
positions to the east of Le Hamel, about 20 miles
east of Amiens. So far today has been a ripping
success and the Boche formations seem to either
be in flight or unable, except in one of two
circumstances, to resist the weight of the Allied
advance. You remember the briefing from the
previous day very clearly that “The Mission of
the Cavalry Corps on “Z” Day will be to secure
the line of the outer Amiens defences and hold
it until relieved by infantry of the Canadian
Corps”. This is the chance you have been
waiting for....a breakthrough, fine weather,
rolling down-land without extensive wire and
your famous cavalry regiment integrated firmly
into the heart of the battle. This won’t be
another Somme where you waited for weeks in
the mud and rain for the breakthrough which
never came....
You have been advancing rapidly on the small
French village of Beaucourt-en-Santerre. While
the village is in sight, the enemy are present in
force. Troopers in the Canadian cavalry
regiment to your right have been forced to
dismount instead of advancing on the village.
From your saddle you can see a small network of
woods and copses in front of you, the largest
wood being the Bois de Cayeaux. The woodland
is crowded with German infantry, although they
appear to be in some disarray.
Your regimental commander, Lt-Colonel
Paterson* gallops up and indicates with a
dramatic sweep of his hand a hill crest and,
beyond it, a small copse in front of the Bois de
Cayeaux. He orders you to lead a troop of your
regiment to capture the copse and the Bois de
Cayeaux and secure a flank route through to the
rear of Beaucourt village. Clanking behind him
you can see 12 of the new Whippet tanks in a
Page 115
110
cloud of dusk. You know that these light tanks
have been attached to the 7th Cavalry brigade.
Lt-Colonel Paterson tells you to gallop over to
the Tank Corps Officer in the lead Whippet with
an express order for him to accompany your
attack on the Bois de Cayeaux.
You feel nervousness in your stomach as you
remember the Cavalry Corps’ standing orders
regarding co-operation with tanks from last year.
Will these orders work better with the Whippets
than with the lumbering Mark IVs? There’s no
time for those sorts of idle thoughts now – it’s
time for your trumpeter to rally your troopers
and advance to victory!
British Briefing Two
You are First Lieutenant Montague de Vere, late
of the 17th Lancers and now of “H” Company, 4th
Battalion, Royal Tank Corps. You transferred
from the 17th Lancers to the Royal Tank Corps in
January 1918, part of the “Big Push” to develop
tactical co-operation between the tanks and the
cavalry. You remember “Boney” Fuller’s droning
lectures on the importance of tanks keeping up
with the cavalry in the now-fashionable
“combined arms operations”. You smile
momentarily as you remember how you used to
be sceptical about the tanks’ abilities, but now
realise that the clanking steel monster you’re
sitting inside could just be the future of
warfare.....unlike the cavalry mounted on
horseback. If only you could get to the action
before the fighting was over. Today might just
be your chance to do that.
So far today has been a good success and the
Boche formations seem to either be in flight or
unable, except in one of two circumstances, to
resist the weight of the Allied advance to the
west of Amiens. You cast an eye through the
observation slips of the Whippet to the swirl of
horsemen from your old regiment, the 17th
Lancers, and the 7th Dragoon Guards and
Iniskillings (6th Dragoon Guards) close by “H”
Company. You have been advancing rapidly on
the small French village of Beaucourt, although
as soon as the village has been reached, the
Canadian Cavalry on your right flank have been
forced to dismount.
From your tank you can see a small network of
woods and copses in front of you lying to the
north of Beaucourt, the largest wood being the
Bois de Cayeaux. The woodland is crowded with
German infantry in some disarray.
A red-faced Captain from the 7th Dragoon Guards
gallops up to your Whippet and indicates with a
dramatic sweep of his hand a hill line crest and a
small copse in front of the Bois de Cayeaux. He
says he’s been ordered to take the copse (more
dramatic gestures) and clear the enemy form the

Bois de Cayeaux and orders you to bring three
Whippets to assist him and secure a flank route
through to the rear of Beaucourt village.
You are about to synchronise watches when his
trumpeter blows a deafening tune and in swirl of
dust and more dramatic cries the Captain and his
trumpeter are gone, galloping towards their
Squadrons reined in towards direction of the
small copse and the Bois de Cayeaux. After
cursing loudly at the beau sabreur (were you
that arrogant as a cavalryman?) you start to feel
nervousness in your stomach as you remember
the Cavalry Corps’ standing orders for co-
operating with tanks from last year. You hope
that the Captain of the 7th Dragoon Guards
remembers the specific instructions in standing
orders for the “donkey wallopers” to stay out of
the way of the tanks – that seems only right
considering that the tanks are now the “Stars of
the Show”. With another curse, you tap the
shoulder of your driver and shout above the noise
of the engine to point the tank in the direction
of the Bois de Cayeaux while you indicate for
two of the Whippets to follow you.
British and Canadian Forces
th
First Troop, “A” Squadron, 7 Dragoon Guards,
7th Cavalry Brigade: 28 troopers and one
Hotchkiss automatic rifle with a team of two
Bois de
Cayeaux
The Copse
Page 116
111
troopers, 5 Big Men (Captain Octavius Wooton
(status III), Warrant Officer Oakham (status II),
Corporal Wood (status II), Corporal Beech (status
I), Corporal Lyme (status I)). 6 of the troopers
carry hand grenades. All troopers carry a rifle
and sword. Captain Wooton can be accompanied
by a regimental trumpeter (armed as a
trumpeter).
Three Whippet light tanks - “H” Company, 4th
Battalion, Royal Tank Corps – each with a crew of
four tankers plus a Big Man (First Lieutenant
Montague de Vere (Status III), Warrant Officer
Hargreaves (status II) and Corporal Raymond
Norham (status I)).
2nd Platoon, “A” Company, 1st battalion,
Newfoundland Regiment (St. John’s) of 36 men
(comprising a Lewis gun team of nine men, a
bombing section of 9 men, 9 rifle grenadiers and
9 riflemen) and five Big Men (Warrant Officer Bill
Norwood (status III), Sergeant Mackenzie (status
II), Corporal Selwyn (status II), Lance Corporal
Ashburton (status I) and Lance Corporal Fairlie
(status I)).
All British ranks have reasonable morale and are
experienced regulars. The British begin the
game on Blinds on the western table edge.
Bois de
Beaucourt

German Briefing
You are Leutnant Kurt Thalmann and today is not
going well. Die Engländer have broken in all
along the front line and from your position in the
Bois de Cayeaux you can see the British tanks
advancing, accompanied by British Cavalry. Your
orders are to hold the Bois de Cayeaux, thereby
preventing the British outflanking the village of
Beaucourt to the south. You consider that the
best way to do this might be to station some of
your troops in the copse to the west of the Bois
de Cayeaux. Your forces are battle ragged, with
brittle morale after seeing the stream of broken
German units flooding back from Hamel during
the course of the morning. Your only hope is to
stop the lead units of the British forces in their
tracks, and defend the line of woods for as long
as your ammunition holds out. Gott strafe
England!
German Forces
First Platoon, 376th Infantry Regiment of 109th
Division - under-strength platoon, 28 riflemen in
four sections, 5 Big Men (Leutnant Kurt Thalmann
(Status III), VizeFeldwebel Schneider (Status II),
Sergeant Fleischessen (Status II), Gefreiter
Rabinowicz (Status I), Gefreiter Grüber (Status
I)). 1d6 of the riflemen have hand grenades.
Second Platoon - half strength platoon, 9
riflemen and 7 bombers in two sections, 3 Big
Men (Unteroffizier Kleist (Status II), Gefreiter
König (Status I), Gefreiter Bek (Status I)). One
sniper. Two MG08/15s and one tripod mounted
MG 08, each with a three man team including a
Status I Gefreiter (each of the MGs has 4 bursts
worth of armour piercing ammunition) One 13.2
mm AT rifle with a crew of two men (no Big
Man).
1D4 German bombers can hastily construct
Geballte Ladung (being the “concentration
charges” comprising a bundle of stick grenades)
to use against the Whippets. All German ranks
have reasonable morale and are experienced
regulars. However, each German section has a
50% chance of 1D4 points of “shock” at the start
of the game, reflecting the historical disarray of
these units at the commencement of the
Cavalry’s advance.
The Germans may deploy anywhere in the woods
to the east of the road but do not have any
defensive positions as they have not had
sufficient time to construct any.
Terrain and Weather
It’s about 2pm in the afternoon, the weather is
good and the terrain is gently undulating
downland. Before the Bois de Cayeaux is a copse
of a reasonable size. The trees in the Bois de
Cayeaux and the copse are not yet entirely shell-
Page 117
112
shattered (about 50% shattered would seem
about right). A hill line crest runs north-south to
the west of the Copse. The crest obscures vision
and direct fire. The hamlet of Cayeaux is a
couple of ruined houses. German forces cannot
start the game in the hamlet of Cayeaux, but can
deploy in any of the wooded areas on the Map.
British and Canadian forces deploy as shown on
the Map.
Victory Conditions
The British Player with Captain Octavius Wooton
wins when the cavalry are primarily responsible
for removing the German player from the Copse
(at the Umpire’s discretion). The British Player
with First Lieutenant Montague de Vere wins if
the Whippets are primarily responsible for
removing the German player from the Copse
(again at the Umpire’s discretion). An overall
British victory requires both the copse to be
entirely cleared of German forces and the Bois
de Cayeaux to be substantially clear of unbroken
German forces. Umpire’s decision to be final as
regards the extent of “substantial” in this
context. Any other overall result is a German
victory.
Cards
British German
Big Men Big Men
British Blinds German Blinds
Command Initiative I Command Initiative I
x2 x2
Command Initiative II Command Initiative II
x2 x1
Command Initiative III Command Initiative III
x1 x1
Whippet Bonus German Sniper
Whippet Breakdown German Battlefield
Fatigue***
Tally Ho! x1 German AT Rifle
British Friction Common
Rally Time for a Snifter
*** German Battlefield Fatigue requires that
thenextGermanunitactivatedbyaGermanBig
ManfollowingtheturnofthisCardwillsufferan
additional one point of “shock” at the start of
that unit’s move, representing the increasing
exhaustion and demoralisation of German forces
duringtheafternoonof8August1918
Umpires Notes
The main difficulty for the British forces will be
the co-ordination of the cavalry and the
Whippets. Unlike in the scenario at Villers
Faucon, the Whippets move at a far slower speed
than the cavalry, creating the risk that the
German defender can defeat the British attack in
two stages by eliminating the cavalry and then

slow down the tanks. This was a historical
problem, and is a challenging one for the British
players to solve.
The British cavalry should be given some
advantages, mainly relating to their speed of
deployment and the ability of their officers to
urge the cavalry troopers to heroic action. By
contrast, the addition of the British Friction card
will serve to represent the difficulties in
communications between the British forces.
The German player faces a tough decision
regarding the location of his forces. Historically,
the Copse appears to have been held by at least
one machine gun. The option of having a
machine gun firing in a sustained fire role from
the Bois de Beaucourt is also an attractive one
for the German player.
[Note] The Umpire may well also be minded to
recreate some of the friction between British
cavalry officers (represented in this scenario by
Captain Wooton) and RTC officers (represented
by Lieutenant de Vere).  This friction appears to
havepersisteddespitethesecondmentofcavalry
officers to the RTC before the battle of Amiens.
While this friction is partly present in the
conflicting victory conditions for the British
Players, it may also be something which the
Umpire may like to have the British Players role
play if appropriate. There are various devices
whichcanbeusedinthisregard,includinggiving
the British Players their briefings separately and
spreading a little disinformation.  My experience
with roleplaying in tabletop wargames is that a
little goes a long way, and I suggest that the
Umpire uses his discretion in this aspect of the
game.
Historical Outcome
The commander of the leading squadron of the
7th Dragoon Guards grasped that the small copse
south of the Bois de Cayeaux was the key to the
German defensive line and charged, somewhat
impetuously, off the Cayeaux ridge line, across
the down-land and into the copse, capturing a
number of German machine guns, some prisoners
and the copse itself. A second squadron of the
7th Dragoon Guards replicated the charge by
closing on the Bois de Cayeaux itself, contacting
the enemy in the woods, before being forced to
withdraw owing to a heavy machine gun cross-
fire from the Bois de Beaucort.
In his later written review of the action, Lt-
Colonel Paterson observed that the German
machine gunners in the Bois de Cayeaux had
been unable to bring fire effectively on cavalry
Page 118
113
charging towards until the last 60 yards of the
charge, by which time it was too late to inflict
material casualties. Paterson was also dismissive
of the efforts of the Whippets which had failed
to keep up with the cavalry. The entry of the
cavalry into the wood had the same effect as the
“disturbance of an ant heap”. Had the Whippets
kept pace with the 7th Dragoon Guards, they may
have provided effective covering fire and
possibly put some of the German machine guns
out of action in the woodlands. The Marquis of
Anglesey notes that the Whippets’ failure to
provide that support resulted in a “certain
amount of recrimination” after the action
although Lt-Colonel JFC Fuller, never a man to
be backward with his views, suggested abrasively
that the Whippets advancing alone could have
cleared the woods effectively with the cavalry
being relegated to a subordinate role.
With the benefit of hindsight, recent historians
have suggested that better results could have
been achieved by advancing the Whippets first,
with the cavalry advance following later.
Whether the beau sabreurs of the 7th Dragoon
Guards would have waited for the Whippets to
be fully engaged on their own terms is a question
you will need to address on the tabletop.
The German defenders of the Bois de Cayeaux,
however, were more complimentary of the
British cavalry’s attack than “Boney” Fuller. Dr.
David Kenyon cites an example of one German
officer, explaining why he had surrendered
saying “Look, Look” and after pointing around
the country “and wherever you look you see
British cavalry”.§
§ The majority of the quotations used in this
article can be found in either the Marquis
of Anglesey’s “History of the British
Cavalry: Volume VIII – The Western Front
1915-1918” or Dr. David Kenyon’s “British
Cavalry on the Western Front”, both of
which are excellent and invaluable
resources for the Great War gamer
interested in fielding British Cavalry on the
tabletop. Dr. Kenyon’s Ph.D. thesis can be
found online from Cranfield University at:
https://dspace.lib.cranfield.ac.uk/bitstream/18
26/3032/1/D%20Kenyon%20Thesis%20corrected.p
df
I’d also like to say a very public “thank you” to
both Robert Dunlop and David Kenyon who
generously provided some really excellent
comments on an earlier draft of the two articles
I have written for this Special – thanks again,
Robert and David
 114

“At the present time I think our action should take the form of 1. Winter ‘sports’ or raids
continued into the Spring. 2. Wearing out fight similar to 1 but on a larger scale at many points
along the whole front”. Douglas Haig’s Diary 14th January 1916

Several British contingents claim to have invented trench raids in the early days of the Great War, and
frankly all such claims must be considered somewhat spurious as troops had been raiding enemy outposts
since time immemorial, and the introduction of field fortifications merely added an extra dimension to
that. Nevertheless it was clear that very soon after the introduction of trenches in late 1914 the practice
of paying an unexpected visit upon ones neighbours became the normal modus operandi.

It was believed that control of No-Man’s-Land through vigorous patrolling established a moral superiority
over the enemy, that a constant raiding of his positions would not only shake his resolve, but also provide
valuable intelligence through the seizing of prisoners or documents. Later it was recognised that such
raids could be instrumental in knocking out key enemy positions, or even be used as a precursor to a
larger attack, a small force snatching a length of enemy trench prior to being reinforced and the line then
held. For the British the trench raid also provided a real opportunity to expose their largely untrained
armies to the rigours of combat without risking a major offensive with men as yet unfit for purpose. As
such the trench raid became a major feature of the Great War and what is more gaming such an action
can provide a diverting and amusing game with a limited number of figures and terrain; ideal for some
winter sport over the festive period.

What follows is a fun game designed to bolt on to the main Through the Mud and the Blood rules, but
with some added tension and fun.

What will I Need?

This is a quick and fun game designed to be played in about an hour to an hour and a half. It would be an
ideal starting point for someone starting out collecting their figures and terrain for the Great War.

¾ A copy of Mud & Blood is essential as we use all of the main rules from there.
¾ A Mud & Blood Game Deck
¾ About forty figures for both sides
¾ A 4’ by 4’ square of terrain with No-Man’s-Land on one half and a trench network on the other.
¾ A set of “Topping Ruses” cards (see below)
¾ A set of German objective markers (see below)
¾ Some dice

All of the main rules apply with the exception that we start the game with all of the British figures on the
table, no Blinds are used. The following add-ons are then used. These rules are written for a British
force, to provide details for all nationalities would take up a daft amount of space in this Special, however
a single brain cell should suffice to allow conversion to other nationalities.

Page 4
 115

The Game Plan

The British player begins the game by planning his raid. He needs to first check what his mission is by
checking the planned missions on the C.O.’s blackboard. Roll a dice to see which mission he gives you.

Now check below to see what that mission entails.

Prisoner Snatch
The British mission is to cross the line and seize a German prisoner, ideally
an officer or NCO, and any documents that can be had. You should specifically
target the enemy Command Dug-Out.
Bunker Demo.
That MG post is a bally nuisance; it is your job to take it out. The player
must destroy the MG position with an explosive charge.

Recce Mission
You have just been posted to this area and the Major you relieved was a fool
who could tell you nothing of the Boche set up. You must now conduct a recce
identifying at least five enemy position markers
before withdrawing. You get no intelligence roll.
The Big Bang

For a jolly jape you must nip across the lines and blow up the Boche
ammunition magazine. That should shake them up!

Get Carter!
Captain Carter has been captured while patrolling No-Mans-Land, you must get
him back alive, and fast. You suspect that the Boche will have him in their
command dug-out.

Peaceful
Penetration
You are being sent forward to get into the enemy’s front line trench and hold
on to it. Once you have seized 12” of front line trench you must send up a
flare and reinforcements will be sent across to secure your gains.


Page 5
 116

Team Selection
The British player now rolls a D6 on the following table to see what unit he is building his raiding force
around.
Dice Force
1 One five man Lewis Gun team.
2 Four bombers
3 Four trench cleaners, one with a trench broom.
4 Two Engineers, each with a roll of French wire.
5 A five man covering party with a Vickers HMG that will deploy on your
base line to provide fire support.
6 Artillery support. On your flare signal the artillery will fire four turns of
fire onto a 12” square area of the board. No casualties will be caused by
this fire, but nothing may move in this area during that time. The fire
arrives immediately and continues until the fourth Snifter card.

In addition to this nucleus the British player may select 24 men to undertake the raid. These may be any
mix of bombers, riflemen, or rifle bombers he wishes and one Lewis gun. The British have three Big Men
available to command this force, one Status III, one Status II and one Status I. The player may add up to
two further Big Men but will lose one of his 24 men for each Status level he chooses for these. So, for
example, a player choosing two additional Status IV Big Men will lose eight men, taking only 16 men with
him. Without doubt an unwise selection! All the raiders are Veterans with Good morale.

A Safe Pair of Hands

While the British player makes his preparation, the defender must also get his force ready, albeit in a
different fashion. The German player must place eight Position Markers face down on the table within his
network of trenches. These must be located in the general areas indicated below, and none may be
within 6” of another marker or within 6” of the table edge. These represent the following:

¾ Three sentry posts. These must be in the front line trench. These are the men who you are
reliant upon to raise the alarm if the British attack.
¾ Two troop dug-outs. These are where your men are sheltering. They must be in or within 6” of
the front line trench. Each one contains a Big Man (Status I) and 1D6+4 riflemen. Don’t dice for
these yet! These troops are Regulars with Reasonable morale.
¾ One Command dug-out. This is where your force commanders, two Big Men (a Leutnant Status III
and Feldwebel II) are based. It must be in the communication trench.
¾ One munitions store.
¾ One prepared MG position with five men in a bunker below ground. This may be anywhere on the
table within the German deployment area (see below).
¾ Two blank cards. These represent nothing but are a ruse to confuse the Engländer

In addition to the above Position Markers the German player must select two locations on his rear base
line from which his reinforcements will arrive should the alarm reach that level. Off table there is a force
of Eingreiftruppen made up of 3D6+16 men of whom 1D6+6 are bombers, 1D6+2 are trench cleaners and
the rest riflemen. These are commanded by two Status II Big Men. Once again do not dice to see the
exact numbers yet, it’s more fun to do that during the game itself. These are Regulars with Good morale.
The Germans may also select three sections of wire upon which to hang tin cans or the likes in order to
serve as an early warning system.

Page 6
 117

Teeing Up
Before the game begins check that you have everything you need. Firstly the table should look a bit like
this.

By now the British should have their forces assembled and the German Position Markers should be on the
table in their defensive zone. To make up the Game Deck you’ll need one card per Big Man, the Snifter
card, a few Command Initiative cards, Levels I, II and III for the British and Levels I and II for the Germans,
a Machine Gun support unit card and three Sentry cards for the Germans. Depending on the British
mission you may need a BANG card and/or a British Machine Gun support Unit card. You don’t need any
Blinds cards as we will see.

In addition the British will need to select three “Topping Ruses” cards from a small deck made up as
below. These may be played at any point during the game, being surrendered as soon as they have been
played.

Topping Number
Ruse Effect of cards
British troops in the adjacent sector stage a diversion with lots of noise and
Chinese
smoke. This may be played at the start of any turn and means that the first two 2
Attack
German sentry cards are ignored for that turn only.
Corporal Piles’ amazing rat impersonations have tricked a sentry into believing
Verdammt
that all he has seen is a fat rat on the prowl for dinner. One successful German 2
Ratten!
spotting attempt is cancelled.
Wir sind Thank Heavens Lieutenant Carruthers mastered the beastly Hun tongue at Eton!
2
Freunde! His timely intervention stops one German Group from firing
A stray flare messes up the night vision of one German Big Man, for a moment he
Blinded by
is unable to issue effective orders. Played at any point in a turn, the next 2
the light
German Big Man card dealt in that turn is ignored.
Failed ruse This card is useless. It does not bode well for your raid. 2

Page 7
 118

The Full SP
Immediately before the game begins the British player rolls a D6. The number of pips shown is the level
of knowledge that he has regarding the German position. This is represented by the turning over of the
German player’s Position Markers. For the first pip on the dice the British player selects which marker he
would like to see revealed, this is then turned over by the German player. If this is a sentry then the
appropriate figure is placed on the table and the marker removed, all other markers are left face up on
the table. For the next pip the German player decides which marker he will turn over, repeating the
above. The players then take turns, the British first, followed by the German, to reveal the markers up to
the number shown on the dice. For example if the dice roll was 3 then the choices would be British,
German and then British again.

In addition to the above knowledge the British have cleared three gaps in the wire that they may use to
advance on the German positions. This allows them to move without hindrance at those points unless any
of these sections has been alarmed by the Germans, in which case see the section below..

Kicking Off
The British start the game with all of their men deployed on the table on their entry edge. It is dark but
we are not using Blinds. The initial stages of the game will see the British attempting to cross No-Man’s-
Land with the German sentries attempting to spot them. They attempt this whenever a Sentry card is
dealt, the German player choosing which order the sentries spot in each turn. As this is night-time it is
assumed that the German player can only spot a British unit that has moved already in the current turn
and that a successful spot represents a fleeting glance of “something” in No-Man’s-Land rather than
actually identifying the British units straight away.

In order to raise the alarm the Germans need to accumulate “Whistle Blowing” points. These may be
gained by several means, as follows:

¾ A successful spot by a sentry will gain the German player two Whistle Blowing points
¾ A successful spot by a Big Man will gain the German player three Whistle Blowing points
¾ A senior Big Man using all of his Command Initiative once the alarm has been raised (14 points or
more) will gain the German player four Whistle Blowing points
¾ Each time a British or German Group fires will add four Whistle Blowing points
¾ A close combat will add four whistle blowing points

As the number of Whistle Blowing points accumulates the German forces will begin to activate. This
occurs as follows:

Total Event
10 The Big Men in the Command dug-out have their cards added to the Game Deck. The
Snifter card is also added.
14 General Alarm. The British have been seen and may be fired on. One Junior NCO card
is added to the deck
15 One junior NCO card is added to the deck
17 The MG support weapon card is added to the deck
24 The Eingreiftruppen Big Men are added to the deck. They enter the table on the rear
edge when it is dealt. The Sentry cards are removed from the Game Deck with any
remaining sentries being moved to join the nearest friendly unit immediately.

Special Rules
OVERPOWERING SENTRIES
If the British raiders make contact with a sentry, spotted or unspotted, before the Whistle Blowing total
reaches 14 then both side will roll a D6 to see if the sentry raises the alarm. If the Germans roll higher
than the British then the sentry raises the alarm and adds three Whistle Blowing points to the total. If the
British roll higher then the sentry was overpowered before he could raise the alarm. If a draw occurs roll
again immediately. If a draw occurs three times then the sentry raises the alarm and is removed from
play.

If the British make contact with a sentry after the General Alarm has been raised then the sentry will
simply run off as he sees them coming and join the nearest friendly unit. Simply move the figure to that
unit immediately.

Page 8
 119

When a sentry is removed from the game the three sentry cards still remain in the Deck, however the
remaining sentries will only spot a maximum of once each in a turn. If the missing sentry’s card is dealt
then one Whistle Blowing point is added to the total.

FALSE ALARMS
Whilst the German player is keen to raise the number of Whistle Blowing points the British will be keen to
keep the total low. Prior to the General Alarm being raised (14 Whistle Blowing points) a British Big Man
who is still in No-Man’s-Land may use all of his Command Initiative to reduce the Whistle Blowing points
total by one. This represents him keeping his men quiet and stationary, thereby lulling the Germans into
a false sense of security.

Winning the Game

The Germans win the game if the British fail to achieve their objective. For the British the following
conditions apply.

1. Prisoner Snatch. The British must seize the German command bunker for one Big Man to spend
one entire turn in there. They must also take one prisoner, of any rank (bonus buns for an enemy
Big Man). Any prisoners taken in this (or any other scenario) must be taken back under guard
immediately.
2. Bunker Demolition. Blow up the MG post. Setting a charge is done by a Big Man (or Engineer if
present), and takes on turn stationary. Add a BANG card to the deck at the start of the next turn,
on the second turn of the BANG card the MG post explodes, causing one hit on any men within 6”.
Roll as if in the open for damage.
3. Recce Mission. Identify at least five enemy posts before withdrawing.
4. The Big Bang. Blow up a Boche ammunition dump. Find the ammunition then follow the steps
outlined above for bunker demolition except that the magazine now explodes on the fourth turn
of the BANG card and causes two hits on anyone within 18”.
5. Get Carter! Captain Carter is being held in chains and a French maid’s outfit in the German
command dug-out; Lord knows what beastly plans the Boche had for him! He will be freed by any
Big Man spending one whole turn in the bunker.
6. Peaceful Penetration. Once you have secured an 18” frontage of front line trench then the senior
Big Man may use one Initiative to send up a flare. This will add four Whistle Blowing points to the
total, but it will also start the countdown to winning the game. On each subsequent Snifter card a
D6 will be rolled and a tally kept of the total. Once the total reaches 30 reinforcements have
arrived and the game is won.

Top Tips
We have had great fun with Winter Sports on Lard Island; every game we have played has resulted in a
different situation and has been a close run thing. Even if the British get into the trench largely unseen it
is only a matter of time before the alarm is sounded. For the British they need to press on regardless of
early losses, they must achieve their objective speedily in order to make their escape. Sometimes
achieving the initial objective is simple, but withdrawing to safety is another matter altogether. The
Germans should attempt to delay the British with their front line troops and the co-ordinate their counter
attack to pick off isolated British units, making the most of their cohesion against an enemy likely to have
suffered some losses.

Page 9

Campaigning with the Tank Corps 1917 style
“In the Third Battle of Ypres, the reputation of theTank Corps was almost destroyed”
Major William Watson, “D” Battalion, Tank Corps
One of the things which attracted me to
wargaming the Great War was the chance to use
the earliest tanks on the table top. ‘Landships’,
the “Devil’s Chariots”, the “New Excalibur”: the
first descriptions of the tanks heralded the
promise of a dramatic battlefield revolution. My
first thought was to try and recreate the piercing
of the Siegfried Stellungen at Cambrai, the Tank
Corps’ triumph at the battle of Amiens in 1918,
and the mercurial exploits of Whippet light tanks
taking on whole battalions of infantry. Quite a
few of these actions we’ve played out at Lard
Island in the past couple of years using “Through
the Mud and the Blood”, and hugely enjoyable
they have been.
However, the more I found out about the early
tanks, the more I started to become intrigued by
the far darker, but no less dramatic, history of
the Tank Corps during 1917 before the
triumphant days of the battle of Cambrai. The
grim battles of 1917 were far from the wild
exploits of Whippets and “Plan 1919”. These
were the days at Bullecourt in April 1917 when
“the tanks were silhouetted against the snow,
and the enemy gunners did not miss”. These
were the times when the Tank Corps “left behind
two or three hundred derelict tanks sinking by
degrees into the mud” at the third battle of
Ypres. And these were the dark days of fighting
in the villages surrounding Cambrai when tanks
without close infantry support were “shot to
pieces” in “many fruitless assaults”.
So, as a counterpoint to recreating the triumphs
of the Tank Corps, this article looks at the
difficult, untested, and frequently downright
terrifying roads down which the early tank crews
passed in 1917, and offers some scenarios in
which their journey can be recreated in
miniature.
Page 87
120
The Devils’ Chariots
“There were no tank tactics when I joined; the
only tactic was to get your tank and drive it
towards the enemy. The infantry with any luck
would follow you”.
Major Mark Dillon, “B” Battalion, Tank Corps
Tactics:
By 1917 the argument advanced by the early
proponents of the tank regarding using the entire
tank force in a single grand assault, achieving
overwhelming force and strategic surprise, had
been lost. Tanks were being used in 1916 and
early 1917 on a limited tactical scale. The initial
idea, set out in the grandly titled “Preliminary
Notes on the Tactical Employment of Tank
(Provisional)” was that: “Each tank attack will
be a definite operation against a limited
objective allotted to a selected number of tanks
and a selected body of infantry, all under one
commander. In certain cases a pair of tanks
supported by a platoon might suffice”. Tanks
could therefore be handled in pairs or in sections
of four, more akin to a diamond formation than a
set of two pairs, with artillery barrages
maintained between each section. As General
Rawlinson commented in advance of the use of
tanks on the Somme in September 1916, “the
difficulty of course is to get them going fast
enough in front of the infantry; if the infantry
overtake them, they will not be much use”. The
tactics tried at the Somme were for tank
sections to grope their way down “lanes” 100
yards wide, with a creeping barrage erupting
slowly before them on either side. It bore a
bitter harvest if the tanks broke down, leaving
the infantry to be decimated by unsuppressed
machine gun fire.
 121

By early 1917, the experiences on the Somme led function also evolved within the Tank Corps,
to the evolution of tank organisation and tactics. together with extensive workshops and specialist
Tank companies were organised by mid-1917 to salvage and supply detachments.
comprise three sections of four tanks each, plus
two additional (indispensible) supply tanks,
frequently being older Mark Is. Emphasis was
placed on tank companies being used in action as
a unit, moving in transit as a formation and then
being deployed in the field together. Within
sections, composition was fluid with tanks
circulating between, or out of, sections as they
suffered mechanical breakdowns, got “bogged”
in bad terrain or were destroyed.

Nevertheless, the tactical tendency to deploy

pairs of tanks to take on specific enemy
strongpoints remained evident throughout 1917,
with the ideal pair consisting of a Male and
Female tank. However, Male tanks, sporting two
quick firing 6pdr guns which could take on
bunkers and fortified buildings with high
explosive, were in shorter supply than Females
owing to the competing claims of both navy and
army for the quick firing 6pdr guns. Compared
to the Males, the Females were at a
disadvantage, the Female’s machine guns merely
bottling up the occupants of fortified
strongpoints and bunkers. The Male tanks also
had the advantage of being able to fire “case
shot”, a thinly cased shell consisting of metal
ball and shrapnel, with devastating effects
similar to a shotgun, on any lightly reinforced
machine gun position where it was not possible
to destroy the position by the usual tactic of
simply running over it.
By Cambrai in late 1917, a typical section
consisted of three tanks, one male and two
Female, offering the greater tactical flexibility
of more sections in each company at the price,
perhaps, of each section being weaker in its own
right.
Training and Preparation:
Training of tank crews was specialised and
thorough. Tank crew men were trained to
undertake multiple roles in each tank, an
invaluable attribute in case of crew casualties.
Tank crews were also highly trained in order to
be prepared to take the initiative in a combat
situation. This helped to mitigate the effect of a
tank commander being killed or incapacitated,
allowing a tank without a surviving officer to
continue to operate in situations where an
infantry unit might well have dug in and ceased
fighting forward.
Reconnaissance of terrain over which the tanks
would fight was carefully undertaken, with each
responsible for guiding the tanks to their starting
positions. A dedicated military intelligence
Tanks:
Despite obvious advances, the deployment of
tanks on the battlefield remained extremely
challenging, particularly in adverse weather
conditions.
Some of the early models of tank quickly became
obsolete. By the start of 1917, both Mark I and
Mark II designs were being phased out, with the
Mark II being found to be particularly vulnerable
owing to being plated in unhardened steel which
was not bullet-proof. While the newer Mark IV,
introduced from April 1917, offered better
armour plating and certain design improvements,
substantial problems remained. The Mark IV still
required 4 of the 8 crewmen to drive it and “[a]
severe handicap was that the reverse gear was of
a higher ratio than the lowest gear, thereby
making it very difficult when one wanted to back
out of a bad place”.
Until the introduction of a ditching beam (a large
railway sleeper reinforced with iron) in mid 1917
to free tanks which had become “ditched” or
“bogged” in thick mud, devices such as “spuds”
or “torpedoes” on tank tracks continued to be
woefully inadequate in extracting tanks from bad
ground.
Even where weaponry was concerned, the new
Mark IVs were less than perfect. The water-
cooled Vickers machine gun of the Mark Is had
been changed to the air-cooled Lewis Gun in the
Mark IVs which, although highly effective as an
infantry weapon, did not function well in tanks.
Post-mortems after battles such as Fontaine on

Page 88

If this is all the
damned toilet
paper we’re
allowed then
they shall have
my resignation
in the morning!
23 November
1917 were
quick to
identify the
shortcomings
of the Lewis
Guns in
combat.
If all failed,
the crew could still use their Webley .455
revolvers through the numerous pistol loopholes,
one gunner having “potted away” for six hours in
such a fashion after his tank had bogged and
guns jammed. Others saw the pistol loopholes as
a way of despatching an enemy who had come to
close to the tank, or simply where the enemy
was suspected of feigning death. Captain Daniel
Hickey calmly noted that “I took a look through
the front revolver loophole in the left sponson.
The man was elderly, short and thickly set. He
was lying in front of the tank and almost on his
face...I closed the flap and the report of Hardy’s
revolver ended the incident”.
Signalling:
Signalling was primitive, with a combination of
shutter lamps, disc signals, pigeons (“only to be
used in an emergency”), and flags. In extremis,
one tank commander simply left the tank’s
sponson doors open to hear the shouted
instructions of the supporting infantry, although
the prize for sheer ingenuity (if not good sense)
was the tactic of alerting tank crews to danger
by shooting at the side of a tank with a Lewis
gun. Communications remained critical to
success of many attacks, however. Section
commanders relied on infantry to direct them to
enemy strongpoints and fortifications which
would be unseen owing to the very limited
visibility from the tanks. Many tank commanders
were killed and wounded, often by snipers,
leading their tanks forward on foot, pressing
gingerly into uneven ground with their ash-plant
walking sticks as they went.
Page 89
122
The Hun:
To the inherent challenges of the new machines
and difficult terrain was added a determined
enemy. German field gunners who had already
seen the Sturmwagen in action would be
deployed in forward positions and trained to get
their guns into action fast. According to a
German account published in 1937, one battery
was able to hit a moving target at 500 metres
with the first round and a target at 1000 metres
in three. Machine gunners were frequently
armed with armour piercing .SmK ammunition,
although this was less effective at stopping the
Mark IVs than it had been against the Mark II
tanks. Both field guns and machine guns could
be deployed in reinforced pits under houses or
buried in the ground, sometimes on the reverse
slope of a hill line, ready to be manhandled into
position should an attack come over the ridge. If
tanks were to enter villages, they could be
attacked by machine guns sheltering in upper
floors where the tanks’ machine guns could not
easily elevate to. When sufficient time was
available to prepare them and train for their
use, small teams of soldiers with grenades
stuffed into empty sandbags and geballte
Ladung, or “concentration charges” made of a
bundle of stick grenades, could also be deployed
should the tanks appear without infantry
support, aiming to wreck the tanks’ tracks and
immobilise them.
Colonel Ernest Swinton’s “Tank Tips” exposed
these risks simply and effectively:
“Smell out the enemy’s machine guns and other
small arms and kill them first with your 6 pdrs.
You will not see them for they are cunningly
hidden. You must ferret them out where they
are, judging by the following signs: Sound.
Dust. Smoke. A shadow on the parapet. A hole
in the wall, haystack, rubbish heap, wood stack
or pile of bricks.”
Optional Rules
The rules in Through the Mud and the Blood
recreate the strengths and weaknesses of the
early tanks very well. Re-reading Chapter 15 on
armoured vehicles is a good idea before playing
the scenarios featured in this Christmas Special.
But like all wargamers, I enjoy adapting a
successful set of rules to particular historical
circumstances. What follows are some
suggestions as to certain additions which you
may like to try if you would like to add more
“1917 colour” to your games of “Through the
Mud and the Blood”.

Section Commanders and Tank Commanders
In Captain Daniel Hickey’s words, “A section
commander’s job was to be where he could be of
most use to the infantry while keeping control of
his troops”. Each section of tanks would be
commanded by a section leader who would ride
in one of the tanks, but could who could also
lead tanks forward on foot or transfer between
tanks in the event of officer casualties. The
section leader would typically be a Captain
(Status III or IV Big Man), while each tank
commander would typically be a Second
Lieutenant or First Lieutenant (Status II or III Big
Man).
“Band of Brigands”
Tank Corps training emphasised that each tank
crewman should be able to perform multiple
tasks. On a tank driver being killed (see Table
“Net two hits” on page 35, allow a replacement
driver to take over on a roll of 4,5 or 6, although
no movement is allowed by the tank for the
remainder of the current turn while replacement
takes place).
Up From The Ranks
Tank crews were highly trained to act under
their own initiative in battle, and could carry on
even despite the death of a tank commander. In
the event of a tank commander being killed or
badly wounded (see Rule 9.5), he is replaced by
a Status I Big Man NCO, whose card goes into the
deck for the following turn. Up From The Ranks
can only happen once in each tank in a game.
For each tank, this rule replaces the general rule
for replacing Big Men in Rule 9.5.2.
Company Reconnaissance Officers
Tank company scale attacks would frequently
involve one officer being deployed without a
tank in the role of company reconnaissance
officer. This was a dangerous, exposed role on
the battlefield. A reconnaissance officer
preceding one tank (or file of tanks), will help
further in Abysmal Terrain – treat the tank as the
tank as bogged on a roll of a double 6 only.
However, such an officer can be separately
targeted by enemy fire (see Rule 4.4 Isolated Big
Men).
Bogged and Ditched Tanks
“Bogged down” tanks can unfree themselves on
rolling a D6, the roll of a “6” allowing them to
move again, with a roll of “1” signifying that
they are bogged in for the rest of the game.
There are numerous accounts of snipers targeting
crew members attempting to fix the “ditching
beans”, “torpedoes” or chains during this time.
To representing this, two crewmen should be
positioned outside the tank from the turn that
the tank has “bogged” until the turn the tank
becomes moveable again (count as being in light
Page 90
123
cover while attempting to fix the ditching
beam).
Abysmal Terrain
Some of the terrain over which tanks fought in
1917 was almost impassable - “An abyss of mud
and water” according to one tank commander.
By the time of the third battle of Ypres,
remaining intact cobbled roads (pavé) were rare
in the Salient and were continually shelled by
German artillery. Tanks struggled to achieve
much off them, sometimes simply sinking into
the morass, making them tempting targets for
forward-positioned field guns. “We travelled
literally one foot to each revolution of the
tracks”, recalled Second Lieutenant Wilfred
Bion. To reflect this, on such very poor terrain
tanks will “bog” when they roll any double on a
movement roll (rule 15.2 – in other words, treat
any off road movement as if crossing a trench).
A tank commander preceding the tank will help
in such terrain – treat the tank as “bogging” on a
double 4, 5 or 6.
“Potting away”
Tank crews could, and did, deploy revolvers
through pistol loopholes, particularly against an
enemy close assaulting a tank. Treat pistols as
only having a close range having a range of 4”,
and with 2 tank crewmen being able to fire at ½
dice per figure for each action dice of fire. Tank
crews firing pistols must choose which side of the
tank the pistol fire is from, no other weapons
being able to fire from that side during that
turn.
Lewis Guns
The tank crews found the unarmoured Lewis
Guns fitted on the Mark IVs to be vulnerable to
armour piercing bullets and shell splinters. To
reflect this, Lewis Guns mounted in mark IV
tanks (and earlier marks) will suffer a stoppage
when the number of 1’s rolled is equal to or
greater than the number of 6’s rolled.
The Luck of the Devil
Finally when we consider the men who manned
these incredible new contraptions, it is
impossible not to be inspired by the bravery and
determination of the early tank crews, it would
be a churlish umpire that does not allow the
Tank Corps player a “Luck of the Devil” card (as
in Sharpe Practice). If a tank crew Big Man is
hit, the “Luck of the Devil” card may be played
before the rolls to see the effect of the hit,
representing the bullet being stopped caught by
a well positioned hip flask, helmet or grease can
carried in the tank.
 124

The scenar
rios
ond part of this
In the seco t article dealing
d with
h the Tank Corps
C in “Thhrough the M
Mud and the Blood”, we e
offer two scenarios, on
ne historical and one ficctional but drawing
d on a number of historical actions. Thee
n each scena
intention in ario is to pro
ovide the players with a sense of soome of the cchallenges faced
f by the
e
Tank Corps as they rolle
ed into actio
on during the
e grim, hard days of 19177.

“Pinprick
ks of Succes
S ss”
T
Taking t Cockcroft: 19 Aug
the gust 1917
7
The British successes att Langemarck and St Juliien on 16 Au ugust 1917 duuring the Third Battle off Ypres were
e
tempered by b realising that
t further progress beyyond St Julie
en was goingg to be challe
enged by the e supportive
e
complex of pillboxes on n the ridge to the northh of the villa
age. These were stronggly constructted concrete e
ns dominatin
fortification ng the remaiins of a few crucial roadds in the norrth of the Yp
pres Salient.. One of the
e
most intimidating of theese pillboxess was a two storey pillbo
ox known as “The Cockro oft”.

Estimates of
o casualties in taking TheT Cockroft and other pillboxes
p in the area ranged from 600
6 to 1,000 0
men. How wever, Majorr Baker-Carrr, command ding “G” Battalion of the Tank Co orps, proposeed that the e
elimination of the fortiffications cou
uld be achievved by a com
mposite forcee of a dozen
n tanks. Afteer a difficultt
journey to starting
s posiitions at 1amm. on Sundayy 19 August, 1917, the taanks proceedded to cross the floodedd
Steenbeek stream
s on a causeway off fascines annd approache ed the lines of
o pill boxes.

Page 91
 125

British Briefing
You are Second Lieutenant Coutts, a tank commander in the 19th Company of “G” Battalion, 1st Tank
Brigade of the Tank Corps. You have been given the task of leading two Mark IV tanks through the shell-
shattered terrain of the Salient to eliminate the German pillbox known as The Cockroft.

The Cockroft is a double story pillbox built as a key defensive position in the German fortified Stellungen
surrounding Ypres. The Cockroft is approached by a cobbled road, which before the War had been
pleasantly lined with trees. The trees have now almost all gone, destroyed by the intense shelling in the
Salient over the past three years. The approach road to The Cockroft has been shelled for over a month,
but the central pavé, the cobbled part, has survived intact except where a direct hit has punched a hole
in the cobblestones. Several trees have fallen across the road. The road is, however, covered with slime,
and careful driving will be needed to avoid skidding off. Off the road, the terrain is abysmal, with tanks
quickly sinking into a morass of black mud.

There is no preparatory bombardment, but the Royal Artillery have been using smoke shells to create an
effective smoke screen in front of The Cockroft. You are supported by a second tank, commanded by
Second Lieutenant Willard, and two platoons of the 7th Warwicks. Your orders are to advance on The
Cockroft, subdue the garrison and signal the infantry to advance (by waving a shovel out of the roof of
your tank). You begin the game deployed on the southern table edge.

Second Lieutenant Willard’s tank has a leaking exhaust and has to be driven with its doors open to avoid
gassing the crew.

The weather is good. The night has been dry and clear, and the morning promises to be overcast with
cloud cover. There is no rain, although any terrain off the road is badly flooded. It is now 5am, and the
signal has been given for your force to advance. The British forces enter the table from the bottom right
corner of the table moving north on the road from St Julien.

British Forces

19th Company, “G” Battalion, Royal Tank Corps

Two Mark IV tanks:

¾ one Male (“Gloucester”,G19), commanded by Second-Lieutenant Willard (status II), 7 other

crew;

¾ one Female (“Gordon II”,G8), commanded by Second-Lieutenant Coutts (status III), 7 other crew.

Both tanks have sufficient supplies of fuel and ammunition. The morale of both tank crews is good,
their experience regular. “Gloucester” has a faulty exhaust and must be driven with the sponson
doors open. Any German attack on “Gloucester” with grenades and concentration charges will take
effect with a factor of 3, not 2.

“A” Company 7th Battalion of the Warwickshire Regiment

Company HQ - Captain Charles Sutton-Coalfield (Status III), two runners

Two Platoons, “A” Company (both identical in composition)

Commander - Lieutenant (Status III), Sergeant (Status II), four Corporals (Status I).
Four sections: (i) eight men comprising two bayonet men, six bombers; (ii) riflemen, two of whom
are trained as scouts; (iii) eight men; two with a Lewis gun plus six ammunition carriers/riflemen (iv)
eight men; four with rifle grenade launchers, four with ammunition to act as loaders.
A smoke barrage, covering an area 122 square, to be placed at the start of the game and to continue
for 10 “Snifter” cards

Page 92
 126

German Briefing

You are Leutnant Erich Genscher, the junior officer commanding the important two storey pillbox north of
St Julien in the Ypres Salient known (to the British at least) as “The Cockroft”.

The Cockroft forms a key part in the extensive series of pillboxes and concreted farms which ring the
British defences outside Ypres. You have been instructed by your battalion commander that die Engländer
are expected to continue their attacks which only a couple of days ago had resulted in them occupying the
villages of Langemarck and St Julien. The enemy’s approach seems to be to make only limited advances
against specific objectives, supported by titanic artillery barrages against which your own artillery appear
to have little response.

Your protection against further enemy onslaughts is the strongly fortified double storey pillbox which your
force now garrisons, and which enjoys commanding views over the flooded and shell-shattered Flemish
countryside. You know that die Engländer have been using tanks to reduce similar fortifications, but you
also realise that the tanks cannot move easily, if at all, off the remains of the cobbled roads. While you
have a small force, it may well be enough to subdue the enemy, particularly if you can force the tanks off
the roads which lead to your position.

You may place up to 18 figures (including Big Men) within The Cockroft at the start of the game. No more
than 18 figures may occupy The Cockroft at any single time. Other troops can be positioned anywhere in
the north half of the table. If desired, other troops can be positioned on the roof of The Cockroft and
would count as being in light cover (sheltered by sandbagged defences and loopholed shields of reinforced
iron).

German Forces

174th Infantry Regiment

Company Commander: Leutnant Erich Genscher (Status IV)

Two snipers, one forward artillery observer.

First Platoon - under-strength platoon, 28 riflemen in four sections, 5 Big Men (Feldwebel Hans
Schmidt (Status III), Vizefeldwebel Freihamm (Status II), Sergeant Siegfried Gemmering (Status II),
Gefreiter Stockdorf (Status I), Gefreiter Kasten (Status I)).
Second Platoon - half strength platoon, 8 riflemen and 7 bombers organised in two sections, 3 Big
Men (Unteroffizier Hadern (Status II), Gefreiter Gauting (Status I), and Gefreiter Emden (Status I))
2 MG08s allocated among the two platoons (with armour piercing ammunition until more 1s than 6s
are thrown for each MG firing. Afterwards, in addition to a stoppage count as only standard
ammunition). In this scenario, any Big Man moving a section with an MG08 will move at a minus 2
“pip” per action dice to simulate the relative difficulty of moving these heavy machine guns around
the abysmal terrain of the battlefield.
Any Germans with hand grenades can construct a geballte Ladung to use against the tanks. All
German ranks have reasonable morale and are a mixture of experienced veterans (as befits die
Flandernkämpfer of July 1917) and newly arrived replacements.
12 points of Defensive Fire Points from the 1st Battery, Field Artillery Regiment 77 once any British
forces approach within 24 inches of The Cockroft

Page 93
 127

Victory Conditions
 at the end of the game. Any other
The British player wins if he has forced the enemy out of The Cockroft
result (including any German troops being within the Cockroft in a “shocked state”) results in a German
victory. Unit’s remaining on the roof of The Cockroft count for these purposes as being within the
fortification.

Cards

British German Common

Big Men
Blinds
Command Initiative I x 2
Command Initiative II x 1
Command Initiative III x 1
Command Initiative IV x 1
Heroic British Leader
British Friction
Big Men Snifter
Blinds
Command Initiative I x 2
Command Initiative II x 1
Command Initiative III x 1
Command Initiative IV x 1
German Sniper
Forward Observer

Umpire’s notes and special rules

The slime-covered cobbled roads, strewn with shattered tree trunks, were particularly difficult to
navigate for the tanks. Whereas the slime and mud threatened to cause the tanks to skid, the trees held
the danger of a broken track. If a double 6 is rolled for movement, roll one scatter dice to indicate the
direction in which the tank skids. In the event of a “circle” being rolled, the tank must roll for a
mechanical breakdown as in Rule 15.1.

The additional rules Abysmal Terrain, Bogged and Ditched tanks, Band of Brigands, Up From The Ranks,
Potting Away and Lewis Guns can be used. If the British forces get hopelessly bogged down, the Umpire
may decide to allow the British player the use of Captain Clough Williams-Ellis, 19th Company
reconnaissance officer. Captain Williams-Ellis can use the Reconnaissance Officer special rule.

Ideally, The Cockroft itself should be represented by a double storey pillbox, or any defensive fortification
which can accommodate (or be treated as accommodating) around 12 to 18 figures. There are a number
of other ruined buildings on the table-top, none of which will provide more than medium cover. The table
is flat, all ground being entirely pockmarked with shell craters and affording light cover to advancing
troops.

Historical Outcome
The attack on The Cockroft was a significant success, with the pillbox being captured with minor
casualties. “Gloucester” bogged early in the action, but “Gordon II” pressed forward to within 50 yards of
The Cockroft, subduing the garrison with her Lewis Guns. Second Lieutenant Coutts was not, however,
supported with vigour by the infantry and was compelled to advance on the pillbox on foot carrying one of
the spare machine gun from the stores held in his tank. The garrison surrendered quickly, but this was not
typical of all of the pillboxes attacked by “G” battalion on 19 August. Second Lieutenant Coutts received
the Military Cross for the action. In this scenario, we have stiffened the resolve of the German defenders,
but balanced this by allowing the attack to include “Gloucester” which took no part in the final assault on
The Cockroft.

Page 94
 128

“The Flanders Sanatorium”

Jackdaw Wood, November
 1917
In contrast to the first scenario in this set of articles which is based on a historical engagement, our
second scenario offers the chance to recreate a number of features drawn from the actions which the
Tank Corps fought in 1917. Although the forces are fixed, the critical component of terrain is variable,
leading to the umpire or the players collectively setting the objectives for the battle.

British briefing
You are Major Jasper Whitechapel of “A” Company 17th (County of London) Battalion of the London
Regiment (Poplar & Stepney Rifles) and you are in command of an infantry force, supported by a strong
contingent of tanks from “B” Battalion of the Tank Corps. You have been tasked with the objective of
pushing forward against a supporting line of the Siegfried Stellung on the third day of the battle of
Cambrai (22nd November 1917). Following the breakthrough of dramatic proportions on the first day of
the battle, German resistance has strengthened over the past 24 hours. After rolling easily through the
outpost defences of the Siegfried Stellung, you have reached one of the main defence lines, stalling your
advance yesterday evening in front of a dense, partly destroyed wood. Your have been ordered to resume
yesterday’s attack at dawn, and push forward to take the wood, or at least ensure the enemy’s grasp on
the wood is disputed.
You have the following forces under your command. (If there are two British players, one can easily take
the role of the Tank Corps section leader, Captain Porter). The British forces enter the game from the top
table edge.
1st
Company, “B” Battalion, Royal Tank Corps
Section Commander Captain Roger Porter (Status III)
Three Mark IV tanks:
¾ one Male (“Black Prince II”), commanded by First Lieutenant William Gustard-Wood (status II), 7
other crew;
¾ one Female (“Belladonna”), commanded by Second Lieutenant Charles Kimpton (status II), 7 other
crew;
¾ one Female (“Banshee”), commanded by Second Lieutenant Francis Lemsford (status II), 7 other
crew.
All tanks have sufficient supplies of fuel and ammunition. The morale of both tank crews is good, their
experience regular. Captain Porter can join any tank he wishes.

“A” Company 17th (County of London) Battalion of the London Regiment (Poplar & Stepney Rifles) –
morale good, experience regular
3 Officers – Major Jasper Whitechapel (Status IV), First Lieutenant Charles Barking (Status III), Second
Lieutenant Charles Millwall (Status III)
8 NCOs – Company Sergeant Major Nobby Burdett (Status III), Sergeant Joseph Beckton (Status II),
Corporal Charlie Blackwall (Status I), Corporal Frank Langdon (Status I), Lance Corporal Peter
Whitechapel (Status I), Lance Corporal Alf Shadwell (Status I), Corporal Harold Stepney (Status I),
Corporal Harry Romford (Status I).
2 platoons of 32 men (each consisting of a Lewis gun team of nine men, a bombing section of 8 men, an
8 man section of rifle grenadiers (4 men carrying rifle grenades and 4 riflemen carrying ammunition)
and 8 riflemen)
A company headquarters consisting of a Lewis gun team of three privates, a signals section of three men
(1 signaller – carrier pigeons, 1 signaller – flags and one runner)
One Stokes 3” mortar with crew of three men, with limited ammunition (sufficient for 1D10 turns of
fire).

2d10 of Barrage Support. Artillery can also lay smoke in a barrage covering 12” square (smoke barrage
lasts for 3 snifter cards) – request is made on a turn of the “British Forward Observer” card, and is
deployed on the next turn of that card.

Page 95
 129

German Briefing 

You are Hauptmann Lothar von Carnstein, an Officer with 4th Company, 171st Infantry Regiment. It is the
third day of the battle of Cambrai. Your battalion have been brought forward from their billets around
Cambrai, the “Flanders Sanatorium”, and deployed in front of a dense, partly destroyed wood. You have
command of a somewhat depleted company of troops, now consisting of 2 full platoons, one shattered
platoon and a number of company support assets and a detachment of two 77mm field guns. Your orders
from High Command are to hold your position at all costs.

The German forces can deploy anywhere on the table. You have the following forces at your disposal.

4th Company, 171st Infantry Regiment

Headquarters - Hauptmann Lothar von Carnstein (Status IV); 2 snipers

First Platoon - Farnrich Harthaus (Status II), Sergeant Max Lehrmann, (Status II), Gefreiter Lothar Brandt
(Status I), Gefreiter Hans Koch (Status I), Gefreiter Hans Beyer, (Status I); three Gruppen of 8 riflemen,
and one Gruppe of 8 bombers.

Remnants of Second Platoon - Gefreiter Boris Schmidt (Status I), eight Grenadiers, four of whom are
bombers. Second Platoon are aggressive troops.

Third Platoon (Reserve) Leutnant Willi van Aalst (Status III), Obergefreiter Lothar Schmidt (Status II),
Gefreiter Jankke Lott (Status I), Gefreiter Harald Keppel (Status I), Gefreiter Johannes Waldheim
(Status I), Gefreiter Ulrich Hemmelhaus (Status I); three Gruppen of eight riflemen (two of whom in
each Gruppe are trained bombers), and one Gruppe of 8 bombers.

One Granatenwerfer 16 with crew of two men

Two sled mounted MG08s (each with armour piercing .SmK ammunition and a crew of five men). Each
MG08 is accompanies by a Big Man, being Gefreiter Rudi Mattheus (Status I) and Gefreiter Paul
Liebowitz (Status I).

1D8 bombers have hastily constructed geballte Ladung (“concentration charges” comprising a bundle of
stick grenades) to use against the tanks. All troops are morale reasonable, experience regular.

The third platoon arrives on the fifth turn of the Blank Card.

1st Battery, Field Artillery Regiment 77 – deployed on base line in Jackdaw Wood
Farnrich Hans Meyer (Status II), each gun being served by five artillerymen, Two 77mm Feldkanone 96
n.A. Both field guns start the game off-table. The first gun is deployable on the fifth turn of The Blank
Card. The second field gun is deployed on the tenth turn of The Blank Card. Both guns enter the game
from the German player’s base line and may need to be manhandled forward through Jackdaw Wood.

14 points of Defensive Fire Points from the 2nd Battery, Field Artillery Regiment 77 (off table)

Page 96
 130

Cards

British German Common
Big Men Big Men Snifter*
Blinds* Blinds* The Blank Card*
Command Initiative I x 2 Command Initiative I x 2
Command Initiative II x 1 Command Initiative II x 1
Command Initiative III x 1 Command Initiative III x 1
Command Initiative IV x 1 Command Initiative IV x 1
Heroic British Leader German Sniper
British Stokes Mortar Forward Observer
British Forward Observer
British Rally
(* denotes a card included in the pack at the first draw)

Terrain
The key variable in the “The Flanders Sanatorium” game is the positioning of the terrain on the tabletop.
A fictional scenario, albeit one influenced by historical events, allows the terrain selected to be more
flexible than in a historical recreation of a specific battle. Having more flexibility regarding terrain
selection also allows for any potential, or deliberate, imbalance in the force compositions to be addressed
to provide a challenging game for both players.

One of the objectives of these articles on the Tank Corps in 1917 has been to show that the use of tanks
was particularly influenced by terrain and weather. Tanks were neither deployed routinely nor in a
defensive role. Rather, tanks were deployed to achieve a specific objective, whether to pierce wire
defence, eliminate an enemy strongpoint or destroy a series of machine gun emplacements. The
movement of tanks was therefore essential to achieving their tactical objectives. Tanks were only able to
operate to best effect in favourable terrain. In locations where fields had turned to heavy mud through
constant rain, tanks would be shackled to the roads. Areas of dense woods proved difficult to pass
through, except on “rides” or other pre-existing paths through the wood.

In this context, the different strengths and weaknesses of British and German forces in “Through the Mud
and the Blood” are complemented by terrain features which can favour either the attacker or defender.
For example, let us consider that our table for “The Flanders Sanatorium” is divided into three zones
(namely, a forward zone, a mid-table zone, and a rear zone) and let us consider the possible terrain
configurations on each and how they may influence a game:

Page 97
 131

The Forward Zone:

Terrain favouring the British Attacker 
The key challenge for the attacker in the British forward zone will be to co-ordinate the advance of the
tanks with the infantry platoons. By the third day of a battle, such co-ordination may well be very
difficult. This reflected the high rates of attrition to tanks and crews, as well as problems with command
and control during prolonged battles. Anything that further fragments the advance, including adverse
terrain, is likely to dislocate the successful assault of enemy positions. For this reason, the British player
may favour remaining “on blinds” at the start of the game. Generally, the most favourable terrain for an
attacker would lack any defensive wire entanglements (or feature wire cut by an opening barrage) and
would be free from defensive trench lines in which detachments of enemy troops might be waiting to
delay the advance. Alternatively, the British player may see material advantages in a German defending
force which is pushed so far forward as to be vulnerable to being outflanked, threatening annihilation or a
difficult withdrawal in the face of British fire.

The Forward Zone:

Terrain favouring the German Defender
The German player is more likely to favour difficult ground and defensive trench lines to slow the tanks
and dislocate the advance of enemy infantry where they have “come off blinds”. If the tanks get
“bogged” or “ditch” in the trenches or in a morass of shell craters, they stand a good chance of being
immobilised and serving only as stationary positions for the remainder of the game. In such a situation,
the infantry’s job would be far harder and tanks would be unlikely to provide close ranged fire on enemy
fortifications.

Small detachments of enemy troops could hold forward positions and further delay the British attack,
particularly if armed with concentration charges. While there were circumstances of large numbers of
German troops fighting in forward positions at Cambrai (including Havrincourt and la Vacquerie), a more
prudent German strategy may be to mount a flexible defence in any front line trenches with troops falling
back on positions in the mid-table zone. Such tactics perhaps militate against locating a machine gun with
.SmK armour piercing ammunition in the forward zone for use against the tanks owing to the maxim MG08
used in 1917 being heavy and difficult to redeploy at speed.

The Mid-Table Zone:

Terrain favouring the British Attacker
Where copses and low hills are present they will break the line of sight of enemy field guns firing over
open sights. This offers opportunities for tanks to advance without suffering enemy artillery fire. Any
enemy field gun or machine gun emplacements placed in the centre of the mid-table zone may also
permit outflanking moves, especially where such emplacements are firing on a fixed line ad/or where the
emplacement is shielded by smoke or an artillery barrage. Roads may also be invaluable to an attacker in
the mid-table zone, particularly where the surrounding terrain is bad or abysmal (although this was not
really an issue at Cambrai). Ruined houses and pillboxes located in the mid-table zone can prove a
double-edged sword for the German defender - while such positions are difficult to break into, once
captured they can easily become the jump-off point for an infantry assault.

The Mid-Table Zone:

Terrain favouring the German Defender
Well sited machine guns firing from emplacements on fixed lines can prove deadly, particularly where
fixed to fire along barbed wire defences or to enfilade advancing enemy infantry. The German defender
does, however, face a choice in the mid-table zone: too many defensive structures may dilute the forces
available for a central defensive stronghold, reduce reserves or even break lines of sight for any field
artillery deployed in the rear zone and firing over open sights (although the last of these should not be a
problem where the artillery have been well sited). Such a disadvantage should be balanced against
positioning fortifications in the mid-table zone where they can break British momentum, force close
assaults and surprise an imprudent enemy advance which has not spent much time spotting.

Page 98
 132

The Rear Zone:

Terrain favouring the British Attacker 
The British attack may be helped by the location of the wooded areas in the centre of the rear Zone,
allowing the tanks to attempt to outflank the enemy field artillery. Dense woods may also impede
movement of enemy reinforcements.

The Rear Zone:

Terrain favouring the German Defender
Where they cover the entire base-line of the rear zone, a wood, or the reverse slope of a hill would be a
formidable defence position. For this reason, many German defensive positions in die Siegfried
Stellungen were located in or near such terrain features. Woods assist in shielding troops from spotting
and are likely to slow any enemy assault past the edge of the wood. Field artillery can be manhandled
forward to a covered position at the edge of the wood, with the possibility that it can be withdrawn if
necessary when the enemy close. By themselves, reverse slopes offer less cover but greater invisibility
from a ground based British force. A combination of a wood on a rear slope would be formidable and
would probably need to be compensated for by an umpire elsewhere on the table.

Any ruined buildings located in the rear zone can be easily reinforced by German infantry, either arriving
from the base line or rallying back in the face of the British assault. Defenders in such buildings can be
difficult for Female tanks to eliminate (not getting the advantage of reducing cover which is given to
6pdrs mounted in Male tanks). In addition, all tanks may be vulnerable to enemy infantry armed with
concentration charges when in built-up areas, unless closely supported by British infantry.

The blend of advantages and disadvantages for two tables for the Jackdaw Wood game can be seen in the
following maps:

Page 99
 133

On the first map, above, the German defender ostensibly has a strong defensive position in the trenches
of the main line of the Siegfried Stellung, which have remained intact despite a preparatory
bombardment. The trenches offer an opportunity for a defending detachment to delay the British attack,
although any troops so deployed face a difficult withdrawal from the support trench. Although there is a
machine gun emplacement in the mid-table zone, it is isolated and may easily be outflanked. While the
Copse on the left of the table and higher ground on the right of the table both offer opportunities for
some troops to be positioned in dead ground, these opportunities are likely to be short-lived. The Copse
is isolated and the dead ground provided by the higher ground is likely to offer cover only until the British
have broken into the mid-table zone. Finally, Jackdaw Wood on Table 1 only offers protection in the
centre of the table, and may be outflanked. A “ride”, or large path, on the left side of Jackdaw Wood
may provide an entry point for a tank which survives this far, although it possible that positioning
defending troops in the ruined buildings in the rear zone may forestall such a manoeuvre.

On the second table the German position appears weaker at first sight, but is in fact significantly more
formidable. In many ways Table 2 resembles the terrain which may have been encountered around the
Ypres Salient, rather than at Cambrai. The mass of flooded shell craters on the right of the forward zone
and left of the mid-table zone may be classed as Abysmal Terrain (see the Optional Rule [earlier in this
article/ in the previous article]) which may immobilise the British tanks. Pillbox A and B may both fire on
oblique lines attempting to enfilade advancing enemy infantry, as well as to the front. Neither pillbox is
easy to outflank, and both channel the British attack to the centre of the table. New wire has been laid
overnight by wiring parties, which may also slow, or funnel, the British infantry into the machine gun fire
lanes. The funnelling of the British attack is assisted by the reinforced shell craters on the right of the
mid-table zone which would serve as a good location for defending infantry equipped with concentration

Page 100
 134

charges to engage tanks in close assaults. Finally, Jackdaw Wood here covers the entire width of the
table’s rear zone, preventing outflanking movements by the tanks and making spotting difficult.

Umpire’s Notes
Any of the Optional Rules featured in the first part of this article can be used with this scenario,
depending on the terrain selected and to even out any potential play balance issues.

As the game is set in the third day of the battle of Cambrai, it would be realistic to simulate a certain
dislocation in the British forces as their overall attack slows and breaks down. Accordingly, the Umpire
should consider holding back “blinds” relating to the Tanks or the British Infantry for 3 or 4 turns of The
Blank Card. Again, this could be used to even out any play balance issues.

Victory Conditions
Unlike other scenarios for “Through the Mud and the Blood”, the victory conditions in “The Flanders
Sanatorium” would need to be adapted by the umpire, or by agreement of the players, to address the
different challenges presented by the terrain. So, on Table 1, a British victory may be secured by at least
two tanks and an infantry platoon reaching the rear zone.

By contrast, on the more challenging terrain of Table 2, a British victory with the forces available may be
achieved through the elimination of both Pillbox A and B and at least one tank reaching the rear zone
intact.

Keeping a number of key terrain features in mind can therefore add a considerable variety to “Through
the Mud and the Blood” games involving the Tank Corps of 1917. Focusing on line of sight and channels of
attack, introducing terrain features such as wooded areas, reverse slopes and strong-points, and ensuring
certain areas are impassable or compromised whether through natural features (morass, bad ground) or
artificial ones (smoke or artillery barrage) adds variety and challenges for the players. And perhaps makes
us appreciate slightly more just how considerable were the achievements of the tank crews of 1917 given
the machines they fought in and the terrain over which their battles took place.

There are a large number of excellent books featuring the Tank Corps, of which my favourites are “Tank
Action in the Great War” (Ian Verrinder), “Cambrai 1917” (Bryn Hammond), The Devil’s Chariots” (John
Glanfield), “Band of Brigands” (Christy Campbell), “Rolling into Action” (Daniel Hickey) and “Company of
Tanks” (William Watson). The quotations in this article are all from contemporaries, and are featured in
the above books. I would also like to warmly thank Robert Dunlop for his invaluable thoughts and
assistance with these articles. Lastly, for those interested in keeping up with my progress with Through
the Mud and the Blood my blog can be found at http://sidneyroundwood.blogspot.com/

Sidney

Page 101
 135

MIDNIGHT AT THE OASIS

By Allan Coleman

T. E. Lawrence peered over the sand dune at

the Turkish outpost. It wasn’t much, just
three buildings nestled among a wall of
sandbags along the railroad line. And of
course the well, which made this little supply
depot possible. And if Lawrence could deprive
the Turks of these supplies, it would hamper
them in their efforts to turn back the coming
offensive. Lawrence made a few notes on his
hand written map and went back to camp to
plan this night’s raid on the Turks….

Much has been written about the man. Whether one thinks that
Lawrence of Arabia was a shameless self-promoter, or a military
genius, or something in between, his writings (and the film based
on them) provide ample fodder for Through the Mud and Blood
scenarios. What follows is not based on any one historical
scenario, but it is certainly constructed in the Lawrence ‘spirit’
and provides an intriguing and enjoyable game set in the heart
of the Ottoman Empire…

Page 117

Allied Briefing
Y ou are T. E. Lawrence, aka, “Lawrence of
Arabia”. You have gained the trust of many
of the Arab chieftains and succeeded in
molding them into an effective group of guerilla
fighters. So effective in fact that your
commanders in Cairo have seen fit to give you
some support in the form of troops from the
Indian Army. Tonight at midnight you will be
raiding a Turkish outpost. Your goal is to blow up
as many supplies as possible.
Your force consists of:
Capt T.E. Lawrence (Level IV)
Sheik Ali-Aladdin, (Level II)
10 Arabs of the Yowza Tribe, all armed with rifles.
10 Arabs of the Howza Tribe, also rifle armed.
2 sections of your personal body guard, each
consisting of 8 Arabs. Each section is armed with
a Lewis Gun.
All have the Arabs have good morale. The
bodyguard troops are veteran troops. The Howza
and Yowza troops are green.
Lt Percival Smythe-Jones (Level III ) of the Indian
Army
Sgt. Hugh Jarce , (Level II)
10 Ghurkas armed with rifles
2 sections of Muslim infantry-each consisting of
10 men armed with rifles and one HMG
The Ghurkas are veteran troops with good
morale, the Muslims are regular troops with
reasonable morale.
Turkish Briefing
Y ou are Pasha Enver, of the 156th Infantry
Regiment, and you have been stuck in this
backwater hellhole of a supply depot for far
too long. You are tired of guarding supplies and
long to join the hunt for the cursed Lawrence.
And tonight is your last night guarding this Allah-
forsaken flea-ridden dump. You have been
informed that your German allies are sending
your relief. In fact, they should have been here
by now. You post two sentries and head to your
meager billet, anxiously awaiting your successor
Page 118
136
Your forces consist of:
Pasha Enver, Level III
Cpl Hashish, Level I
Cpl Bey, Level I.
(Both Corporals are armed with pistols)
3 groups of rifle armed Turkish infantry organized
into 3 sections of 10.
2 HMGs, each with two crewman.
You may place one squad on guard behind
sandbags or walls. The other two squads are
considered to be in the buildings asleep and will
not appear until the alarm is sounded. Each
sentry has a flare. All are regular troops with poor
morale
German Briefing
Y ou are Major Kaiser, just off the boat from
a successful campaign in Africa. You are
here to show your Turkish allies that one
German can do the work of 3 Turks when it
comes to guarding supplies. After the arduous
campaign in Africa, you are more than happy to
guard some supplies and let the Turks chase their
tails in search of Lawrence.
Your force consists of:
Major Kaiser (Level IV)
Sgt. Herman Zermits (Level II)
8 rifle armed Seebattalion troops
8 rifle armed Seebattalion troops with one HMG
All are veteran troops with good morale
Umpire Briefing
T he table is 6X4. Normal night time spotting
rules apply. The Turkish supply depot is in
the south west corner, and is surrounded
by a wall of sandbags. It consists of 3 buildings,
two of which are single room buildings. The 3rd
consists of two rooms on the lower story, and
one room on the top floor, which is only
accessible from an outside staircase. The Turkish
player must inform the umpire which rooms are
barracks for sleeping soldiers, and which room
contains the supplies.
 137

Cards:
This scenario will require the following
cards:

British Empire and Arab Allies

Lawrence, Level IV
Heroic Leader
Dynamic Commander
Sheik Ali-Aladdin, Level II
Percy Smythe-Jones, Level III
Sgt. Hugh Jarce, Level II
A rail line runs parallel to the sandbags. The Arab CI III
Turks start with 8 men behind the sandbags and Arab CI I
may place two sentries anywhere within a foot of Indian CI II
the rail line. They may place two HMG’s Indian CI I
anywhere they wish within the supply depot. All Friction
Turks other than the ten already mentioned are Sons of the Desert
assumed to be asleep in the buildings until the Arabian Nights
alarm is sounded.
Central Powers:
The Arabs start on the western half of the Pasha Enver, Level III
northern side of the board on blinds. They may Cpl. Bey-Level I
have two more blinds than the total number of Cpl Hashish Level !
units fielded. The Indian Army troops start of the Turkish CI II
eastern half of the northern edge of the board on Turkish CI I
blinds. They may have one more blind than the Turkish Delight X2
number of units fielded. As soon as the Central Major Kaiser, Level IV
Powers have spotted an Arab and an Indian unit, Sgt. Zermit, Level II
an “Allied Friction” card is added to the deck. German CI III
German CI II
On the 3rd turn of the blank card the train bearing Friction
the Germans arrives at a speed of 3D6. At the Common Cards:
same time a “Central Powers Friction” card is Blank, Snifter
added to the deck.
Nation specific cards:
Searching a building: On a task roll of 5 (the It is suggested the following carsd are
supplies that Lawrence and his men are looking added to the pack to give a genuine
for are in REALLY big stacks) will reveal whether eastern flavour:
or not there are supplies in the building. A task
roll of 10 (Lawrence must be present) will set a “Sons of the Desert” allows any Arab
charge successfully. squad to make a bonus move of 2D6
“Arabian Nights” allows one Arab
Command initiatives: Lawrence may use either squad that has been spotted to go back
Indian or Arab CI cards. The Arab commanders onto a blind.
may only use Arab CI cards, and the Indian “Turkish Delight”-Any Turkish unit in
Commanders only Indian Cards cover may remove one point of shock.

Page 119

“From the beginning of July until well until
October…we lived on the edge of a precipice
where the least slip might have led to a
catastrophe”
“The forces in Iraq were vulnerable, with
insufficient troops and supply lines that were
dangerously long and vulnerable to attack. [The
commander] also faced insurgents who appeared
to be led by former Iraqi officers and had
watched his police officers desert as the fighting
intensified.”
Serious fighting had erupted in towns now
familiar to us: Najaf, Baghdad, Kufa and across
the country. The recent removal of the previous
regime left a vacuum that the small number of
new administrators, inexperienced in the ways of
the country, supported by a military force that
was undermanned for the task it faced, were
hard pushed to fill. Shortly local groups rebelled
and inter regional conflicts resurfaced in a major
rebellion.
This summary comes not from the occupation of
Iraq after the Second Gulf War of 2002 but from
a British occupation force that faced such a
serious insurrection in 1920! I came across
Haldane’s account of the conflict, Insurrection in
Mesopotamia as a result of my reading on the US
involvement in the region. Commanders
unprepared for the break out of violence in the
region re-learnt the lessons of men such as
Haldane and from the French in Algeria and
Vietnam, as well as their own experience in
South America and South East Asia.
Sir James Aylmer Lowthorpe Haldane GCMG,
KCB, DSO already had a solid service record by
the time he was sent to Iraq. He had been a
Brigade commander in 1914, rising to Divisional
Command that same year, becoming Corps
Commander to VI Corps in August 1916. He was
Page 89
138
on half-pay until recalled to take command in
Mesopotamia.
In May 1920, certain Arab tribes had risen in
revolt to the new occupying force, unsettling the
new Arab government that the British had
installed. Over 300,000 rifles and other
equipment had been left in the country by the
Ottoman army at its defeat. Added to this were
imports from Iranian agitators, seeking to extend
their influence in the country.
For the British the potential of a major break
down of their authority in the region, with
fighting already occurring against Bolshevik
troops in Iranian border territory in the north,
made this campaign of major importance.
The fighting was brutal, with the British forces
defending their overextended lines of
communication and government outposts against
ambushes and raiding. Haldane’s response was
to centralise his forces, a necessary first step
after early actions that saw British regulars and
their Indian troops defeated by the rebels. In one
instance, a large force of the Manchester
battalion was heavily defeated. Sensing victory,
the rebels attracted many more volunteers and
soon whole regions fell into open revolt.
The campaign saw the first concerted use of air
power to bomb towns, in “Punishment Raids” for
insurgent actions, and the use of mobile columns
of armoured cars, cavalry and infantry, in the
first “modern insurgency”.
It took a timely reinforcement that brought the
British forces to 12,000 British and 61,000 Indian
troops to quell the rebellion. The costs were
significant with 2269 Anglo-Indian forces
casualties and an estimated 8,450 for the rebels.

The similarities with the conflict we have
watched on our TV screens are impossible to
miss. For the gamer, however, the tactical
challenges for Haldane’s commanders provide for
an exciting alternative to European WW1 gaming.
The ideas here are presented for the excellent
Through the Mud and the Blood rules, which,
with very small modifications, let us reflect this
conflict and the actions of its platoon and
company commanders.
I’ve chosen to concentrate on the smaller,
tactical actions of the conflict. The potential to
game the fighting of a regional column would be
a great, higher level game.
SPECIAL RULES:
Peacocks
“The Arabs have a rooted dislike to engage
themselves against defences, and when our
garrisons were besieged, generally
preferred to expend their ammunition
firing from cover into the camp” Haldane
The Iraqi forces represented in the following
scenarios are supplemented by other hangers-on.
These are essentially a rag-tag bunch who will
turn up whenever there is any fighting and take a
few pot shots in order to boast about their
exploits later without actually committing
themselves to the fight.
All Blinds will initially operate as these
“Peacocks”, counting as six men with older
weapons which may fire from Blinds without
deploying on the table. To represent their old
and unfamiliar weapons treat the target as in
one level of cover worse than normal.
When a Blind is spotted if it contains the real
Iraqi troops they will be deployed on the table
or, if the Blind is a dummy, it is removed, the
Peacocks assumed to have been dispersed.
In this way the British can never be sure is an
unspotted Blind is a real threat of just a bunch of
posturing Peacocks in search of vainglory.
Loot
“they show themselves particularly bold
when following up a retiring force and
were to be trusted to display great skill in
taking an immediate advantage of a fault
in dispositions” Haldane
At each “Snifter” the insurgent player may add
one additional figure for every two wounds
remaining on the British Force, representing the
Page 90
139
increased confidence of the wider group. They
may be placed on blinds within 12” of a big man.
Armoured Cars
These are worth a special mention as they were
prominent in the fighting in Iraq. Several rules
help represent their strengths and weaknesses.
Miring
The British armoured cars available to Haldane
were mostly “heavies” and were best suited to
the roads. If more 1’s than 6’s are rolled for
movement in a turn, the vehicle has mired. The
crew must roll a “5” or “6” on the next
movement dice to get going again. They may
attempt this each turn, however if they roll a 1
the armoured car has bogged in for the rest of
the game and will need towing out.
Primitive Anti-Armour Techniques
The insurgents realised fairly rapidly that the
armoured cars were susceptible to rifle fire, in
particular the shooting out of the pneumatic
tyres. A rifle group firing on a car may attempt
to concentrate its fire on the vehicle’s tyres. If
it does this the following rules apply:
x For each man firing roll one D6, every
“6” rolled will indicate a hit. The car
may roll against this with its level two
armour rating. A net hit indicates a tyre
blown.
x For every tyre blown, the car’s speed is
reduced by 1 movement dice each turn.
Close Combat
The insurgents found they could attack and
damage armoured cars in the close confines of
villages or if they could close with the vehicles.
An insurgent unit can assault a vehicle with one
attack dice per two men attacking providing they
have a further two men firing at the vehicle with
rifles to distract the crew. The armoured car
will treat such attacks as a normal anti-tank
attack and will use its amour rating in defence.

“[US Teams] attacked from the south,
covering the rural farmland and palm grove
expanse south of Kufa, [], allowing The US
forces the element of surprise and
unimpeded movement to [their objective].
Movement for [US teams] was canalized
and slow, and all vehicles, including tanks,
had to restrict maneuver to the roads.
Heavy fighting ensued when Crusader
reached PL Ginger, with the enemy
resisting from positions around an
abandoned police station and cemetery”
Major Todd E Walsh, USASC, December
2004
“The 8th Rajputs, supported by 1/15th
Sikhs, was forced to traverse country of a
more enclosed nature. As the force,
supported by artillery, approached the
insurgents position, the defence weakened,
and after an engagement of three and a
half hours, the ground the held was
captured” Haldane, 1920
A large Iraqi force, in total numbering some
three to three and a half thousand men, had
Page 91
140
taken up positions in the vicinity of Kufah. The
British forces were halted on the outskirts of the
town where the farmland and canals offered
cover for the insurgents. This terrain not only
limited the line of fire of the British, but
provided many entrenchments and cover for the
Iraqi’s.
BRITISH BRIEFING
You, Captain Griegson, are to move your
company to remove the Arabs from their
positions near the cemetery. They seem to have
dug in along the canal bunds and around the
palm groves adjacent to the temple itself. We
will lay on a preparatory barrage from the
columns 18pdrs and then it’s down to you.
With sharp memories of your time on the
Western Front, fighting the Hun from entrenched
positions similar to this; your lead platoon will
advance by bounds supported by the Lewis squad
and grenadiers. Battalion aren’t sure quite how
many of the Arabs are in position but your
experience to date suggests that quick,
aggressive action saves time and men. Faced
with a determined foe, the Arabs are prone to
lose their resolve quickly.
 141

Elements D Company, 8th Rajputs cover from small-arms fire, the other buildings
all provide hard cover when firing from inside,
Big Men albeit with limited windows, and medium cover
Captain Griegson, level III if firing from on the roof.
Subhudar Singh, Level II
Havildar Chuahan, Level I The British enter the table on the southern edge
Naik Sanga, Level I within 12” of the road. The Iraqis may begin the
HQ section, 2 runners, one two-man rifle game anywhere more than 24” from the southern
grenade team. table edge. The table is 6’ by 5’.
Lewis section, 1 Lewis Gun, 10 men
Rifle section, 10 men The British begin the game with one Blind per
Bombers, 6 men section and then 1D4 additional Blinds. The
Bayonet section, 10 men Iraqis have three Blinds plus 1D3 additional
Blinds which operate as Peacocks.
The platoon has been altered slightly from
standard Indian Army orbat to reflect Griegsons CARDS
likely response to the tactical situation facing his
British
company, based on his Western Front
experience. Players may want to experiment Captain Griegson
with their own assault formations, possibly Subhudar Singh
combining the riflemen, bayonet-men and Havildar Chuahan
bombers into combined sections.
Naik Sanga
Command Initiative I
The British bombardment is from a battery of
18pdr guns. Use table 10.2 to resolve the Command Initiative II
results. Command Initiative III
LMG Bonus card
AL SADDIM’S BRIEFING British Rally Card
Up and at ‘Em!
The British are advancing into the outskirts of
Iraqis
Kufah near the cemetery; you must stop them.
If it is Allah’s will you will send them running. Al Saddim
Take your men and use the canal bunds to Ali bin Farteen
provide cover Asheet M’hdrahz
Asheet M’hdrahz
Al Saddim, Level II
Ali bin Farteen, Level II Yupis Yussulf
Asheet M’hdrahz, Level I Command Initiative I
Yupis Yussulf, Level I Command Initiative II x 2
Jihad (Iraqis Rally)
Forty men, twenty with modern rifles and the
Insurgent Bonus Move
rest having older weapons (treat target as in one
level better cover for these) and five bombers. Ammunition Shortage
The insurgents were well-equipped with Game Cards
captured Turkish weapons, left over from the Time for a Snifter
war or imported from Iran, however not all of it British Blinds
was well maintained. Iraqi Blinds
The defenders may occupy prepared defences
HISTORICAL SUMMARY
offering good cover in the cemetery and palm
The hard fighting of the Indian troops pushed
groves. The canal bunds and canals themselves
back the insurgents who later fled the town.
act just like trenches, which is what they acted
These men, according to Haldane, “offered
as in the fighting.
excellent targets for the artillery and
UMPIRE’S NOTES aeroplanes” as the escaped across the open
The map represents the outskirts of Kufah and is desert.
a mix of open ground with a scattering of rough, The Iraqi forces were thought to be often
rocky ground which offers light cover. The bunds advised by ex-officers and NCO’s who’d served
are part of the flood defences and are dry at with the Ottoman army and made good use of
present, offering good hard cover to be treated terrain and protected and entrenched positions.
like trenches.
The total casualties for British forces were 18
The walled graveyard in the left-centre of the dead and 65 wounded, giving a good indication of
table has a five foot wall which provides medium the ferocity of the action.

Page 92

By August Haldane was occupied in consolidating
his forces in the country. From there he secured
towns and lines of communication, moving by
mixed columns of infantry, artillery and cavalry.
The insurgents reacted by attacking the fragile
lines of the old Turkish narrow gauge railway and
watering places.
Elements of the Royal Irish Fusiliers, supported
by armoured cars were providing a covering force
at the station near Khanakin. During the
afternoon of the 16th August, a body of tribesmen
attacked the small force at the station, making a
determined effort to cut them off and destroy
the position.
This fierce action lasted for over two and a half
hours and left at least 15 Iraqi’s dead plus more
wounded.
BRITISH BRIEFING
Major Edwards’ reconnaissance yesterday had
Page 93
142
been forced to fend off an ambush by some 40
insurgents, nearly cutting of his party. As a result
we are evacuating the essential staff and
engineers by train. To do this, we must ensure
that the line remains clear and that the station is
in full working order, in this heat the engines will
need a full replenish of water or they’ll never
make it back down the line.
You are Lieutenant Kerr Tomlinson of the Light
armoured Motor Battery. Attached to you is a
platoon of the Royal Irish Fusiliers, under an
experienced sergeant, O’Reilly. You’ve had a
chance to look over the place, the buildings are
thickly walled and well supplied, but the area is
full of rocky scrub and scruffy palm groves,
making clear field of fire difficult.
You are tasked to hold the station and protect
the civilian engineers, patrolling the line to
prevent any incursion from insurgents. Your
armoured cars are “heavies” and have reported
that the ground, off road, is hard going. The
Royal Irish have had time to prepare some
defensive positions, “borrowing” the spades and
supplies from the station to do so.
The train is due to arrive tomorrow morning,
good luck!
 143

Your force is as follows:

The buildings provide good cover, although as
Big Men with the first scenario they have a limited
Lieutenant Kerr Tomlinson Level III number of windows to fire from. Troops may
Sergeant O’Reilly Level III access the flat roof space where they will get
Corporal Finn, Level II medium cover. The walled section of the station
Corporal Kennedy, Level II is around seven foot high with an improvised
Lance Corporal O’Shaughnessy, Level I firing step.

Elements No2 Light Armoured Battery The rocky outcrops and the areas of trees
Two Austin Armoured Cars provide light cover however do remember to
Armour 2, 2 Vickers MMG in turret mounts, 5 apply the rules for the armoured cars potentially
crew each miring as the ground is less than ideal for them.
The British begin the game with their forces on
Elements C Coy, Royal Irish Fusiliers Blinds within 12” of the station buildings. They
Rifle Platoon: have six Blinds which they may use as they
HQ Section desire. The Iraqis begin the game with nine
2 Lewis Gun Sections, 1 Lewis gun with 10 men Binds in total, some of which are just
1 Rifle section, 10 men “Peacocks”. They may enter the table on any or
1 rifle Grenade Section, 6 men, 2 launchers all edges on turn one.

Light entrenchments/improved positions for CARDS

three sections have been built and may be British
emplaced at the player’s discretion.
Captain Tomlinson
INSURGENT BRIEFING Sergeant O’Reilly
The British forces have been forced into a Corporal Finn
shameful retreat across the region. Our attacks Corporal Kennedy
on their precious railways and roads have been Lance Corporal O’Shaughnessy
successful and many of us have gained new guns Command Initiative I x 2
and valuables along with great prestige as a Command Initiative II x 2
result. Command Initiative III
LMG Bonus card
Sheik Al-Khasalzar has gathered his kinsmen from
around Quraitu. Yesterday they ambushed a British Rally Card
force that was inspecting the railway. Today a Iraqis
greater raid is planned to destroy the station at Al-KHasalzar
Khanakin. The success of this will cut off the Mohammed Dhin
British and their allies from our region and allow Abdul Khan
us to secure our hold in the area. Alim Bhast
Sheik Al-Khasalzar, Big Man, level III Zufar Kabir
Mohammed Dhin, Level II Command Initiative I
Abdul Khan, Level II Command Initiative II x 2
Alim Bhast, Level I Jihad (Iraqis Rally)
Zufar Kabir, Level I Insurgent Bonus Move
Fifty 50 men, 20 with modern rifles. Ammunition Shortage
Five men with explosives (supplies of dynamite, Game Cards
looted from stores at Quraitu). Time for a Snifter
The dynamite is designed for destroying the British Blinds
station and track but players are welcome to use Iraqi Blinds
their imagination. There are two satchel charges
available. FOOTNOTE
Hopefully this short piece will provide inspiration
UMPIRE’ NOTES for some players to take Mud and Blood beyond
The map is centred around the railway station the Western Front and try it out for some of the
and its outbuildings which are set among harsh more exotic options which 1920s and 1930s
terrain with scattered rocky outcrops and scrub British Army can provide. There are plenty of
like vegetation with a few stunted trees that Middle Eastern terrain options around at the
provide much wanted shade on the hottest of moment and just a few dozen figures can provide
days. The railway line is atop a shallow a very different gaming experience.
embankment around three to four feet in height.

Page 94
 144

While I greatly enjoy Through the Mud and the As an overview of the West Front 1915-1918
Blood for gaming the First World War I have some of these statements are of necessity a
always been inclined to fight this conflict at a generalization. A study of specific battles will
somewhat higher level in order to get the chance provide exceptions but my focus is on when
to see how a full scale attack against a position significant changes were widely applied by the
formed to a network of defensive belts would major powers on the West Front.
work. Naturally my choice was to look to If the
Lord Spares Us to see if that could be adapted
to the war on the Western Front. Setting-Up the Game
The table used does not need to be an accurate
Trench warfare is essentially siege warfare. The representation of any particular piece of
defender is numerically the weaker but the first ground, indeed for the purpose of the game we
requirement for attack is the reduction of the use an abstraction of the trench systems
defensive obstacles that act as a force multiplier showing the attacker front line, no-man’s-land
baring any other way around them. High and three defender trench lines, each being
explosives delivered by artillery and mining was about eight to twelve inches apart with wire one
the usual method since aircraft were in their to two inches in front of each line.
infancy in the Great War. Artillery tactics also Communication trenches, weapon pits and
evolved during the conflict based on what observation posts can be scattered amongst this
resources were available and how various system. Opposing front lines were anything from
doctrines were developed. a few dozen to a thousand yards apart so no-
man’s-land can vary in depth.
Often prolonged, intense bombardments
characterized the Western Front during WW I.
Rather than focus on one battle that flared and
subsided over months I wanted an overview of
developments from 1915 to 1918. This is not an
artillery game and as a consequence we focus on
effect rather than cause; only the results of the
bombardment need to be determined. Since the
Allies did most of the attacking in the West the
shortage of heavy artillery and howitzers along
with the insufficient supply of quality HE shells
until late 1916 affected them most. Especially
since the Germans began with more of both and
when the front became static their main
defenses were sited on reverse slopes when
possible. The quantities of shrapnel shells were
most effective against troops in the open but The table represents the frontage of two
men learned to dig in quickly without being attacking battalions in line in their front line
ordered. Howitzers, mortars, and especially trench, a fairly typical arrangement for a
quality HE shells became essential. Brigade attack. In rough terms the distance
from the attacker’s jumping off point to the
enemy’s wire is 10" with the front line trench

Page 103

about one to two inches behind that.
Communications trenches run back to the
defender's second wire and trench line 8" further
back with the third line of trenches a similar
distance further back. Clearly distances can
vary with the scenario however these distances
have proved reasonable in our games.
For a typical game the attacker should have four
battalions, two of which begin the game in the
front line trench with a further two ready to
move up into those trenches when the first wave
goes over the top. If your game is set in 1915 -
1916 a company will have four bases. 1917
onwards a company has three bases unless
ANZAC, Canadian or US when it will still have
four bases.
Additionally a Brigade or Regimental command
base is needed along with two signal teams, one
officer, two HMG and one mortar bases for each
battalion. Three off-table heavy artillery
batteries are assumed to be there, but you don’t
need any figures for these. You can obviously
recycle figures as casualties occur to provide for
further waves in larger games, but we do like to
have five battalions available in case of low
casualties in leading battalion. Unless players
use a wider attack frontage four to five
battalions worth of miniatures is generally
enough for an attacking division of nine to
twelve battalions.
The defender will have just five companies on
table at the start of the game with strengths the
same as the attacker depending on the year.
Additionally they will have a Battalion
Headquarters (acting as a Brigade HQ in the
rules), three signal bases, one officer, one HMG
base per company and three mortar bases.
These defenders will be supported by two off-
table artillery batteries. At the start of the
game the defender uses a sheet of gridded
Page 104
145
paper, each box representing a 6” square section
of his defenses, to mark the location of his
forces. Historically the Germans developed the
tactic to hold their front line only weakly and
rely on counter-attacks to eject any allied
advance, however the player can choose exactly
how he wishes to deploy. Any underground
shelters should be marked, but they should not
be visible to the attacker.
The attacker in the meantime will be
considering his attack. He doesn’t need a map
as he can simply look at the terrain and decide
how he wants to deploy his troops and what his
key objectives are going to be. Most important
at this stage will be the development of a fire-
plan for his supporting artillery, as we shall see.
In Storm of Dice a day is represented by ten
turns. The attacker decides victory conditions
by choosing an attack with limited objectives
such as the capture of one or more trench lines,
a strategic village or wood, or a major
breakthrough attack to push through the
defenses on a wide front to exit off the
defender's edge. The objective determines how
many attacking battalions may be used. He
should note down just what he is looking his
attack to achieve but to keep it real the
defender should not know what that objective
is.
As in reality, more than one "day" may be played
as desired or required. In a longer game the
attacker is allocated all his forces at the start
regardless of how many "days" are to be played
or victory conditions. For a one day limited
attack three to five battalions is enough. If this
is to be a major breakthrough offensive then
nine to a dozen battalions may be required,
although plenty of these will be “recycled”
burned out battalions. If the battle is to
continue over more than one "day" the defender
 146

will receive reinforcements each "day", as will

be covered in the rules section below.
Storm of Dice Rule Changes
If the Lord Spares Us provides an excellent
starting point for our Western Front games, but
it is clear that the war in the Middle East lacked
some of the ferocity of that fought in France
and Belgium. The following rules are simply
bolted on to the rules as they stand.
ARTILLERY BOMBARDMENTS – THE FIRE PLAN
There are many permutations available with
barrages, and this is an area which could
undoubtedly be developed much further. For
simple game purposes we assume that the
barrage will move across the table, in turn
targeting the front line, the second line and the
third line defenses. This effectively mirrors the
Lifting Barrage of 1917 onwards but, as
mentioned, it does keep things simple.
The attacker will need to develop a fire-plan in
very simple format in which he determines how
many turns he wishes to fire on each of the
three lines. It is assumed that when targeting
each line any
effect can also
be applied to the
wire and also
that some of the
damage has been
caused by
preparatory
bombardment
before the game.
All he does is
note how many
turns each line
will be targeted
for; just like the
one we have
here.
We can see that this plan calls for eleven turns
of in-game bombardment, the first three turns
will be on the front line, followed by three turns
on the second line and finally five turns on the
third line of trenches. The bombardment will
automatically occur on the Tea Break card and is
assumed to be hitting their target accurately,
however any of the attacker’s companies or
weapons bases that are within 9” of the target
trench will roll 2D6. On a 10 that unit is
suppressed and may not move on the next turn.
On an 11 or 12 the unit loses one base to
friendly fire.
Unfortunately communications in the Great War
were limited and accounts of the conflict are
littered with attackers walking into their own
barrage or losing contact with it entirely. To
replicate this we roll a D6 from the Tea Break
card prior to each bombardment being
scheduled to end and consult the following
table.
Turn D6 Result
Schedule -1 1-2 Bombardment lifts early
and moves on
On Schedule 5-6 Bombardment continues
for one more turn
Any other result means that the bombardment
conforms to the fire plan. It would be possible
to construct a scenario specific version of this,
co-ordination improved as the war progressed.
ARTILLERY BOMBARDMENTS - EFFECT
While under bombardment no troops in the
affected position may fire or spot. After the
bombardment has lifted from each of the lines
we roll a D6 on the following table for each 12”
section of the line using the relevant row
depending on the period of the war, and then
consulting the bottom row which will show us

Allied Preparatory Bombardment Table

Date Roll a Dice for result
1915 1-2 3-4 5 6 -
January 1916 to August 1916 1 2-3 4-5 6 -
September 1916 to May 1918 1 2 3-4 5-6 -
June 1918 to December 1918 1 2 3 4-5 6
1919 1 2 3 4 5-6
Damage 2 4 6 8 10

German Preparatory Bombardment Table

Date Roll a Dice for result
1915 1-2 3-4 5 6 -
1916 to February 1918 1 2-3 4-5 6 -
Verdun February to April 1916 1 2 3 4-5 6
March 1918 to June 1918 1 2 3 4-5 6
July 1918 to 1919 1 2 3-4 5-6 -
Damage 2 4 6 8 10
Page 105
 147

how many points of damage have been caused.

Unit Unit onwards
When rolling for the effect on the second line
10 Artillery Artillery Germans use
trench apply a –1 to the roll, and for the third
Unit Unit Group A from
line trench roll with –2. This represents
11 Assault Assault 1915 to 1917,
decreasing accuracy and observation at longer
Unit Unit Group B for 1918
ranges, however “1” is the minimum result
12 Cavalry Tanks onwards
possible.

Each damage point will remove 3” wire, hit 3”
of trench or place a shell hole in open terrain. If
two hits are registered on the grid square where
an underground shelter is located then this will
be considered to have collapsed, killing the
occupants.
How we distribute depends on the pre-assault
methods used. From 1915 The French and
Germans closely examined the effects of their
bombardment before sending the first wave over
the top. If this reconnaissance showed defenses
too intact the attack would be delayed and they
would try to bombard them more (weakly
considering all the problems involved) or just
attack where defenses had been acceptably
damaged. In this case the Attacker removes the
damaged defenses.
The British tended to depend on the preparatory
attack bombardment and a rolling barrage early
on so would attack into the brown without
serious recon of damage inflicted; essentially a
war according to a timetable. In this case we
allow the Defender to pick what defenses are
removed allowing him to channel the attack as
much as possible.
What the reinforcements actually are will
depend on your own collection, but typically an
infantry unit will be a battalion, an HMG unit a
company, artillery a battery and cavalry a
Regiment. An assault unit could be
flamethrowers or an assault company. There
should be some flexibility here, for example the
HMG unit could be Sharpshooters or not, the
artillery could be heavy or field guns or even
mortars. Reinforcements will normally be troops
from the same nationality, however from 1918
onwards up to two US units may reinforce a
French force.
At the end of each game day the attacking force
may withdraw burnt out battalions and replace
them with fresh ones from their reserve.
Tanks are an exception, any tanks that the
attacker had in his force have to be committed
on Day One of the attack, no reserves may be
kept until perhaps 1919 if you are extending the
war to cover into that year.
CARD DECK ADDITIONS
As well as the standard cards used in If the Lord
Spares Us we add the following:

REINFORCEMENTS BROKEN LINE

If more than one ten turn "day" is played then Add two of these to the deck. When the next
the defender receives will get reinforcements at card is drawn the side it applies to loses one
the end of the first day. Consult the table below random signal base representing loss of
to see how many units arrive depending on the communication with forward troops. Brigade
year and nationality. HQ may spend one Command Pip on subsequent
turns, rolling a D6 and restoring the signal base
on a 5 or 6.
Defender Reinforcement Numbers
Year German French British US GAS POCKET
1915 3 3 1 - Add one card into the deck for each off-table
1916 5 5 3 - artillery battery firing gas. The next unit drawn
1917 5 5 5 - from either side loses all action for this turn and
1918 3 3 3 3 takes one suppression Point.
1919 1 1 3 5
AIR OBSERVER
Add one card for each side. This allows off
Now roll 2D6 for each unit of reinforcements table artillery deviation to be reduced to 1D6 +
that arrive, consulting the table below. artillery Spunk rating when the aircraft is over
the target.
Reinforcements
2D6 Group A Group B Notes COUNTER BATTERY FIRE
1-7 Infantry Infantry Allies use Group A Add one card per side. This prevents an enemy
Unit Unit in 1915, Group B battery on or off-table from firing that turn. The
8-9 HMG HMG from 1916 player chooses which battery he is targeting.

Page 106

GENERAL RULE AMENDMENTS
The following amendments are made to the
basic rules.
FIRING
To represent the use of Light Machine Guns Allied
Infantry or German Jager or Stoss troops from
1916 onwards add +1D6 to all firing. Some
German line may get this bonus from 1917.
Sharpshooter HMG and Jager, Stoss or Assault
troops have –1 Spunk
Flamethrowers at 3” range causes the target to
take a TDLIUE test with a +1 Spunk. Test before
resolving Close Combat if in range.
COMMAND AND CONTROL
Regiment or Brigade HQ bases are not allowed to
move after being placed on table at the start of
the game, however in a multi-day game they
may relocate once at the end of each game day.
Signal bases (runners and land lines) are very
important in maintaining communication with
forward troops. Signal bases have their
operational range reduced to 12” rather than 18”
to reflect the denser terrain of the Western
Front.
COMBAT
When fighting in trenches up to two friendly
infantry bases in column behind and in contact
with a fighting base may add 1D6 each in support
of the fighting base. The supporting bases are
not themselves firing or in Close Combat, but
represent the trench cleaners losses and supply
of grenades etc being replenished from the rear.
A side in trenches that loses a Close Combat
should retreat along the trench line if possible.
AIRCRAFT
Availability will depend on who has air
superiority at that time. This should be decided
as part of the scenarios or if you are playing a
more casual game it may be diced for before the
game begins with both sides rolling a D6, the
higher score having air superiority. The following
table will then be used whenever the Air support
card is dealt.
D10 Result
8-9 Air superiority aircraft appears
0 Air inferiority aircraft appears
Once an aircraft appears it must be given a
mission: Air Observer (artillery), Contact Patrol
(orders), Ground Attack (bombs and strafing in
main rules), or Combat Patrol (dogfight). These
Page 107
148
are represented as follows:
AIR OBSERVER
THIS aircraft is placed on the table adjacent to any
artillery target of the player’s choice. While
present any artillery fired at that target deviates
with only 1D6 + artillery Spunk rating. This card
replaces the Biggles or Hun in the Sun cards.
CONTACT PATROL
This plane may drop new orders to a unit that
has lost contact with its HQ. Place aircraft next
to friendly ground unit and test for any Archie
fire from enemy units nearby. If aircraft survives
the unit may have its orders changed. The
aircraft is then removed from play..
GROUND ATTACK
This aircraft will attack enemy ground forces in
subsequent turns.
COMBAT PATROL
This plane will fly “top-cover” above the table to
protect other planes or ground targets from
enemy air activity. If both sides have an aircraft
above the table at any time then test as per the
aircraft rules in If the Lord Spares Us. A dice roll
could be used to decide which is shot down or
driven off. If the side with air inferiority wins the
fight then dice again immediately to see if air-
superiority changes.
MOVEMENT
Movement is affected by the ground conditions
and familiarity with the area. To reflect this we
apply the following guidelines.
x Movement in the open counts as Bad
Going
x Movement in Flanders mud counts as
loose sand
x Movement in friendly trenches counts as
hard ground
x Movement in enemy trenches counts as
Bad Going
A stand moving in the open that wishes to enter
any trench uses the trench move rate when the
move could take it into the trench.
Shell holes and destroyed trench sections are
treated as Open Terrain for movement but are
Soft Cover for troops in them.
Cards
The cards in the Game Deck will follow the
pattern in If the Lord Spares Us, but with the
additions mentioned. Typically this will be one
for each attacking battalion, one for each
defending company, Brigade and battalion
Headquarters, two Broken Line cards, Five Gas
Pocket cards, two Air Observer cards, one for
 149

each side, and two Counter Battery Fire cards,

again one for each side.
Unit Description Spunk
Classification Rating
General Thoughts and Observations Old Regular troops BEF -1
The Germans placed the bulk of their defenses in Contemptibles 1914
their second and third lines with the front held Kaiser Bills Regular German 0
quite lightly. They depended on counterattacks troops 1914
to retake lost ground. The British held their Poilu Elan French elite troops – 0
front quite strongly while the French used their Zoaves, mountain
field guns to try to break up German attacks with troops, Foreign
field guns right behind forward lines. Gunners Legion, Spahi,
would know ranges to friendly lines so defending marines.
fire on own trenches occupied by the enemy Kaiser Bill German reserve 1
could be at reduced deviation to improve Reserves units
accuracy if called to fire upon them. (An early Saturday Boys Territorial and 1
form of Broken Arrow, things really don‘t change Yeomanry British
much!) German artillery lost effectiveness after troops 1914/1915
the Kaiserschlacht Offensive due to the inability Kukri Killers Indian troops 1914 1
to replace worn-out or lost guns.
Poilu French regular 1
Since the defenders usually begin outnumbered troops
and more spread out between the trench lines Poilu reserve French Reserve 2
one officer per company is used. In the case of a troops
more dense defense only one officer per
battalion is allowed just as in the main rules.
The ideas behind Storm of Dice is to provide a
The typical infantry attack would begin with foundation which gamers can use to develop
formed units and formations but by the time that their own scenarios to portray particular battles.
the enemy trenches were reached activity broke
down into knots of men clearing their way along We have found it possible to portray the
the line. To remain out of the trench to assault character of battles from 1915 through 1917 with
the next section exposed men to fire from every minor changes. We have used the tank rules from
possible source. The trench clearing rule If The Lord Spares Us and they did work okay
encourages support from the rear of the leading but we'd like to investigate this further along
assault stand by leaving supports less vulnerable. with seasonal day lengths, use of cavalry,
armored cars, different types of barrages and
Wire is placed within close combat range to national differences.
represent the grenade and small arms fight that
could develop if the attacker reached intact The trick here is, I believe to not get too tactical
wire. If they win they may remove 1 section of in detail. It should be more of a grand tactical
wire and move into the trench. game so more abstraction of tactics (as in trench
clearing) is necessary. Through the Mud and the
At the scale of If The Lord Spares Us a single Blood handles the tactical level well and it looks
base is the smallest group that can be like Sid is developing that even more ideas in
represented. For a regiment, brigade or that area.
divisional game this is appropriate. In a game of
this size we must focus on the view and activities
of battalion and higher command by accepting
greater abstraction at the company and platoon
levels. Scale as regards to the depth of the
three defending trench lines is also very
abstracted. Considering the ranges of modern
weapons this is of little concern and in any event
if a larger table is available the depth especially
can be increased.

Other rules in If the Lord Spares Us remain

unchanged but we use the suggested Leadership
Characteristics and additional Troop Quality for
the Western Front submitted by karl7609 to the
Yahoo Group. [I am reproducing them here with
acknowledgements to the author. Ed.]

Page 108
 150

One of the iconic images of the Great War is
the photographs of shell shattered woods,
broken and splintered trees silhouetted
against the sky, frequently with a solitary
soldier or two just visible.
Besides being a dramatic image, it’s also a
reminder of the pivotal role played by
numerous woods in the battles of the Great
War on the Western Front. Deville Wood,
High Wood, Trones Wood, Inverness Copse,
Polygon Wood, Bourlon Wood, Oppy Wood –
such a list could continue for some time.
Woods such as these were frequently
situated at critical points of the battlefield.
For a defender, woods could serve as
anchors of a defensive line, be a location to
which reinforcements and supplies might be
directed, could be used to canalise and
constrict attacking formations or to impede
an assault. For an attacker, fortified woods
would be places of danger, capable of
enfilading an attacking force, but offered
the promise of a location (once cleared of
the enemy) from which further attacks could
be made. Such tactical and strategic
reasoning ensured that woods played a
critical battlefield role, and were vigorously
fought over by both sides.
In a couple of conversations at Lard Island
over the past year, it became pretty clear
that a few of the club members were keen
for me to add a few wood boards to the
collection of trenches we’d built in 2009 for
the demonstration games of “Through the
Mud and the Blood” at Salute, Partizan and
Crisis in Antwerp. Here’s how I went about
building them.

Integration...
As we’d already invested a lot
of time in building modular
trench boards, I wanted the
new terrain to fit easily into
the existing trench board set
up. Ideally, I wanted to try
and make sure that someone
looking over all of the boards
wouldn’t know that the boards
had been built almost two
years apart. That took a bit of
planning, partly to match up
paint colours, materials and
contours and partly to make
sure the new boards just
“looked right” alongside the
older boards.

Page 112

I also wanted to establish the setting very
strongly in the eyes of my players. I wanted
to “set a time and a place” for the terrain,
both by super-detailing and by the overall
image of the terrain. Here’s Wilfred Owen’s
description of No Man’s Land from a letter
he wrote on 19 January 1917: “It is the
eternal place of gnashing of teeth. It is
pock-marked like a body of foulest disease
and its odour is the breath of cancer...No
Man's Land under snow is like the face of
the moon, chaotic, crater-ridden,
uninhabitable, awful, the abode of
madness.” I wanted to try, respectfully, to
recreate that feeling of an alien landscape
and to coax the players into a world where
“the shell-holes were mostly small lakes of
what was no doubt merely rusty water, but
had a red and foul semblance of blood”. A
place where the players would, in Edmund
Blunden’s words, imagine that “the days
were melancholy and the colour of clay”.
The memory of the diary entry by Corporal H
F Hooton about High Wood, was never far
from my mind: “Ghastly by day, ghostly by
night, the rottenest place on the Somme”.
Practicalities….
As well as recreating the feel of a Great War
wood, I wanted the new wood boards to be
practical, as well as dramatic. One of the
problems I’ve had in moving figures through
forests and woods is the difficulty of getting
hands into the woods themselves to move
figures without knocking over the trees. I
wanted to have the figures located in nice
looking terrain, but to try and make sure
that we could get to them to move them!
I also wanted to make sure that the woods
could be packed away neatly before and
after a game. For this reason, I wanted to
make sure that the trees were not
permanently fixed to the terrain board.
Finally, I wanted to get the maximum use
out of the woods once built, and not just
with the modular terrain. I wanted the
woods to look as if they are part of the
terrain board, but also be able to use them
on a tabletop as part of free-standing
terrain. I thought this way I could get twice
as much gaming out of the same terrain.
With this in mind, I sketched out a few
boards. To start with, I wanted a shell
blasted copse without trenches which could
Page 113
151
be used as a defensive strongpoint, or an
area needing to be patrolled or scouted
owing to it breaking lines of sight across the
front lines. This could be a contested area
for night-time patrols, a jumping off point
for an attack, or a bastion of desperate
defence. I had plans for a much larger
wood, but a single copse was where I
started.
I built the base board and added the
Styrofoam base as I’ve mentioned in my
previous article on building trench terrain in
the 2008 Christmas Special. The Wood was
built in exactly the same way with a base
board, 40mm Styrofoam base and a couple
of very small contours made from foam
board.
Building the woods…
I then decided to build a number of “bases”
of trees on the board, and cut the bases out
of non-warping marine plywood to a size of
4 inches square. These would be the bases
on which the shell damaged trees could be
positioned.
I then cut out a “frame” of plywood or
hardboard, basically constructed of strips of
plywood/ hardboard about an inch wide.
Once I’d positioned the bases where I
wanted them on the Wood board, I glued
down the strips to surround each of the
bases. I left enough room to wiggle the
bases and allow an easy access to lift the
base on an off the board.
Next, I wanted to make sure that the
plywood locating frames into which the
wooded bases can be slotted were not too
obvious and pronounced. I like using Milliput
for this sort of thing - it’s pretty cheap, very

hard when dry and easy to mould into shape.
Although the standard green Milliput is a
rough textured epoxy putty, as it was going
to be covered in PVA and gravel scatter later
in the terrain build, the rough texture didn’t
matter.
The Wood Bases
I whittled down a number of sturdy branches
which had fallen from trees in the garden
during the winter into something which
looked (at least to my eye) like the shell-
shattered woods found on the Western
Front. At this point, I confess that I had
some doubts about whether a collection of
branches and twigs from my garden could
ever look like a hellish wood shattered by
high explosive and drenched in mustard gas.
Somehow the twigs I’d selected looked….too
neat. There’s a balance, though, to be
found between building wargames terrain
and building a museum model. I tend to
stay on the side of terrain which is playable,
even if a little reality is sacrificed – but I’ll
not be the one to criticise anyone who wants
to carpet their model wood with the wood
splinters of shattered trees!
Page 114
152
I then took some off-cuts of Styrofoam and
glued the sticks into the Styrofoam, and
glued the Styrofoam to the 4 inch square
wood bases. I used a sharp drill and
manually carved out the holes into which
the sticks could fit snugly. I found that it
was very difficult to get the twigs to stick
properly to the base without some
Styrofoam into which the twigs could be
supported. I reasoned that I was building a
wood which had been shelled and scarred by
war, the contours of shell craters adding to
the natural undulations in the ground itself.
The Trees
One of the first things I wanted to do was to
make the trees look a little more varied and
less “stick-like”. I bought some plastic,
bendy tree armatures a while back and
these are great for bending into various
shapes. They were perfect for the smaller
branches which may not have been removed
by the shelling, and made the trees slightly
more varied. I drilled the sticks with a fine
hand drill and then glued in some small
armature branches with epoxy resin (less
brittle than superglue, as the trees may
have a fair bit of handling at Lard Island).
 153

I wanted some variety on the “woodland”

floor as well as in the trees. I cut some tufts
from an old piece of rubber-backed floor
matting and cut some suitable grass patches
from an old set of towelling which I had
dyed dark brown. The towelling can be
painted with PVA and water based paint and
makes a super-robust substitute for grass
scatter when it’s dry.

Then I rustled up a pretty unpleasant

mixture of dark brown paint, Polyfilla and
PVA glue in an old container which I spread
onto the terrain board and wood sections
with an old brush. I tend to do this pretty
liberally, as the Polyfilla adds a slight
contour. Then, as with the other terrain
boards, I scattered loose gravel and sand
over, and pressed the brown towelling
patches into, the brown PVA sludge. I found
it easiest to cut the towelling terrain to
shape while the Styrofoam base is free from
the PVA/Polyfilla mix, as it takes a bit of
time to ensure you cut around the various
shell holes, trenches and so on.

After the brown sludge is painted on, the

gravel and sand scatter make the whole

Page 115
 154

terrain board and the wood bases look a lot around. There are loads of great tutorials on
better…. the internet telling you how to make these,
so I won’t repeat the advice here. Suffice to
say I made the sandbags with Milliput,
pressing them out using a cloth (to indent a
fabric pattern on the putty) and finished the
detailing using a sculpting tool and a pin.

I’ll accept that the pin might have been

going over the top a little ! That being said,
I thought that adding the sandbag stitching
was a fun thing to do on a couple of the
sandbags. [Weirdo! Ed.]

As you can see below, the idea is to get a

double use out of the woods – so they can be
used on a normal non-modular terrain table,
as well as each having a custom place
slotted onto their home on the terrain
board.

Finally, I wanted to have some of the trees

with longer roots, again trying to make them
seem more natural. I did this for a couple of
trees, but found it really painstaking. I
thought it looked good a couple of times,
but perhaps a little bit too much to do for
each of the trees on the wood terrain board.

I wanted the trees to stand up to a lot of

handling by wargamers at Lard Island. As
you will know, not all wargamers have thin,
delicate, elfin fingers. I therefore coated
the twigs and armatures liberally in a
Polyfilla/PVA glue mixture to prolong their
lifespan. (For obvious reasons, this is best
done after you have finished scattering
gravel around!)
I’d also made a couple of inserts in the wood
board to enable me to use the inserts as
machine gun posts and then to replace them So that left the terrain board and the wood
with different inserts to be built later – ready to paint and finish off.
things like fortified gun positions, crashed
aircraft, artillery bunkers. For the moment, I The paints I used were mainly household
was happy to finish up the two inserts as a emulsion and some acrylic craft paints
couple of interchangeable machine gun/ called “Louvre” and some Plaka paints. Both
mortar/ command pits in the terrain board, of them are inexpensive, give a decent matt
and wanted these to have some sandbags

Page 116

finish and mix well with great covering
consistency. For the fine detail painting –
the corrugated iron and planking in the
inserts, and the fallen leaves, I just used
Vallejo acrylics. The sandbags were finished
off with a mix of both – a covering of craft
acrylics and a dry-brush of Vallejo Khaki
mixed with white.
I don’t normally bother varnishing scratch-
built terrain, but I ran a quick coat of
Page 117
155
household matt varnish over the plastic-card
corrugated iron and the sandbags just to
make sure that the paint was covered where
it was likely to be scuffed.
So, there we have it. A pretty inexpensive
way to add a shell shattered wood or copse
to a Great War set up, whether modular
terrain or as a free-standing set up.

The German colony at Rabaul learned of the
outbreak of war in Europe on the 5th of August
1914. By the 12th of September all outlying
German wireless stations were out of operation
and the colony was isolated from outside
information except for wireless intercepts.
The colony had no standing army, only a mobile
expeditionary force of natives to provide escorts
for the nine District Officers. The force had
been increased from 125 to 240 native police
armed with Mauser rifles. There was no artillery
and the only machine gun was taken by the
German gunboat “Planet” in August. Two active
officers, Rittmeister von Klewitz and
Oberleutnant Mayer, seven reserve officers and
forty reserve NCO’s along with twelve untrained
Germans who were familiar with the land were
available for military service.
Both von Klewitz, in overall military command,
and Mayer, commanding the mobile force,
considered the native soldiers to be of inferior
quality because they were drafted from the
outlying police districts. The District Officers
had naturally kept the most intelligent and
fittest police with them, therefore the available
colonists were divided to provide stiffening to
the native force rather than grouped into one
company. The local police were ordered to
offer no resistance to occupation and only
maintain order in the settlements.
The only wireless station was at Bitapaka
guarded by Hauptmann Wuchert with eight
Germans and sixty natives. His orders were to
retire fighting from the coast towards Bitipaka.
Page 14
156
The wireless station was not to be captured in
working order under any circumstances.
Withdrawal from Bitapaka was to be further
inland.
Von Klewitz believed that two to three hundred
men could hold off an occupying force by using
the jungle, broken terrain and climate.
Governor Dr. Haber ordered that a reserve
wireless station be constructed at Talil, about 25
miles inland. This was completed by the 9th of
September but the receiving equipment was
found defective.
The colony was suffering from drought and food
was short because overseas shipping had
stopped. Therefore it was decided that if the
German Pacific Squadron was lost or left and
strong landings by Australia or Japan were made
surrender should be negotiated.
The main German concentrations were:
Oberleutnant Mayer with ten Germans, 140
natives at Herbertshohe; Hauptmann Wuchert,
eight Germans, sixty natives near Kabakaul;
Leutnant Fiebig, ten Germans, 24 natives near
Toma. Other smaller mixed parties were place in
good observation positions.

On 11 September an Australian squadron landed
25 troops under Sub-Lieutenat Webber at
Herbertshohe meeting no resistance. Another
35 men under Lieutenant Bowen landed at
Kabakaul with orders to capture the wireless
station supposed to be somewhere inland.
Leaving ten men as connecting files with the
beach Bowen proceeded up a narrow road with
25 men. He encountered a Chinese trader at a
crossroad who pointed out the way to the
station.
Led by a section under Petty Officer Palmer the
party moved cautiously through the bush parallel
to the narrow road. Some of the bordering bush
was impassible and stepping into the road
Palmer spotted a German and some natives.
Opening fire he wounded and captured the
German who was made to call out that 800
Australians were advancing down the road. Two
other Germans hearing the wounded man call
came forward to find themselves surrounded also
surrendered. One was Hauptmann Wuchert, the
other Leutnant Mayer who, hearing of the
Kabakaul landing had taken three Germans and
twenty natives to investigate. Mayer’s
remaining Germans and native soldiers were left
at Takubar near the coast. Together Wuchert
and Mayer were scouting ahead of a force of five
Germans and twenty natives under Leutnant
Kempf occupying a trench across the road about
500 yards back. Thus the two senior German
officers in the area were taken and a detailed
map of the road captured with them.
Lieutenant Bowen, learning that the Germans
Page 15
157
were ahead in force called for reinforcements.
Lieutenant Hill was sent from the ships along
with fifty men, some with only pistols. A
company under Lieutenant Gillam and Lieutenant
Commander Elwell was also landed to be
followed by Lieutenant. Bond with another
company and Captain Harcus with a MG section.
Meanwhile Lieutenant Bowen moved ahead.
Dense bush and rifle pits along the road favored
the defense. When the trench across the road
was seen the advance halted until Lieutenant
Hill arrived. A small decoy flanking force was
sent to the left while the main attack would be
to the right. Lieutenant Bowen was wounded in
the attack. Hill took command until Lieutenant
Commander Elwell arrived at which point Elwell
ordered Hill to attack on the left while he
attacked on the right. Elwell was killed leading
his men forward but the natives defending the
trench could no longer be induced to fire. With
both flanks turned and greatly outnumbered
Leutnant Kempf reluctantly surrendered after
long discussions in which he agreed to end
resistance and surrender Bitapaka.
A half-company with the Machine Gun section
under Lieutenant Bond accompanied by Leutnant
Kempf were then sent to take possession of the
wireless station at Bitapaka. Remaining
resistance was very weak and a German carrying
orders to dismantle the wireless was captured.
At Bitapaka the equipment was found
undamaged though the masts had been cut
through.

There are varying accounts of the fighting near
Bitapaka. This is to be expected with different
perspectives of events, especially in close
country. The scenario very loosely follows real
events with the Imperial troops racing to get to
the wireless station before it is dismantled.
Ultimately the Germans are in a no-win
situation, however they can serve the Kaiser one
last time by stopping important resources falling
into enemy hands. Unfortunately their native
troops are also aware that this is not a fight they
can win, and their enthusiasm is understandably
wanting.
The Table
The table is ideally around 6’ by 4’ largely
covered with jungle. A beach lies at one end
then a narrow road about three figures wide with
several curves extends the length of the table,
splitting into two around half way to the far end.
Jungle borders the road closely and undergrowth
is dense. The German player may place three
15” sections of trench between 12” and 30” from
Page 16
158
their end of the table, only one of which may be
occupied. It extends into the jungle on both
sides of the road for 6”. Visibility on the road is
Slightly Obscured, in the jungle it is Obscured
including the trench in both cases. All German
Blinds must be spotted twice. Once to identify
them as actually being there and then again to
see what they represent.
Australian movement in the jungle is -2 pips per
dice, on the road there is no penalty. German
movement in the jungle is -1 pip per dice due to
their familiarity with the terrain with no penalty
on the road or in the trench.
All shooting and spotting ranges are halved. Men
in jungle, including native soldiers in the trench
extensions are in Medium cover. Men on the road
are in the Open. Native soldiers in the trench are
in Light cover.
Native soldiers in the trench who have more
Shock than men will hide in the trench and do
nothing until their Shock level is reduced. If any
additional kills are inflicted on hiding troops
these are counted as two additional Shock points
instead of removing a man. When they have
three times the amount of Shock as men
remaining they will surrender.
German and Australian Big Men who are Seriously
Wounded or Killed may not be replaced.
German Briefing
Leutnant Kempf has been ordered to hold the
trench with 15 natives led by Feldwebels Ritter
and Schipmann. Your commander, Hauptmann
Wuchert went down the road towards the beach
a while ago and hasn’t been seen since.
Six numbered locations (1 – 6) about 9” apart at
least 6” from the road should be designated by
the German player. When the Blank Card is
drawn roll a D6 on the following table to see if
anything arrives:
Roll Arrivals
1 One Dummy Blind
2 1D6 unarmed civilians
3 One sniper
4 Dummy Blind
5 One sniper
6 German Big Man (I) with 4 native troops
 159

Now roll a D6 to see at which location these The Cards

arrive at. Add 1 Level I Initiative Card for every
two German Big Men with native soldiers that Australians
appear as reinforcements. Lieutenant Bowen, Status III
Petty Officer Palmer, Status II
Native troops are Green and have Poor morale Midshipman Buller, Status I
and must be in the influence range of a German Runner
Big Man or will do nothing but hide. If in close Command Initiative I
combat and the German Big Man is even lightly Command Initiative II
wounded they will surrender. Australian Blinds
Australians Rally
Reinforcements I
Australian Briefing Lieutenant Hill, Status II
Lieutenant Bowen has been landed at Kabakaul Leading Seaman Harris, Status I
with twelve riflemen led by Petty Officer Palmer Leading Seaman Hampton, Status I
and Midshipman Buller with orders to find and Command Initiative I
capture the wireless station that is supposed to
be somewhere inland. En route he is shown a Reinforcements II
narrow road leading toward the station by a Lt Commander Elwell, Status II
Chinese trader. Reinforcements from the ships Lieutenant Gillam, Status II
offshore are available if resistance is met. To Lieutenant Bond, Status II
get them you must send a runner back to the Command Initiative II
beach (your entry edge) and the reinforcement Germans
will immediately appear there. The runner will Leutnant Kempf, Status III
move on his own card after being ordered by the Feldwebel Ritter, Status II
Lieutenant. Lieutenant Bowen’s group starts Feldwebel Schipmann, Status II
20” onto the table. Sniper
Command Initiative I
If called for the reinforcement will consist of Command Initiative II
Lieutenant Hill with 15 men, two Level I leaders, German Blinds
leading Seamen Harris and Hampton, and one Cards for reinforcements as relevant (see above)
Maxim HMG. A reinforcement card is put into
the deck as soon as Hill’s men are on the table.
When this card has been drawn three times
additional reinforcements under Lt. Commander
Elwell and Lieutenant Bond with 20 men arrive at
the beach.

Lieutenant Bowen has captured three Germans,

two of whom are officers. A map of the road and
location of the wireless station is found on the
officers. Roll a D6 to see which fork leads to the
radio station.

All the Australians are Green troops with

Reasonable morale.

Winning for King or Kaiser

Roll 1D6 each time the Snifter card ends the turn
and keep a running total of the pips rolled. The
Australians must capture the trench and reach
the German side of the table before the total
reaches 60 or the wireless station will have been
dismantled and removed. If the Australians fire
on unarmed civilians roll an additional D6 and
add to the Victory time total.

Page 17

ThebattlesofThirdYpresin1917,whichare
known more generally by the name of the
final battle in the sequences of offensives –
Passchendaele  have become a dark and
bitter place in British public memory.  The
collectivememoryformanyBritishpeopleis
of mud, blood, suffering and military
incompetence.  Many historians, perhaps
particularly those of the post Second World
War period, have referred to Passchendaele
in a negative context.  One referred to the
campaignas“asynonymformilitaryfailure–
anameblackborderedintherecordsofthe
British Army”.  Another described the
battlescape of the Ypres Salient leading to
Passchendaelevillageasbeingthe“sacrificial
ground”ofBritishandImperialforces.
Such collective public memories and
historiographyweighheavilyonanyattempt
topresentPasschendaele,oranyoftheThird
Ypres battles and offensives, as a wargame.
Although there have been a number of
“revisionist” historical writings in the last 15
years which have sought to rebalance the
interpretation of Passchendaele, it is one
thing to balance historical accounts of
campaignobjectives,casualtiesandstrategic
results.  It’s quite another to produce a
wargame from the same material which is
playable, historically accurate and above all,
fun.
Page 35
160
ThisarticleintheChristmasSpecialfor2011
is all about how I tried to create awargame
fromthatstartingpoint.
TheChallenge
LikealmosteverywargamerI’vemet,Ithink
about the morality of my hobby.  By this, I
don’t mean that I agonize over whether it’s
rightorwrongtowargamehistoricalactions.
Iknowmanyfriendsinthehobbywhoprefer
nottorecreatehistoricalactions–forthem,
therecreationofthedeathsofrealpeoplein
a game setting is something they feel
uncomfortable with.  I completely respect
thatapproach.
However, my approach is to take another
route in exploring the moral aspect of
wargaming. I see historical wargaming as
commemoration, as a personal way of
remembering the deaths of those who died
in battle and as a way of attempting to
deepen an understanding (however shallow)
of why they died.  To me, this approach is
well suited to wargaming Third Ypres, and
Passchendaeleinparticular.TheThirdYpres
campaign has been called a “senseless”
battle resulting in “needless sacrifices for
uselessground”of“nomilitarysignificance”.
The wargames I’ve staged covering the
campaignhavepartlybeentotryandredress
thatbalance.Asamethodofcomplimenting

personalremembrance,Iwouldsuggestthat
wargaminghasmuchtoofferinthisregard.
I can understand your concerns if you think
thatthisapproachmightmakewargamingan
unduly sombre affair. I did not find this.
Wargaming is a social experience, just as
soldieringis.ThewargamersIsatroundthe
tablewithasweplayedthroughthegamesin
this article may well have been very similar
friends to those I would have sat in a
waterloggedshellcraterwithhadIbeenborn
just70yearsearlier.Myviewonthegames
wehaveplayedisthateachoftheplayersat
Lard Island has taken something away from
trying to recreate Third Ypres on the
tabletop, and that a component of that
experiencehasbeenenjoyment.
So,whyPasschendale?
The more I read about the Third Ypres
campaign, the more I became intrigued.  It
was a very different environment, both
natural and military, from other Western
Front battlefields.  As a military campaign it
touchedanumberofextremes.Thefighting
was intricate, complex, intensely
orchestrated, and represented the pinnacle
of modern warfare and tactical thought at
thattime.Smallunittacticsevolvedrapidly,
alongside technological developments and
theintroductionofnewweapons.
Thelargescaleindustrialisationofwarfarein
the campaign was also unprecedented –
whetherintermsofartilleryortanknumbers
deployed, or by reference to the sheer
weightofammunitionexpended.
Finally, the condition of the ground and the
weather (at least at certain, critical parts of
the campaign) was exceptional.  If extremes
of experience make for interesting history,
andthereforepromisingwargamingmaterial,
Third Ypres should be at the forefront of
engagements to recreate.  So …. why hasn’t
Third Ypres been a popular wargaming
subject?
 participants concerning the battle, there are

Page 36
161
“I died in hell – (They called it
Passchendaele)”
The most famous line of literature written
aboutThirdYpresandPasschendaelehintsat
the reason why Passchendaele is so difficult
towargame.Thecampaignwasverymucha
“soldier’sbattle”,inwhichthebattleagainst
theenvironmentinwhichmenfoughtwasat
least as challenging as the actions of the
enemy.
Also, the “soldier’s battle” was made
infinitely more hellish by the utter
dominance of artillery  barrages, frequently
ofsuchdevastatingforcetoobliterateenemy
formations (on both sides).  Tactics had
advancedbutonlytothestagethat,without
radios and a truly mobile battlefield
alternative to infantry, massed artillery
bombardment remained the key to both
tactical and strategic success in the field.
Against creeping barrages, box
bombardments, superheavy artillery, rail
guns and Stollenknicker (shells targeted to
smash pillboxes), the tabletop wargaming
potentialseemsvastlydepleted.Whowants
to line up wargames figures to see them
taken off almost immediately when the
“symphonyofhell”startstoplay?
I’ve therefore come away from wargaming
Third Ypres with the conclusion that, while
integratingalltheelementsofwarfareinthe
Ypres Salient and producing a viable game
does take a little thought, it is far from
impossible.  Reading the accounts of
anumberofkeythemeswhichfitwellwithin
the confines of a tabletop wargame.  These

themesarewhatIcametothinkofasthekey
tacticalelementsoftheThirdYprescampaign
and Passchendaele: evolutionary smallunit
tactics; terrain; artillery; and military
technologicaldevelopment.
Tactics
British smallunit tactics evolved rapidly in
1917.  As mentioned in the annexes of
“ThroughtheMudandtheBlood”rulebook,
the 66page SS135 Instructions for the
trainingofdivisionsforOffensiveActionand
the 15page SS143 Instructions for the
trainingofplatoonsforoffensiveactionwere
vitally important manuals in developing
coordinated platoon attacks combining
firepower and manouvere.  These tactical
doctrines were amplified with specific
procedures to tackle the numerous German
bunkers which had been positioned in the
Salient.
The Germans has commenced construction
of deep defensive works following the
closure of Second Ypres in 1915, each
defensive line covering a broad swathe of
groundwithinterconnecteddefensiveworks
Page 37
162
offering interlocking fields of fire. Pre
fabricated concrete bunkers or MEBUs
(Mannschafts Eisenbeton Understände),
known to the British as “pillboxes” were the
cornerstoneoftheGermandefensivelinesin
Flanders.  They gave protection against
shelling, provided troops with
accommodation and came in a variety of
sizes.  Some were built “blind” without
embrasures, merely allowing shelter against
artillery fire.  Some, with embrasures, were
designed to hold key ground, channel and
breakup attacks and it was this type which
became a thorn in the side of the attacking
BritishandImperialformations.
Sometimes these fortifications were built
into existing farms, other times the bunkers
wereclusteredaroundparticularlyimportant
features of the battlefield such as streams,
crossroads, on reverse slopes and in deep
woods.  Their low elevation made spotting
the bunkers difficult, particularly when
covered in mud by their defenders.  Ever
resourceful,theGermans,beingas“cleveras
cats”ensuredthattherearfacingsideswere

far less reinforced with concrete than the
front,makingthebunkeranuncertainhaven
in the event of capture by the British.  The
bunkers formed the fulcrums in a defensive
structure which would also include close
supporting weapons such as
granatenwerfers, minenwerfers and snipers,
eachofwhichwasdeployedwiththeaimof
breakingup attacks on the defensive lines.
Theirtacticalsignificancewaslostonneither
side;althoughsomeGermanfrontlinetroops
in bunkers surrendered quickly when faced
withoverwhelmingBritishattacks,manyheld
on to the grim end.  When the end came,it
could frequently be savage – whether
throughgrenadesbeingthrownintotherear
entrances of the bunker or the occupants
killedwithoutquarter.
Much has been written about the evolution
of German defensive tactics as following a
flexible and indepth doctrine which
undoubtedly hampered British progress in
thedifficultterrainoftheSalient.However,
theintricaciesoftheGermanelastic,flexible
defense,suchasthedifferentapproachesto
using Eingreif (“counterattacking” or
“interlocking”) divisions, is difficult to
replicate at the smallscale of “Through the
Mud and the Blood”.  We found it easier to
focusonthechallengestoGermandefensive
coordination on their front line, a process
whichwouldbeledbylocaljuniorofficersor
Kampftruppenkommandeur (KTK).  These
officers would have been deployed in a
forward position, known as the AStellung.
The KTK was the key officer in the forward
sector,withresponsibilitiesexceedingthatof
a normal battalion commander. He would
have significant local autonomy over a front
line area usually kept to a width of 400
metres in order to ease command and
control difficulties.  Within this sector, the
KTK had complete devolved power of
command, managing resources and
defensive tactics irrespective of his junior
rank.  It was up to the KTK to decide when
and where to deploy supporting forces,
whichwouldcomeunderhisdirectcommand
when committed.  Whenever possible, he
Page 38
163
would be located, with a small staff, in a
concrete blockhouse, although on occasions
hemaybeforcedtooperatefromatrenchor
a shell crater as an emergency measure.  A
number of the scenarios which follow
attempt to recreate the skill and bravery of
the KTKs as they struggled to hold back the
tideofBritishandImperialattacks.
TheGermanflexibledefensedoctrineusedat
Third Ypres forced British tactics to evolve.
Britishplatoontacticsfocusedonmaintaining
fireonGermanpositionswhichhadescaped
the artillery onslaught, with Lewis guns
trainedonbunkerembrasures,riflegrenades
saturatingtheareatotherearofthebunker
and manouvere sections such as bombers
and riflemen outflanking the bunkers to
attack through the rear entrances.  Faced
with such tactics, the German responded
with attempting to heavily wire the
approaches to defensive lines and to push
scattered machine gun teams forward of
their positions and, it was hoped, the main
British barrage. The idea was that the
microscopically small individual weapons
teams would escape destruction by artillery
and spring to life to enfilade the flanks and
rearofBritishformationsastheypassed.
Whilethesmallunittacticsonbothsideshad
notablesuccesses,astheThirdYpresbattles
progressed and the weather turned for the
worse, both sides found tactics constrained.
In bad conditions, advancing in anything
approaching a rigid line was impossible.
Extended lines were preferred to force
German forces to disclose hidden positions,
“with the remainder in small groups or in
filesreadytodealwith unexpectedmachine
gunsorpartiesoftheenemy”.Oftenthough,
it was a case of merely slogging forward as
bestonecould.Formaldeployment,suchas
in diamond formations of platoons simply
was impossible at times: “The Mud was
dreadful.Itwasimpossibletowalktheridges
betweentheshellholes.SoIgavetheorder
to open into a formation of sections” wrote
Captain Godfrey Buxton of 1/6 Duke of
Wellington’s.

Mud
“Youcannotconceivewhatthegroundis
like.  The last sector we were in was a
solid mass of shell holes practically
touching each other and mostly full of
water.  The ground was very low lying
and sluggish streams, mostly mud and
marsh” Major Claude Worthington,
6/Manchesters.
The cheery reassurance of Sir James
Edmonds,theBritishOfficialHistorian,inthe
contextofThirdYpresthat“mudinwarisnot
unusual” seems hard to better as an inapt
comment on the state of the terrain over
which Third Ypres, and Passchendaele in
particular, was fought.  The terrain and
weather atThird Ypres were a supreme test
ofasoldier’smindandbody.Thedestruction
of the intricate Flanders drainage system by
warfare was compounded by an unusually
wet July and Autumn which turned the
Flanders soil into a heavy, gluelike mud.  In
the context of platoon tactics, mud
Page 39
164
hamperedeffectiveoperations.Itdislocated
advances.  It rendered weapons useless: in
late October 1917 at Passchendaele, one
Britishofficercalculatedthatthemudwasso
thick and pervasive that a Lewis gun would
beuselessinthreeminutes,allcoveredrifles
would be useless within 10 minutes and all
uncovered rifles would be useless at all
times.  There are accounts of troops
attacking the enemy with a variety of
improved weapons once their rifles were
clogged.“Ourriflesandmachinegunswere
now useless, being gummed up with mud
and we had to use hand grenades and then
pick handles in close combat”.  One
desperate Company Sergeant Major even
used a Verey pistol to kill a German pioneer
carryingaflammenwerfer.
The mud also made navigation difficult.
“Therearenolandmarksatall,andtogetour
way I had to go entirely by the contours on
the map”, Captain Godfrey Buxton noted.
Roads, trees, farms, landmarks were

frequentlyobliteratedinthefighting.Inone
attack at Graf House on 3rd November, the
42ndBattalionofRoyalHighlandersofCanada
simply failed to find their objective.  Units
wandered off course, formations became
muddled, communication routes and
duckboards became congested or were
subjectedtoconstantshelling.
Justasmovementwasdifficult,signalingwas
near impossible by the autumn.  Pigeons
could not fly with being saturated in mud,
runners got bogged down or arrived utterly
exhausted after hours of struggling.  “More
difficulty was experienced in maintaining
communicationsonthisoccasionthanIhave
hitherto experienced during the War”
observed MajorGeneral Cator of 58th
Division.
It was unsurprising that in these atrocious
conditions, fire and movement tactics were
compromised and a disproportionate effort
was required for minimal advances over a
featurelesswasteland.Movementitselfwas
difficult, as William Thomas from The Daily
Mail observed on 2 August 1917: “The rain
has so fouled this low, stoneless ground,
spoiled of all natural drainage by shellfire,
thatweexperiencedthedoublevalueofthe
early work,for today moving heavy material
was extremely difficult and the men could
scarcely walk in full equipment, much less
dig.Everymanwassoakedthroughandwas
standingorsleepinginamarsh.Itwasawork
ofenergytokeeparifleinastatefittouse.”
And, perhaps most infamously, the very
ground was an enemy waiting its moment.
ThewellknownImperialWarMachinesound
recordingofWarrantOfficerRichardTobinof
the Hood Battalion remains chilling to this
day: “There was no chance of getting
wounded and getting a blighty one at
Passchendaele.Youcouldeithergetthrough
ordie,becauseifyougotwoundedandyou
slippedofftheduckboardsyoujustsankinto
the mud. Each side was a sea of mud. You
stumbled and slid along. If you slipped you
went up to the waist, not only that but in
every pool you fell in there were
Page 40
165
decomposedbodiesofhumansandmules.If
youwerewoundedandslippedoff,wellthat
wastheendofyou.”
Artillery
The sheer scale of artillery at Third Ypres
provides one of the signatures of the battle.
One estimate is that 33 million shells were
fired overall in the four months of battle by
the British Army alone, with a weekly
consumption of between 2 and 3 million
shells.  On numerous occasions, the
aftermath of a creeping barrage could be
astonishing, as when Lieutenant Cyril
Lawrence looked over Polygon Wood in late
September 1917: “on our left, the shattered
remains of Polygon Wood – gone –
absolutelywipedout–simplyamassofhuge
splintered trunks and matchwood lying
everywhere.Infront,twoorthreepillboxes
stand up like warts … and everywhere,
everywheretheseaofgreatshellholes,lipto
lip–notatraceofgrass,oftheformsofthe
hedges or the fields remains – just one
heavedupmassofturnedupearth”.Besides
thesheerbrutalityofartilleryattheforefront
of an offensive, Third Ypres saw increasingly
sophisticated artillery plans being used by
bothsides.Theintentionwasnottodestroy
the enemy but rather to achieve
neutralization for a period of time, to
interdict the enemy’s supplies and reserves,
to target formation areas and duckboard
tracks and to deny areas to the enemy.  As
one soldier wrote “the duckboards were
taped by the Germans and he was shelling
the whole time”.  Accounts of nightmarish
journeysthroughthelandscapeoftheSalient
to the front areas under heavy shellfire
appear with great regularity in writings on
ThirdYpres.
In this last context, the German use of
mustard gas (not developed by the British
until 1918) to persistently deny
contaminated ground to their enemy and to
harass British artillery batteries, was a
significant technological advantage over the
BritishduringthefirstphasesofThirdYpres.

Tactical advantages were also enjoyed by
German artillery such as use of multiple
batterypositionsaroundwhichartilleryguns
could be moved, use of rear slope positions
which were difficult to observe from British
lines and also the converging effect of
Germanartilleryaroundthecircumferenceof
the Ypres Salient.  These advantages went
some way to balancing the British and
Imperial superiority in both artillery pieces
and shells, although as the battle wore on
into a muddy autumn British gunners were
finding it increasing difficult to obtain stable
groundonwhichtheirgunscouldbereliably
andconsistentlylocated.
TheNewExcalibur
The pace of development of military
technologykeptalongsidethatoftactics.As
mentioned above, German use of artillery
fired gas shells and mustard gas was
significantthroughoutThirdYpres.
German close air support tactics were also
pioneering.  German tactics appear to have
beeninfluencedbyBritishaircraftconducting
ground attacks during the Somme in 1916.
One captured German document, dated 10
June1917,statesthat“[i]nfantryandfighting
aeroplanes,bytakingpartininfantrybattles
Page 41
166
and by firing on enemy reserves and
garrisons,canexerciseagreatmoraleffect”.
By early 1917, German aircraft were
sporadically engaging ground targets in
conjunction with German counterattacking
tactics (at Gavrelle in April 1917 and
LombardyinJuly1917).BySeptember1917,
attacks were becoming more frequent and
bettercoordinated.EightlowflyingGerman
twoseaters attacked Australian 2nd Division
artillery at Menin Road on 20 September
1917, with LVG C.Vs being deployed in
supportofGermanforcesfightinginPolygon
Woodon26September1917.SeveralBritish
accountsnotethepresenceofverylowflying
German aircraft raiding, harassing and
strafingBritishtroops.Someoftheseattacks
were conducted as low as 30 feet.  The
German Schlachtflieger “must have helped
theenemyconsiderablyduringtheassault,as
their crews provided not only additional
coveringfire,butshoutedencouragementto
their men”, one British colonel reported.
One lowflying enemy aircraft “was brought
down so suddenly that …the men could
scarcelydodgethefallingmachine”.
Operating unarmoured, but highly
manoeuvrable twoseat aircraft, these close
air support tactics presage the wider use of
SchlactStaffeln (battle squadrons) in the
German counterattack at Cambrai in late
November 1917 and, more famously, in the
KaiserschlachtinMarch198.
A less visible, perhaps quieter, development
in the battle was the growth of military
intelligenceonthefield.StartingintheFifth
Army, and continuing with the introduction
in the Third Ypres offensives of the British
Second Army, “intelligence policemen”
(frequently former civilian policemen and
Germanspeakers) went forward with
battalions during attacks to get information
of vital tactical importance as soon as
possibleafterprisonerswerecaptured.Each
intelligencepolicemenwasgivenfourmento
assist him in searching the battlefield for
important documents.  Prisoners were
hurried back to the Divisional Intelligence

Officer where any information likely to be
urgentlyrequiredinthebattlewasextracted.
Captured papers were quickly processed.
These sources of information gave away the
timings and routes of German counter
attacks.  This information was immediately
refined,studiedandthenfedthroughtothe
heavyartillerygroups,whowerethenableto
task guns onto the German deployment
areas and routes of attack. As part of the
informationprovidedtothecorpsandother
commandersinadvanceofanattack,British
mapswereabletoidentifyGermancounter
attack plans in advance, thereby forestalling
theireffectiveness.
The development of tank warfare through
Third Ypres is a more controversial subject.
“In the Third Battle of Ypres, the reputation
of the Tank Corps was almost destroyed”
wrote Major William Watson of “D”
Battalion, Tank Corps.  The reasons are not
difficult to find and are conveyed effectively
in many images of tanks bogged immovably
in flooded shell craters, defying all attempts
to extract them.  While potent, the images
onlytellpartofthestory.Thefailureoftank
operations on 31 July 1917 was not caused
by mud but by the skillful channeling by
German defenders of tanks into killing
grounds.  In the pressured terrain of the
Salient, the narrow defiles between the
numerous woods and copses and the areas
of broken ground canalized tank formations
intovulnerableartillerytargets.Thelessons
learnt by the tank section commanders and
staff officers were that on a front where
there were only one or two avenues of
approach, tanks should not be employed
until the ground had been captured which
overlooked the tanks’ appraoch.  Success
came with surprise, and minor operations
under the cover of smoke or a shrapnel
barragepaiddividends.(Icoveredoneofthe
“pinpricksofsuccess”fortheTankCorps,the
takingofTheCockroft,inAugust1917inthe
TooFatLardies’ChristmasSpecial2010).
As the battle developed tank tactics were
focusedonattackingsecondlineorthirdline
Page 42
167
objectives, mopping up, and using their
firepower (where male tanks were
concerned) on tackling persistent German
bunkers.  Cooperative tactics were also
developingrapidly.SS164:“Notesontheuse
ofTanksandonthegeneralprinciplesoftheir
employment as an adjunct to the Infantry
attack” stated presciently “with tanks, as
withanyarm,satisfactoryresultscanonlybe
obtained by the close cooperation of all
arms”.  By 4th October 1917, a “counter
attack aircraft” was attached to the Tank
Corps to warn tanks of impending enemy
counterattacks and to secure tank co
operation in repelling them.  Tanks carried
small arms ammunition and grenades
forward for infantry, and carried wounded
soldiersontheirreturnjourney.Whiletanks
could still be treacherous for infantry to be
locatednearby(“theproximityandwakeofa
tank was so dangerous that all kept away
from them as far as possible”), the nascent
cooperation between infantry and tanks
evidenced at Cambrai and later in 1918 was
beginningtobemoreprominent.
IntheSalient:AdaptingtheRules
Thepublishedrulesof“ThroughtheMudand
theBlood”workverywelltorecreateanyof
the four engagements which appear later in
this TooFatLardies’ Christmas Special.  What
follows is definitely not an attempt to
supplantanyofthecore,publishedrulesbut
toaddinanumberofpossiblethemeswhich,
when used as “houserules”, might serve to
placethetabletopactionevenmorefirmlyat
ThirdYpres.
ForanyonewantingtodeploytheTankCorps
intheSalientin1917,youmaybeinterested
in the rule adaptations I published in the
2010 TooFatLardies’ChristmasSpecialunder
thetitle“RollingintoAction”.
“Ascleverascats”
German bunkers were deliberately
constructedwith“paperthin”concretewalls
attherearthanatthefrontorsides,thereby
making it more difficult for any British
infantry capturing a bunker to “reverse” it.

One a roll of 1 or 2 on a D6, any German
bunkerhasthisunpleasantfeature,dropping
the cover level of the rear of the bunker by
onelevelatalltimes.Germanplayers,wary
of equally cunning British tank crews, may
wish to keep the results of the dice roll to
themselves!
Duckboards
Artillery of both sides concentrated on
communication lines, replacement
marshalingareasandtheduckboardedtracks
(thinslattedwoodenladdersplacedlevelon
boggyground)whichslakedtheirwaytothe
front.Foranypreplannedartilleryfirewhich
istargetedonaduckboardtrack(suchasSOS
fire:rule10.4;oranartillerysupportbarrage:
rule10.7),reducethedeviationoffireby1d6
atalltimes.
CommunicationsDown!
Both British and German artillery routinely
interdicted their opponent’s rear areas,
attempting to disrupt communications,
supplies and enemy artillery positions.
British gunners could call down a withering
fire on German rear positions and deploy
devastating counterbattery fire – but only
when the German artillery could be located
on the rearslopes of the Gheluveld Plateau
and Passchendaele Ridge.  In return, British
gunners found themselves effectively
enfiladed by German artillery from all sides
of the Salient, forced into an even tighter
pocketand“bracketed”byintense,precisely
concentrated German artillery fire.  Under
these circumstances, any supporting fire
could,attimes,beirregular.
To reflect this critical aspect of the battle,
when using an SOS artillery card (rule 4.1.1
(SupportUnits)andrule10.4(SOSFire)),add
a “Communications Down” card in the card
deck.  Keep a track of the number of times
the “Communications Down” card has been
drawn.  If that number exceeds the number
of times the SOS artillery support card has
beendrawn,thennoSOSartilleryisavailable
(thereasoningbeingthatcommunicationsto
Page 43
168
the SOS artillery batteries have been
disrupted).
Example: A “Communications Down” card is
added into the card deck at the start of the
game.  However, the British “SOS Artillery
Support”cardisaddedonlyafterthesecond
turn of the Snifter card.  By the time the
British“SOSArtillerySupport”cardisadded,
the “Communications Down” card has been
drawn once.  Until the British “SOS Artillery
Support” card has been drawn during the
gamemoretimesthanthe“Communications
Down” card, no SOS artillery is available.
(Note that a kind and warmhearted umpire
might remove the “Communications Down”
duringthegameifhereasonsthat(say)fresh
cables have been laid to the relevant SOS
battery.  A number of variations of the
interactions between the “Communications
Down” card and the “SOS Artillery Support”
cardarepossible,andwehavefoundinplay
testing that they add some unpredictability
and context to the artillery aspects of
“ThroughtheMudandtheBlood”).
Schlachtflieger!
The attentions of very lowflying German
aircraftweresufficientlyunnervingtofeature
in a number of personal accounts and
battalion war diaries.  For any German
aircraft deployed in a game, consider
adapting the standard Aircraft rule 16 as
follows:  any aircraft attacking with machine
guns will inflict double shock owing to the
very lowlevel of the attack, sometimes as
low as 30 feet.  However, any antiaircraft
fire(see:rule16.3)willbeeasiertohit(Scout
aircrafthiton11or12;Bombershiton10,11
or12).
MudMalfunction
Adda“MudMalfunction”cardintothedeck
on any battlefield which has been subjected
to heavy rain, leaving a terrain of heavy,
cloying, nearimpassable mud.  When the
MudMalfunctioncardisdrawn,theBigMan
with the next card drawn* or the next rifle/
machine gun armed support unit (sniper,
machinegun,etc.)carddrawntakesa“Mud

Test”.Iftheunitaffectedhasnotyetfiredin
thegame,theMudTestisfailedonad6roll
of1,2or3.Foraunitwhichhasfiredinthe
game, the Mud Test is failed on a d6 roll of
1,2,3,4 or 5.  Failing a Mud Test means the
firepower of the unit is reduced by 75%,
roundeddown(onlyonemaninfourcanfire,
Lewisgunsfirewithonedice,etc.).NoMud
Test is required where the unit affected has
not been in open ground during the game 
forexample,aunitinabunker.(*WhenaBig
Man card is drawn next following the Mud
Malfunctioncard,theresultsoftheMudTest
areinflictedontheunittowhichtheBigMan
isattached).
Abysmalandpoorground
Ensure that the tabletop can be divided
somehow so that different areas can be
identified.  This may be simple (such a table
quarters)ormorecomplex(suchasacentral
areaandirregularareasontheedgesofthe
table).  Roll for each area to determine
whether the terrain has been badly affected
by rain, shelling and the collapse of any
organized drainage.  On a d6: 1= abysmal
ground; 2, 3, 4= poor ground, 5 and 6=
satisfactory ground.  For abysmal ground,
reduce movement by 2 pips on each
movement dice.  For poor ground reduce
movementby1piponeachmovementdice.
The chance of abysmal ground could be
increased by an umpire or the players
dependingonthescenarioandhistoricallyor
randomly generated weather.  However,
some caution is required as we have found
inplaytestingthat“abysmalterrain”slows
downmovementsignificantly.
Battlefieldfatigue
Troopsmovingtothebattlefield,whetheras
reinforcementsorasEingreiftruppen,faceda
difficultjourney.CaptainPhilipChristisonof
6/Cameron Highlanders described his first
impressions: “Rain, mud, gas shelling and
constant bombardment.  I had never seen
such a scene nor thought it possible. The
whole country was waterlogged, small spits

Page 44
169
of muddy land joined shell holes great and
small,fullofwater,manywithdeadmenand
animals,thestenchofwhichmadeusretch”.
For any game in which forces are to arrive
from a rear area as reinforcements, add a
“British Battlefield Fatigue” or “German
Battlefield fatigue” card into the card deck.
Keep a note of how many times it is drawn
beforethepointatwhichthereinforcements
arriveasBlindsonthetabletop.Thenumber
oftimestheBattlefieldFatiguecardhasbeen
drawn by the time of arrival of the
reinforcements is the number of inches that
the reinforcement Big Man/ support unit’s
totalmovementisreducedeachturn.This
reduction lasts the entire game for the
reinforcementaffected.
TreacherousGround
Some ground was not only abysmal, it was
treacherous and deadly, especially at night,
or for wounded men.  “One leading NCO
slipped off the track into a huge shell crater
fullofwater.Hejustdisappearedandcould
notbegotoutasthesidesofthecraterwere
just glutinous mud".  On the draw of a
“Treacherous Ground” card, any section
(randomlydeterminedonanyside)notona
road, on a duckboard, or in a building or
fortification which has moved in the current
turnsuffersasfollowsonarollof1d6:1,2or
3(1addedshock);4or5(2addedshock);6
(either3shockoronedead).
Disorientation
NavigationcouldbedifficultintheSalientby
theendofThirdYpresowingtotheabsence
oflandmarksandthesheerchangeswrought
tothelandscapebycontinualshelling.Adda
“British Disorientation” or “German
Disorientation” card to the card deck,
dependingonwhichsideistheattacker.On
the draw of the British Disorientation card,
the German player moves any British blind
1d6inchesinanydesireddirection(andvice
versaforthe“GermanDisorientation”card).
This simulates the forces on the Blind not
beinglocatedwheretheythoughttheywere.

Scenario One
 which influenced German tactical responses
Gegenangriff
Late September
1917
 infantry, there is to be an increased
The evolution of British “bite and hold”
tactics, as seen at the battle of Menin Road
on20thSeptember1917andinthebattlefor
Polygon Wood on 26th September 1917,
prompted the German High Command to
review their tactical responses to the British
offensives.  Previous operational methods
hadinvolvedlaunchingEingreifformationsin
counterattacking waves, with the objective
ofreachingaprearrangedstopline,beyond
whichGermanartillerywouldpreventBritish
forcesfrompressingback.TheGermanHigh
Command had noted the failure of these
tactics when confronted with British limited
advances followed by devastating artillery
barrages.  The British tactical variation had
therefore transformed the German counter
actions against insecure and hastily
constructeddefencesintoafarmoredifficult
counterassault against reinforced British
field positions.  This critical transformation
resulted in the failure of the Eingreiftruppen
inlateSeptember1917.
 which they have won, to launch costly
Desperate for a solution to the changed
British tactics, the German Fourth Army
commissioned a study of the fighting in the
Page 45
170
FlandernschlactinlateSeptember1917.The
study included these important findings,
inOctober:

“In order to wear down and destroy the
enemy [British] infantry in the same way
as the enemy attempts to do to our
concentration on the engagement of the
enemyinfantry.Mostofthefieldartillery
istobeusedinthisway…..Largeamounts
of gas [shells] are to be used against
enemy[battery]positionsandtheenemy
forwardbattlezone.Armyheadquarters
will issue orders separately for these
“Major Gas Engagements”.  Each of the
Groups will also direct smaller scale gas
shootsagainsttheinfantrywheneverthe
windisfavourable.Extensiveuseistobe
made of gasfilled mortar bombs…we
have to force the enemy, therefore,
constantly to maintain larger forces in
their forward battle zone and to place
theirreservesfurtherforward,sothatour
artillery has worthwhile infantry targets
to engage.  This can only be done if we
launch attacks ourselves, preferably
during the intervals between their
attacks, so that we can disrupt their
plans.  This will force the enemy, if they
are to be able to hold on to the ground
counterattacks against which we can
deploy maximum firepower.” (emphasis
added)

 
The following scenario, Gegenangriff,
replicatesoneoftheseGermanassaultsona
consolidating British position in Polygon
Wood.  While fictitious, it closely resembles
theGerman“spoilingattack”launchedon1/
Middlesex on 25 September 1917.  Similar
attacks were made by German Eingreif and
assault forces throughout Third Ypres and
Passchendaele, even as late as the
unsuccessfulOperationHubertuslaunchedto
the west of Passchendaele village by 39th
InfantryDivisionon3rdNovember1917.
 Plateau.Theshellinghasencompassedboth
British Briefing
ItislateSeptember1917.TheBritishSecond
ArmyhasjustfoughtitswaythroughPolygon
Wood, hammering the German defenders
backtowardstheWilhelmStellungthrougha
series of titanic artillery onslaughts followed
up by fresh Australian and British Divisions.
The British Second Army Commander,
GeneralHerbert Plumer, is now replenishing
his forces and logistics for the next attack,
across the Wilhem Stellung and onward to
the Gheluvelt Plateau and the Broodseinde
Ridge.  The attack is to commence on 4th
October,1917.
Page 46
171
Britishassaultformationsarecurrentlytaking
their positions along the front line on the
eastern edge of Polygon Wood in readiness
fortheforthcomingrenewaloftheoffensive.
Battalions from 62nd Brigade are due to
replace 1/Middlesex Regiment, one of the
current battalions holding the British front
line,inthenextfewhours.1/Middlesexhave
hadaparticularlydifficulttimerecently,and
havebeenheavilyshelledwithgasandheavy
shrapnel from German artillery batteries
shelteringontherearslopesoftheGheluvelt
the1/Middlesex’sfrontlineandalsotherear
positions of the battalion.  They are keen to
be relived, but the foremost relief troops
from 62nd Brigade, “B” Company of 12/13
Northumberland Fusiliers, are finding it very
heavygoingthroughtheshellshatteredruins
ofPolygonWood.

You are Major Jasper Whitechapel of “A”
Company of 1/Middlesex and you have
command of a small force of exhausted
troops ready for relief from the front line.
Thelastcoupleofdayshavebeenextremely
difficult.  Your troops have taken many
casualties,andyourcompanyisbarelymore
thanhalfstrength.Nearbyyourpositionare
the remnants of the 1st platoon of “A”
Company, together with a Vickers machine
gun and 2” mortar.  Sentries have been
posted forward (as is standard practice) but
you cannot see them as the early morning
mististhickandheavy.

You need to hold your positions on the
eastern edge of Polygon Wood (being the
point at which the Australian and British
attack of a few days ago reached) at least
until relieved by elements of 62nd Brigade.
This will be symbolised by ensuring that the
1/ Middlesex Company Command post has
not fallen into German hands by the end of
thegame.


 172

British forces Second Platoon, “B” Company, 12/13

Ontableatstartofthegame Northumberland Fusiliers (Regular quality,
 goodmorale)

“A” Company, 1/ Middlesex Regiment
FirstLieutenantJackShearer(StatusIII)
(Regularquality,goodmorale)


2ndPlatoon,“B”Company
CompanyCommandPost

MajorJasperWhitechapel(StatusIV)
FourCorporals(StatusI)
onesubaltern(SecondLieutenant)

oneartilleryliaisonofficer
Foursections:
onesignalsprivate.
(i) eight men comprising two bayonet

men,sixbombers
Only Major Jasper Whitechapel out of the
(ii) eight riflemen, two of whom are
CompanyHQqualifiesasaBigManforthe
trainedasscouts
purposesofthisscenario.
(iii) eightmen;twowithaLewisgunplus

sixammunitioncarriers/riflemen;
FirstPlatoon,“A”Company,
(iv) four rifle grenadiers and four
1/MiddlesexRegiment
riflemen


ThreeCorporals(StatusI).
 
Threesections:
(i) eight men comprising two bayonet
German Briefing
It is late September 1917.  The
men,sixbombers; Flandernschlact, what in years to come the
(ii) eight riflemen, two of whom are
British will call the Third Battle of Ypres, is
trainedasscouts; raging to the east of the town.  The British
(iii) eight men; two with a Lewis gun SecondArmyhasjustfoughtitswaythrough
plus six ammunition Polygon Wood, hammering the German
carriers/riflemen. Fourth Army defenders back towards their
second line, the Wilhelm Stellung, though a
series of titanic artillery onslaughts followed
 up by fresh Australian and British Divisions.
SupportWeapons:1xVickersMachineGun The German Commander, Crown Prince
withfivecrew;1x2”mortarwith3crew(2” Rupprecht of Bavaria, is now preparing his
mortarcanbeheldofftable) forces for meeting the next British attacks
 across the Wilhem Stellung and to the
 Gheluvelt Plateau and the Broodseinde
Ridge.  He fears that the attack is to
British commence on 4th October, 1917, but is
Reinforcements unwilling to wait passively for the storm to
The following force will arrive during the descend.  In accordance with the latest
gameasoutlinedinthetext. German Fourth Army analysis of the
 Flandernschlact the High Command has
 determined that the time is perfect for a
 spoiling attack to be launched on die
Engländer to dislocate and delay enemy
preparations for their offensive, by which

Page 47
 173

timetheFlandersweathermighthaveturned once the opening barrage from your

fortheworse. supportingartillerylifts.
 
YouareLeutnantJoachimVogel(StatusIV)of TowinthegameyoumustcapturetheBritish
the Stosstruppen detachment from 3rd Company Command HQ (wherever it is
battalion, 229th Reserve Infantry Regiment. locatedonthetable),andholditattheend
Your force consists of skilled and specially of the game.  This will indicate that your
trained troops from the German Fourth forceshavedriventheBritishbackfromtheir
Army’s Stosstruppen assets. You have been forward positions on the eastern edge of
ordered to lead your force on an attack on Polygon Wood and that the British
consolidatingBritishpositionsontheeastern preparations for their forthcoming attack
edge of Polygon Wood.  Your force was havebeendisrupted.
recentlyinactioninanotherspoilingattackin 
PolygonWoodon23September1917.While
yourdetachmentsufferedcasualties,inyour
German Forces
viewitisstillafirstratefightingunit,despite
theattritionwhichwascausedtoitsfighting Stosstruppen detachment from 3rd
potential.  This engagement will, however, battalion,229thReserveInfantryRegiment
give you ample opportunity to demonstrate
that, despite the losses suffered, your men Leutnant Joachim Vogel (Status IV) , with
areatthecuttingedgeoftheKaiser’sArmy. card“dasGlckdesTeufels”(theequivalent
 ofa“Devil’sLuck”cardinSharpePractice)
FirstPlatoon:4BigMen
1xFeldwebel(StatusII)
1xObergefreiter(StatusII)
2xGefreiter(StatusI)

FourSections:
(i) 8riflemen
(ii) 8bombers
(iii) MG08/15swith2crewand6rifles
(iv) trench cleaners (4 rifles, 4 “trench
brooms” comprising C96 Mausers
and Luger automatic pistols with
snaildrummagazines)

GrosseFlammenwerfer(2 men and 2 rifles)
from12thCompanyGuardReservePioneer
Regiment
 (GardeReservePionierRegiment).
 
It is early morning.  The weather has turned 2Granatenwerfer15s
slightly and a drizzle is falling, and a thick, 
heavy mist has fallen over the eastern edge You may also have support from
of Polygon Wood.  You have crossed the HalberstadtCL.IIsofKampfgeschwader4as
openareabyCameronCoverttotheeastof yourattackpressesforward
Polygon Wood, generally without detection
All German ranks are Veterans with Good
and are about to close on the English
morale,asbefitsskilledandspeciallytrained
positionsalongtheeasternedgeoftheWood
GermanStosstruppen.

Page 48
 174

BritishDeployment:TokeepthingsrealisticI
Umpire’s Notes requiredthatthesectionsfrom1/Middlesex
VictoryConditions:TheBritishplayerwinsif
should be spread at the start of the game
he holds the 1/Middlesex Company
over the board.  One section needed to be
Commandpostattheendofthegame.Any
within 24” of the German baseline, another
otherresultisaGermanvictory.
within 24” of the British baseline and the

third inbetween.  Any of the sections from
Terrain:Allofthetableshouldbeconsidered
1/ Middlesex can move once the game
tobepartofPolygonWood,andistherefore
commences. The British player is free to
quite difficult to move through.  By late
place the 1/ Middlesex Company Command
SeptemberPolygonWoodhadbeenreduced
Postwhereverhewishesontheboardatthe
to a wilderness of shattered tree stumps,
start of the game, but once positioned it
shell craters, broken barbed wire and thick
cannotbemoved(owingtotelephonecables
undergrowth.Itappearstohavebeenavile
having been laid to a set position).
placetomovethroughandfightin.Itwould
Unsurprisingly, in each playtest the British
beentirelyappropriatetodeterminethatall
player placed the Company Command Post
movement is at a penalty, such as 1 pip on
near the British baseline in the entrenched
each movement dice.  However, in the
position.
playtests of the game, I decided that each

terrain board section would be determined
Random Event Card: Add a Random Event
randomly.Ialsoaddedsomeintactwooded
cardintothecarddeck.Oneachturnofthe
sections which count as “poor ground” and
Random Event Card, make a note of the
block line of sight – I reasoned that these
number of times the card has been turned
limited sections had mainly escaped the
andconsultthefollowingtable:
British creeping artillery barrage in late

September when the British and Australians
capturedthewood.Thetableis6’by4’. Turns of Effect Notes
 Random
EventCard
Random Dice Roll TERRAIN EFFECT ON
6th Bring two sections British player
for Each Terrain MOVEMENT
Random of the 12/13 chooses which
Section
EventCard Northumberland sections to
Diceroll1(onaD6) OK ground – no
Fusiliers on the bring on first.
movement penalty
British table edge Sections can
unless inside intact
between points A start on Blinds
woodedsections
andB if the British
Diceroll2,3,4,5(on Poor Going – minus 1 playerwishes.
aD6) pip on each th
7  Bring on the 
movementdice
Random remaining two
Diceroll6(onaD6) Abysmal Going – Event sections of 12/13
minus 2 pips on each Northumberland
movementdice Fusiliers on the
 British table edge
Theonlynotablefeatureontheboardisthat between points A
thereshouldbeapartlydestroyedtrench,or andB
th
MEBUatsomepointontheBritishbaseline. 6  Add 
This would be a suitable place for the 1/ Random Kampfgeschwader
Middlesex’sCompanyCommandPost,should EventCard 4 card into the
theBritishplayerwishtodeploythere. carddeck

Page 49

British Battlefield Fatigue: Add a “British
Battlefield Fatigue” card into the card deck.
Keep a note of how many times it is drawn
before the 6th draw of the Random Event
Card.  The number of times the British
Battlefield Fatigue has been drawn by the
time of arrival of the first sections of the
12/13 Northumberland Fusiliers is the
numberofinchesthatthetotalmovementof
each section of “B” Company, 12/13
Northumberland Fusiliers is reduced.  This
reductionlaststheentiregame–Ireasoned
that this deduction reflects the exhausting
progress made by British reinforcements as
they struggled under German artillery fire in
Britishrearareasandastheymovedthrough
theremnantsofPolygonWood.
 high velocity long range guns).  The German
BritishSOSArtilleryFire:Addbotha“British
SOS Artillery Fire” card and a “British
Communications Down” card into the card
deck.  The British should have at least one
turn (I suggest two) in which the “British
Communications Down” card is in the card
deck before the introduction of the “British
Page 50
175
SOS Artillery” card into the card deck to
signifyGermaninterdictionofBritishartillery
batteriesfromrearslopepositionedGerman
artilleryfiringmustardgasmunitionsaswell
as conventional high explosives.  Treat the
BritishSOSArtillerybarrageasinRule10.4of
the“ThroughtheMudandtheBlood”rules.

German Artillery Barrage: Accounts note
that the German artillery was particularly
heavy and accurate in late September and
early October 1917.  The earlier German
“spoiling attack” on 25 September was
notablefortheuseofgasshellingandheavy
shrapnel.  (The 25 September attack was
supportedby27batteriesoffieldartillery,17
field howitzer batteries and 5 batteries of
player is allowed an artillery barrage in
support of his attack in the game.   The
Germanartillerysupportbarragemustcover
anarea36”incheswideby12”deep,andis
selectedbeforethestartofthegame.There
is no deviation dice for placing the barrage.
The barrage lasts three turns of the Snifter
 176

card (regardless of whether the German

ArtillerySupportcardisdrawninthosethree
Cards
turns).  Any unit caught within the barrage
suffers6D6foreffect,reducingcoverbyone British German Common
level.  If the German player wishes, he can BigMen BigMen Timefora
reduce the effect of the barrage by up to Snifter
3D6, each D6 reduced resulting in an BritishBlinds GermanBlinds Wind
additionalreductionof1inchmovement(i.e. Direction
an extra point of British Battlefield Fatigue) Command Command PoorGas
on the 12/13 Northumberland Fusiliers once InitiativeIx2 InitiativeIx2 Discipline
theyarrive. Command Command 
 InitiativeIIx1 InitiativeIIx1
If the German player wishes, he can Command Command 
introduceamustardgascomponentintothe InitiativeIIIx1 InitiativeIIIx1
German artillery support barrage as in rule Command Command 
10.8.  If mustard gas munitions are used, InitiativeIVx1 InitiativeIVx1
reducetheGermanbarrageeffectto4D6for British Grosse 
effect.  If mustard gas is used, also add a Battlefield Flammenwerfer
“PoorGasDiscipline”Cardtothedeckonthe Fatigue
FIRSTturnoftheGermangasbarrage.Ifthe BritishVickers GermanForward 
“PoorGasDiscipline”cardisdrawn,thenext MachineGun Observer
British or German group or weapons team British GermanArtillery 
which is deployed in the gas barrage suffers Forward Support
1D3 additional wounds (counting no cover). Observer
The “Poor Gas Discipline” card is removed BritishSOS German 
onceallthegashasdissipated.Eachmustard Support Granae’nwerfers
gasbarragewillhaveadurationof3D4turns, British GermanDynamic 
although a historically minded and Communicatio Commander
unpleasant umpire might also rule that nsDown
certain areas in which mustard gas has BritishMortar SturmAbteilung 
landed remain contaminated for the Vor!
remainder of the game.  One deployed, the
 Kampfgeschwader 
mustard gas barrage will move 4” per turn
4
with the wind, the gas being moved on the
 “DasGlckdes 
Snifter Card.  A Wind Direction card should
Teufels”
also be added to the card deck as per rule
2.5. 
 Historical Outcome
Visibility:  Owing to the early morning mist,
As noted above, Gegenangriff is a fictitious
all visibility remains at 18” during the game.
scenario, although based on the German
MakeSpottingharderwitha1toanyroll.
spoilingattackonBritishpositionsinPolygon

Wood on 25 September 1917.  The German
Additional Third Ypres Rules: 
spoilingattackcausedconsiderableconfusion
Schlachtflieiger!, Abysmal and Poor Ground,
alongtheBritishandAustralianline,although
BattlefieldFatigue.
the dislocation did not prevent a successful

attack being made on German positions in
PolygonWoodadaylater.

Page 51

Scenario 2
Virtutis Gloria
Merces: Reutel
4th October 1917

st
The task of the 21  Division at the battle of
Broodseinde on 4 October 1917 was to
occupy the high ground above the
Reutelbeek and Polygonbeek valley  and to
generallytoactasarightflankguardforthe
continuing push to the Broodseinde Ridge
andbeyondtothenorth.

Although not all objectives were achieved,
after prolonged and heavy fighting a secure
flank was established by the 21st Division.
The actions in the Polygonbeek and
Reutelbeek valley form a microcosm of the
differing tactical decisions which the British
and German forces faced in the middle
stages of Third Ypres as the weather
graduallyworsenedafteradrySeptember.
 leading the advance from Joist Farm, which
The focus in this scenario, Virtutis Gloria
Merces,isonthevalleyofthePolygonbeek.
This was no bubbling, freshwater brook by
earlyOctober1917:
 objective of the Broodseinde Ridge, about
 “The objective of the brigade is the
extreme left of the high ground of the
German position.  From the starting off
point, the ground falls till it reaches
Polygonbeek.  The ground on either side
of this is marshy and churned up by
shells.  The Polygonbeek is narrow but
haswaterinit.Unless,however,thereis
heavy rain, the ground is passable at a
slow rate….on the east of the
Polygonbeek, the ground rises fairly
steeplyuptothetopoftheridgewhichis
reached on the first objective.  The
advancetothesecondobjectiveisonthe
top of the ridge.  The chief obstacles to
thisadvancearethevillageofReuteland
the line of blockhouses running
northward from the east end of the
Page 52
177
village” (Brigadier General Hugh
Headlam,O/C64Brigade)

OthersreferredtothePolygonbeekasbeing
muddy, fouled and filled with broken and
discardedbarbedwire.


British Briefing
You are Captain Horace Richmond,
commander of “A “Company, 9/ Kings Own
Yorkshire Light Infantry, part of 64 Brigade,
21 Division.  You have been tasked with
was captured a few minutes ago, to the
village of Reutel.  It is 4 October 1917 and
you are part of the massive British assault
which is aiming to capture the limited
1500 yards to the east of where you now
stand.

Beforeyou,inthedimtwilightofacold,wet
Autumnmorning,youcanseeamuddyroad
stretching to a low bridge over a muddy
stream (the Polygonbeek), with the ground
rising steadily to a cluster of damaged
buildings on the horizon, about a third of a
mileaway.ThisisthetinyFlemishvillageof
Reutel, which your Divisional intelligence
officer has informed you is securely in
German hands.  You must lead your force
forward, crossing the bridge, and secure
Reutel.Germanresistanceisexpectedtobe
heavy.

 178

Hereisadescriptionoftheconditionsaround whichseemstobeworseningbytheminute
the Polygonbeek from the war Diary of 62nd astherainfallssteadily.
Brigade, the formation to your immediate 
north:
“A” Company, 9th Battalion, King’s Own

YorkshireLightInfantry
“The place of assembly was thirty feet

belowthefirstobjectiveandinfullviewof
Company HQ   Captain Horace Richmond
the enemy.  Three streams separated the
(StatusIV),tworunners
opposingforces.Eachstreamranthrough

soft and boggy ground 50 yards in width.
2nd Platooon, “A” Company, 9th Battalion,
This ground had been churned by
King’s Own Yorkshire Light Infantry
continuous shelling to an almost
(Regularquality,goodmorale)
impenetrable morass.  Scrub covered the

slopes of the small spurs and this was
CommanderSergeant(statusII)
heavilywired.About50yardstotheeast
FourCorporals(StatusI).
of the Polygonbeek and again to the east

of Jetty Warren concrete blockhouses,
Foursections:
somecontainingthreecompartmentsand
i) eightmencomprisingtwobayonetmen,
eachprovidedwithloopholesandmanned
sixbombers
by garrisons of 20 to 30 with machine
ii) eightriflemen,twoofwhomaretrained
guns and trench mortars, commanded all
asscouts
approaches .  4 or 5 feet deep trenches
iii) eightmen;twowithaLewisgunplussix
weresitedonalltheprominentpositions.
ammunitioncarriers/riflemen
The beds of the stream were swept by
iv) eight men; four with rifle grenade
machine gun fire from Cameron Covert
launchers, four with ammunition to act
and Polderhoek Chateau.  As seen in
asloaders.
Daylight, after the attack, the position rd
3  Platooon, “C” Company, 1/ Durham
seemed impregnable.” War Diary of 62
Light Infantry (Regular quality, good
Brigade
morale)


Itwillbeahardmorning’swork,butyouare
Commander   Second Lieutenant Sedgwick
confidentthatyouhavetheforcestoachieve
(statusIII)
thetaskentrustedtoyou.Inadditionto2nd
FourCorporals(StatusI).
Platooon,“A”Company,9/KOYLIwhichleads

youradvance,youhavealsobeingjoinedby
Foursections:
a platoon from 1/Durham Light Infantry
(i) eightmencomprisingtwobayonetmen,
(from95Brigade,5thDiviion)whichhavegot
sixbombers
hopelessly lost from their parent formation
(ii) eightriflemen,twoofwhomaretrained
to your south.  You have called on their
asscouts
officer, Lieutenant Sedgewick, to follow you
(iii)eightmen;twowithaLewisgunplussix
intheadvance.
ammunitioncarriers/riflemen

(iv)eight men; four with rifle grenade
You are also assisted in your task by three
launchers, four with ammunition to act
tanks of No.12, Section, “A” Battalion of the
asloaders.
Tank Corps, led by Captain Clement
Robertson.  Although only 28, he is an
experienced officer, although you are wary 
about the usefulness of the tanks in terrain

Page 53
 179

No.12Section,1stCompany,“A”Battalion, have already been told by your scouts that

RoyalTankCorps your defending positions at Joist Farm have
been overrun by a massed British infantry

attack,supportedbyEnemytanks.
Section Commander, Captain Clement

Robertson (Status IV) and Private Cyril
While your defences are flexible and deep,
SheldonAllen
you are gravely concerned that a British

breakthrough will be extremely difficult to
ThreeMarkIVtanks:
haltshouldtheEnemycrossthePolygonbeek
¾ one Male (“Ardent”,A19, commanded and continue up the ridge to Reutel village.
by Second Lieutenant Roger Haileybury You have two smaller bunkers, MEBUs, on
(statusIII),7othercrew); the east side of the Polygonbeek which can
bedefendedbyeithersectionsofinfantryor
¾ two Female (“Antelope” A14, machine guns.  You also are certain that
commanded by SecondLieutenant Divisional support weapons in Polderhoek
GeorgeWicklow(statusII),with7other Château to the south of your positions can
crew; and “Arethusa” A23 commanded add supporting fire while the British are
by SecondLieutenant Toby Delgany seekingtocrossthePolygonbeek.
(statusII),with7othercrew) 
 Your lines of telephone communications
All three tanks have sufficient supplies of appear to have been cut and your ears are
fuel and ammunition.  The morale of both startingtobleedwiththedeafeningintensity
tankcrewsisgood,theirexperienceregular. ofdieEngländerartillerybombardment.You
 ignorethepaininyourheadandfindanew
determination that you will not yield your
 positions to the enemy. You know that your
German Briefing divisional Eingreif formations will be waiting
YouareOberleutnantMaxvonRichterofthe for their chance to support your sector and
2nd company, of Reserve Infantry Regiment pushtheBritishback.Itisonlyaquestionof
92.  You are the Kampftruppenkommandeur hangingonuntiltheyarrive….
in charge of the section of the German lines 
coveringJoistfarm,thePolygonbeekandthe
villageofReutel.Youarecurrentlylocatedin
your“A”Stellungcommandposttotheeast
of the Polygonbeek.  Try as you might, you
cannotgetthefearoutofyourmindthatany
second your concrete bunker could be
destroyed by a Stollenknicker –  a shell
specially targeted at concrete bunkers such
asyoursbyahighvelocitynavalorrailgun.
You only hope that the camouflage draped
overthetopandsidesoftheconcretewillbe
enoughtoremainunobserved.


Itisearlymorningon4October1917,andfor
thepast20 minutesyouhavebeenurgently
trying to contact your battalion commander
to alert them of the British advance up the
road from Polygon Wood to Reutel.  You

Page 54

German Forces
2nd company, of Reserve Infantry Regiment
92
Kampftruppenkommandeur: Oberleutnant
Max von Richter (Status IV)
Oneforwardartilleryobserver.
 capture or destroy two out of three of the
FirstPlatoonunderstrengthplatoon
20 riflemen in three sections and eight
bombersinonesection.
FourBigMen
Feldwebel(StatusIII)
Vizefeldwebel(StatusII)
2xGefreiter(StatusI)).

SecondPlatoonhalfstrengthplatoon
8riflemenand7bombersorganisedintwo
sections
TwoBigMen
2xGefreiter(StatusI)
Eachsectionalreadyhas2pointsofshock.
 shellsplintered trees, marking the edge of
2MG08s,with5crew.AnyBigManmoving
asectionwithaMG08willmoveataminus
1 “pip” per action dice to simulate the
relative difficulty of moving these heavy
machine guns around the battlefield.  Both
MG08s have ample supplied of armour
piercingSmK.Ammunition.

OneMG08offtableonasustainedfirerole.
This weapon is deployed in Polderhoek
ChateautotheSouthandiseffectiveatthe
start of the game.  This MG08 has no
armour piercing SmK. Ammunition (and
therefore acts only to interdict the British
infantry).

Twosnipers
 defendingGermaninfantryandtemptedthe
One 7.58cm leichter Minenwerfer n.A. and
fourcrew
 heavilywired,andthiscanberepresentedif
All German ranks have reasonable morale
and are a mixture of experienced veterans
(asbefitsdieFlandernkämpferofNovember
1917)andnewlyarrivedreplacements.Any
Germanswithhandgrenadescanconstruct
ageballteLadungtouseagainstthetanks.
Page 55
180
Umpire’s Notes

Victory Conditions:  The British player will
win a major victory if he reaches the village
of Reutel with either two tanks or one
platoon.ABritishminorvictorywouldbeto
GermanbunkerseastofthePolygonbeek.A
German minor victory would be to keep the
British out of Reutel and control two of the
bunkers at the end of the game.  A German
major victory would be to control all three
bunkers at the end of the game, or to deny
the British forces passage over the
Polygonbeek.

Terrain: The terrain is not as bad as in the
other two scenarios in this article.  The
terrain rises steadily and perceptibly to the
east from the Polygonbeek.  A cluster of
JuniperWood,isanicetouchtoplaceonthe
lefthandedgeoftheGermanbaseline.The
tableis8’by4’.

As noted in the 64 Brigade report,“[u]nless,
however, there is heavy rain, the ground is
passable at a slow rate”.  Accordingly, all of
thegroundexcepta12”striponeachsideof
thePolygonbeekcanbeconsidertobegood
ground.  Polygonbeek appears to have been
difficult to cross, and I suggest infantry
should minus 1 pip on any movement dice
while they cross the Polygonbeek.  As
accounts refer to the banks of the
Polygonbeek being “churned up”, I also
allowed the 12” strip on either side to be
treated as light cover (which helped the
British infantry to linger there).  Some
accountsalsonotethatthePolygonbeekwas
desired.PassageoverthePolygonbeekatthe
small bridge is at no penalty for infantry, as
thisappearstohavebeenbothintactandof
stone construction. However, all tanks must
cross the Polygonbeek at the Bridge.  Any
attempttocrossthePolygonbeekotherthan
attheBridgewillresultinthembeingbogged
 181

(with usual dice roll to unbog).  I suggest British Deployment: All British forces deploy
that umpires tell British players of the between point A and point B.  All British
impassability of the Polygonbeek other than forces can deploy on the first British Blinds
at the Bridge – this was something which cards.  Tanks are placed nose to tail on the
CaptainRobertsonwasawareof. roadandarenotdeployedonBlinds.Captain
 Robertson and Private Allen start the game
Movement for tanks on the road on either onfootinadvanceofthefirsttank,“Ardent”.
sides of the Polygonbeek appears to have 
been possible, but with extreme care. German Deployment:  The German player
Generally, the mud and slimecovered mustdeploythesecondplatoontothewest
Flemish cobbled pavé road were particularly of the Polygonbeek.  9/KOYLI’s war diary
difficulttonavigateforthetanks.Theslime reportedthat“[j]ustwestofthePolygonbeek
and mud threatened to cause the tanks to Germans were met in some force and hand
skid, and any fallen trees across the roads tohandfightingtookplace”.OtherGerman
held the danger of a broken track.  If a forcescanbeplacedwhereverdesiredonthe
double6isrolledformovementofatankon eastbankofthePolygonbeek.
theroad,rollonescatterdicetoindicatethe 
direction in which the tank moves.  In the Random Event: Polderhoek Chateau:
eventofa“circle”beingrolled,thetankmust 9/KOYLI’s war diary reported that “[t]he
roll for a mechanical breakdown as in Rule crossingofthebeekwasadifficultmatteras
15.1. duringitspassagethetroopsweresubjected
 to severe enfilade fire from the direction of
The buildings in Reutel village are partly JuniperCopseandtherightflankgenerally.”
destroyedandprovideonlymediumcover. Other, earlier, British accounts refer to
 GermanmachinegunslocatedinPolderhoek
Umpiresmightfindtheadditionalrulesinthe Chateau (about 300 yards to the south off
TooFatLardies Christmas Special 2010 on the table) being a thorn in the side of
fielding the Tank Corps from 1917 helpful in advancing British infantry.  To representing
thisscenario. this, I allowed a single MG08 firing on a
 sustainedfirerole.However,atthe7thdraw
oftheRandomEventcard,Ideemedthatthe

Page 56
 182

supporting fire had been silenced (whether Any unit caught within the barrage suffers
byPolderhoekChateaubeingcapturedorby 6D6foreffect,reducingcoverbyonelevel.
theMG08beingdestroyedbyartilleryfire). 
 TheLuckoftheDevil:Umpiresshoulddecide
German fortifications:  None of the German if they would prefer to include Private Allen
bunkers are positioned on the table at the to accompany Captain Robertson, or
start of the game.  The smaller German alternatively to allow Captain Robertson a
MEBUbunkerscanaccommodateeitherone “Luck of the Devil” card.  The former is
MG08or10figures.Theyaresmall,andnot historically accurate (see below), but the
easily spotted (plus one to the spotting latterfavourstheBritishplayer.
requirement)owingtotheirverylowprofile. 
Each pillbox hats embrasures on the north, Additional Third Ypres Rules:  Abysmal and
west and south faces.  The exits are on the Poor Ground and Disorientation (applicable
east side.  The Kampftruppenkommandeur’s only to British infantry groups owing to the
“A” Stellung also has a low profile (plus one confusion amongst British battalions
to the spotting requirement) but has no regarding their precise location on the
embrasures on any side.  The exit is on the morningof4October1917.).
eastside. 

German SOS Artillery Fire: Add both a
Cards
“German SOS Artillery Fire” card and a British German Common
“German Communications Down” card into BigMen BigMen Timefora
the card deck.  The German player should Snifter
have at least one turn (I suggest two) in BritishBlinds GermanBlinds Random
which the “German Communications Down” Event
card is in the card deck before the Command Command 
introduction of the “German SOS Artillery” InitiativeIx2 InitiativeIx2
card into the card deck to signify British Command Command 
artillerysuperiorityon4thOctober1917.The InitiativeIIx1 InitiativeIIx1
German “German Communications Down” Command Command 
cardthe“GermanSOSArtillery”cardareonly InitiativeIII InitiativeIIIx1
placed into the card deck once the British x1
player has commenced crossing the Command Command 
Polygonbeek.TreattheGermanSOSArtillery InitiativeIV InitiativeIVx1
barrage as in Rule 10.4 of the “Through the x1
MudandtheBlood”rules. HeroicBritish GermanSniper 
 TankCorps (x2)
BritishArtilleryBarrage:TheBritishplayeris Leader
allowedanartillerybarrageinsupportofhis British GermanForward 
advance in the game.   Two British artillery Forward Observer
support barrages are allowed, reflecting Observer
either a creeping barrage or a Chinese
British GermanSOS 
barrage.Eachcoversanarea36”incheswide
Artillery Artillery(add
by 12” deep, and must be selected before
Support afterBritish
thestartofthegame.Thereisnodeviation
forcescrossthe
dice for placing either barrages.  Each
Polygonbeek)
barrage lasts three turns of the Snifter card

(regardless of whether the British Artillery

Support card is drawn in those three turns).

Page 57
 183

Canadian German  actionwouldalmostinevitablycosthim

Mortar Communications his life. This gallant officer was killed
Down(addat afterhisobjectivehadbeenreached,but
leastoneturn his skilful leading had already ensured
before successful action. His utter disregard of
introductionof danger and devotion to duty afford an
theas“German exampleofoutstandingvalour.”
SOSArtillery
Support”card, AfurtheraccountbyaCaptainMitchellgives
butafterBritish moredetail:
forcescrossthe 
Polygonbeek) “Captain Robertson was certain that if
Canadian German  the tanks, blundering from one muddy
MachineGun minenwerfer crater to another, failed to see this
(x2) bridge,theactionwaslost.Deliberately
Canadian GermanMachine  he made up his mind.  He would guide
MachineGun gun(x3) themovertheothersideofthestream.
Bonus So, slowly and patiently he walked on,
and his brave assistant [Private Allen]
TheLuckof GermanMachine 
accompaniedhim”.
theDevil GunBonus

(optional)
Captain Clement Robertson VC is buried in
 Oxford Road War Cemetery, Flanders.  The
Historical Outcome:  Despite prolonged and inscription on his headstone reads "Virtutis
fierce fighting, the attack of 9/KOYLI was a Gloria Merces" ("Glory is the Reward of
success and Reutel village was taken in the Valour"), which is the motto of the Scottish
morning of 4 October 1917.  A significant ClanRobertson.
counterattack by German Eingreif 
formations was halted at 1pm in the Private Allen’s devotion to duty was even
afternoonbybothBritishartilleryandseven more remarkable considering he had been
Lewisgunsfiredbytwocompaniesof15/DLI. “blown up by a shell and severely shaken”
 only on 1 October 1917.  Private Allen was
The action is also notable for the heroic awarded the DCM for his exemplary and
actions of Captain Robertson and Private braveconduct.
Allen.  Captain Robertson was awarded the 
VC for his actions on the morning.  His VC 
citation in the London Gazette of 18 
December1917readsasfollows: 

“For most conspicuous bravery in

leading his tanks in attack under heavy
shell, machinegun and rifle fire over
ground which had been heavily
ploughed by shellfire. Captain
Robertson,knowingtheriskofthetanks
missingtheway,continuedtoleadthem
on foot, guiding them carefully and
patiently towards their objective,
although he must have known that his

Page 58
 184

this was once human and inhabited

Scenario 3 land…..Surely the God of battles has
deserted a spot where only devils can
reign” (Major John Lyne, 64th Brigade,
“A Spot where RoyalFieldArtillery)

only Devils can 
Canadian Briefing
Reign” You are Captain Charles Robertson, the
commanding officer of “A” Company, 3rd
Vine Cottage (Toronto) Battalion of the Canadian 1st
6th November 1917 Division.  As part of the final assault on the
areaaroundPasschendaelevillage,youhave

been given the extremely difficult task of
After a series of battles throughout October
capturingalarge,formidableGermanpillbox
spearheaded by the New Zealand Division,
built in the ruins of what was once “Vine
the 9th (Scottish) Division and General
Cottage”, a typical Flemish farm complex.
Currie’s Canadian Corps, the final assault on
The ground is desperately bad, and
the area around Passchendaele village and
movementispainstakinglyslow.Whileyour
on the village itself fell to the 1st and 2nd
troops are fatigued following their advance
Canadian Divisions in early November 1917.
totheirstartingpositionsfortheattack,they
The first phase of the Canadian attack was
areinreasonablygoodspirits.
plannedfor6thNovember1917involvingthe

capture of Passchendaele, Mosselmarkt and
However,yourfirstattack,launchedatdawn
Goudberg.  Other, higher, points along the
on 6th November has not been successful.
Passchendaele Ridge were to be taken four
TheFirstandSecondplatoonsof3/(Toronto)
dayslater.
have suffered heavy casualties from a

number of machine gun positions in and
By now the battlefield was extremely
around Vine Cottages.  Most of the troops
challengingasalocationinwhichtoconduct
have fallen back in some disarray, although
coherentmilitaryoperations.Anyattacks,no
there is a sizeable group of wounded and
matter how determined and irrespective of
leaderless men pinned down in and around
which side was pressing forward, were
Vanity House.  Through your field glasses,
intensely difficult to coordinate. Casualties
you estimate that the wounded number
caused by the artillery forces of both sides
approximately10men.Inthecolddawnand
were eating away at the numbers, strength
drivingrain,theircriesforhelpareterribleto
andmoraleofthetroopsinthefield.
hear.


“The conditions are awful, beyond
YoumovetothefrontofyourCompanyand
description, nothing we’ve had yet has
prepare to lead the remains of the First and
come up to it, the whole trouble is the
Second Platoons back against the German
weatherwhichdailygetsworse.Figure
positions.  You have also sent a runner to
to yourself a desolate wilderness of
commandtheThirdPlatoontocomeforward
waterfilledwithshellcraters,andcrater
intotheattack.
after crater whose narrow lips form

narrow peninsulas along which one can
TheremainsoftheFirstandSecondPlatoon
at best pick but a slow and precarious
can start anywhere up to 12” from the
way.Hereashatteredtreetrunk,there
northern tabletop edge.  The desired entry
a wrecked pill box, sole evidence that

Page 59
 185

pointoftheThirdPlatoonmustbeidentified Wounded and leaderless troops from First

inadvance. andSecondPlatoon


Canadian forces 10 plus 1d10 soldiers are located in and
 aroundVanityHouse.50%ofthetroopsare
wounded (and play no part in the game,
“A”Company,3rd(Toronto)Battalionofthe
except for constituting additional casualties
Canadian1stDivision
in the event that the group is fired upon).

This group of figures start the game with 5
Company HQ   Captain Charles Robertson
points of “shock”, but have no card in the
(Status IV), two runners, one forward
carddeck.Theycannotmoveorfire,butwill
artilleryobserver
defend themselves is attacked in a close
 assault.  If a leader is nearby, the
PadreMichaelSt.John(StatusI),Chaplain, unwounded troops can be rallied and will
CanadianExpeditionaryForce fightasasinglesection.
 
ThirdPlatoon,“A”Company Support Weapons: 2 x Vickers Machine
 guns (with 5 man crews) and 1 x 2” Stokes
Lieutenant (Status III), Sergeant (Status II), mortar(with3mancrew)
fourCorporals(StatusI).


18pointsofAttacker’sFirePointsfrom82nd
Foursections:(i)eightmencomprisingtwo
Brigade,RoyalFieldArtillery(seepage42of
bayonet men, six bombers; (ii) eight
therules)
riflemen, two of whom are trained as

scouts;(iii)eightmen;twowithaLewisgun
AllCanadiantroopsareVeteranswithGood
plus six ammunition carriers/riflemen (iv)
morale.
eight men; four with rifle grenade
launchers, four with ammunition to act as 
loaders.

Remains of the First and Second Platoon,
“A”Company

One Sergeant (Status II), Four Corporals
(Status I) and Corporal Colin Fraser Barron
(StatusII).

Fivesections:(i)sevenmencomprisingtwo
bayonet men, six bombers; (ii) six riflemen,
two of whom are trained as scouts; (iii)
eight men; two with a Lewis gun plus six
ammunition carriers/riflemen (iv) eight
men; two with rifle grenade launchers, six
withammunitiontoactasloaders;(v)seven
riflemen.

Corporal Barron carries a Lewis gun and is
accompaniedbytwootherranks.
 

Page 60
 186

morale is surprisingly good, all your troops

German Briefing are suffering from lack of sleep, gastro
Youcansensethattheendiscoming.Over
intestinalproblems,coldsandfeversandskin
the last four months your forces have been
conditionscausedbyplaguesofvermin.
pushed back out of the Ypres Salient, with

one Stellung after another falling to the
British and their allies.  Now, your back is German Forces
trulyagainstthewall.
FusilierRegiment38

Kampftruppenkommandeur: Leutnant Klaus
You are Leutnant Klaus Jurgens or the 7th
Jurgens(StatusIV)
Company,FusilierRegiment38.Youarethe
Kampftruppenkommandeur in charge of the Oneforwardartilleryobserver.
deployment of the understrength 7th FirstPlatoonunderstrengthplatoon,
Company of Fusilier Regiment 38 and a 28riflemeninfoursections
disparate collection of supporting troops. FourBigMen
Youaretaskedwithholdingonaslongasyou Feldwebel(StatusIII)
canindefensivepositionsaroundGoudberg, Vizefeldwebel(StatusII)
the central point of which is a large, 2xGefreiter(StatusI)).
formidable pillbox built within the (now 
ruined)farmwhichisknowntotheBritishas SecondPlatoonhalfstrengthplatoon,
“VineCottage”. 8riflemenand7bombersorganisedintwo
 sections,2BigMen(2xGefreiter(StatusI))
Twonightsagoyouledafightingpatrolinto 
the desolate wasteland between the 1 MG08/15, with three crew plus Gefreiter
opposing armies, capturing a Canadian (StatusI)
prisoner.  On questioning, he informed you 
thattheCanadian’snextassaultisimminent.
2 MG08s, each with 5 crew, allocated
Youhavealsonoticedoverthepast48hours
amongthetwoplatoons.Nomorethanone
that Canadian pressure is becoming
MG08canbepositionedintheVineCottage
relentless.  Enemy patrols have constantly
pillbox.AnyBigManmovingasectionwith
raided your forward positions, and enemy
an MG08 will move at a minus 2 “pip” per
artilleryhasconcentratedtheirfirewherever
actiondicetosimulatetherelativedifficulty
any deployment of your forces has been
of moving these heavy machine guns
spotted.Itisbecomingimpossibleforyouto
around the abysmal terrain of the
maintain your defensive outpost zone in the
battlefield.
desirable depth as prescribed in standing

orders.  Indeed, in parts of your sector,
Onesniper
enemy forces are only 50 feet away.  As

attack frontages of the Enemy have
All German ranks have reasonable morale
narrowed, the number of your protected
and are a mixture of experienced veterans
observation points have been reduced
(asbefitsdieFlandernkämpferofNovember
dramatically,leavingyoustrugglingtolocate
1917)andnewlyarrivedreplacements.
the Enemy concentrations of infantry and

machineguns.
10 points of Defensive Fire Points from the

1st Battery, Field Artillery Regiment 198
Counterattacks by your Divisional specialist
onceanyCanadianforceapproacheswithin
forces have failed, even when led by
24 inches of Vine Cottage. (see Defensive
specialist assault units and you are now
Fireonpage43oftherules)
serious concerned that your men are
reaching the end of their endurance.  While 

Page 61
 187

The German Player may place up to 18

figures (including Big Men) within the Vine
Umpire’s Notes
VictoryConditions:TheCanadianplayerwins
Cottage pillbox at the start of the game.  If
if he has forced the enemy out of the Vine
theGermanplayerplacesanMG08machine
Cottagepillboxattheendofthegame.Any
gun in the pillbox, the number of additional
other result (including any German troops
troops it can accommodate is reduced by 8
being within the Vine Cottage pillbox in a
(to only 10).  No more than 18 figures may
“shockedstate”)resultsinaGermanvictory.
occupythepillboxatanysingletime.Other
AnytroopsremainingontheroofoftheVine
troops can be positioned anywhere on the
Cottage pillbox count for these purposes as
tableprovidedthattheyarenonearertothe
beingoutsidethepillbox.
Canadian starting line than 24”.  If desired,

othertroopscanbepositionedontheroofof
Terrain: The table is 8’ by 4’.  The terrain is
theVineCottagepillboxandwouldcountas
desperately bad, and conforms to many
beinginlightcover(shelteredbysandbagged
people’s impressions of Passchendaele as a
defences).
modern Golgotha.  The tabletop should be

deployedas“asoftboggyseaofmudwhich
Also, the German player should feel free to
waslashedbyceaselessrainandoverflowing
position the lightmachine gun team
with filthy water.  It was punctuated by
anywhere within 6” of the Canadian starting
countless shell holes, which gave the whole
line.  This microunit will be extremely
monotonousareatheglazedlookofadeath
difficult to spot (spot only on a roll of 11 or
mask” (Nollau: History of Infantry Regiment
12, unless within 4”, when automatically
51).Thetablegraduallyrisestotheeast,with
spotted.) This reflects the microscopically
a series of contours forming a spur in the
small tactical units which the German
centreofthetable.
Divisions attempted to use towards the end

ofThirdYpres,theaimbeingfortheunitsto
VineCottageislocatedonthespur.Sources
remainconcealed,escapetheBritishartillery
refer to Vine Cottage as containing a large
barragesbutenfiladeenemyforcesfromthe
and formidable pillbox, but the farm
flankorrear.
buildings in which the pillbox was concealed

Page 62

inhavebeenalmostcompletelydestroyedby
British artillery fire. Ideally, Vine Cottage
should be represented by a large model
singlestoreypillboxwhichcanaccommodate
(orbetreatedasaccommodating)around12
to18figures.Theembrasuresonthepillbox
areonthenorth,westandsouthfaces.The
exitisontheeastside.
 Weather:drivingrainandcoldwinds
Thereareanumberofotherruinedbuildings
on the tabletop, none of which will provide
more than medium cover.  Most notably, to
thewestofVineCottageistheruinofVanity
House, another farm which is almost totally
destroyedandprovidesonlylightcover.
 the role is based on the famous Canadian
TothenorthofVineCottagearetheremains
of Goudberg Copse, which appear to have
been shattered by shellfire.  A larger,
unnamed,copsetothesouthofVineCottage
canalsobepositionedonthetable–thistoo
shouldberuinedandshellsplintered.While
VineCottagewasconnectedtoVanityHouse
by a small track, it is reasonable to expect
that very little of this, if anything, will have
survivedtheartillerymaelstrom.
 Malfunction, Abysmal and Poor Ground,
The entirety of the table is Poor Ground
(minus 1 pip on each movement dice), and
can be treated as light cover.  At the
Umpire’schoice,someareasofthetablemay
also be Abysmal Ground or Treacherous
Ground.  Be aware that “less is more” in
deployingareasofbothAbysmalGroundand
TreacherousGround,asthesedoslowdown
thegameandcanbedecisive.Thereseems
to have been little left by early November
1917 of either Goudberg Copse or the
unnamedcopsetothesouthofVineCottage.
Wetreatedtheseasprovidingeitherlightor
mediumcover(randomlydetermined).

There is no bonus to moving on the track.
The contours should be recreated on the
table, ideally with an area of dead ground
around Vanity House where the Canadian
woundedandleaderlesstroopsarelocated.
 
Page 63
188
Canadian reinforcements: Third Platoon:
ThirdPlatoonwillappearin1d6turnsofthe
Snifter card.  Make sure that the “British
Battlefield Fatigue” card is in the card deck
fromthestartofthegame,asthiswillaffect
the movement of the Third Platoon once
theyarrive.


Padre Michael St. John, Chaplain, Canadian
Expeditionary Force: Padre St. John is
included in the scenario to tend to the
Canadian wounded.  (If preferred, he could
be replaced with two stretcher bearers, but
minister,CanonFrederickGeorgeScott).He
moves on his own card (Status I) and can
assist in removing shock from the wounded
soldiers at Vanity House.  He cannot,
however, leave Vanity House and the
wounded soldiers once he has arrived.  He
can be shot at by the Germans, but this
shouldbestronglydiscouraged!

Additional Third Ypres Rules:  Mud
Battlefield Fatigue, Treacherous Ground and
Disorientationcanallbeused.TheGermans
should have at least one turn in which the
“German Communications Down” card is in
thecarddeckbeforetheintroductionofthe
“German SOS Artillery” card into the card
deck to signify the increasing pressure of
BritishandCanadianArtillery.




 189

amongst the normally steadfast Canadian

Cards troops was not helped by the cries of the
Canadian German Common wounded at Vanity House, exposed to both
BigMen BigMen Timefora drivingrain,coldwindandsporadicfire.
Snifter 
CanadianBlinds GermanBlinds  The day was saved by thirtytwo year old
CommandInitiative Command  CorporalColinFraserBarron,aLewisgunner
Ix3 InitiativeIx2 whoworkedhiswayaroundtheflankofVine
CommandInitiative Command  Cottage to knock out two German machine
IIx1 InitiativeIIx1 gun crews with his steady fire.  He then
CommandInitiative Command  chargedtheremainingmachinegunposition
IIIx1 InitiativeIIIx1 with the bayonet, killing four of the MG08
CommandInitiative Command  crew before the remainder of his platoon
IVx1 InitiativeIVx1 could intervene.  Corporal Barron continued
HeroicCanadian GermanSniper  tofireontheretreatingGermanforces,using
Leader their own machine guns against them.  For
CanadianFriction German  this gallant and conspicuously brave action,
Forward Corporal Barron was awarded a well
Observer deservedVictoriaCross.

CanadianForward GermanSOS 
The loss of Vine Cottage and Goudberg only
Observer Artillery
placedmorestrainontheGermandefensive
CanadianArtillery German 
linescontractingaroundPasschendaele.
Support Communications

Down(addat
leastoneturn Acknowledgments
before There is a very significant body of literature
introductionof for Third Ypres and Passchendaele.  I found
theas“German the most useful to be “Passchendaele: The
SOSArtillery Unseen Panoramas” (Peter Barton),
Support”card) “Passchendaele: The Sacrificial Ground”
Canadian   (NigelSteeleandPeterHart),“Passchendaele
Communications in Perspective” (Peter Liddle et al.),
Down(addatsame “Passchendaele: The Fight for the Village”
timeas“Canadian (Nigel Cave), “Polygon Wood” (Nigel Cave)
ArtillerySupport” and “The German Army at Passchendaele”
card) (Jack Sheldon).  Dr Bryn Hammond’s PhD
CanadianMortar   thesisontheTankCorps(availablefromthe
CanadianMachine   British Library) was very helpful for
Gun(x2) informationontankactionsintheSalient.All
CanadianMachine   of the quotations in these two articles are
GunBonus from contemporaries present at Third Ypres
andPasschendaele,andaretakenfromthese

books.Iwouldalsoliketoacknowledgethe
Historical Outcome variouscontributionsmadebypostersonthe
Despite atrocious conditions, the Canadian TooFatLardies yahoo group which were very
attack on Vine Cottage was eventually a helpfulinpreparingthesetwoarticles.
success.  Initial attacks had not been
successful,with heavyground and defensive
fire making grenades ineffective.  Morale

Page 64
 190

No one knows Big Men like our very own Sidney Roundwood. In this typically
elegant piece Sidney exposes his anthropological expertise with an
exploration of British and German Backgrounds for Big Men in “Through
the Mud and the Blood”
One of the very enjoyable things about the “Sharp and the Blood”. It is certainly not an attempt to turn
Practice” stable of rules is the focus on the role of the “Through the Mud and the Blood” into a roleplaying
Big Man. There’s an element of roleplaying which is game – the colour of Sergeant Limehouse’s eyes
just beneath the surface in how Big Men are used (hazel), or OberGefreiter Zeigler’s dexterity at leaping
within these rulesets – they drive the action, they rally from high walls (not the best since he was wounded at
their troops, they lead the close combat assaults. Verdun) isn’t going to matter at all. Rather, the
“Through the Mud and the Blood” is no exception, and intention is to map out some of the personality aspects
offers a great deal if you want to look more closely at which possibly, just possibly, might change the course
the background, motivation and, just possibly, the of a trench raid, a platoon assault, or even a bigger
future history of your tabletop Big Men in the Great moment of military history.
War.
Will your platoon commander’s fragile health and
The idea behind this article is to fill in some of the shattered nerves hold up in close combat? Will
blanks regarding the Big Men of “Through the Mud Gefreiter Fassbinder brave the Lewis gun fire to rescue

Page 22

that cold fish, Fähnrich Vogel, from No Man’s Land?
And will Captain Westferry’s secret illness, hidden from
the Poplar and Stepney recruiting officers, come back
to haunt him? Sometimes, warfare can turn on small
details like these.
The other objective of this article is to take a light-
hearted, but not entirely irreverent, look at where the
future might take your Big Men after the guns fell
silent at 11am on 11 November 1918. Will Corporal
Beckton remain in khaki in some far-flung corner of
the British Empire? Or will he return to the
Corporation Tramway depot he left four yaers earlier
when he volunteered? What uniform will Leutnant von
Scheer be wearing in the glitter and doom of the
Weimar Republic – that of the Heer, or something far
darker in shade?
191
Space in this Summer Special has prevented me doing
much except outlining the characteristics of British and
German Big Men in “Through the Mud and the Blood”.
Backgrounds for other combatants should not,
however, be too difficult for you to assemble if you’re
that way inclined. And if space permits in future, who
knows - perhaps the backgrounds for American,
French and even Turkish Big Men might appear one
day in a future TFL Special.
Breeding
So, what exactly is the background of each of your Big
Men? For each Big Man in your force, roll 2D6,
applying the modifiers shown.

BRITISH OFFICERS
“The soldier in the hour of need and danger will ever be more ready to follow the officer and
gentleman whom education, position in life and accident of birth point out to be his natural
leader…than the man who, by dint of study and brainwork, has raised himself from the plough or
anvil”.
Lieutenant General Sir Frederick Hamilton (1874)
You’ve clawed your way out of the ranks, and been rewarded with a (temporary)
Up from the
2-5 commission. Who would have dreamt it? If only your mates at Grimethorpe Colliery
Ranks
could see you now…
A “Temporary A grammar school boy perhaps, with a newly minted temporary commission and a
6,7,8
Gentleman” chance to climb the social ladder and show you’re as good as your “betters”.
Public School Play up, and play the game – this is what has been expected of you all since you were a
9, 10,11
Boy boy. You are part of Britain’s natural leadership – everyone is counting on you.
Daddy was a general in the Sudan, and Uncle Harry is an Earl. Soldiering is in your
blood. Having “Honourable” before your name just means you get a better dug-out to
12 Toff
hang your Burberry trench coat in… You will always be a Countryman (see Character
Traits below)
Sidney’s Notes: Regular and Yeomanry Cavalry Regiments: +1 to roll. For 1917-1918 period: -1 to roll

British NCO’ s
“Squire nagged and bullied till I went to fight, (Under Lord Derby's scheme)…”
Conscripted from the slums of the East End and now in the trenches of France.
2-5 Guttersnipe
Strewth, what a life!
You signed under Lord Derby’s Scheme.
6,7 Apprentice
You just hope your job will be there when you get back.
You signed up in 1914, into your local “pals Battalion” in a Kitchener Division.
8,9 “T’Others”
At least you’ve stayed with your mates from the tramway depot
You signed up in 1914, into your local “pals Battalion” in a Kitchener Division.
10,11 A “Commercial”
But don’t worry, you’re with fellows from your own class!
You’ve seen a lot since the summer of ’14. Not many of your generation left. Roll
1D6 for an Old Sweat – 1-3 Pre-War Territorial; 4-6 Old Contemptible of the pre-
12 Old Sweat
War regular army.
Add an additional Status level l (to a maximum of Status III).
Sidney’s Notes:
1914 period: In August 1914, all NCOs should be “Old Sweats”, with the number of such NCOs dropping as the years pass.
Between April 1917 to the end of the War, one way of reflecting the disappearance of the BEF veterans of Mons and Le Cateau
would be to roll again (just the once) if you initially roll “12” for an Old Sweat.

Page 23
 192

German Officers
“Leutnant Goebel’s been my platoon officer for the last three months. One of those small,
white-faced chaps. He’s only an amateur at the game like the rest of us. One of the reserve, one
of those autumn manoeuvre hoppers. But one of the sort a chap can get on with. Doesn’t shirk
his job and doesn’t pinch his men’s rations”
Karl Brőger, Pillbox 17

Your bravery and skill have finally been rewarded with a battlefield commission (Roll 1d6
Up from the
2 - 5 to see if your promotion came with a decoration: on a 5, Iron Cross Second Class; on a 6
Ranks
Iron Cross First Class)
Kriegsakademie
6,7 One of the next generation of leaders of the Fatherland.
graduate
Prussian Your ancestors fought with Freidrich der Grosse. Now the Fatherland calls you. Will you
8,9,10
Juncker answer? Gott Strafe England!
An arriviste from the middle classes. Your father, a veteran from 1870, held a
temporary commission in the 14th Infantry Regiment, has allowing you to enter the
11,12 Bourgeois
German officer class despite your middle class background. Can you outshine your
father’s fine military career and finally be accepted by the Prussians in your regiment?
Sidney’s Notes:
1917-1918 period: -1 to roll

German NCO’s
“In the heat of battle, one of my men, Gefreiter Kimpenhaus, jumped up on to the parapet, and
fired down th trench until he was brought down by two bad wounds in his arms. I took a note
of this hero of the hour, and was proud to be able to congratulate him two weeks late, on the
award of the Iron Cross, First Class.”

Ernst Junger, Storm of Steel

Son of a minor civil servant, you failed to gain entry to the Vienna Akademie der
2 Failed Artist bildenden Künste (not your fault, of course!) and since then you‘ve lived the life of a
down and out. Your watercolours are bland and unfashionable. Minus 2 on popularity roll.
From the
Conscripted into Feldgrau.
3 - 5 rattenkellers
The half-flooded bunker in Flanders reminds you of home …
of Hamburg
Landwehr and Perhaps you thought your time might have passed, but the telegram arrived a short while
6,7,8
Landsturm ago to call you to the Stellungkrieg.
9,10 Reservist Mobilised, trained and ready to answer your Fatherland’s call …
A war volunteer, who intended to seek a commission at the start of the war, you are a
survivor of die Kindermord bei Ypern. You were a student and sang as you ran “into this
11 Kriegsfreiwilliger
hell with childish trust”. Never bright morning again for those of you who lived through
it. You are a Linguist (see Character Traits below)

A veteran from the pre-War army, you can even remember the summer of ’14 if you try
hard. So much has happened since then, but none of it good. You are a Verdunkämpfer,
12 Altekämpfer
Sommekämpfer or grizzled survivor of die Flanderenschlact. Add one status level (to a
maximum of Status III).

Page 24
 193

Physical Stature
Are you a boy soldier, a “bantam”, a walking skeleton or a strapping ox of a man? Find out by rolling
2D6.

Physical Stature
“Ooh, look at you…”

2 You hid a secret illness from the recruiting officers. Roll 2D6
again

2 - You’re an asthmatic: if the unit you are attached to is caught in gas attack or gas pocket and subject
to a “Poor Gas Discipline Card”, treat as a light wound (page 21 of the “Mud & Blood” rules). Add a
“Poor Gas Discipline” Card to the “Mud & Blood” deck whenever gas is used. If the “Poor Gas Discipline”
card is drawn, the next group or weapons team (of either side) which is deployed in the gas barrage or
gas pocket suffers 1D3 additional wounds (counting no cover) – let’s hope you’re not in it!
3 to 11 - various embarrassing ailments, but nothing impairing military efficiency;
12 - You suffer from panic attacks, and they’re getting worse while you’re in the Trenches: Drop your
Health (see below) by 2 points at the start of the game
3 "Clear off son. Come back tomorrow and see if you're
nineteen, eh?" You’re a boy soldier, underage by at least two years. You have lots of spirit, but
it’s a man’s war. Minus 1 dice in close combat.
4 Bantam – (if British only) You’re well below 5 foot 3 inches in height, barely bigger than a rifle. But
you make up in guts what you lack in inches.
Emaciated - (if German only) Black bread and ersatz coffee is all the regimental canteen has
offered for weeks. Your belt and trousers are three sizes too big. You dream at night of English bully
beef and French chocolate.
5 - 9 Average – Slim, but of average build. Nothing that the regimental cook can’t fix.
10,11 Athletic – You’re fit and healthy and love running, especially when you’re being shot at. Plus 1 pip
to any dice roll when moving alone.
12 Giant – You’re a giant of a man, with hands like hams. Plus 1 dice when engaged in close combat.
Sidney’s Notes:
Member of a Stosstrupp, Stormtrupp or trench raiding party: plus 1 to roll

Page 25
 194

Popularity
Perhaps you find that, despite the misery and death in the trenches, some solace in the
companionship of your fellow soldiers. Do you lead the singing of “Wacht Am Rhein” or “It’s a Long
Way to Tipperary” as the enemy’s shells fall. Or are you introverted and silent, forever cursing your
luck? Roll 2D6 and find out.

Popularity
2,3 Not worth a light – a “real stinker”: Your men are stuck with you –
perhaps you feel the same away about them.

4,5 A Cold Fish : You brood on the bad fortune which brought you to this black and broken land.
You keep yourself to yourself. Making friends quickly leads to bitter grief in this place.

6,7,8,9 Likeable enough: You are generous with the parcels from home, and give out cigarettes
like confetti – there’s a lot worse than you Up The Line

10,11,12 Popular and Personable – “A sort of cobber of ours”: Like the Prince of Wales,
your men have accepted you whatever your background. You’re respected, and that means a lot to
you.

Sidney’s Notes: For a badly-wounded man, his popularity could make a difference in being rescued from no
Man’s Land, or left to die in a flooded shell-hole: When a Big Man is badly wounded and rolls 1D6 (page 21 of
the “Mud & Blood” rules), +1 for a Big Man who is “Popular and Personable”, -1 for a “Real Stinker”.

Health
Fighting on the Western Front took a terrible
toll on those who fought there. The pressures
of leadership, coupled with the rigours of a
social system in which showing fear or being
“windy” was greatly frowned upon,
exacerbated the tension for junior officers. As
an option for junior officers who may have
been in the front line for some time or who
have been under fire or enemy attacks for a
considerable time, you may like to use the
following Health system.
addition to providing an insight (however
small) into the terrifying experience of junior
commanders of all sides on the Western Front,
the use of the rule creates significant
challenges for player controlling a Big Man
under extreme pressures but who nevertheless
may occupy a critical position or undertake a
key role in the game.

In a number of playtest games, we have used

the Health system sparingly. (In our playtest
games we have not tracked the Health of each
Big Man in a force – we have found that “a
little had gone a long way” in the context of
using this rule.”) Generally, we have used the
Health rule in in circumstances where, viewed
objectively, one of the Big Men in a force
would be at risk of succumbing to combat
stress during the battle. These circumstances
would be rare, but are documented fairly
frequently in accounts by contemporaries. In

Page 26
 195

Health
“He put a bullet through his brain. No one spoke of him again”

1 “Done in”
2 Exhausted
3 Battle-ragged
4,5 Worn
6 Still fresh
Sidney’s Notes
For each wound suffered in any previous game (whether lightly or badly wounded – see page 21 of the “Mud
& Blood” rules): -1
Gassed in immediately preceding game (being within a unit suffering “shock” from a gas attack): -1
Suffers from panic attacks (see Physical Stature above)

Roll 1D6 and ascertain the Big Man’s Health

on the above table at the start of the game.
Track the Big Man’s Health on the table below,
starting with the Health score as shown at the
start of the game. Then, during the game,
reduce the starting Health score by the
number of Shock points inflicted on any unit
with which the Big Man is attached to (even if
that Shock is later removed). On reaching 5
Shellshock points, reduce the Big Man’s
status by one status level in the game.
On reaching 0 Shellshock points, treat the Big
Man as badly wounded (see rule 9.5.1 on page
21 of the “Mud & Blood” rules). He will have
no further influence on the game, but the
owning player must attempt to remove him
from the field of battle (no roll is needed for
this). Removal to a regimental aid post takes
two stretcher bearers if available (four in heavy
terrain), and two men from the unit the Big
Man is attached to if not.

Shellshock Points Table

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Treat as Drop “Done Exhausted Battle- Worn Still
Badly one -in” ragged Fresh
Wounded status

Character Traits
I like to try to add a little more colour to Big Blood” or the “Winter Sports” trench-raiding
Men through the following table. Many of supplement (see TooFatLardies’ Christmas
these have no effect on the game (although it Special 2010)
is surprising how often these are referred to
when playing). However, traits marked in blue
(positive) or red (negative) will have an effect
on the game of “Through the Mud and the

Page 27
 196

Alcoholic
All tasks take 50% longer owing to indulging in
frequent snifters
Countryman
British Officer only (excluding any officer “Up
from the Ranks”): armed with a trusty 12 bore
shotgun (Purdy’s) - counts as equipped with
trench broom in close combat
Morose
Minus 1 to popularity. Miserable sod.
Reckless
Roll 1d6: 1-4 reckless: may only make one
spotting attempt at each separate target (once
attempted, can’t repeat same target).
5-6 foolhardy: as “reckless”, but may not add
his initiative to any spotting attempts

Charismatic Sharp-eyed
Add +1 to Popularity. What a guy! Apply +1 on all spotting rolls.

Determined Short-sighted
Always adds 1 pip per dice of movement Apply -1 to all spotting rolls.

Dug-Out/Stellungkämpfer Sixth Sense

Overly cautious - remove 1 pip per dice of Award 2 additional Whistle Blowing Points at
movement start of game of Winter Sports when
defending in front line trench. Always a
Humane Highlander (with or without kilt) in a British
Will always attempt to rescue a wounded Big force.
Man of his own regiment or battalion,
regardless of the danger Stealthy
Always +1 to D6 roll attacking a sentry (Winter
Iron Constitution Sports)
Ignores first light wound (page 21 of “Through
the Mud and the Blood” rules) Thruster
No initiative point needed to enter close
Krieghund combat.
German Officer or NCO with 9mm Mauser with
snail magazine, or Bergmann MP18: always Trophy Collector
counts as both being a trench cleaner and as Add +1 to any souvenir collecting or looting
being armed with a trench broom in close rolls in enemy trenches
combat
Windy
Linguist Needs to expend an extra initiative to enter
Add another Wir Sind Freunde card (or close combat
equivalent) in Winter Sports to a trench raid
(up to 3 allowed)
Worn-out
Reduce Health to “9” at start of the game

Page 28
 197


“Slowly, slowly, the wound to the soul
begins to make itself felt, like a bruise
After the Guns Fall Silent which only slowly deepens its terrible ache,
I also like to find out what might happen to tillFirst,
it fills all the
and most psyche. find
importantly, And whether
when we
the Big Men from the games and campaigns
thinktheweBighave recovered and forgotten,
Man survived the War and lived to
it is
then that the terrible after-effects have to
played after the War, should they survive. The the moment when the guns finally fell
be encountered at their worst”
inspiration for this section came from Big silent. For those surviving, civilian life
Rich’s article in the 2010 Summer Special beckons. And for a few, the fighting
D H Lawrence Lady Chatterley’s Lover
which looked at later careers for Big Men in continues on …
the Charlie Don’t Surf “Tour of Duty”
Supplement. It’s not meant to be particularly Roll 2D6 for each Big Man used in the
serious but could, at the end of a game or game. Then, for the survivors, follow the
campaign of “Through the Mud and the relevant Exit and roll 1D6. Good Luck!
Blood”, add some suggestions on where you

might find your “Mud & Blood” Big Men
reappearing in your games.

Did you survive to hear the guns fall silent?

2-5 In Proud and Glorious Memory: Sadly, you are one of The Fallen. Dulce est Decorum Est
Pro Patria Mori.
6 Survived - but Wounded: A piece of shrapnel lodged firmly in your inner thigh always makes
you wince when the weather’s cold and wet. You are a Wounded Civilian – go to your relevant Civilian Exits Æ.

7-10 Survived: You have survived the War to End all Wars, and leave the army on being demobilised. You are a
Civilian – go to your relevant Civilian Exits Æ.

11, 12 Survived: You survived the War to End all Wars, but have remained in the army, or at least in a uniform of
sorts. Go to your relevant Military Exit Æ.

British Civilian Exits: “A Land Fit for Heroes”?

“I saw the Prince of Darkness, with his Staff,
Standing bare-headed by the Cenotaph”
Shell-shock and illness: You struggle to recover from the War. The post-War years are a series
1 of hospital wards and Doctors’ cold waiting rooms. The smell of formaldehyde now makes you physically sick. You
have trouble sleeping, and suffer vivid, terrible nightmares.

2 Penniless: The “Land Fit for Heroes” was another empty promise. There are so many like you, chasing so
few jobs on Civvie Street.
An “ordinary” life: Your life after the War is as “ordinary” as it can be after what you have been
3-5 through. You slip back into employment, your trade or a quiet profession, never to forget. You never talk to
anyone about your life in the Trenches.
The Dark Decade: You have an unusual life ahead of you. Roll 1D6 again:
1 You become a hack novelist writing horror stories about black magic, cashing in on the burgeoning interest in
ghosts and the supernatural immediately after the War.
2 You become the gamekeeper to the wife of a war-wounded baronet and behave unspeakably in her potting shed.
6 3 You form an unusual alliance with an odd, but clever, Belgian detective
4 You have a glittering career as a poet after the War. But you feel guilty you are remained alive and lace your
poetry with black, sarcastic bile …
5 You become a Member of Parliament, determined to avoid another War. But you slowly begin to realise that
democracy is doomed.
6 You leave the wreckage of Europe for the lure and promise of the Americas. Who knows if you will ever return.
Sidney’s Notes: If you are a Wounded Civilian: -1

Page 29
 198

British Military Exits: Sons of Empire

“We have come over here to finish our time, doing guards, curfew patrols, street patrols and
heaven knows what else. Ship Street Barracks, Great Dame Street, Dublin is the new address, and
its raining, what a life”
Private J.P Swindlehurst (British Voices from the Irish War of Independence 1918-21)
Home Service in Ireland
From Flanders to Fermanagh, you are not sure which is the frying pan and which is the fire. You preferred it when
your enemies wore a uniform. Roll another D6:
1 1 – 3: You remain in the regular army fighting the IRA in ambushes and raids across the “badlands” of Kerry;
4 or 5: You join the Black and Tans and earn the eternal loathing of Irish republicans;
6: You join the “Special Gang F Company Auxiliaries”, better known as the “Cairo Gang”, fight a vicious street-war
through Dublin and attempt to escape assassination by Michael Collins in November 1920.
Russia and the Intervention
2 You regiment is shipped to Arkhangelsk to fight the Bolsheviks in a bitter, nasty, civil war. And to think, a few
short years ago, these were your allies
India, Africa and the Empire
3,4 The British Empire spans the globe – where it calls, you follow. Somewhere there always seems to be some
revolting foreign johnnie to control, shoot, machine gun or gas.
Red Clydeside
5 You didn’t fight the Hun to let the Bolshevik burn your home. You never expected to be pointing a rifle at strikers
in the dockyards of Glasgow, but these are dark times.
Sandhurst
6 You rise through the ranks and are determined never to make the same mistakes as the Generals did in the Great
War. You become friends with “Boney” Fuller and Captain Liddell-Hart. You write a book about mobile warfare
which everyone, especially you, considers is brilliant.
Sidney’s Notes:
If you were an NCO, an officer “Up from the Ranks” or a “Temporary Gentleman”: -1
If you were a British trench raider: -1

Page 30
 199

German Civilian Exits: Glitter and Doom

“For us, Berlin was crazy, debauched, metropolitan, anonymous, gargantuan, futuristic.
In short, an infernal cesspool and paradise in one”.
Hans Flesch von Brünningen
1 Doom: You suffer from shell-shock and struggle to recover from the War. You travel to Vienna and visit Professor Freud
who attempts to psychoanalyse your “war neurosis”. Unfortunately, he can do little to stop your nightmares about that burnt
out bunker on the Siegfried Stellung …
2, Ruin: What meagre savings you have are obliterated in the hyper-inflation of 1923. You now sell matches and bootlaces at
3 the doors of a cabaret club, bitter at the failure of the Weimar politicians to help you.
4 Revolutionary: “Vereignt in Unser Kampfen”. You join the KPD and fight in Berlin, Munich and the Ruhr for the
communist cause until all hope is lost and your leaders are murdered. The future looks very bleak for you after that.
5 Glitter: For you, the chaos of Weimar is but an opportunity to prosper in the New Babylon. Roll 1D6:
1 You become a dada artist, exhibiting hat stands and urinals in a smart Berlin exhibition.
2 You become a German expressionist painter of note, producing savage canvasses inspired by your War experiences.
3 You become a writer, telling the German Volk what really happened in the War. You achieve fame and a certain notoriety,
although later generations will disown your works.
4 You become a black market profiteer, making a fortune out of hyper-inflation.
5 You become a politician, a social democrat. You spend lavishly on champagne and prostitutes and cannot escape the feeling of
impending disaster.
6 You open a cabaret bar in Berlin, hire an incredibly fashionable American jazz band, flirt with actresses from the Silver
Screen and are arrested for malicious practices.
6 Respectable anonymity: You return to the Heimat, continuing your old employment or trade but feeling
disillusioned, perhaps even betrayed. Was it all in vain? Will Germany ever be great again?
Sidney’s Notes: If you are a Wounded Civilian: -1

German Military Exit: Steel Wolves Further reading

“This is the New Man. The storm soldier, the elite of Middle Europe. Wargamers interested in the
A completely new race, cunning, strong and packed with purpose….the
Great War currently have a
axis of the future”
wealth of resources to look
Ernst Jünger Der Kampf als innere Erlebnis (The Struggle as Inner Experience)
through for information about
1 SturmAbteilung: Disillusioned at the end of the War, you come to the lives of combatants on the
believe in the Dolchstoss, the stab in the back of the army by the “November Western Front and other
Criminals” and politicians in 1918. You’re disgusted by the Treaty of Versailles theatres of the War. Some of
and its War Guilt Clause. You meet an Austrian Corporal in a dark bierkeller the most interesting books of
and are spellbound by his strange, magnetic personality. Your NSDAP party recent years have focused on the
membership number is impressively low. Your black heart knows there are hard role of the junior officers in the
street-fighting years ahead. British army, including the
2 Freikorps: The Fatherland must be protected against the Bolshevik excellent “Six Weeks” by John
horde. You fight against communists from Berlin to the Baltic coast with the Lewis-Stempel and “Playing the
Freikorps. You imagine yourself as some latter-day Teutonic knight, but you Game” by Christopher Moore-
know that the bitter truth is far less prosaic. Bick (both of which are highly
3 Putsch: You throw your lot in with renegade and reactionary generals, recommended).
determined to bring order to the Weimar chaos.
Autobiographies of soldiers in
4-6 Heer: You remain in the army. You have an undistinguished 1920s, going on the war abound and are widely
manoeuvres on bicycles and quietly waiting, watching. Perhaps you can already
available. Those by Robert
see the whirlwind approaching.
Graves, Siegfried Sassoon,
Sidney’s Notes: If you previously fought in a Stosstrupp, a Stormtrupp or were a
Edmund Blunden and Ernst
German trench raider: -1. If you are a Cold Fish (see Popularity above): -1
Jünger are not only among the
best known, but have the
attraction of being some of the
easiest to read.
Page 31

If a group of wargamers were each to pick
oneformationtorecreateinminiatureoutof
allofthosefightingon theWesternFrontin
theGreatWar,itwouldbeasafeguessthata
sizeable number would choose a formation
of German stormtroopers.  And that choice
wouldbehardlysurprising.
We think we know about these troops:  the
imageoftheirstallhelmandtheirbreadbags
ofhandgrenadesseemasdistinctiveastheir
innovative methods of fighting.  We have
probably all seen the same photographs, of
groups of aggressive, athletic, young men
posingforthecamerainareararea,awaiting
battle,perhapsaMG08/15lightmachinegun
at their feet or a MP18 Bergmann sub
machine gun carried proudly at the front of
theformation.
We think we know these troops, and how
they are used in wargames.  Infiltration.
Aggression.Storm.Attack.Speed.Surprise.
We see them in our mind’s eye looming,
masked, out of a cloud of phosgene gas. A
61
200
visceral, nearferal, uniquely Teutonic
whirlwind tearing through their opponents.
“ThisistheNewMan.Thestormsoldier,the
elite of Middle Europe.  A completely new
race, cunning, strong and packed with
purpose….theaxisofthefuture”wroteErnst
Jünger in 1925.  We think we know these
men,andtheirwayofwarfare.
And then we look closer.  We read further
and look at some of the revisionism about
the stormtroopers…or is that sturmtruppen
… or stosstruppen … or ersatzstosstruppen?
What exactly were these formations?  Were
theyallthesame?Weretheythatdifferent
fromBritishorFrenchtroops?Howdidthey
fight, and was it always in the same way?
And what happened to them after the
Kaiserschlacht,theGötterdämmerungonthe
Somme?  And perhaps, slowly, we start to
see a far darker subtext, one which unrolls
through the early literature regarding
stormtroopers in the 1920s and into the
nationalisticwritingsofthe1930s.Webegin

towonderifthereisa“StormtrooperMyth”,
orworse,misinformation.
 tactics is to navigate through the confusing
Thisisn’ttheplaceforadetaileddescription
of the origination, establishment and use of
theseunitsintheGreatWar,norofthevery
considerable body of revisionism, counter
revisionism, bias, propaganda and
(sometimes) downright lies which has
surrounded their treatment in history and
politics since 1918.  What I’ve tried to do
here is drill down to the way in which
differing assault techniques in the German
army, and the sometimes widely differing
assault formations, might be recreated in
miniature.  I’ve offered some rules
adaptations which hopefully add some
additionalflavourtotheuseofthesetroops
onthetabletop.
 Different Units, Different Roles:
I could have stopped there, as I have done
with previous rules adaptations for using
cavalry and tanks, and recreating a specific
battle – Passchendaele.  However, after
having looked at several different accounts
and perspectives on the use of German
stormtroopers, I came to the view that it is
difficult to replicate their particular way of
warfaresimplythroughatabletopaction.A
wider context is needed, as the point at
whichstormtrooperscontactedtheirenemy,
and how they did so, was just the apex of
theirevolvingbattlefieldrole.I’vetherefore
addedapregamesystemwhich,whilenota
game in its own right, hopefully allows
players to recreate the use (and misuse) of
stosstrupps on the tabletop, but which also
givesawidercontexttothetabletopaction.
 example,in1916,eachofthe3regimentsof
As an introduction to the rule adaptations
and pregame, I’ve highlighted some areas
below which typified the German assault
units of the Great War, and some of the
themeswhichemergewhenwelookbehind
thebackgroundweallthinkweknow.
 battalion and no sturmtrupps.  Certain
62
201
Terminology:
Oneofthefirsttasksinlookingatstormtroop
terminologyandformationsintowhichthese
troops were organised.  The usual German
terminology for stormtroop detachments
was “stosstrupps”, the German “stoss”
meaning “shock, “push” or “thrust”.  As late
as 1939, Stosstrupp was the usual German
Reichswehr and Wehrmacht usage; the use
of the word “sturm” carried more political
and NSDAP party associations.  Over time,
andinparticularinthelate1930s,theterms
became conflated (not least in the
propaganda produced by Nazi Germany’s
opponents), but for the purposes of this
article I’ve tried to mainly referred to
“stosstrupps”and“stosstruppen”.
Anothertaskistolookattheunitformations
in question.  There were significant
differencesbetweenthe17specialisedstoss
battalions of the German Army (such as 3rd
JägerSturmBataillonandSturmbataillonNo.5
commandedbyWillyRohr)andthedivisional
and regimental stosstruppen and
ersatzstosstruppen.The17specialisedstoss
battalions had both a combat role and an
important training role,each battalion being
linkedwithaspecificGermanArmyalongthe
frontlines.
The training programme initiated by the
German High Command ensured that by
November 1916 all German divisions on the
Western Front comprised a number of stoss
formations, mainly at company level.  As
the 28th Reserve Division formed a
sturmtrupp of three officers and 150 men,
and the Bavarian Ersatz Division at Verdun
advanced in skirmish lines with a refused
SturmAbteilung.  By then, some divisions
(termed “flying divisions” in some sources,
such as the 2nd Guard Reserve) had a sturm
divisionswerealsoknownasstormdivisions,

ostensiblybecausealloftheinfantryinsuch
divisions has been trained, or at least
familiarised, with tactical stock troop
methodsor“stosstrupptaktik”.
Materialdifferenceswould,however,remain
when regimental and battalion stosstrupps
were compared with the highly trained and
specialiststormbattalions.Thenovel“Krieg”
byLudwigRenn,himselfastosstruppofficer,
highlightshowtroopsonlylooselytrainedin
stosstrupptaktikcouldbeexposedandsuffer
heavy casualties when conducting such
tacticsonthebattlefieldwithouttherelevant
experience.
FormationsandTactics:
Much has been written about the
“revolutionary”natureofthetacticsusedby
the stosstrupps.  The impression gained
through reading some postwar accounts is
that they were the pioneers of “infiltration”
tactics, and that their combat effectiveness
was barely challenged by linear defences.
While there were a number of strikingly
modern themes in the tactical operation of
stosstrupps, one approach would be to
interpret their tactics as being more
evolutionary than revolutionary.  The
formations and tactics employed would vary
significantly according to the context of the
particularaction.
It is difficult to be categorical concerning
“typical” stosstruppen formations.  While
company and battalion scale assault
formations are well documented, the great
varietyofstosstruppsorsturmblocks(smaller
assault units attached temporarily to larger
units)isnoteasilyreducedtoastandardsize
or organisational formula.   Battle casualties
were considerable in these lower level
formations, making paper strengths
misleading.
The forming of individual stosstrupps was a
reaction born out of the potential for
stalemate in the winter of 1914 between
63
202
AlliedandGermantrenchlines.During1915
the tactical foundation of what became
recognisableasstosstrupptactics–initiative,
flexibility, dynamic junior leadership and
overwhelming firepower at a focal point –
were being developed in both German and
Allied armies.  Tactics were becoming
individualisedthroughnecessity.Bythetime
of the publication of “Instructions for the
Training of Shock Troops” in 1917 company
stosstrupps were deployed in a distinct, but
complementary, manner alongside
supportinginfantrysquads.TheInstructions
stated that “[t]he shock troop should never
influence the commitment of the company,
meaning that men should not believe that
the shock troop will now accomplish
everything by itself”.  The company
stosstrupp’s role was to flank defences,
capture forward saps and attack
blockhouses,machinegunsandstrongpoints.
Stosstrupps were intended to “reach the
point of penetration the moment their own
artillery moves on” and thereby inflict
surprise on their enemy.  However their
tactical flexibility in achieving this goal was
not to be gained at the expense of
dislocation with supporting forces: “During
theattacktheshocktroopsareintendedfor
the support and guidance of the infantry in
difficult circumstances. They form the first
assaultwave,eachshocktroopstrengthened
bytwoorthreeinfantrysquads…Theuseof
shock troops without attached infantry
squadsisnotrecommended”.Theemphasis
was on the stosstrupp operating as a
component of the attack, not as a separate,
uniqueforce.
A typical example is the combined attack by
LiebGrenadierRegiment109andacompany
of 3rd JägerSturmBataillon, a specialised
assault battalion, on 30 November 1917 in
thelaterstagesofthebattleofCambrai.The
Germanforceswereconfrontedwithatangle
of old trenches and obstacles on rolling
countryside 400 metres west of Bauteaux,
withthedefencesstretchingtoadepthof2
 203

kilometres.  Three stosstrupps were formed test describes clearly how stosstrupp
from 3rd JägerSturmBataillon, two of which formationswouldformthesecondlineinan
each consisted of four sections (two with a advance – very much as prescribed in
MG08/15 light machine gun), two light “Instructions for the Training of Shock
Granatenwerfer 15s and a section of two Troops”.
portable Klein flamethrowers.  A third
stosstrupp, termed a “security group”, Firepower
accompanied the two leading stosstrupps to Arguablythefulcrumofstosstrupptaktikwas
reinforce them in the event of casualties. thereforenotinfiltrationbutthedeployment
Whereas the stosstrupps attacked the ofoverwhelmingfirepower,concentratedon
defencesfrontally,thesupportingcompanies key breakin points.  Cooperation between
from Lieb Grenadier Regiment 109 the stosstrupps and the Beglietwaffen
manoeuvred into outflanking positions, (support weapons) was critical.  The
forcingtheBritishdefendersback.Casualties supportingweaponsofthestosstruppswere
amongst the company from 3rd skilfullyhandled.
JägerSturmBataillonwereheavyenoughforit
to be pulled out of action for the next two MobileGranatenwefer15grenadelaunchers
days.  Actions such as this emphasise the wereadeptat“rapidandpouncingaction”as
complementary nature between specialised they deployed forward, engaging targets
stosstrupptaktik and the battle as being withinthe60–300metrerange.
foughtbyotherinfantryformations.
Infantry guns (infantriegeshutz) would be
These complementary roles are repeatedly formedintofourgunbatteries,comprisinga
emphasised in “Instructions for the Training pair of twogun echelons, and placed under
of Shock Troops”.  Far from practicing only the command of the local battalion
“infiltration tactics” (a term used first in commander.  Crews would be trained as
French sources and then appropriated by stosstruppen,eachgunhavingadetachment
British and Americans writers), stosstrupps of five pioneers to accompany the gun and
were used frequently at focal points of
resistance.  The Instruction that “[i]f heavy
resistance from the enemy is not expected,
the assault troops can also be initially held
backandthenonlyusedifduringtheattack
the infantry encounters obstacles which are
difficult to take” is typical of the tone
adopted in the “Instructions”.  A different
theme of stosstrupptaktik can be seen in
their deployment against enemy
strongpoints, quite distinct from the flowing
dynamism and infiltration often associated
with stormtroopers in action.  A number of
examplesofstosstruppsbeingdeployedasa
hammer to smash through determined
defences are given in Fritz Ristow’s book
“Sturmgrenadiere”, a detailed account of
Sturmbataillon 7 which took part in
Operation Friedensturm, the last of the
German Spring offensives in 1918.  Ristow’s

64

clear obstacles on the battlefield in advance
oftheguns’movement.From1917,2heavy
machine guns were also attached to each
infantriegeshutz echelon of the stosstrupp.
Firing a combination of highexplosive and
bluecross shells (containing
diphenylchloroarsine,asolidchemicalirritant
embeddedinthehighexplosiveshellcasing)
thegunswouldengagetargetsfromasnear
as 50 metres, the highexplosive rounds
being used against strongpoints and
blockhouses, the bluecross shells against
enemyinfantry.
Flammenwerfers were deployed either from
the Guard Reserve Pioneer Regiment, as
assault formation specialising in flame
tactics, or (less frequently) from a
formation’s own integral flammenwerfer
troops.  Twelve man sections would form a
kleinstosstrupp of two flammenwerfer
squads(offourmeneach)accompaniedbya
fourman squad armed with hand grenades
and two squad leaders.  The
kleinstosstruppen would use an Indian style
forward stalking (indianermässigen
65
204
Vorpirschen) to advance on the enemy line.
Within 70 yards a covering jet of flame and
smoke (Deckunssstrahl) would be unleashed
withtheintentionofconfusing,demoralising
and terrifying the enemy, before the assault
sections rushed in.  By 1916, flanking
machine guns and grenade sections
accompanied the kleinstosstrupps,
employingapincertactic(ZangenTaktik)ina
movement “that the enemy often considers
crazy,chapshoppingaimlesslyfromcoverto
cover” before coordinating the final assault.
ApamphletpublishedshortlybeforeVerdun
(PamphletIa,No491,6thFebruary,1916)on
the use of Flammenwerfers emphasises that
“it is often necessary for the shock troop to
movesideways”.Ratherthaninfiltration,the
careful preparation and deployment of
support weapons and harnessing of their
firepower at a single critical point was seen
asdecisive.
In addition to skilful handling, support
weapons were frequently numerous, with
the aim of deploying them in overwhelming
force.  By the time of Operation Michael in
March 1918, one regiment in the 2nd Army
deployedasashockformationwasassigned
ten stosstrupp from 3rd JägerSturmBataillon,
eightinfantryguns,twoflammenwerfer,two
light Minenwerfer, two machine gun
sharpshooter detachments each with twelve
MG08 machine guns, a divisional mortar
company with four heavy and eight light
mortars, four field guns in addition to the
regiment’s own compliment of support
weapons.
Infiltration:
Infiltration as a tactic was practicable where
enemy defences wereweak, poorly sited, or
incomplete, and where major gaps existed
between centres of resistance.  In 1916 and
1917, the use of infiltration tactics by
stosstruppscanbefoundbutitappearsmore
as an exception to the general rule of their
deployment.Whereinfiltrationwasseenon
a large scale, such as at Skrobowa in

September 1916, this could be as the result
of a “knife tactic” (Messertaktik) whereby a
large serpentine column of (flamethrower
assault sections (Flammenstosstrupps)
approached a very heavily fortified Russian
defensive area before striking the line and
dissolving into “twitching pieces” which
carved their way through the Russian
defences.  Such improvised infiltration
appears to have been more a result of
battlefield initiative than a planned and
deliberateoperationalmethodology.
The publication in January 1918 of “Der
Angriff im Stellunkrieg” (The Attack in
PositionalWarfare)appeared,atleastatfirst
sight,toelevateinfiltrationtobeingatactical
imperative for German assault forces.  This
remarkable document has been seen by a
number authors as the fountainhead of
German Stosstrupptaktik.  It appears
strikingly modern, emphasising the
66
205
ascendancy or morale factors, the
concentration of artillery at breakin points,
the merits of careful planning coupled with
dynamic responsiveness and the harnessing
ofenergy.“Everythingdependsonquickand
independent action by all ranks within the
context of the whole” is one exhortation
whichappearsinanumberofdifferentforms
throughout the document.  Particularly
interesting is the change of emphasis
towards attacking places of heavy enemy
resistance:“Strongpoints,villagesandwoods
mustbeneutralised,incertaincircumstances
by smoke clouds.  The troops should pass
them and, distributed in depth, attack the
points which appear likely to offer the least
resistance”.  This, at last, appears to the
reader to be the apotheosis of the German
stormtrooper: infiltration, speed, shock and
dynamism with “every attack offering the
opportunity for free activity and joyfully
decisive(entschlussfreudingen)action”.

However,thesethemesneedtobeviewedin
context.  Der Angriff represents a change in
focus from the lower level company
stosstrupps to a setting relating to higher
levelcommands.Thecontextisnotsomuch
the attack with “limited objectives” of the
“Instructions for the Training of Shock
Troops”, but an Angriffsschlact, or attack
battle, encompassing all forces.  The scale is
dramatic, but aspirational.  The fulcrum in
Der Angriff is the divisional and army
engagement.Yetlittleworkwasdonewithin
the German High Command to link this
frameworkintoalargerandmorepervading
context at a battalion and regimental level.
Advocates of Der Angriff have illustrated its
influence by reference to the significant
successes of German forces in Operation
Michael against the British Fifth Army.
However, against more tougher and better
prepared defences, such as those of the
French armies in Champagne and on the
Chemin des Dames in 1918, the bold
blueprintofDerAngriffwaslesssuccessful.
ManagainstMaterialschlact:
One of the more difficult tasks to undertake
inuncoveringthetacticsofStosstruppsinthe
Great War is discerning the extent to which
our perception of stosstrupps and their
tactics have been clouded by a number of
filters.  Some of these filters are literary;
some are attributable to propaganda
circulated in the 1930s; some are deliberate
obfuscation by former generals; and some
relatetoaGermanophileapproachtotactical
evolution in the Great War adopted by a
numberofacademicsbetweentheWarsand
in the 1970s and 1980s.  While space does
notallowforafulldiscussionhere,oneofthe
mostinterestingexamplesofthecloudingof
our perception comes through the works of
ErnstJünger.
 from being anodyne professional articles on
This may at first seem surprising.  Jünger’s
book“StormofSteel”,isfrequentlyheldout
asaclassic,perhapseventheclassic,ofGreat
War autobiography.  However, on closer
67
206
inspectionJünger’stextforthebookappears
to have been an extraordinarily malleable
literary work. It’s origins are undoubtedly
rooted in his personal experiences; Jünger
subtitled “Storm of Steel” “aus dem
Tagenbuch eines Stosstruppfuhrers” (“from
thediaryofaShocktroopLeader”).However,
significantdifferencesexistbetweenJunger's
Kriegstagebuch (his war diary, recently
published in German) and “Storm of Steel”.
Unlikehiswardiary,“StormofSteel”ismore
formal, and far less personal, depicting his
experiences as typical of front line officers.
He portrays himself in “Storm of Steel” as
tacticallycompetent,perhapswithaneyeto
his position in the Reichswehr in the
immediate postwar period.  The sullen and
resentful troops Jünger describes in his war
diaryhaveevolvedintoepicheroeswhenwe
meet them in “Storm of Steel”, with the
latterbookbeingintended(particularlyinthe
first edition of 1920) to function as a war
memorialdedicatedtothememoryoffallen
comrades.  As monumental history with a
tendency to distort the past, the result in
“Storm of Steel” is a highly unstable text,
frequently altered and edited by Jünger in
tandem with his fluctuating political and
philosophicalviewsintheWeimarperiod.
PlacingJünger’swritingsinaliterary,andnot
a military context, is something which
militaryhistoriansandwargamersareloathe
to do.  However, even Jünger’s professional
military writings in German military journals
in the immediate postwar years suggest a
significant congruence with his literary
development.  In Skizze Moderner
Gefechtsführung (1920) and Die Technik in
der Zukunftsschlact (1921) Jünger
contemplated, respectively, the role of
stosstruppen in battle and his evolving
technicist understanding of warfare.  Far
military theory, these works fit well into
Jünger’s literary progression.  They also
contribute to a near paralysing feeling of
prolongedcrisisinJünger’sworkinthe1920

1925 period, and indicate a path to his
extraordinary work Der Kampf als innere
Erlebnis(“TheStruggleasInnerExperience”)
publishedin1925.Itisinthelaterworkthat
we are told “[t]his is the New Man.  The
stormsoldier,theeliteofMiddleEurope.A
completely new race, cunning, strong and
packed with purpose….the axis of the
future”.  Such works signpost Junger’s
reactionarymodernism,allowinghimtofuse
heroiclanguageandthemesofGermanneo
romanticism with an acceptance, and
redefinition, of modernity. Such works are a
long way from the personal, intimate
battlegroundsofhiswardiary.
SuggestionsinJünger’swritingsinthe1920s
that stosstrupptaktik potentially formed a
corrective, revolutionary solution to the
stalemate of trench warfare conforms to
many of the postwar reactionary modernist
approachestoboththeroleoftheindividual
in an industrialised war, and notions of
Materialschlact.   Literary critics of Junger
which have navigated through the jungle of
signs,allusions,philosophyandmetaphorsin
his postwar personal and professional
writings.Manymilitaryhistorianshavebeen
less keen to apply equivalent approaches to
his works, treating “Storm of Steel” and,
perhaps to a lesser extent, “Copse 125” as
primarily military and not literary texts.
Unfortunately, therefore, for the wargamer,
“StormofSteel”belongsjustasmuchinsuch
a literary framework as it does in a military
one.
WideningtheContext:
I’ve attempted in this article to place
stosstrupptaktikintoamoreaccuratecontext
by looking at the breadth of tactical
approachesavailabletoaGermanbattlefield
commander.  I’ve also tried to rebalance
concepts of stosstrupptaktik away from the
 
68
207
aspirational,battlefieldthemesofDerAngriff
im Stellungskrieg and towards a lower level
context.  I’ve also tried to stand back from
literary works such as “Storm of Steel” in
favourofmilitarydocumentswhichresonate
with actual battles and engagements.  As
everwithwargaming,anyresearchneedsto
be translated into a practical tabletop
context.  So where does my reappraisal of
stosstrupptaktik leave a wargamer wanting
to recreate the specialised method of
warfareonthetabletopin“ThroughtheMud
and the Blood”?  My main thought is that a
number of different approaches are
necessary.

RulesAdaptations:
“ThroughtheMudandtheBlood”replicates
the possible use of stosstruppen in
wargamingverywell.Beinganopen,flexible
system, the rules allow for significant
variations in troop quality and abilities both
through the classification of troops
(aggressive, veteran) and also through the
introductionofadditionalcommandinitiative
cards and SturmAbteilung Vor! cards. Until
this year, each of the numerous games we
have played using stosstruppen have been
varied using just the card deck.  In other
words, all of the features outlined in the
article above can, with some thought, be
replicatedbythebasicrulesinthe“Through
theMudandtheBlood”rulebook.
Recently, however, I’ve been adding a
numberofadditionalelementstoourgames
with the aim of developing the themes of
stosstrupptaktik described above without
adding complexity or gametime.  I’ve listed
these additional (and strictly optional) rules
below, each of which flows from the theme
of Stosstruppen Formations: Infiltrate,
Junior Leadership, Storm Detachments and
GotoGround.
 208

Stosstruppen Formations
Foranystosstruppenbeingusedinagame,determinethenatureandexperienceofthese
troops.  Additional stosstrupp attributes are shown on the table which follows.  The
percentagefiguresinthistablerelatetothelikelinessthatanadditionalattributeispresent
when using the formation on the tabletop. Are your stosstruppen a sturmblock from an
elite,specialisedSturmbataillon,attachedtoacompanyofStellungsbataillonkämpfer?Or
are they a thinlytrained regimental stosstrupp, with only a few days practice behind the
lines at Douai, their leather elbow and knee patches only recently sewn onto their old
uniforms?Rollad6toseewhichtypeofformationyouarefielding,asshownontheleft.
The right hand column then indicates the percentage chance of that particular formation
havingcertainattributes.Rollasetofpercentiledice,andfindout.

1 RegimentalStosstrupp Infiltrate(20%chance),DynamicJuniorLeadership(40%
(insufficientlytrained) chance), Aggressive troops (automatic), Storm
Detachments(10%chance),GotoGround(30%chance).

AddoneSturmAbteilungVortothecarddeck.Addone
German friction card in 1915 games where stosstrupps
are present with other troops to reflect early problems
in coordination between stosstrupps and other less
specialisedformations.

2,3 RegimentalStosstrupp Infiltrate(40%chance),DynamicJuniorLeadership(40%

chance), Aggressive troops (automatic), Storm
Detachments(20%chance),GotoGround(30%chance).

AddoneSturmAbteilungVortothecarddeck.

4 DivisionalStosstrupp Infiltrate(50%chance),DynamicJuniorLeadership(50%
chance), Aggressive troops (automatic), Storm
Detachments(50%chance),GotoGround(50%chance.

AddoneSturmAbteilungVortothecarddeck.

5 DivisionalSturmBataillon Infiltrate(80%chance),DynamicJuniorLeadership(70%
chance), Aggressive (automatic), Storm Detachments
(40%chance),GotoGround(80%chance).

AddoneSturmAbteilungVortothecarddeck.

6 EliteSturmBataillon Infiltrate,DynamicJuniorLeadership,Aggressivetroops,
(SturmBataillon5(Rohr), StormDetachments,GotoGround,UpfromtheRanks–
3rdJägerSturmBataillon, Alloftheseattributeswillbepresentautomatically.Add
etc.) twoSturmAbteilungVortothecarddeck.

69
 209

Stosstrupp Attributes
Infiltrate AstosstruppwiththeInfiltrateattributecanroll4D6formovementona
blind,discardinganyonediceitwishes.Thisreflectsthefrequenttraining
ofmanystosstruppsto facilitatetheirmovingthroughabattledamaged
landscape and using the cover as effectively as possible.  Infiltrate can
onlybeused,however,theretheformationontheBlindisnotcarryingor
accompanied by heavy weapons (anything heavier than an MG08/15,
Madsen,capturedLewisGunorChauchatisa“heavyweapon”forthese
purposes).

Junior ExpandtheleadershipradiusofallstosstruppBigMenby2”
Leadership

Storm The stosstrupp can form up to two small, micro4 man units scouting
detachments within 16” of any Big Man.  When moving on the table (deployed from
blinds) the storm detachments move using d8s, not d6s.  A storm
detachmentwillbedifficulttospot,anyspotteradding+1totherequired
spotting score.  This attribute reflects the detachment’s training in
scoutingaheadusingtheirindianermässigenVorpirschen(Indianforward
stalking).

GotoGround Astosstruppwiththisattributewillautomaticallygotogroundattheend
oftheirmovewithouttheunitneedingtoexpendanActionDice.

Ausdenranken For an elite SturmBataillon, the “Up from the Ranks” roll (rule 9.5.2)
producesareplacementforafallenBigManonanythingbuta“1”.


 

70

In addition to looking at how to rank our
stosstruppen,Ialsowantedtocreateabasic,
fast way of deploying stosstrupp onto a
tabletop battlefield.  Although I am a big
supporter of using scenarios as the
framework of a game, I also wanted to try
and replicate some of the chaos of battle
when forces arrive at an initial tabletop
deployment point having already engaged
the enemy a short time before.  I felt that
creating this context was more suited to a
“pregame” than a preprepared scenario.  I
alsowantedthepregamestagetobesimple,
andtobecapableofcompletioninaround15
minutes.TheresultisStosstrupptaktik!
 stacked together in any numbers.  This
StosstrupptaktikRules:
1. The German player chooses his forces
from the force list.  The intention is to
replicate the immediate aftermath of a
major offensive, such as in the second or
thirdday–thinkofthe22ndor23rdMarch
1918,forexample.
 1d6: On a roll of “1” through “4”, one
2. TheGermanplayerstartswith10pointsof
Stosstrupps, with 1 point equating to 1
squad of 8 figures plus a Big Man.  The
German player adds 2D6 of points from
the Available Stosstrupptaktik
Formations and Doctrines table on the
next page, either selecting units or
doctrines to enhance his basic force.
These forces can be organised as
“Abteilungen” – basically any group of
troops and weapons which you wish to
stackandmovetogetheronthemap.
71
210
3.  For added colour you can roll on the
StosstruppFormationstableabovetosee
whatsortofforceyouarefielding.

4. Nowwelookatthedefenders.Thesewill
beareFrench,BritishorImperialforces.
The defending player starts with ten
sections of troops, each being eight men
and one Big Man.  In addition they have
one trench mortar, two HMGs on fixed
lines and two fortifications (fortified
wood, trench line, wooden bunker, or
fortified farmhouse, depending on your
terrain).  Defending troops can be
deployed in any area on the map and
allows the defending player to weigh his
front line defence and second and third
linesashewishes.Doeshechooseahard
but brittle front line or a defence in
depth?

 Eachfortificationhasasizecapacity.Roll
section can be located in the blockhouse
or strongpoint; on a “5” or “6”, two
sectionscanbelocatedintheblockhouse
orstrongpoint.

5. Duringthepregamephasethedefending
player will receive reinforcements at a
rate of one unit per move, rolling on the
Defending Reinforcements table on the
next page.   Roll a d6 when each
reinforcement section arrives with it
arriving in section 9 on a roll of 1 to 3 or
section10onarollof4to6.
 211

AvailableStosstrupptaktikFormations andDoctrines
Stosstrupp 1point Mobile,each1squadof8menandBigMan
Grantenwerfer15 1point Mobile,canfireintoownoradjacentareas
andcrew
LMGandcrew 1point Mobile
Flammenwerferand 1point Mobile
crew
Infantrygunand 2points Slow,canfireinsameoradjacentarea
crew
Minenwerferand 1point Slow,canonlyfireintoadjacentareas
crew
HMGandcrew 1point Slow,canfireintoownoradjacentareas
Infiltrate Doctrine, Can move multiple areas, only stopping when encountering
1point more than one enemy units.  Can also pass through an SOS
barrage but at loss of 1 point per Abteilung.  The Infiltrate
doctrineisonlyavailabletoMobiletroops.
Schlactflieger Doctrine, (Available in late 1917, 1918 games only).  Cannot use with
1point BadWeather.Ifchosen,simplyaddSchlactfliegercardtothe
deckinthegame(randomisefighterorbomber)
Gas Doctrine, Chooseeitherontablegasbarrageorontablebluecrossgas
1point shellswithinfantrygun.Deployonanyspecifiedareaonthe
map.
Additional Doctrine, Onlyoneadditionalcardallowed(maxof2ingame)
SturmAbteilungVor! 1point
card

DefendingReinforcements
1 ReinforcementsaredelayedowingtoGermaninterdictionartillery.Noreinforcements
thisturn.Rollagainnextturn.
2 Yourreinforcementsarrivefromacommunicationstrenchthisturn
3 Yourreinforcementsarrivefromacommunicationstrenchthisturn
4 Addoneadditionalsectionofriflementhisturn
5 Addoneadditionalsectionoftrenchcleanerstothereinforcementsnextturn
6 AddoneLMGwithcrewtothereinforcementsthisturn.

72

6. Turn sequence:  The German player
activates his troops first in each turn.
After completing the German move, the
defending player can move.  In the
playtest games we have found that the
defending player tends to remain in
positionuntilreinforcementsarrive.
7. Movement:AnyAbteilungorDefending
Unitcanmoveoneareapermoveonthe
map,butmustceasetheirmovementon
enteringanareacontainingaDefending
Unit.  Abteilung which are using the
“infiltrate” doctrine (chosen from the
Formations and Doctrines table above)
canmoveanunlimitednumberofareas
on the map, but must cease their
movement on entering an area
containing a Defending Unit, at which
pointacombattakesplace.
8. Combat:  Combat takes place either on
the tabletop (when a significant
engagement is achieved, which the
playerscandetermineforthemselves)or
in an abstracted form.  The abstracted
formwehaveusedintheplaytestsisfor
the German player to choose a number
onasingleD6.Thenumbercorresponds
to the number of units in the Abteilung
which he wants to fight in the combat.
The defender selects on the dice the
number which he thinks the German
player has chosen – if he guesses
correctly, that number of German units
73
212
aredestroyed.Ifthedefendingplayer’s
guess is incorrect, one of his units
(chosen by the German player) is
destroyed. In the event that a German
player deploys Gas (using the “Gas”
doctrine)insupportofanattack,thefirst
successful guess by the Defender is
ignored.
If the German player wins the combat the
number of units he attacked with can
move forward into thenext area on the
nextturn.Theymaydothiseveniftheir
opponent still occupies the area where
theyhavejustfought,leavingthemtobe
mopped up by forces following on
behind.TheGermanplayercanattackas
many times in a turn as he wishes,
however each Group may only attack
onceinaturn.Attacksconductedbythe
defendingplayerworkonthesamerules
mechanic.
9. The defending player has two SOS
barrages which should to be pre
positioned at the start of the game
(unknown to the German player).  The
SOSbarrages“cut”aroutebetweenmap
areas.  A German player may move any
AbteilungthroughanSOSbarrageatthe
cost of one unit (stosstrupp or heavy
weapon, chosen by the German player)
being destroyed.  Note that as the
German Infiltrate move is unlimited,
infiltrating stosstrupps can simply pass

aroundtheSOSbarrageunlessotherwise
blockedbytheirenemyinanadjacentor
nearbydifferentarea.
10. Long range fire is possible for some
weapons listed on the Stosstrupptaktik
Formations and Doctrines table.  Such
weapons can fire into an adjacent area,
hitting on a “5” or “6” (remove one
Stoss/Section/weapon chosen by the
targeted player).  Heavy weapons firing
inaturncannotmove.
11. Translating to the tabletop: in a fairly
simple game like this it may well be
obvious when the action should be
translatedfromthepregamemaptothe
tabletop.  This would usually (but not
always)happenwhentheGermanforces
achieveaconcentrationofforcebeforea

74
213
welldefended position or strongpoint.
The German player now begins the
tabletop game with the forces he has
advanced into that area.  If any enemy
forces are still being mopped up behind
these lead elements then they must be
overcomebyanyfollowupforcesbefore
they can join the tabletop game.  To do
thisaddaBlankCardtotheGameDeck
for the tabletop games.  Each time this
card is dealt roll a D6 for each squad
sized Group or support weapon in the
followup force.  For each 6 rolled they
overcome one section of defenders.
Onceallthedefendersareovercomethe
followup force may move on to the
tabletop game, appearing on Blinds on
thenextBlankCard.
We now play the tabletop game as normal
withtheGermanplayerneedingtoovercome
thedefendersinthatareainordertowin.
The aim of the pregame is to have the
German player determine whether a single
pointofattackormultiplepointsofattackis
preferable, and to balance the use of the
Infiltration doctrine against combining
overwhelming firepower at a single breakin
point.  For the defending player, positioning
the two strongpoints will determine the
course of the pregame and the defensive
systemusedtoprotectthem.
 214

As 2014 looms large on the horizon we as “Formeasasoldier,thesmallestdetailcaughton
wargamers can expect to have the next four the spot in the heat of the action is more
years where, more than ever, our prime instructive than all the Thiers and Jominis in the
requirement will be a survival kit to help get us world”
through endless televised commentary telling us 
all about “Lions led by Donkeys” and the Paddy referred to his own methods as “Tactical
“sausagemachines” into which the pompous snippetting”; the seeking out of hundreds, if not
Generalsendlesslyfedthebraveworkingman. thousands, of tiny bits of information which,
 when sewn together in a patchwork, could
Myownescapepodwillconsistquitesimplyofa provide a more accurate picture of events than
crisptenpoundnotesoIcanswitchofftellyand anysinglebroadbrushcommentaryoraccount.
their well rehearsed platitudes and retire to the 
pubforanhour. How does this work?  Well, take, by way of an
 example, the 2nd Devons on the 17th of
When writing Through the Mud & the Blood my September 1944, as featured elsewhere in this
primary objective was to present combat in the Special.  It is really very easy to get general
Great War as it actually was, rather than some information on XXX Corps and the Irish Guards
cliché ridden image of classbased parody of battlegroup;theyweretheglamorousendofthe
ineptitude.InthatIwasaidedbythewritingsof party and as such much reported.  The 2nd
authors such as Dr Paddy Griffith which inspired Devons, providing the flank Guard were part of
me to seek real understanding of conflict, any 231 Brigade, not really part of XXX Corps but on
conflict, through gaining an appreciation of how attachment.  Their role in most histories is
the war was actually fought: namely, the real incidental, if not entirely overlooked.  Indeed,
tacticsonthegroundatthelowestlevel. their own Regimental history, The Bloody
 Eleventh, gives us no more than a few pages on
Paddy, a mentor who became a friend, told me theevent.
over a particularly good lunch that his own 
inspiration had been the writings of Colonel In order to build up even the most superficial
Ardant du Picq; a French officer of the 19th understanding of what happened to that force
century who was killed in the FrancoPrussian overaperiodofthreehoursononedayin1944I
War.  Du Picq’s method of studying military wasobligedtoseekoutwhatinformationIcould,
history was to seek out small detail, for this, he wherever I could.  The Battalion diary, the
believed,wouldprovidethetruthastohowwars accountsofColonelJ.O.E.Vandeleur,lookingout
werereallyfought.Hesaid: theIrishGuardshistory,the2ndIrishGuardswar
 diary, listening to recorded interviews with
anyone from that battalion on record at the

Page 35
 215

Imperial War museum, seeking out any written donkeys,butitwasalsonotrelianton“lions”to

firsthandaccountsIcouldfindandthentopping do the job.  This was not a programme which
that off by having certain facts (very kindly) promoted selfsacrifice, indeed it focussed on
checkedandcrossreferencedformebythestaff selfpreservation.  The training took an
at the Regimental Museum at the Keep in industrialised approach to the wellbeing of the
Dorchester (wellwortha visit). Andfranklythat enlistedmanwhichaskedmerelythateveryman
wasenoughforanarticleaboutwargaming! didhisdutyaccordingtowhathewastrainedto
 do.Itwasaverycivilianapproachtotherealities
But the principle remains that the Devil is in the ofaverycivilianarmy.
detail.  Rather than simply accepting the 
comfortabletruismsournationalmythservesup In Mud & Blood I refer to the British Army
weneedtolookfurtherafieldatallsortsofdata training manual SS143, Instructions for the
in order to build up a picture of how troops Training of Platoons for Offensive Action.  1917.
actuallyfoughtatthesharpend.Andthesame Andrightlyso.
wasastruein1918asitwasin1944. 
 PublishedinFebruary1917SS143isaspectacular
Reading Battalion Diaries for the Great War one ripostetothe“sausagemachine”chargesooften
cannot but be struck by how much time is levelled.  Its breakdown of the platoon into four
dedicated to training (and indeed to sport).  In componentmutuallysupportingpartsisproofof
the appendix to the War Diary of the 1st imaginative thought and practical application of
AustralianInfantryBrigadefor1918onefindsan new technology which was occurring at grass
illuminating document which confirms just how roots level as early as July 1916 and being
central constant training was to the Empire adoptedbythe“topbrass”immediatelyafter.
forces. 
 SS143inits1917garbisanexcitingmanualisfor
“Sequence. both the Great War historian and the wargamer
(i) (a) The Company commander selects his of the period.  The subsequent update of
ground and draws up a short scheme for February1918isnothingmorethanastatement
platooncommanders. of the professionalism of the BEF.  A
 professionalism which was borne of its
(b) He then takes the platoon commanders experiences,butequallyimportantlytheveryfact
through, giving them situations to solve, that its leaders were constantly seeking to
messagestowrite,orderstowrite,plentyof improveonwhathadgonebefore.
mapreading 
 Inits1917formatSS143showedclearlythatthe
(c)Thenextdaytheplatooncommandersgo British Army had grasped the basic concepts of
through the same process with section fire and movement.   By 1918 the manual took
commandersandaskingthemquestionswith that further by embracing the concepts of the
regards the use of ground, covering fire and empty battlefield and devolving command
formations. authoritydowntothesectionleader.Thiswasa
 huge leap from 1916, the British Army’s first
(d) The next day the whole exercise is done majoroffensivewithitsnewcivilianarmies,when
with troops.  Full explanation before the the lowest level of real command was the
exercise,fullcriticismafterit. companycommander.Itisimportanttorealise
 thattheselessonswerenotlearntcheaply.Many
(ii) (a)The following week the Battalion mendiedinorderfortheseprofoundchangesto
Commander exercises his Company occur.Itwouldbewrongofustounderestimate
commanders without troops, and then on the human cost of this, but equally it would be
subsequentdayswithtroops.” foolish of us to not recognise the parameters
 within which the British, and other, armies were
Andsoon,allthewayuptoDivision.Thiswasa operating.
serious war being taken seriously by all 
concerned.  In truth the Army was not only far Much credit is, rightly, given to the Germans for
removedfromthechargethattheirleaderswere the development of the concept of the “elastic

Page 36
 216

defence”.  Rightly so.  That represented an especially one pitted with shell holes and
intelligent use of limited resources.  But it is obstacles, but what the illustration does show is
important that we also recognise parallel the source of command in a central and leading
advances in British tactics, and the means by position.Inthecaseofthesecondplatoonthisis
whichtheywereachieved. the Platoon Sergeant as the officer has already
 advancedtospeaktohisoppositenumberinthe
Let us compare two images from the 1917 and firing line.  In itself this speaks volumes of how
1918 manuals.  Firstly the 1917 edition shown the function of the platoon HQ, the officer and
here. Sergeant, was viewed in 1917.  The formation
 wasdesignedtoallowthemthebestopportunity
to closely influence everyone under their
command,namelyfourninemansections.

By1918thefortymanplatoonwasathingofthe
past.  The Platoon HQ was still very much the
same.  The Lieutenant was supported by the
Platoon Sergeant and there were two runners,
one of them also being the officer’s batman.
However,thesectionswereverydifferentintheir
composition.  The 1918 manual makes it very
clear that the platoon’s weapons remained the
same; rifle and bayonet, handbomb, rifle bomb
andLewisgun,butthecompositionwasnowvery
different.  Four sections remained.  Indeed the
“square” structure was there throughout the
battalion.  Four companies each had four
platoons which each had four sections.  The
sections in a battalion were now numbered 1 to
16, with the odd numbered sections being
designated as rifle sections, the even numbered
sectionsasLewissections.So,eachplatoonhad
 tworifleandtwoLewisgunsections.
This shows two platoons attacking a German 
strongpoint around a crossroads.  Keen eyed This was an interesting development, but it
readers will spot that this is the first training remained true to the earlier concept that two
scenarioinStoutHearts. sections were there to provide supporting fire
 while the other two were to manoeuvre and
The first platoon is shown in black, the second assault with the bayonet.  Indeed the document
platoonmovingupinsupportisinred. isexplicitinstating:
 
Ifonelooksatthefirstplatoonitisapparentthat “The secret of victory is successful movement by
these troops are using their weapons to best theinfantry.Infantrycannotmoveinthefaceof
effect by the way that the four very different unsubduedhostilefire.”
sectionsarepositioned.However,itisalsoclear 
that the advance to the attack is, in theory at A sterling principle and a lesson well learned.
least,stillverylinear.Theplatoonisadvancingin What was different was the composition of the
two waves, the first wave being the manoeuvre sections.Noweachonehadsixenlistedmenand
and assault elements, namely the bombers and one NCO.  Not only this, but regulations now
the riflemen.  The second wave follows up with stipulated that a section could fall to three men
the firepower elements, specifically the Lewis in strength before it was amalgamated with
sectionandtheriflebombersection. another, so highly was the fire and movement
 flexibilityoffourindependentsectionsvalued.
Naturally the use of such rigid formation would
be amended by circumstance on the battlefield,

Page 37
 217

On Fire and Movement tactics, the manual is teaching.  Secondly, and far more interestingly,
explicit. weseethehugeshiftincommandresponsibility.
 Rather than leading from the front we see 6
“Thewholeofinfantrytacticsisthusfoundedon Platoon HQ sat back with two of its sections (7
the principle of combining Fire with Movement. and 8) while 5 and 6 sections advance forward.
The simplest picture of the principle is found in Theyinturnhavedeployedtwomenasscoutsto
the platoon itself, for example one or more precedetheiradvance.
sections moving towards the enemy while the 
othersectionsengagehimwiththeirfire”. Let me quote from the text which accompanies
 thismap.
Above is the diagram from the 1918 manual.  I 
havereplacedtheoriginaltextin theboxesonly “This sketch shews No.6 Platoon in front.
because the scan on the old manual was not Nos. 5 and 6 sections are making a “bound”
great,soapologiesforthelossinquality.Several to the hedge which is already occupied by
thingsarestriking.Firstlythemanualhasmoved scouts.  The Platoon commander will keep
away from the diagrammatic to the pictorial. Nos.7and8sectionsundercoveruntil5and
This was found to be a more effective way of 6 complete the “bound”.  No. 8 Platoon is

Page 38

supporting No. 6 : its commander watched
No. 6 and keeps touch with No.6 H.Q.  The
support company (“C”) is not shewn in the
sketch:  it is advancing through the “Soft
Spot”tosupportNos.6and8Platoons.The
commander of the leading Platoon of “C”
companyhasmovedforwardtokeepintouch
with Nos. 6 and 8 Platoons : he has two
runners for sending information to his
company commander, but he acts without
waitingfororders.”
 So, in the same way as the training scenarios in
Not only are there no donkeys or sausage
machinesinsight,butthisalllooksverymodern.
Advancing in bounds, troops on overwatch,
reinforcing success by finding and exploiting the
“SoftSpot”intheenemydefences:thisisnota
view of tactics which would shock anyone in
Afghanistan today, apart from the fact that the
use of runners as the only means of
communicationmeantthatthedecisionsin1918
were being taken by the junior officers on the
ground without the ability to ask their superiors
viaradio“WhatdoIdonow?”
 Replacing these were individual strong points
Finally,inthe1918versionofSS143therearesix
illustrationsdisplayedinthisformat,eachlooking
ataspecifictacticalsituation.Ofthosethreeare,
likethisone,setinopencountryside.Inonethe
settingisunclear,itcouldbeabroadexpanseof
NoMansLandoritcouldbeopencountry.Only
one image is specifically set in the scarred
battlefieldwhichweallconsidertypical,andeven
therethetwoplatoonsinquestionareusingfire
and movement tactics in a modern sense.  This
manual, produced in February 1918, was not a
manual for static warfare.  It was not a manual
for doing things “the way they had always been
done”, but rather was a statement of real
technicalabilityandtheintentiontobreakoutof
themudandthebloodtoreachthegreenfields
beyond.

TrainingforSuccess
So,letusleavebehindthemud,blood,trenches,
sausage machines and donkeys and project
ourselves forward to 1918 and a more mobile
formofwarfare.

Despite the Blackadder images of men rotting in
the trenches for years on end, the truth is
actuallysomewhatdifferent.TypicallyaBattalion
wouldspendbetween3andtendaysatatimeon
a“tour”ofthetrenches.Ofthattimeonedayin
Page 39
218
three was typically spent in the front line, with
the other two in the reserve trenches.  For an
average British soldier the majority of his time
wasspentawayfromthefrontintraining.
Throughout the war the British were meticulous
in their analysis of their fighting techniques and
capabilities.  After an attack questionnaires
wouldbecirculatedtoallofthemen,irrespective
of rank, and the responses collated and acted
upon.

Stout Hearts used the 1917 version of SS143 I
thoughtthebestwaytopresentthe1918version
wouldbeinthesamefashion.Herewewilllook
athowtheBritishtrainedforanattackandthen
consider a real example from the more open
warfareof“TheHundredDays”inlate1918when
the lessons learnt allowed the British soldier to
win where the much vaunted Stormtrooper
tacticshadfailedearlierintheyear.

By 1918 the German defences were significantly
different to the linear trench networks of 1917.
whichweresupportedbyneighbouringpositions
with mutually supporting fields of fire.  Even
within the large battlefields of the war, such as
Passchendaele in 1917, an attack was no longer
about getting British Battalion A to assault and
occupyalinearpositionheldbyGermanBattalion
X, with the Company the main unit of
manoeuvre, as in 1916.  The battle now
demandedmuchgreaterplanningwithindividual
platoonsbeingallocatedveryspecificobjectives.

For the British the German defences, and more
importantly how to take them on, were
categorised in two ways:  Organised or
unorganised.  Let us look first at organised
defencesandhowtocrackthem.


Scenario One
“Organised Resistance”
 prescribe formation depth, talking more about
“Organised resistance will be met where the
enemy has had time to make a plan of
defence and carry it out.   It may be
developed and elaborated by fieldworks –
wire entanglements, trenches, dugouts, etc.
But it is the plan of defence and it execution
by the enemy which constitutes organised
resistance, and not the existence or wire or
trenches.Organisedresistancewillrequirean
organised attack – a general plan of
movement for a number of units in co
operation, and prearranged covering fire
(artillery barrages, trench mortars, machine
gunstanks).“
 StatusIII
Between 1917 and 1918 it is clear that the
practical realities of war prompted a devolution
of responsibility which saw the section leaders
trusted not just to provide discipline and
obedience but also to lead and make tactical
decisions.
 
Contrast the platoon formation below with that
onpage57ofMud&Blood.Theplatoonisnow
operating on the same frontage as the 1917
Company.  A full company advancing would
Page 40
219
operate on a 400 yard frontage, so a square
arrangementtypicaloftheperiod.

Interestingly the1918versionofSS143doesnot
tactical bounds rather than fixed distances.  A
realmovetomodernity.

British Briefing
In the following scenario the British player is
commandingtwoplatoonsofinfantry,bothvery
much as we have described above, in an attack
on an organised German defensive position in a
smallFrenchfarm.

BritishForce
PlatoonOneHeadquarters
Commander Lieutenant Reginald Carshalton,
SergeantAlfMitcham,StatusII
Tworunners
SectionOne–RifleSection
Corporal Frank Romney, Status I, with six
riflemen.Includedaretwomenwhocanoperate
asbomberswhenrequired.
SectionTwo–LewisGunSection
Corporal Bill Hythe, Status I, with six riflemen,
NumberoneandtwoontheLewisgunplusfour
ammunitioncarriers/riflemen.Theriflemenmay
 220

add their fire when the Lewis is deployed and plus four ammunition carriers/riflemen.  The
firing. Two men may operate as rifle bombers if riflemen may add their fire when the Lewis is
required. deployed and firing. Two men may operate as
 riflebombersifrequired.
SectionThree–RifleSection 
Corporal Burmarsh Rhodes, Status I, with six SectionThree–RifleSection
riflemen.Includedaretwomenwhocanoperate Corporal Billy Banstead, Status I, with six
asbomberswhenrequired. riflemen.Includedaretwomenwhocanoperate
 asbomberswhenrequired.
SectionFour–theLewissection 
Corporal Nosher Dymchurch, Status I, six men; SectionFour–theLewissection
NumberoneandtwoontheLewisgunplusfour CorporalPrestonPark,StatusI,sixmen;Number
ammunitioncarriers/riflemen.Theriflemenmay one and two on the Lewis gun plus four
add their fire when the Lewis is deployed and ammunitioncarriers/riflemen.Theriflemenmay
firing.Twomenmayoperateasriflebombersif add their fire when the Lewis is deployed and
required. firing.Twomenmayoperateasriflebombersif
 required.
PlatoonTwoHeadquarters 
LieutenantBertieBellingham,StatusIII StokesMortarTeam
SergeantSydHill,StatusII FivecrewwithoneStokesMortar
Tworunners 
 Reconnaissance tells you that the enemy is
SectionOne–RifleSection occupying One Hundred Acre Farm 200 yards
CorporalAlfStreatham,StatusI,withsixriflemen. aheadofyourcurrentposition.Enemystrength
Included are two men who can operate as isunlikelytobemorethan20men,morelikelya
bomberswhenrequired. dozen.However,itissupportedbyotherenemy
 positionsclosebytotheNorthEast.
SectionTwo–LewisGunSection 
Corporal Bert Shortlands, Status I, with six You may select one of the following support
riflemen,NumberoneandtwoontheLewisgun optionstoassistyou:

Page 41
 221

 
1. AMarkVtank
2. A Vickers machine gun section of two
Umpire’s Notes
guns The Germans must deploy within 6” of the
3. A smoke screen provided by 18 pounder farmhouse.  They may be entrenched or the
fieldguns. buildingcanhavebeenstrengthenedtoserveas
abunker.Ifthelatter,itwillfirefromtwofaces

of the player’s choosing with a 120 degree arc
Your objective is to attack and clear the farm.
Your force will begin the game deployed on fromthatposition.
Blindsonthesoutherntableedgeatthestartof 
TurnOne. The Germans may have two Sustained Fire
Machine Guns firing onto the table from

positions off to the North East.  The machine
The British will have the following cards in the
GameDeck: guns may place their markers anywhere on the
 northern table edge between the top right hand
(northeasterly) corner and the German flag
BritishCards
marked on the map.  However, if the British
BigMen
player has selected the smoke screen as his
BritishBlinds
supportoptionandplacedthatofftabletoscreen
StokesMortar
offthesethentheyareremovedfromplay.
CommandInitiativeIx2 
CommandInitiativeIIx2
CommandInitiativeIIIx2 Tactical Solution
Upandat‘em! The tactical solution here is shown (or shewn if
 wearein1918)onthenextpage.Itis,ofcourse
theoreticalanddrivenbythestoryinthetrainer’s
German Briefing mind.
You have been ordered to hold the position at 
KronPrinz Farm as part of the defences in this We can see that one platoon, No.3 in this
area.  As a forward position you have not yet instance, has advanced on the left and met
been able to deploy wire, but you do have food resistance.  It has responded by leaving its two
fire support from friendly positions just to the rifle sections back out of harm’s way and
NorthEast.Yourforceisasfollows: deploying its two Lewis sections to engage the
 enemy with maximum firepower.   The attached
Commander Stokesmortarisaddingitfire.
FeldwebelArturSpengler,StatusIII 
 What the manual seeks to teach us here is that
MachineGunSection No.1 Platoon, moving to support No.3 platoon,
GefreiterHansBeyer,StatusI,oneMaximHMG, has moved round the German flank and sought
fivemen. outthe“SoftSpot”,ormoreparticularlythepoint
 wheretheenemy’sfireisnotconcentrated.
RifleSectionOne 
Gefreiter Rudi Schmidt, Status I, eight riflemen, Here this advance been masked off by smoke
twomenofwhomaretrainedasbombers. fromotherpositionsandwecanseethatScouts
 have been placed on the flanks to ensure
The Germans have the following cards in the security.
GameDeck: 
 

GermanCards
BigMen
GermanBlinds
GermanMachineGun
CommandInitiativeIx1
CommandInitiativeIIx1

Page 42
 222

Itisatheoreticaldream.Intruththesameresult
could have been achieved if Number 1 Platoon
had advanced to draw the fire and Number 3
Scenario TWO
Platoon had then advanced to support it.  But “UNOrganised Resistance”

however cynical I may wish to be about the
“Unorganisedresistancewillbemetafterthe
preciseness of such an illustrative example the
breaking down of organised resistance.  The
factisthatbycombiningfireandmovement,one
enemyshouldthenhavehadnotimetoplan
pinning and, hopefully, suppressing, while the
ororganisehisfurtherdefences.Thedefence
othermovesiscertainlythekeytosuccess.
will be left to parties of his troops dispersed

overthegroundandactionontheinitiativeof
As an aside, my recent research into small unit
localcommandershereandthere.Itwilltake
tactics for Chain of Command has made me
the form of scattered machine gun “nests”
realise just how little things change between
andrifleposts.Thisformofresistanceshould
WWIandWWII.Thetruthistacticsdon’tchange
not and must not hold up the advance.  It
atall,onlythesectionweaponschangeandthat
must be overcome by the determination of
makesonlyatinydifference.
platoonandcompanycommandersactingon

their own initiative within their sectors, and
What is notable is how few wargamers dare use
relyingmainlyontheirownresourcesforfire
fire and movement.  It has been my experience
tocovertheirforwardmovement.”
that most wargamers get their troops into a fire 
fightandthensitthereandblazeaway.Isthisa
criticism?No.Itisanobservationabouthuman British Briefing
nature and why the Army spends so much time In the following scenario the British player is
teaching the combination of the two.  Any fool commanding a single platoons of infantry in an
can do one or the other badly. Combining the attack on an unorganised German defensive
two is what takes skill, and practice.  That will positionbyabridge.

upsetsomeone! 



Page 43
 223

BritishForce required.
PlatoonHeadquarters 
Commander Lieutenant Reginald Carshalton, Your objective is to attack and overcome the
StatusIII enemyMG“nest”andopentherouteacrossthe
SergeantAlfMitcham,StatusII river.   Your force will begin the game deployed
Tworunners onBlindsonthesoutherntableedgeatthestart
 ofTurnOne.
SectionOne–RifleSection 
Corporal Frank Romney, Status I, with six The British will have the following cards in the
riflemen.Includedaretwomenwhocanoperate GameDeck:
asbomberswhenrequired. 
 BritishCards
SectionTwo–LewisGunSection BigMen
Corporal Bill Hythe, Status I, with six riflemen, BritishBlinds
NumberoneandtwoontheLewisgunplusfour CommandInitiativeIx3
ammunitioncarriers/riflemen.Theriflemenmay CommandInitiativeIIIx1
add their fire when the Lewis is deployed and Upandat‘em!
firing. Two men may operate as rifle bombers if 
required.

German Briefing
WiththeEnglishadvancecontinuingallorderhas
SectionThree–RifleSection
beenremoved.Youhavenoordersbutyouknow
Corporal Burmarsh Rhodes, Status I, with six
thisbridgeisimportantandyouanbuthopethat
riflemen.Includedaretwomenwhocanoperate
Engineers have been sent to destroy it.  In the
asbomberswhenrequired.
meantime you will hold your ground against any

enemyadvances.
SectionFour–theLewissection

Corporal Nosher Dymchurch, Status I, six men;
NumberoneandtwoontheLewisgunplusfour GermanForce
ammunitioncarriers/riflemen.Theriflemenmay Commander
add their fire when the Lewis is deployed and FeldwebelArturSpengler,StatusIII
firing.Twomenmayoperateasriflebombersif 

Page 44
 224

MachineGunSection cover.
GefreiterHansBeyer,StatusI,oneMaximHMG, 
fivemen.

Tactical Solution
RifleSectionOne The tactical solution presented here is that
Gefreiter Rudi Schmidt, Status I, four riflemen, Number1sectionmanoeuvrestotherightofthe
road to provide fire support from behind the
twomenofwhomaretrainedasbombers.
crest.MeanwhileNos.2and4sectionsmoveto

The Germans have the following cards in the theleftviathetrack totakeuppositionsonthe
GameDeck: crest to fire down with their Lewis guns.  These
 sectionsfiringfromofftotheleftcankeepfiring
uptothelastmomentbeforeanyassaultgoesin.
GermanCards

BigMen
The advantage of firing the Lewis gun from an
GermanBlinds
angleisillustratedthus:
GermanMachineGun
CommandInitiativeIx1
CommandInitiativeIIx1

Umpire’s Notes
TheGermansmustplaceasandbaggedmachine
gunnestwithin4”oftheflagbythebridge.The
riflemenmaybeentrenchedanywherewithin6”
ofthebridgeoneithersideoftheriver.Neither
position has overhead cover so both are at risk
fromtheBritishriflebomb.

Onekeyareahereiswherethecrestofthehillis. 
The British tactical manuals make much of using Number3section,ledbytheplatooncommander
the crest as a form of entrenchment, or at least willmanoeuvredownthelanetoassaulttheMG
an advantageous firing position.  I have marked nest.  As they pass No.1 section will join in the
the crest discretely with a green dotted line. charge,attackingonawidefrontsoastoreduce
Your terrain doesn’t have to be precise, but the effectiveness of the German machine gun.
consider where your own crest is and allow Thebayonetwillbethepreferredweaponinthe
troops behind it the advantage of being in soft finalcharge.

Page 45
 225

The battle commenced on the 4th of November

Mobbs’ Own 1918.  As part of the 24th Division the 7th
 Northamptonshiresweredetailedtotakepartin
The story of the 7th Battalion of the the general advance across their entire Brigade
Northamptonshire Regiment is an interesting frontage.  A short barrage preceded them and
one.  In 1914 England Rugby player and Captain theybegantheiradvanceat03.00.By08.00the
of Northampton Rugby Football Club, Edgar British had moved too far forward to enjoy
MobbsvolunteeredfortheBritishArmy.Aged34 artillerysupportwhilsttheGermanswereableto
thenhewas,allegedly,toldthiswouldbeayoung bring down a barrage of their own to halt the
man’swarandtogohome.Mobbsrespondedby advanceontheheightsacrossfromWargniesle
recruiting 250 men to form a “Sportsmans Petit.  What was more, German defenders o the
Company”. heights opposite were putting down effective
 machinegunfire.
The idea may seem slightly odd to the modern 
readerbutinformingKitchener’snewarmythere It was decided that 2nd Lieutenant C.Pike would
were some particularly unusual recruitment takeforwardCCompanytotakethedefendersin
methods used.  In London two Sportsmen’s the flank.  Moving forward with the main
battalionsincludedlargenumbersofcricketersas chausséeonhislefthewouldattackthenorthern
part of the “Pals Battalions” initiative which saw end of the village and, supported by Captain
menencouragedtosignupwiththeirfriends. Williamson’s A Company, would roll up the
 defenders in the village and occupy the heights
Mobbs’ force was to form the nucleus of the 7th opposite.
(Service) Battalion of the Northamptonshire 
Regiment and, after spending nearly a year
trainingontheNorthDowns,landedinFrancein
September1915.

Mobbsisamanwhodeservessomestudyinhis
own right; he rose from Private to the rank of
Lieutenant Colonel, commanding the battalion,
beforehisdeathtakingonamachinegunpostat
Zillebeke in Third Ypres.  Here, however, we are
goingtolookattheverylastactionoftheGreat
Warfoughtby“Mobbs’Own”duringtheSecond
BattleoftheSambreinNovember1918.

BattleoftheSambre
By the end of October 1918 General Haig had
beenpoundingtheGermanswithasuccessionof
offensives for twelve weeks.  The battle of the
Selle had been so successful that the British and
French were determined to follow this up 
immediately with another blow which, they GSGSSheet2743.Belgium&France,Sheet511:40,0001917.Lard
IslandLibrary
hoped,wouldknockGermanyoutofthewar.


This is an action which is a really nice size for
TheFrenchFirstArmyandtheBritishFirst,Third
Through the Mud & the Blood and is typical of
andFourthArmiesweretoadvanceona30mile
the period.  German defences were largely
front to threaten Namur.  Meanwhile US forces
limited to machine gun nests manned by men
were to break out of the Argonne.  The entire
whowerefightingondespiteallhopebeinglost.
operation was designed to stop the Germans
forming a fresh, and significantly shorter,
defensivelinealongtheMeuse.


Page 46
 226

BRITISH BRIEFING
You are commanding two platoons of C
Company, 7th Battalion Northamptonshire
Regiment.  The Boche are utter barbarians, still
holding on despite their losses.  Now we must
attack and break into the village ahead before
Captain Williamson can follow up and take the
SectionTwo–LewisGunSection
Corporal Harry Hammersley, Status I, with six
riflemen,NumberoneandtwoontheLewisgun
plus four ammunition carriers/riflemen.  The
riflemen may add their fire when the Lewis is
deployed and firing. Two men may operate as
riflebombersifrequired.


heights. SectionThree–RifleSection
 Corporal “Uppen” Underwood, Status I, with six
You know the enemy will be chiefly made up of riflemen.Includedaretwomenwhocanoperate
machine gun teams and you are every keen to asbomberswhenrequired.

keepyourmensafe,sorememberthetacticsyou
SectionFour–theLewissection
havebeentaught.Takecare!
 Corporal Charlie Carling, Status I, six men;
BritishForce NumberoneandtwoontheLewisgunplusfour
PlatoonOneHeadquarters ammunitioncarriers/riflemen.Theriflemenmay
Commander2ndLieutenantPike,StatusII add their fire when the Lewis is deployed and
SergeantBertieBeaumont,StatusII firing.Twomenmayoperateasriflebombersif
Tworunners required.


SectionOne–RifleSection The British will have the following cards in the
Corporal Reggie Rotherham, Status I, with six GameDeck:
riflemen.Includedaretwomenwhocanoperate 
asbomberswhenrequired.
 BritishCards
SectionTwo–LewisGunSection BigMen
CorporalVinceVassal,StatusI,withsixriflemen, BritishBlinds
NumberoneandtwoontheLewisgunplusfour CommandInitiativeIx3
ammunitioncarriers/riflemen.Theriflemenmay CommandInitiativeIIx2
add their fire when the Lewis is deployed and Upandat‘em!
firing. Two men may operate as rifle bombers if 
required.
 German Briefing
SectionThree–RifleSection Whywearestillfightingnobodyknows.Weare
CorporalJerryJohnson,StatusI,withsixriflemen. beaten,surelytheKaisermustknowthis.There
Included are two men who can operate as istalkthatLudendorffisinanasylum,thatthere
bomberswhenrequired. is revolution at home, that out families starve.


SectionFour–theLewissection Yet we are told nothing but that we must hang
Corporal “Lenny” Leonard, Status I, six men; on.Yourforceisasfollows:
NumberoneandtwoontheLewisgunplusfour 
ammunitioncarriers/riflemen.Theriflemenmay GermanForce
add their fire when the Lewis is deployed and Commander
firing.Twomenmayoperateasriflebombersif FeldwebelUweSeeler,StatusII
required. 

MachineGunSectionOne
PlatoonTwoHeadquarters Gefreiter Hans Tilkowski, Status I, one Maxim
SergeantWilfWakefield,StatusII HMG,fivemen.
Tworunners 


SectionOne–RifleSection MachineGunSectionTwo
Corporal Wally Woodward, Status I, with six Gefreiter HorstDieter Hottges, Status I, one
riflemen.Includedaretwomenwhocanoperate MaximHMG,fivemen.

asbomberswhenrequired. MachineGunSectionThree
 GefreiterWilliSchulz,StatusI,oneMaximHMG,
 fivemen.

Page 47
 227

MachineGunSectionFour
Gefreiter Wolfgang Weber, Status I, one Maxim
Umpire’s Notes
The Germans are largely deployed facing across
HMG,fivemen.
 the valley rather than against the British attack
RifleSquadOne from the north.  As a result they may place two
Gefreiter Siegfried Held, Status I, four riflemen, MachineGunsectionsasfarnorthasthedotted
linealongthehedge.Therestoftheirforcemust
twomenofwhomaretrainedasbombers.
be deployed up to the dashed line which

RifleSquadTwo indicatestheendofthevillageitself.
Gefreiter Lothar Emmerich, Status I, four 
riflemen, two men of whom are trained as TheGermanshaveonlyonemachineguncardin
the deck which they may use to activate a team
bombers.
which is yet to be activated in the current turn.

The Germans have the following cards in the Other than that the Germans are entirely reliant
GameDeck: ontheirBigMentokeeptheirforceinaction.
 
TheBritishenterthetableonBlindsanywhereon
GermanCards
the section of table edge marked with the Blue
BigMen
line.Theymayelecttobringononeplatoonata
GermanBlinds
timeorbothtogether.
GermanMachineGun

CommandInitiativeIx1 To win the British under Lieutenant Pike must
CommandInitiativeIIx1 clear the table of Germans with the resources
they have available.  The Germans must stop
them to claim the victory.   The table here, as
withallothersinthispiece,is6’by4’.

Page 48

As we have discussed previously in the pages of
theSpecials,farfrombeingthesausagemachine
ofpopularlegend,theGreatWarwasaperiodof
intense, unrelenting change.  Nowhere was this
seen more than in the development of infantry
tactics, as the protagonists attempted to find
solutions to the unique problems created in this
verymodernconflict.
 wartheyfoughtinorder todeveloptheirtactics
As with all wars, the planning and projections
madebeforehandbythemilitarypowersthatbe
wereamixtureofgoodandbad.Lessonslearnt
in previous conflicts were found to be only
partiallyapplicabletothecurrentwar,anditwas
only with experience that it was possible to
develop and then refine new tactics to suit the
veryparticulardemandsoftheGreatWar.
 and Kaiser Wilhelm II.  The Kaiser was less than
This is, of course, a comment which could be
made about any war in history.  Vietnam, Iraq,
Afghanistan; all have seen doctrines which were
previouslyarticlesoffaithprovedonlytobeonly
partially true; all have seen the unique
circumstances of each new war demand the
developmentofnewideasandconcepts,andthis
takes time as ideas are tested, rejected,
developed and finally adopted.  This is not to
criticise the armed forces for a failure to predict
inadvancewhatthetacticsofthenextwarwould
Page 150
228
be, but rather to acknowledge it as a universal
truthforanymodernwar.

It could be said that the RussoJapanese War
servedasaprecursortothetrenchwarfareofthe
GreatWar,indeedmanysimilaritiescanbeseen.
However, what is true is that armies naturally
tendtolooktotheirownexperiencesinthelast
for the next conflict.  Here the British and
Germanstookinspirationfromtwoverydifferent
conflicts in order to form their tactical doctrines
forthewarwhicheruptedsosuddenlyinAugust
1914.

This difference is nicely illustrated by a
conversation between Sir Robert BadenPowell
impressed by the development of British tactics
from their experiences of the Boer War where
menweretaughttospreadoutandusecoveras
they advanced to attack an enemy.  “You teach
them to be afraid of bullets before they have
evenheardone”.ProclaimedtheKaiser,“Inthe
German Army we march the men by rank after
rankoftheirfellows;theycannotfailtocarrythe
position.”


ItwouldbeveryeasytosimplydismisstheKaiser
as slightly optimistic at best, or a bloodthirsty
tyrantuncaringforthelivesofhismenatworst.
Intruth,theGermanshadbeendebatinginfantry
tactics and in particular the thorny issue of
whethertouselooselyordered“Boertactics”or
toretaincloseorderdrillforalongtime.Infactit
hadbeenthePrussianArmyin1866andthenthe
armyoftheNorthGermanConfederationin1870
which had been at the forefront of open order
infantrytactics.In1866theAustrianshadlooked
decidedly Napoleonic in their deployment when
compared to the “swarms” of Prussian
skirmishers who deployed to face them.  Indeed
entirePrussianbattalionsweredeployedinsuch
amanner,utilisingcoverandtheirbreechloading
riflestogreateffect.
 was commentators such as Albrecht von
Yet,despitethegreatvictoriesof1866and1871
all was not well in the German camp.  The
GermancommentatorFritzHönigwritingin1894
in Untersuchungen über die Taktik der Zukunft
statedthat:
 continuetooperateincloseformations,thereby
“The combat by masses of skirmishers
restrictsitselfbytheinfluenceoftheleaders.
The disorder which becomes thereby
unavoidable threatens to abrogate it
entirely.”
 German artillery would engage the enemy,
Indeed Theodor May writing in 1869 said of the
seniorofficersinabattalion:
 formation adopted in order to continue the
“They are all in the front line, and by their
personal example influence those among
whom they have placed themselves, but in
fact they have become mere captains of
companies; the whole line of battle has thus
becomenothingmorethanafightbetweena
number of company leaders and the
opposingenemy.”
 volleys, overcome the enemy with firepower.
Clearly commentators such as May and Hönig
were not fools, both had seen active service in
the wars of 1866 and 187071 and understood
that closer order would mean higher levels of
casualties.  Indeed, Hönig writing in the 1890s is
very clear that the flatter trajectory of modern
firearms and the introduction of smokeless
power would make the battlefield a very
dangerous place indeed.  However, their
arguments were summed up with the morbidly
pragmaticmantra:“Bettertolosementhanlose
control”.
Page 151
229
This is not to say that the argument was a one
sided affair.  Nor indeed that this was the only
argument.  The Second Boer War had seen
overwhelming support among the German
population for the Boer cause, from the Kaiser
downwards.  The humiliation of the British at
SpionKopandtheinabilityoftheImperialforces
to bring the Boers to a conclusive battle saw a
significant party within the German military
favourtheintroductionof“Boertactics”.

Suffice to say here that neither party won the
argument and the regulations of 1888 and 1906
were both ambiguous in leaving the precise
choice of formation in the face of the enemy to
theofficercommanding.Ifanypartywastohave
arealimpactonGermantacticaldevelopmentit
Boguslawski who called for a more combined
arms approach, with the increased effectiveness
oftheinfantryweaponbeingovercomebyuseof
artilleryinparticularoperatinginaclosesupport
role.This,itwasfelt,wouldallowtheinfantryto
retainingcontrol.

The1906regulationsprescribedthattheprimary
formation of manoeuvre would be a close order
formation.  At a range of 1000 metres the
obligingthemtoseekcover.Howsuccessfulthis
bombardment was would determine the
advance.  In the event of the enemy being
effectivelysuppressedthecloseformationwould
beretaineduntilthefinalbayonetcharge.Ifthe
enemy were still able to resist, ever smaller
formations, down to squad size is necessary,
wouldbeusedtoadvancebyrushestoaposition
around 400 metres from the enemy where a
firing line would form and, with controlled
Whentheenemywerefinallysubduedabayonet
charge would deliver a coup de grâce.  It was a
magnificent theory, but a frightening
misinterpretation of modern warfare, as the
Germansweretodiscover.

TheGermanZug
Structurally the German Platoon of 1914 was
comprised of up to eighty riflemen commanded
by a Leutnant.  This was then broken down into
eight man squads, each commanded by an
 230

Unteroffizier or Gefreiter making nine men in fire from the main body of the platoon,
total.  Each pair of squads was under the simultaneously sending forward the next sub
command of a Sergeant or VizeFeldwebel. unit,againadvancingbyrushes.
However,whatisimportanttonoteatthisstage
of the war is that the NCOs were not there as
tactical decision makers; rather they were there
to implement the orders provided by their
officer,andthisshouldbereflectedinourgames.

German tacticaldoctrine calledfortheofficerto
instigate any action undertaken by the platoon
anditscomponentparts.



This process would then be repeated until the
entire platoon had advanced forward.  The
advance of each subunit covered by the fire of
theircomrades.


Inthefirstinstancetheplatoonwouldadvanceto
formafiringline.Then,wheninstructedtodoso
by the Leutnant, one NCO would advance by
rushes to cover nearer to the enemy whilst the
rest of the platoon provided covering fire.  The
distanceadvanced woulddependontheterrain,
a tactical bound in British Army terminology,
fromoneadvantageouspositiontothenext.


OnceinpositiontheNCOwouldcontrolthissub 
unit’s fire whilst the officer continued to control 

Page 152

 shouldberemembered thatHaig’sfatherwasin
Withthewholeplatoonnowinpositionrelatively
closetotheenemy,theofficerwouldconsolidate
brieflyonthisposition,takingtheopportunityto
reorganise where necessary and ensuring that
theentireplatoonwasunderhiscommand.

Then, finally, when the enemy had been
suppressed by fire from the infantry and the
supportingartillery,thepositionwouldbecarried
withabayonetcharge.
 abovebeingapplied.
 
The structure adopted by the Germans was
unique in being incredibly large for a modern
battlefield.  What is interesting in reading the
arguments of the late 19th century is the
recognition that this is an anachronism, but the
acceptance of the fact that there are simply
insufficient “men of quality” to go round.  Far
more than the British, the Germans stuck rigidly
Page 153
231
totheirperpetuationofthemilitaryhegemonyof
theJunkerclass.Hönignoted:

“The presentday fightingmethod demands
more subaltern and noncommissioned
officersthenbefore.Yetpreciselythissalient
point is unattainable with the armies of
masses.”

Interestingly this contrasts, badly from the
perspective of a modern and more egalitarian
reader, with the more flexible system in the
British Army.  Despite the aristocratic image
popularly held of the British officer class, it
trade (and proud of it) and Robertson, Chief of
the Imperial General Staff for most of the war,
had begun his adult life as a servant and then
joined up as an enlisted man, only being
commissionedafterelevenyearsintheranks.In
the German system such careers would simply
nothavebeenpossible.

To reflect the responsibilities of the platoon
commander,andtheunwieldynatureoftherigid
structurewhichtheGermanArmyinsistedupon,
the German platoon of 1914 must begin the
gameasasingleformationwiththeexceptionof
two squads which may be operating in skirmish
order under the control of an NCO.  During the
game further squads may be deployed as
detachments at the cost of one of the Officer’s
CommandInitiative.

GermanNCOsarefreetorallyShockorinitiative
firing, but may only initiate squad movement
when they are ordered to do so by an officer
usingaCommandInitiative.

GermanLeutnantsareDamnedFineChapswitha
StatusIII.AllotherNCOsareStatusIorII.Ifthe
Leutnantiskilledthenhewillbereplacedbyone
of the NCOs, with the same restrictions detailed
It is worth noting that the platoon was entirely
riflearmedwiththeexceptionoftheofficerwho
hadapistolandasword.Thehandgrenadewas
yet to be developed for mass production and
what tiny numbers were present were in the
storesofPioneerunits.  TheiconicGermanstick
grenadewasnotdevelopeduntil1915.



GreatBritain
It is impossible to read the Infantry Training
manual of 1914 without being minded of the
Boer War, hence the image above which I used
some time ago on Lard Island News when
explainingthetacticsofthatconflict.
 fistwhichfinallysmashesenemyresistance.
Like the Germans, the British were taking their
mostrecentlessonsandattemptingtousethem
to find a formula for their next conflict.
Fortunately for the British they, with their more
recent practical experience against an opponent
armed with magazine rifles and quick firing
artillery,wereabletofocusmoreonthepractical
and less on the theoretical than their German
oppositenumbers.
 At some point when in effective range of the
Mirroring almost exactly the diagram above, the
British general plan for an attack by a battalion
sizedforceisforthatunittobedividedintothree
groups.  Firstly the open order advancing troops
whichwilltriggeraresponsefromtheenemyand
become the firing line.  Secondly the supports
who will, once contact is made, reinforce the
firing line to add with weight of fire.  Finally a
local reserve is to be held back in order to
Page 154
232
provide troops to garrison any positions of
tactical importance which are seized in the
advance (farms, woods and the likes), but also
provideacoherentbodyofformedtroopsableto
reacttoanysituation,bethatanenemycounter
attack or an opportunity to advance as the solid

Indeed, whilst the diagram above shows troops
ontheSouthAfricanveldt,itcouldjustaswellbe
Salisbury Plain in that last summer of peace in
1914.

How was that formation to be used?  A rapid
advance was to be undertaken in combination
withsupportfromartilleryandmachinegunfire.
enemyitwaspresumedthatanyfurtheradvance
would become impossible.  This was the point
when the supports would be committed to the
line.

Astheenemypositionwasweakenedbyfirethe
infantry would resume their advance by rushes,
witheachtacticalboundbeingdeterminedbythe
terrain.  Finally the bayonet assault would drive

the enemy from their position and secure the
victory.
 supported by a platoon Sergeant.  Under their
Interestingly, and this relates to Chain of
Command as much as Mud & Blood, the British
Armywereveryprecisewhenitcametoranges.
For infantry 600 yards was considered close
range, with effective range being 600 to 1400
yards.  Long range was 1400 to 2000 yards and
distant range 2000 yards to 2800 yards.  To put
this into context, this would give a 25mm figure
in 1:1 scale a close range of 300” or twenty five
foot,andaneffectiverangeofjustunder60foot.
At close range each man would be expected to
fire at will, choosing his own target and
regulatinghisownrateoffire.Ateffectiverange
“carefully controlled collective fire”, or volleys,
was considered to have the best effect.  Over
1400yardsonlyvolleyfireagainstdenselypacked
bodies of troops was recommended, and that
carefullycontrolledbytheCorporalwhoseduties
werelargelyfocussedonwhatthemanualrefers
tohisroleas“fireteamcommander”.
 thewaywhentheentireplatoonwasadvancing.
TheBritishPlatoon
The British and Imperial forces of 1914 were
using a platoon structure which appears much
more modern to the reader today.  However, in
truththiswasmorebyaccidentthandesign.The
British Army was relatively small by European
standards of the day, where massed conscript
armieswerethenorm.Britain,protectedasshe
was by the Royal Navy and with an Empire built
on trade and (largely) cooperative overseas
subjects, had no need for such drain on her
financial resources.  As a result her military
structurestendedtobesmallerthanthoseofher
closeEuropeanneighbours.
 theplacewhereanyweakeningofenemyfirecan
 bestbenoticed,anditleavestheinitiationofthe
Page 155
233
LiketheirGermanequivalent,theBritishplatoon
was commanded by a subaltern who was
command were four sections, each of twelve
men, one of whom was a Corporal.  As with the
Germans, this force was armed entirely with
rifles, with the officer having a pistol and, more
oftenthannot,awalkingstick.Thelatterwasan
affectation of the period, but not an impractical
accessory.Probablymoreusefulthanasword.

A platoon, and indeed a company, in the attack
would be limited to the firing line and supports.
The local reserve would be drawn from other
units in the battalion.  When briefed, a platoon
officer would call together his NCOs, explain the
orders and define their area of operation.  This
would involve setting boundaries between the
platoon and its neighbours and considering the
arc of fire of any supporting units so as not to
strayintothese.

Intheattacktheplatooncommanderwastolead
The sections were to advance in a shallow
columnoffoursorinfilewhichwereconsidered
the best formations for an advance with limited
losses due to enemy fire.  It was, however, an
optiontosendforwardscoutstorangeaheadof
the force as a whole in order to identify enemy
positions before the whole platoon was in
contact.

WhentheenemywerecontactedtheLieutenant
would then be responsible for keeping the firing
line effective and, finally deciding the moment
when the assault was to be made.  The British
manual sets great store by the firing line being
finalchargetoanyofficerofanyrank,withthose

nearby being obliged to support this when it
occurs.
 NationalCharacteristicCards
Inessencethetwodoctrineswerenotdissimilar,
but the Germans emphasis on constant and
unbroken movement forward is where the key
difference comes.  The British acceptance that
therewas,ultimately,apointwhere noadvance
waspossible,andthenfirepoweralonewouldbe
requiredtobreakresistanceisindicativeoftheir
morerecentpracticalexperienceinthefaceofa
“European”enemy.
 perpetual advance.  However, this card should
Within the British section, the Corporal was
undoubtedly seen as the fire controller as
opposed to a full tactical leader.  However, the
British place more emphasis on a collective
approach,withthePlatoonSergeantavailableto
supporttheofficer.Anyonewhohasplayedlate
warGermansversusBritishinChainofCommand
canattesttothevalueofhavinga“spare”leader
ofsomeranktosharetheburdenofcommand.It
is tangible, and whilst the 1914 manual is
particularly silent on the role of the platoon
sergeant (he is barely mentioned other than to
sayheexistsandthatiftheLieutenantislosthe
will take command) it is impossible to not
recognisethecontributionthismanwouldmake.
 
Page 156
234
In the same way in which we presented specific
rules for the Germans, here we suggest some
similar amendments for the British.  Similar in
broad terms, the different structures mean they
haveratherdifferenteffectsinplay.

TheBritishplatoonof1914mustbeginthegame
as a single formation with the exception of two
sections which may be operating in skirmish
orderunderthecontroloftheirNCOs.Individual
Scoutsmaybedetachedtooperateinadvanceof
the platoon as covered in Section 5.2.2 of the
rules.

British Corporals are free to rally Shock or
initiative firing, but may only initiate section
movement when they have been specifically
detached from the parent body by an officer or
PlatoonSergeant’sorder.

BritishLieutenantsareDamnedFineChapswitha
StatusIII.PlatoonSergeantswillnormallybethe
same,althoughinsomeTerritorialunitstheymay
be Status II.  Section Leaders will generally be
StatusII,

These are very simple as we use existing one
from the main rules.  The British Expeditionary
Force should always get “Mad Minute” in the
deck to reflect the marksmanship of a long
serviceregularforce.

The Germans will get the “Storm” card which,
althoughtooearlytobethinkingofStormtrooper
tactics, does reflect their emphasis on the
never allow an advance to contact with the
enemy and as such cannot be used when within
12” of an enemy position.  Advances to contact
should only occur when ordered by the platoon
commander.

Reflection
British or German, it is not difficult to see why
casualties among young junior officers were the
highestamongallofthemenservingthroughout
the Great War.  The demand for leadership, and
usually leadership from the front made this a
particularly dangerous job, whatever your
uniform.

 235

 particular I favour the retreat from Mons in late

 August 1914 as a setting, as this incredible story
 is almost a Dunkirk pocket set twentysix years
 earlier.TheBritish,leftisolatedaroundMonsare
 obliged to conduct a withdrawal southwards
 whilst attempting to fend off a numerically
 superiorenemy.
 
 The story of Mons and the subsequent retreat
 reached almost a semireligious status in the
One tends to think of the early stages of mindsoftheBritishpressandpublicatthetime,
the Great War as a period of grandiose and subsequent accounts are often more
sweeping manoeuvres, where entire hagiographical than serious military study.  So,
armieswereonthemarchastheGerman for the sake of avoiding an argument, I propose
andEntentePowersattemptedtowinthewar here to simply present a fun scenario which will
by strategy rather than by the small print of allowyoutotestoutyourGermantacticsbythe
tactics.Andthatiscertainlynotafalseimage. book against a platoon of British defenders.
 Should you wish to learn more of the period I
AttheveryhighestlevelthebattlesofAugustand suggest you read as widely as you canand draw
September represent an intellectual struggle your own conclusions.  It’s a worthwhile
between the two main protagonists, as the investmentintime.
Germans make their initial thrust, the French 
parry, then the race to the sea with a clash of Sufficetosaythatonthe25thofAugust1914the
steelaseachblowisagainmetandrepulsed.To 1st battalion of the Royal Berkshire Regiment
some degree this was the final campaign of found itself on the outskirts of Maroilles, some
sweeping Napoleonic manoeuvre before twenty five miles to the South South West of
technology obliged both sides to recognise that Mons.  Since they began retreating on the
the most important weapon for the next few previously day, they had been continuously
yearswouldbetheentrenchingtool. harassed by German cavalry and were very
 conscious of being under pressure from
Yet,despitethiswarofgrandmanoeuvre,atthe advancing German infantry formations.  The
sharpendthemenfacingtheenemyweredoing objective was to keep falling back whilst slowing
so in all types of situations and applying the theGermansdownwheretheycould.
tacticaltrainingwhichtheyhadreceived.Forme 
oneofthemostenjoyableaspectsofwargaming At various points platoons were told off to hold
is an opportunity to use my hobby to examine keypositions,andatthesmallhamletofRuedes
aspects of military history to which, otherwise, Juifsasmallbridgeoverastreamwasbeingheld
cannevergainaccess. byonesuchforce.
 
It is one thing to read the brief tactical primer British
which I have presented above, but in order to
gain a real appreciation of what it was like to Briefing
command a German platoon in the attack, to FollowingtheengagementatMons(anactionin
really grasp just how that force of eighty men which you played only a minor part being some
lookedtooneindividualforleadership,demands distance away from the main point of contact
us putting some figures on the tabletop and with the enemy) the precipitous withdrawal of
playingitthrough. French forces has meant that your unit, along
 withalloftheB.E.F.,isobligedtowithdrawfrom
We are fortunate in the two very different southernBelgiumintoFrance.
platoon structures that they lend themselves 
perfectly to gaming the mobile period of 1914 Itisperfectlycleartoall,fromGeneralFrenchto
wherethesmallerforceofdefiantBritonsstands the lowliest private soldier, that the enemy are
to face the more numerous Teutons as they present in such numbers that our forces risk
ravage their way across plucky Belgium.  In being swamped by the German advance and

Page 157
 236

quite simply overrun.  As such it is critical that YourforcecandeployintheSouthernareaofthe
whereverpossibletheiradvanceischecked.Your table, on Blinds within 18” of the farmhouse.
battalion is forming part of the rearguard of the Two sections of your men may be in improvised
6th Brigade and your platoon has been deployed entrenchments which improve any cover by one
todefenda“bridge”ontheroadtothenorthern level – open becoming light cover, light cover
side of Maroilles.  In truth the term bridge is becoming hard cover.  Hard cover may not be
somethingofamisnomer,itislittlemorethana improved, however the farmhouse may be
culvertandtheriverismoreofanirrigationditch loopholedfordefence
whichamancouldleapinonestride.Butorders 
areordersandhereyoustand. Be warned.  Within the last hour you saw off a
 partyofUhlans.TheBocheknowyouarehere!
Yourforceisasfollows: 
 
Lieutenant,StatusIII German
PlatoonSergeant,StatusIII
 Briefing
SectionsOnetoFour TheBritishgaveourforcesanastyshockatMons,
OneCorporal,StatusIIwithrifle it seems that they have more pluck than we
Elevenriflemen allowedfor.However,theycannothopetostand
 against us for long; their numbers are too small,
ouradvanceistooswift.

Your platoon is approaching the small
French town of Maroilles from the
north and the Foret de Mormal.  You
have met with an officer of Uhlans
whoinformsyouthatthesmallhamlet
aheadisoccupiedbytheEnglish,albeit
in small numbers.  It is vital that your
force push on and drive what would
appear to be a rearguard out of their
position so that the advance can be
maintained.

Yourforceisasfollows:

Leutnant,StatusIII

Sergeant,StatusII
Twosquadsofninemen

Sergeant,StatusII
Twosquadsofninemen

Vizefeldwebel,StatusII
Twosquadsofninemen

Vizefeldwebel,StatusII
Twosquadsofninemen

Yourforceentersthetablebytheroad
onthenorthernedgeonBlinds.



Page 158
 237

Umpire’s notes conducting a rearguard delaying action, create a

separate“TempusFugit”deck.
Thisscenarioisdesignedtobeanopportunityto

see how the theory of German tactics work on
TheTempusFugitDeckisasmashingideacreated
the battlefield.  To achieve this you can use
by my good friend John Drewienkiewicz for
throughtheMud&theBloodaswritten,withthe
representing the fact that time can appear to
card driven system limiting the command
standstillwhenonehasplentyofit,butseemsto
options, or,  if you prefer, bolt on the Chain of
evaporate with alarming speed as the deadline
CommandC3system.Myownpreferenceisthe
foranimperativeapproaches.
cards as it reflects better the command issues

that the German Leutnant will have when
In this instance five cards are used, four blank
controllingsuchalargeforce.
and one inscribed with the words Tempus Fugit.

Thisisshuffledandsetasidewiththecardsface
TheGermansmaybringonuptotwoBlindseach
down.WhenevertheTiffincardisplayedthetop
time the Blinds card is played.  The British are
cardfromtheTempusFugitdeckisturned.Ifitis
verylikelytobeonhiddenBlindsaseventroops
a blank card the game continues as before.
duginintheopenwillcountashidden.
However, when the Tempus Fugit card is dealt

oneblankcardisremovedfromthedeckandthe
Thetableislargelyflat,thesearelowlyingwater
cardsreshuffled.
meadowswhicharepronetoflooding.Thegreen

areatotheSouthWestisstandingcropsaround
Eventually the deck will reduce to just one card,
4’high.Acoupleofshallowirrigationditchescan
the Tempus Fugit card, at which point the game
beseen,thesearearound2’6”deepandprovide
ends.  At that point any British troops further
lightcover,asdoesthestreamwithisonlyalittle
than18”fromanyGermantroopsmayslipaway.
deeper.
AnyBritishtroopswithin18”oftheGermanswill

immediately lose half of their strength as
The farm, as seen below in its modern
prisoners, the remainder withdrawing
incarnation, is well constructed in stone and
successfully.  To win the British must have killed
provideshardcovertoanytroopstherein.
twiceasmanyGermansastheyhavelostdeador

prisoners.AnyotherresultisaGermanvictory.
Thisscenariocanbeplayedwithnotimelimit,or,
to better reflect the fact that the Berkshires are

100yearsonandtheRuedesJuifsislittlechanged
Page 159

Those familiar with a broad range of
TooFatLardiesruleswillbeawarethattheDNAof
the “family” is something of a tangled web, but
withseveraldistinctbranchesemergingoverthe
years.ThefoundingfamilywasIAin’tBeenShot
MumwithitsdirectdescendantincludingTroops,
Weapons & Tactics and Charlie Don’t Surf.  The
second branch was begun with Sharp Practice
and continued with Through the Mud & the
Blood, Dux Britanniarum and, most recently
ChainofCommand;fourverydifferentrulesets,
butallsharingsomestrikingfamilyresemblance.
 rules, be they Chain of Command or Mud &
Chain of Command began its life when people
playing and enjoying our Great War large scale
skirmish rules, Mud & Blood, began asking if we
could produce a WWII version of the game.  In
fact the very first playtest version, now
ensconced in the Lard Island museum, was
nothing more than a set of adjustments to the
firetabletoreflectmoremodernweapons.
 presumed that Chain of Command takes
Of course, the seminal moment in the
development of Chain of Command was the
introductionoftheCommandDiceandtheChain
5
238
ofCommandpointswhich,combined,makefora
very different and, we think, more dynamic and
fun game.  Naturally it didn’t take, long for the
questiontobeasked“CanweusethiswithMud
&Blood?”.So,inthespiritofretroengineering,
wethoughtwe’dtakealookathowthe“Sonof
Mud&Blood”couldteachtheolddogafewnew
tricks.

First a word of warning; I am not going to
replicate whole sections of the rules book here,
butratheritismyintenttotaketranchesofthe
Blood, and apply them carte blanche.  However,
the most important guiding principle is that we
areusingChainofCommandasthecoreruleset
andtakingbitsfromMud&Bloodtoapplywhere
certainissues,suchasgas,arejustnotcoveredin
the WWII rules.  If viewing both rule sets and
finding a conflict between the way in which
certain subjects are resolved, it is always
precedence.


Mythoughtsarethattheseruleswillreallyapply
from 1916 onwards, when the armies on the
Western Front have evolved from a mass of
riflementodevelopspecialistweaponswhichadd
lots of colour and interest.  That said, the rules
can be used for earlier fighting.  One will simply
find that the forces are more reliant on the bolt
actionrifleand,asaconsequence,aresomewhat
“vanilla”.
 phaseinordertoreflecteventsoccurringpriorto
I am not going to repeat here the numerous
references I have made to the way men in the
Great War fought; the Mud & Blood rulebook
gives a good appraisal of tactics and we have
coveredthesubjectinanumberofSpecialsover
theyears.Here,wesimplyfocusontherules.
 defending fixed defensive positions, such as
THEBROADBRUSH
As already stated, Chain of Command is the
primary vehicle for this project, so this means
thatthecorerules,suchasMovementandFiring,
areappliedwholesale,albeitwiththesmallprint
changing to reflect earlier weapons.    Some of
the rules we saw in Mud & Blood are removed
entirely; there are no cards as we are using the
CommandDiceandChainofCommandpointsto
replace those.Thiswill meansomechangesare
required in order to replicate some of the
national characteristics which we saw in Mud &
BloodwithChainofCommandDiceoptions.
 COMMAND&CONTROL
Equally, Spotting in Mud & Blood is entirely
removed, as is the system of Blinds for hidden
movement.  However, we do make some
amendments to the Patrol Phase and the Jump
Off Point placement where we are representing
positionalwarfare.

THEFINEDETAIL
Chain of Command is a WWII rule set but with
just over twenty years passing between the end
oftheGreatWarandthebeginningoftheSecond
WorldWar,andwiththeexperiencesandtactics
developed in the earlier conflict feeding straight
6
239
into the latter, there is much common ground
which allows the rules to be used for both wars
with a minimum of adjustment.  The following
areasarewhereweneedtomakeadjustmentsto
Chain of Command to better represent the
uniquecharacteroftheGreatWar.

THEPATROLPHASE
Chain of Command uses a unique pregame
the main game which determine where troops
may deploy onto the table.  In a Great War
setting the Patrol Phase reflects the importance
of patrols in NoMan’sLand and are played
through as normal.  However, when placing
JumpOff Points, a player whose force is
entrenchments, will always place four JumpOff
Points.Twoofthesewillbegeneratedasnormal
using the system in Chain of Command.  The
other two may be placed wherever the player
chooseswithinhisentrenchments.

On the conclusion of the Patrol Phase, the
defending player will immediately place two
JumpOff points in his positions of choice.  After
that,theplayerswilltakeitinturnstoplacetheir
remaining JumpOff Points, beginning with the
attackingplayer.

The Command Dice in Chain of Command give
the game its unique flavour, presenting the
gamerwithanumberofchoicesineachphaseof
play.  This works in precisely the same manner,
with details of what counts as a team and a
sectionbeingfoundintheArmyLists.

In the Great War version, grenades are not
thrownindividually,asinChainofCommand,but
by specialist bombers whenever they are
activated.

CHAINOFCOMMANDPOINTS
ThegenerationofChainofCommandpointsand
subsequent use of Chain of Command dice
remainsthesameasinthemainrules.However,
thefollowinggeneraloptionsareadded.

Reduceyouropponent’sCommandDiceby
oneinthenextPhase.Thismustbeplayed
 240

before your opponent rolls his Command MOVEMENT

Dice. This is conducted as per the rules.  Terrain
Add two Command Dice to your hand in definitions in Chain of Command should be
thisPhase.Thismustbeplayedbeforeyou amended to show that trenches are considered
rollyourCommandDice. to be Broken Ground as is muddy ground.
Changethetargetforanofftablemachine Waterlogged and shell cratered ground is Heavy
gunby18”. Going.  Dry ground, even when cratered, is
Other national characteristics will be covered in consideredtobeOpenGround.
theArmyLists. 
 CavalryareatrooptypenotrepresentedinChain
TURN&PHASESEQUENCE of Command.  These move with up to 3D6,
This works in the same way as in Chain of adding +2 pips per dice.  Manhandled artillery
Command; however, when a random event is move with 2D6, discarding the lower dice rolled
generated, a roll of 3 will be a building fire as forlightinfantrygunsorthehigherdiceforField
normalwherebuildingsarepresent.Failingthat, Guns.Heavygunsmaynotbemoved.
wheretherearenobuildings,arandomgasshell 
dropsontothetable.Rolltoseewhichareofthe FIRING
table is affected using the same grid as the This is done in the same way as in Chain of
random mortar barrage for a roll of 1.   The gas Command,buttheArsenalTablebelowisusedto
cloudremainsoverthatareaofthetableforallof reflect the weapons of the Great War.  In some
thenextTurn. instanceslineofsightrulesinChainofCommand

INFANTRYWEAPONS
Weapon Firepower Close Effective Notes
Pistol 1 09”  
Rifle 1 018” Over18” 
Riflegrenade 2  18”60” Reducescoverbyonelevel
Grenade 2/3 11”  2firepowerinopen,3inconfinedspace.Rollforhitsas
inopen.
AutomaticRifle 3 018” Over18” 
LewisGun 6 018” Over18” Losetwofirepowerwhencrewreducedtooneman
MG08/15 6 018” Over18” Losetwofirepowerwhencrewreducedtooneman
MMG 10 036” Over36” Losethreefirepowerwhencrewreducedtooneman
Flamethrower 12 09”  Allcoverisignored.AllShockdoubled
Granatenwerfer 2  18”60” Reducescoverbyonelevel
MORTARS
Weapon Firepower Notes
Upto60mm 3 
61mmto100mm 4 TargetsoneTeamandalsohitsanyneighbourswithin4”
100175mm 5 Maynotfireintwoconsecutivephases.TargetsoneTeamandalsohitsany
neighbourswithin4”.DoubleShock
Over175mm 6 May only fire twice in any Turn.  Targets one Team and also hits any
neighbourswithin6”.DoubleShock
ARTILLERY
Weapon Firepower Notes
37mm/1Pdr 3 Reducescoverbyonelevel
60mm/6Pdr 5 Reducescoverbyonelevel
76.2mm/13Pdr 6 Reducescoverbyonelevel
77mm+/18Pdr 7 Reducescoverbyonelevel

7
 241

are ignored, such as for bombers throwing their 2D6 and fire secondary armament at half
grenades around trench traverses, or rifle effect.
grenadiers firing indirectly.  For such weapons, 
anyenemyunitonthetablemaybetargetedifit Wheeledvehiclesmoveasnormalintherules.In
hasbeenlocatedbyfriendlytroops. addition to the AFV commander activating
 weapon positions, other positions may activate
Hitsandeffectarecausedinthesamewayasin onaCommandDicerollof1.
themainrules;however,anytroopswearinggas 
masksfirewitha1ontheir“tohit”roll. ANTITANKFIRE
 Antitankweaponscanbeeitherdesignedforthe
Whentargetingmountedmen,rollfortheeffect roleorimpromptuweaponsthatfindthemselves
of each hit as normal with any kills being re facingtanks.Theyrolltohitasnormalandtheir
rolled. On a 1 the horse is hit but it ignores the ArmourPiercingfirepowerratingisasfollows:
effect.  On a 2 or 3 the horse is killed and the 
ridermustnowoperateonfoot.Ona4to6the
rideriskilledandthehorseremovedfromplay.
WEAPON STRIKEDICE
 GrenadeBundle 2
Tripodorsledmountedmachinegunsmayfirein AntiTankrifle 1
a sustained fire role.  If they do so they MUST ArmourPiercingMG 1
remainfiringinthatmannerfortheremainderof ammunition
the Turn.  A machine gun firing sustained fire is 37mmAntiTankgun 4
effectively on a sustained Overwatch.  It must 37mmlowvelocitygun 2
mark a point on the table as its target.  Any 57mm/6poundergun 3
troopsmovingwithin6”ofthatpointwillbefired 75mm/77mmM1896/13 5
onimmediatelyinthephaseinwhichtheymove. poundergun
The machine gun may also fire on any single 75mmAntiAircraftGun 6
TeamorSectionwithin6”ofthatpointwhenitis 77mmM1916/18pounder 7
activated on a roll of 1, or when activated by a 
SeniorLeader.IffiringagainstaSection,itmust
fire against the whole section and not pick out
one Team as its target.  It may, however, fire
againstanisolatedteaminthatarea.Thetarget
markerisremovedattheendoftheTurn.

ARMOUREDVEHICLES
Armoured vehicles will only be available for
scenarios marked as such.  If no armour is
present, no Field Guns may be deployed on the
table.

TheArmourrulesfromChainofCommandshould
beusedwiththenationalvehicletablesproviding
therelevantdata.Speedisalteredtoreflectthe
primitivestateofthevehicles.TrackedAFVsmay
moveatthefollowingrates:

Slow:  Move with 1D6 but may fire their
secondaryarmamentatfulleffect.
Fast:  These may move with 1D6 and fire
their main gun at full effect or may move


8

CLOSECOMBAT
TheCloseCombatrulesfromChainofCommand
areused;however,thelistofadjustmentsisnow
asfollows:
 defendinglightcover.Addonetotherollifthey
CLOSECOMBAT
Add 1D6 for the Command Initiative level of
everyoneofyourLeaderspresentinthefight
Add2D6foreachtroopqualitylevelhigherthan
theenemy
Add 1D6 for each D6 of movement the enemy
movedtogetintocontact(1stroundonly)
Subtract1D6foreachtwopointsofShock
AggressiveTroopsadd1D6foreverythreemen
Add2D6foreachtrenchbroompresent
Add1D6foreachbomberpresent
Add4D6foreachLMGor6D6foreachMMGthe
defenderhasiftheattackeradvances tocontact
throughtheirarcoffire(1stroundonly)
Ifyouaredefendinglightcover,add1D6foreach
threeD6youalreadyhave(1stroundonly)
Ifyouaredefendingheavycoverorabunker,add
1D6foreachtwoD6youalreadyhave(1stround
only)
If you have been hit in the rear, remove half of
yourdice(1stroundonly)
IfyouarePinned,removehalfofyourdice
Cavalryadvancingtocontactdoublediceagainst
infantryintheopen
 suchasbombardments,butalsooptionsspecific
CROSSINGWIRE
Troops may attempt to cross an undamaged
section of wire.  In order to do so a Section or
Team must be placed adjacent to the wire and
roll a D6 in each phase it does nothing except
makethisattempt.Onarollof6theyareableto
removeonesectionofwire.
 GENERICSUPPORTOPTIONS
CLEARINGBUNKERS
Large bunker or fort complexes must be treated
in the same way as buildings, being cleared one
area,ratherthanstorey,atatime.
 TRENCHBROOMS
Normallybunkersordugoutswillbesignificantly
smaller affairs, more shelters than fighting
positions.Thesetendedtobecapturedoncethe
enemy had reached their entrance and the
occupantshadnorouteofescape.IfaGroupof
attackers reaches the entrance to a bunker or
dugout the occupants may be offered the
9
242
opportunity to surrender.  To see if they choose
thatoptionrollaD6.Ona14theywillsurrender
on a 5or 6 they will come out fighting, entering
Close Combat with their opponents counting as
areaccompaniedbyanofficerBigMan.

Alternatively the attacker may throw grenades
into the bunker or dugout, rolling 8 dice on a
targetcountingnocover.Afterthisthetroopsin
the dugout will roll a D6 for their reaction,
applyinga1totherollforeachmankilledbythe
grenades.  On a 13 they will surrender, on 46
the survivors, incensed will come out fighting,
entering close combat with their opponents
countingasdefendinglightcover



THEARMYLISTS
The following lists are based on the force
structuresforthemajorityof1917and1918with
the relevant support options for that same
period.  Each list will have a number of generic
supportoptionswhicharecommontoallnations,
totheindividualnation.Genericsupportoptions
are covered below, nation specific support
optionsarecoveredineachnation’ssection.

Support options show in red are limited to one
beingpresentinanygameforthatforce.

Most of these are precisely as listed in Chain of
Command.  The following differ to reflect the
nuancesoftheGreatWar.

Trenchbroomsareweaponsdevisedtocleanup
enemy trenches rapidly, either through a high
rateoffire,suchasthesubmachinegun,orblast
effect,suchasshotguns.Theseweaponsdonot
have any ranged fire capability, but provide an
enhancedabilityinclosecombat.

THETRENCHBLOCK
Assault units would carry with them the means
with which to secure a captured section of
trench, with wire or Chevauxdefrise, coiled
French wire or similar.  These may be deployed
by any squad or section with their Leader using
allofhisCommandInitiativesinaphasetodoso.
Where the block is deployed, a 4” section of
trenchisunusablefortherestofthegame.
 During the first Turn of the game, Units and
ENTRENCHMENTSANDBUNKERS
Entrenchments are normally Team sized to hold
support weapons.  Two entrenchments may be
selected to hold a section or squad of up to ten
men; three for a single squad of up to twenty
men.  Bunkers, whether wood and sandbag or
concrete, these are assumed to be large enough
to hold one squad of up to 12 men, or one
supportweaponteam.
 the bombardment rule above is applied, but the
PREGAMEBARRAGE
A pregame barrage is designed to disrupt the
enemy immediately before an attack
commences,ortobreakupanenemyattackinits
assemblyarea.Weuseasimple“buildabarrage
system” where the player selects a number of
barrage components to create the barrage he
wants.

BarrageComponents
The player may select from the following
components:

H.E.onthewire
Bombardmentonenemytrenchline
“Feurwaltz”tactics
Gasontheenemytrenchline
Counterbatterybombardment
Ingamebarragephases

Theseachievethefollowing:

H.E. on the wire will, hopefully, clear paths
through the wire for your troops.  For each 6”
section of wire, roll 1D6 the first time that
attackingtroopsmovetowithin12”ofit.Ifone
H.E.onthewirecomponenthasbeenselected,a
rollof5or6meansthatthissectionisremoved.
If two H.E. on the wire components have been
selected, it is removed on a roll of 4 to 6.  No
10
243
morethantwoH.E.onthewirecomponentsmay
beselected.

Bombardment on enemy trench line in the pre
gamebarragewillnotkillanyofyourenemy,but
itcanreflectthedisorderitcausesinhisranksby
disrupting your enemy’s ability to deploy onto
thetable.

Leaderswhichhavebeenbombardedmustrollto
deployontothetableasthoughnoSeniorLeader
ispresentwiththeirforce.Thislastsonlyforthe
first Turn of the game, after which it has no
continuing effect.  No more than one
Bombardment on enemy trench line may be
selected.

If a “Feurwaltz” option is added to the barrage,
enemyattemptingtodeployingontothetabledo
so on a roll of 5 and 6 rather than 4 to 6.  This
lasts for the first Turn only.  A “Feurwaltz” is a
complicated and carefully orchestrated fire plan
which must be drawn up based on a good
knowledge of enemy positions.  As a result this
component may only be selected when gaming
the first actions of a battle or, in a campaign
setting,theopeninggame.

Gas on enemy trench line will add gas to the
barrage.Ifthisisused,thedefenderreducesthe
number of Command Dice rolled by one during
every phase of the first Turn. No more than one
Gasonenemytrenchlinemaybeselected.

Counterbattery bombardment reduced the
enemy chances of being able to call for an SOS
barrage during the game.  See the SOS barrage
rulesbelow.

“Feurwaltz”isacatchallphrasetocovertheuse
ofamorecomplicatedbarrage.Thetermrefers
to the capability to “dance” the barrage across
enemy positions in order to confuse your
opponentsastoyourintentions.TheBritishused
thetermChinesebombardmenttocoverthis.

Ingame barrage phases can only be used in
conjunctionwithapregamebarrage,continuing
the bombardment into the game itself.  The in
 244

gamebombardmentmustbetargetedatasingle removedattheendofaTurn.Offtablemachine
enemyJumpOffpointor,iftwoJumpOffpoints gunsmayhavetheiraimingpointshiftedbyupto
are within 18” of each other both may be 18”bytheplayerusingaChainofCommandDice.
targeted.  While the barrage continues these 
pointsmaynotbeusedtodeploytroops. 
 
However,anyTeamsofeithersidecomingwithin 
18” of these JumpOff Points, or 12” if in 
entrenchments,willtestforfriendlyfirefromthe 
barrage using the mortar barrage rules in Chain 
ofCommand. 
 
NomatterhowmanyphasesofInGameBarrage 
are selected, the barrage will end once the first 
Turnends. 
 
THESOSBARRAGE 
An SOS barrage is limited to preregistered 
targetsand,asaresult,mayonlybeselectedbya 
player in a defensive position.  The player must 
identify two targets before the game begins, 
noting these or marking them discretely.  We 
suggest using several casualty figures to scatter 
on the table, two of which are marked 
underneathastherealtargets. 
 
To initiate an SOS Barrage, the highest ranking 
Senior Leader must use all of his Command 
Initiatives in a phase to send a message to
battery.  The battery is then subsequently
activatedbyaCommandDicerollof1.

If the enemy initial barrage included a Counter
battery bombardment, roll a D6 when this is
calledfor. Onarollof103the gunshavebeen
silencedandnoSOSbarragewillbeavailablefor
the duration of this Turn.  The player may
attempt to contact the battery in subsequent
turns.

AnSOSbarrageistreatedinthesamemanneras
amortarbarrageinChainofCommand;however,
it may not be adjusted nor may it be continued
longer than the turn end by playing a Chain of
CommandDice.

OFFTABLEMACHINEGUN
Offtable Machine Guns will fire in a sustained
role throughout the game using the same
technique as ontable weapons, however their
targetisfixedfortheentiregameandwillnotbe

11
 245

 REDUCEDSTRENGTHPLATOON
 PLATOONFORCERATING:
 Regular:3
 Elite:+1
 
 CommandDice:5
 
 PLATOONHEADQUARTERS
The French were at the forefront of developing Lieutenant,SeniorLeader,withpistol
new infantry tactics based on the availability of 
newweapons,structuringtheirplatoonstoallow DEMISECTIONONE
effectivefireandmovementtactics. Sergeant,JuniorLeader,withrifle
 GRENADIERVOLTIEGURSQUAD
All French infantry count as Regular but some
Caporal,JuniorLeader,withrifle
colonialinfantrymaycountasElite.
Twobombers

Fourriflemen
FULLSTRENGTHPLATOON SUPPORTSQUAD
PLATOONFORCERATING: CHAUCHATTEAM VBTEAM
Regular:1
One Chauchat with Three V.B. launchers
Elite:+3

twocrew withtwocreweach
CommandDice:5 Onerifleman
 
PLATOONHEADQUARTERS DEMISECTIONTWO
Lieutenant,SeniorLeader,withpistol Sergeant,JuniorLeader,withrifle

GRENADIERVOLTIGUERSQUAD
DEMISECTIONONE Caporal,JuniorLeader,withrifle
Sergeant,JuniorLeader,withrifle Twobombers
GRENADIERVOLTIEGURSQUAD Fourrifleman
Caporal,JuniorLeader,withrifle SUPPORTSQUAD
Threebombers CHAUCHATTEAM VBTEAM
Fiveriflemen One Chauchat with Three V.B. launchers
SUPPORTSQUAD twocrew withtwocreweach
CHAUCHATTEAM VBTEAM Onerifleman
One Chauchat with Four V.B. launchers 
twocrew withtwocreweach SUPPORTOPTIONS
Tworiflemen Thefollowingsupportoptionsareavailable.
 
DEMISECTIONTWO FRENCHSUPPORTLIST
Sergeant,JuniorLeader,withrifle
GRENADIERVOLTIGUERSQUAD LISTONE
Caporal,JuniorLeader,withrifle EngineerWireClearingTeam,3men
Threebombers Minefield
Fiverifleman StaticBarbedWire
SUPPORTSQUAD Adjutant
SingleTeamEntrenchment
CHAUCHATTEAM VBTEAM
TrenchblockorChevauxdefrise
One Chauchat with Four V.B. launchers
Onebarragecomponent
twocrew withtwocreweach
Tworiflemen Add two trench brooms to one Grenadier
VoltigeurSquad

12
 246

LISTTWO 
 FRENCHNATIONALCHARACTERISTICS
CanondeInfantrie3.7cmM1916with5crew

andaJuniorLeader


Mortierde58mmfiringfromofftable LABATAILLECONDUITE

SniperTeam UnderMarechalFoch’sleadership,theFrench

LISTTHREE  ArmybelievesintheBatailleConduit,literally
SOSbarrage  “battle by guidance” but more normally
HotchkissM1914MMGwithfivecrew  referred to as the “Methodical Battle”.  It
OfftableMachineGun  represents an orderly and structured
Woodandsandbagbunker(hardcover)  approachtowarfare.
CharronArmouredCarwithaJuniorLeader  
 To reflect this doctrinal embracement of the
LISTFOUR importance of central command, the French

Concretebunker Platoon Sergeant is focussed on controlling

WhiteArmouredCarwithaJuniorLeader  the fire of the Support Squad.  When using
LISTFIVE  twoCommandInitiativestocontrolthefireof
FT17withaJuniorLeader  theChauchathe mayadd twofirepowerdice
Canonde75M1897withfivecrewandJunior  toitsfiringinthecurrentphase.
Leader  
LISTSIX  ENAVANTMESBRAVES
 The French placed much emphasis on their
SchneiderCA1withaJuniorLeader
 officers leading by example and gaining the
StCharmondwithaJuniorLeader
 absolute trust of their men.  As their manual
  says, “Troops are a reflection of their
VBLAUNCHERS  commander.Theywishfornothingmorethan
The VB Launcher is treated as a rifle grenade  toadmirehimandfollowhimblindly”.
launcherintherules.  
  Asaresult,aFrenchofficerspendingallthree
MORTIERDE58MM  of his Command Initiative to rally a Group or
The 58mm mortar was a spigot mortar with a  Squad may remove on additional point of
muchlargerchargethanthecalibresuggests.As  ShockinthatPhase.
a result treat this as a 100175mm mortar.  It is  

assumed to be firing from just offtable with an 

observer wellpositioned to view and correct 
firing.Assuch,anyenemyunitonthetableisa 
potentialtarget. 
 


FRENCHARSENALTABLE
VEHICLE ARMOUR ARMAMENT SPEED
SchneiderCA1 3 One75mmgun,twoLMGs Slow
StCharmond 3 One75mmgun,fourLMGs Fast
FT17 4 37mmgunoroneLMG Fast
CharronArmouredCar 2 OneLMG Wheeled
WhiteArmouredCar 2 One37mmgun,oneLMG Wheeled


 
 

13
 247

 
 
 1918PLATOON
 

PLATOONFORCERATING:

Regular:0



CommandDice:5
 
Startingthewarwiththesmallestarmyofallthe PLATOONHEADQUARTERS
majorpowers,Britainwasobligedtostandonthe
Lieutenant,SeniorLeader,withpistol
defensiveforthefirsttwoyearswhileherforces
Sergeant,SeniorLeader,withrifle
andherindustrypreparedthemselvesforbattle.
 RIFLESECTION
WiththenightmareoftheSommebattlesbehind Corporal,JuniorLeader,withrifle
them, the British were quick to harness Eightriflemen
technologyandtacticaladvancestocreateahard BOMBERSECTION
hittingforcewhich,in1918,dealtthekillerblow Corporal,JuniorLeader,withrifle
toImperialGermany. Threebombers
 Fiveriflemen
AllBritishinfantrycountasRegular. RIFLEBOMBERSECTION
 Corporal,JuniorLeader,withrifle
1917PLATOON Four rifle grenade launchers with two crew
 each
PLATOONFORCERATING: LEWISGUNSECTION
Regular:1 Corporal,JuniorLeader,withrifle
 LEWISGUNTEAM LEWISGUNTEAM
CommandDice:5 One Lewis gun with One Lewis gun with

twocrew twocrew
PLATOONHEADQUARTERS Threeriflemen Threeriflemen
Lieutenant,SeniorLeader,withpistol 
Sergeant,SeniorLeader,withrifle


RIFLESECTION
SUPPORTOPTIONS
Thefollowingsupportoptionsareavailable.
Corporal,JuniorLeader,withrifle

Eightriflemen
BOMBERSECTION BRITISHSUPPORTLIST
Corporal,JuniorLeader,withrifle LISTONE
Threebombers EngineerWireClearingTeam,3men
Fiveriflemen Minefield
RIFLEBOMBERSECTION StaticBarbedWire
Corporal,JuniorLeader,withrifle Adjutant
Four rifle grenade launchers with two crew TrenchblockorFrenchWire
each OneBarrageComponent
LEWISGUNSECTION Addtwotrenchbroomstooneriflesection
Corporal,JuniorLeader,withrifle LISTTWO
OneLewisgunwithtwocrew 2”“ToffeeApple”mortarfiringfromofftable
SixRiflemen Stokes3”mortarfiringfromofftable
 SniperTeam


14
 248

LISTTHREE which inspired the modern infantry mortar.  Up

to three of these may be selected and group
SOSbarrage
together, offtable, as a single mortar section,
VickersMMGwithfivecrew
activating on a Command Dice roll of 2.
OfftableMachineGun
Individual mortars will activate as a Team on a
Woodandsandbagbunker(hardcover) rollof1.
Rolls Royce Armoured Car with a Junior 
Leader 
LanchesterArmouredCarwithaJuniorLeader 
BRITISHNATIONALCHARACTERISTICS
LISTFOUR  
Concretebunker  MADMINUTE
AustinArmouredCarwithaJuniorLeader  The British soldier is taught to love his rifle
 andthemantrathatdeliveryoffast,accurate
LISTFIVE
 fireisthekeytosuccess.
MarkAWhippetwithaJuniorLeader
 
13 pounder Field Gun with five crew and  WhenaLeaderisattachedtoarifleTeamand
JuniorLeader  uses two or more Command Initiatives to
LISTSIX  activatethatTeam,hemayaddthatmanyD6
MarkItankwithJuniorLeader  to the Team’s firing dice to reflect his
MarkIVtankwithJuniorLeader  controllingtheirrapidfire.
MarkVStartankwithJuniorLeader  
LISTSEVEN  THEPLAYINGFIELDSOFETON
 The British Army’s emphasis on sports and
MarkVtankwithJuniorLeader
 physical fitness, combined with their officers
  beingchapswhoknowhowtoplaythegame,
2”TOFFEEAPPLEMORTAR  will allow any assault lead by a British officer
The2”trenchmortarwasaspigotmortarwitha  using two Command Initiatives to add an
muchlargerchargethanthecalibresuggests.As  additional D6 of movement.   This will not
a result treat this as a 100175mm mortar.  It is  count as an additional dice of movement
assumed to be firing from just offtable with an  whencalculatingthedefender’sclosecombat
observer wellpositioned to view and correct  dice.
firing.Assuch,anyenemyunitonthetableisa  
potentialtarget. 
 
3”STOKESMORTAR 
The 3” Stokes mortar was the innovative design

BRITISHARSENALTABLE
VEHICLE ARMOUR ARMAMENT SPEED
MarkIMale 2 Two6pounderguns,twoLMGs Slow
MarkIFemale 2 FourMMGs,twoLMGs Slow
MarkIVMale 2 Two6pounderguns,twoLMGs Slow
MarkIVFemale 2 FourMMGs,twoLMGs Slow
MarkVMale 3 Two6pounderguns,threeLMGs Fast
MarkVFemale 3 SixLMGs Fast
MarkVStarMale 3 Two6pounderguns,threeLMGs Slow
MarkVStarFemale 3 SixLMGs Slow
MarkAWhippet 3 FourLMGs Fast
RollsRoyceArmouredCar 2 OneMMG Wheeled
LanchesterArmouredCar 1 OneMMG Wheeled
AustinArmouredCar 1 TwoMMGs Wheeled

15
 249

 
 
 SUPPORTOPTIONS
 Thefollowingsupportoptionsareavailable.
 

 USSUPPORTLIST
 LISTONE
 EngineerWireClearingTeam,3men
 Minefield
 StaticBarbedWire
Arriving in 1917, bringing fresh enthusiasm for Adjutant
the fight to the Western Front, the US forces TrenchblockorChevauxdefrise
adopted an enlarged French platoon model with Onebarragecomponent
a greater emphasis on firepower to break the
Add two trench brooms to the third, rifle,
deadlockoftrenchwarfare.
section

US infantry count as Green troops in their early LISTTWO
encounters, becoming Regular from September 1 pounder 3.7cm M1916  with 5 crew and a
1918.  US Marines will normally be rated as JuniorLeader
Regulartroops. Stokes3”mortarfiringfromofftable
 SniperTeam
USINFANTRYPLATOON LISTTHREE
PLATOONFORCERATING: SOSbarrage
Regular:+2 HotchkissM1914MMGwithfivecrew
Green:3 Woodandsandbagbunker(hardcover)

OfftableMachineGun
CommandDice:5
 LISTFOUR
PLATOONHEADQUARTERS Concretebunker
Lieutenant,SeniorLeader,withpistol LISTFIVE
Sergeant,SeniorLeader,withrifle FT17withaJuniorLeader

75mmM1897FieldGunwithfivecrewand
SECTIONONE JuniorLeader
Corporal,JuniorLeader,withrifle LISTSEVEN
Fivebombers
MarkVtankwithJuniorLeader
SixRiflemen

SECTIONTWO
VBLAUNCHERS
Corporal,JuniorLeader,withrifle
The VB Launcher is treated as a rifle grenade
ThreeVBLauncherswithtwocreweach
launcherintherules.
Threeriflemen

SECTIONTHREE
3”STOKESMORTAR
Corporal,JuniorLeader,withrifle The 3” Stokes mortar was the innovative design
SeventeenRiflemen which inspired the modern infantry mortar.  Up
SECTIONFOUR to three of these may be selected and group
Corporal,JuniorLeader,withrifle together, offtable, as a single mortar section,
CHAUCHATTEAM VBTEAM activating on a Command Dice roll of 2.
Two Chauchats with Two Chauchats with Individual mortars will activate as a Team on a
twocreweach twocreweach rollof1.
Tworiflemen Tworiflemen 

16
 250

THE“ONEPOUNDER”GUN 
USNATIONALCHARACTERISTICS
TheFrench37mminfantryguninUSservicewas 

known as the One Pounder and used very 
successfullytoassistattacksonenemypositions.  SHOOT‘EMOUTBOYS!
Up tothree ofthesemaybeselected andgroup  General Pershing was convinced that US
together, offtable, as a single gun section,  forces could break the deadlock with their
activating on a Command Dice roll of 2.  superior firepower.  He was somewhat over
IndividualgunswillactivateasaTeamonarollof  optimistic in this, but it did lead to an
1.  emphasis on the use of concentrated
  firepower.
WEAPONVARIATION 
TheUnitedStatesentryintotheGreatWarsawit  To reflect this, when both Chauchat Teams
with a huge shortfall of the amount of both  concentratetheirfireonthesametarget,they
trainedmenandreadilyavailableequipment.As  willcauseanadditionalpointofShockonthe
a result they purchased weapons from other  target unit.  If multiple units are present, the
nations to fill the gap.  Where we have listed  USplayermayselectwhichtargetunithasthe
specific weapons, such as the Hotchkiss M1914  additionalShockappliedtoit.
MMG, the player may feel free to replace that 
with other weapons, such as the M1917 
BrowningMMGifthatisthemodelhehasinhis 
collection. 
 
 

USARSENALTABLE
VEHICLE ARMOUR ARMAMENT SPEED
FT17 4 47mmgunoroneLMG Fast
MarkVMale 3 Two6pounderguns,threeLMGs Fast
MarkVFemale 3 SixLMGs Fast
MarkVStarMale 3 Two6pounderguns,threeLMGs Slow
MarkVStarFemale 3 SixLMGs Slow

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

17
 251

 
 STOSSTRUPPENZUG
 PLATOONFORCERATING:
 Elite:+7
 
 CommandDice:6
 
 PLATOONHEADQUARTERS
 Letunant,SeniorLeader,withtrenchbroom
With the onset of trench warfare, the Germans VizeFeldwebel, Senior Leader, with trench
were keen to develop new infantry tactics in broom
ordertobreakthedeadlockintheWest.Aswith 
the French and the British, they increased ASSAULTGRUPPEONE
firepower with additional automatic weapons. Gefreiter,JuniorLeader,withrifle
However,themaindevelopmentwasthetraining Sixbombers
ofeliteStormtrooperunits. tworiflemen
 LIGHTMACHINEGUNGRUPPEONE
INFANTRYZUG Gefreiter,JuniorLeader,withrifle
AllGermaninfantrycountasRegular. OneMG08/15orLewisGunwithtwocrew
 Sixriflemen
PLATOONFORCERATING: ASSAULTGRUPPETWO
Regular:0 Gefreiter,JuniorLeader,withrifle

Sixbombers
CommandDice:5
 tworiflemen
PLATOONHEADQUARTERS LIGHTMACHINEGUNGRUPPETWO
FeldwebelLeutnant, Senior Leader, with Gefreiter,JuniorLeader,withrifle
pistol OneMG08/15orLewisGunwithtwocrew
 Sixriflemen
RIFLEGRUPPEONE 
Gefreiter,JuniorLeader,withrifle SUPPORTOPTIONS
Eightriflemen The following support options are available.
Twobombers Items in blue may only be selected by a
LIGHTMACHINEGUNGRUPPEONE Stosstruppenforce.
Gefreiter,JuniorLeader,withrifle 
OneMG08/15orLewisGunwithtwocrew GERMANSUPPORTLIST
Eightriflemen
LISTONE
RIFLEGRUPPEONE EngineerWireClearingTeam,3men
Gefreiter,JuniorLeader,withrifle
Grenadebundlecompoundcharge
Eightriflemen
Antitankriflewithtwocrew
Twobombers
Minefield
LIGHTMACHINEGUNGRUPPEONE StaticBarbedWire
Gefreiter,JuniorLeader,withrifle
Adjutant
OneMG08/15orLewisGunwithtwocrew
TrenchblockorFrenchWire
Eightriflemen
Onebarragecomponent

OneM1916Granatenwerfer

Add two trench brooms to one rifle or

AssaultGruppe

Add one captured Lewis gun to one LMG

Gruppe

18
 252

LISTTWO rollof1.TheMinenwerferwillbedeployedoff
table, whereas the Granatenwerfer may deploy
Light 7.85cm Minenwerfer  firing from off
eitheronorofftable.
table

SniperTeam
MARKIVTANK“BEAUTEPANZER”
LISTTHREE This is a captured British tank pressed into
SOSbarrage Germanservice.Usethevehiclefiguresfromthe
Maxim 08 MMG with five crew and Junior BritishArmoury.
Leader 
OfftableMachineGun 
Woodandsandbagbunker(hardcover) 
GERMANNATIONALCHARACTERISTICS

Flamethrowerteam,threemen 
Erhardt EV/4 Armoured Car with a Junior 
STURMABTEILUNGVOR!
Leader  Toreflecttheirfocusonrapidmovementand
LISTFOUR  infiltrationtactics,RegularStormtrooperunits
 may deploying within 9” of a JumpOff Point,
Maxim 08 MMG with armour piercing
 whilstElitetroopsdeploywithin12”.
ammunition.FfivecrewandJuniorLeader
 
Concretebunker
 HANDGRANATEN!
LISTFIVE  The German army used the hand grenade as
7.62cmInfantryGunor7.7cmNahkampfGun  theirclosequarterweaponofchoice.
withfivecrewandJuniorLeader  
7.7cm Field Gun with five crew and Junior  To reflect this, when a Leader attached to a
Leader  TeamorSquadusestwoCommandInitiatives,
LISTSIX  he may lead a charge against any enemy
MarkIVtankwithJuniorLeader  within 12” preceded by a hail of grenades.
 Roll1D6,subtracting1iftheenemyisinlight
LISTSEVEN  cover, 2 if in hard cover.  On a roll of 1 or 2,
A7VtankwithJuniorLeader  onehandgrenadehashitthetargetunit;on3
  or 4, two grenades hit; on 5 or 6, three
7.62CMINFANTRYGUN  grenadeshitthetarget.Rollfortheeffectof
These cutdown, captured Russian Field guns  theseandtheTeamorSquadmaythenmove
were designed to be relatively light and able to  withupto3D6totrytoinitiateCloseCombat.
keep pace with an infantry advance.  When 
movingtheyroll3D6anddiscardthehighestdice 
rolled 
 
M1916GRANATENWERFER 
7.85CMMINENWERFER 
Up to three of either of these options may be 
selected and grouped together as a single 
section, activating on a Command Dice roll of 2. 
Individual weapons will activate as a Team on a 


GERMANARSENALTABLE
VEHICLE ARMOUR ARMAMENT SPEED
ErhardtEV/4 2 ThreeMMGs Wheeled
A7V 4 One57mmgun,fiveLMGs Fast


19

 forward from their friendly edge to the
THESCENARIOS
ThesixscenariosinthemainChainofCommand
rule book are still used, but with the following
amendments.


 defender’s his base line.  Two
ScenarioOne–Patrol
Thisscenariorepresentstheclashoftwopatrols
in NoMan’sLand.  No trenches will be present
(unless abandoned and largely destroyed).  No
armour or artillery may be used in this scenario.
This scenario may be played across or along the
table.
 one wood and sandbagged bunker 36”
ScenarioTwo–Probe
This scenario represents an attacker probing
againstforwardpositionsaheadofthefrontlines.
The defender has three squad sized
entrenchments which they may place within 24”
of their table edge.  One sap runs forward from
their friendly edge to one of the positions.  The
attacker has 1D6+6 points of support.  The
defenderhas1D6pointsofsupport.Noarmour
orartillerylargerthaninfantrygunsmaybeused
onthetableinthisscenario.Anartillerybarrage
maybeselectedbytheattacker,anSOSbarrage
may be selected by the defender.  This scenario
mustbeplayedalong,notacross,thetable.
 This scenario represents a breakthrough battle
ScenarioThree–Attack&Defend
Thedefenderhaseitherofthefollowing:

A stretch of front line trench running
acrossthetableupto24”infromhisbase
line.  One communication trench runs
20
253
frontlinetrench.
Three concrete bunkers and three wood
andsandbaggedbunkerswithupto24”of
communicationtrenchesbetweenthem.
The attacker has 2D6+6 points of support.  The
defenderhas1D6pointsofsupport.Armourand
artillerymaybepresentonthetable.Anartillery
barragemaybeselectedbytheattacker,anSOS
barrage may be selected by the defender.  This
scenario must be played along, not across, the
table.

ScenarioFour–DelayingAction
Thetableiseitherofthefollowing:

A stretch of front line trench running
across the table 24” from the attacker’s
base line and a similar stretch of trench
running across the table 24” from the
communicationtrenchedconnectthetwo,
there being at least 24” apart.  A single
communication trench runs from the
defender’s friendly edge to the nearest
trenchline.
One concrete bunkers 24” from the
defender’sedge;oneconcretebunkerand
from the same edge; one wood and
sandbagged bunker 40” from the same
edge.Onedamagedbuildingwillbewithin
24”ofthedefender’stableedge.

The attacker has 2D6+6 points of support.  The
defenderhas1D6pointsofsupport.Armourand
artillerymaybepresentonthetable.Anartillery
barragemaynotbeselectedbytheattacker.An
SOS barrage may be selected by the defender.
This scenario must be played along, not across,
thetable.

ScenarioFive–FlankAttack
once the initial defensive belt has been
penetrated.  As such, the defender must place
three 12” sections of trenches or squad sized
defensivepositionsbasedondamagedbuildings.
Amix,suchastwobuildingsconnectedby12”of
entrenchments, is allowed.  These must be at
least24”fromthedefender’stableedge
 254

 
The attacker has 1D6+6 points of support.  The mustplacetwo12”sectionsoftrenchesorsquad
defenderhas1D6pointsofsupport.Armourmay sized defensive positions based on damaged
bepresent,butnoartilleryheavierthaninfantry buildingsandoneconcretebunker.Amix,such
guns may be present on the table.  No artillery as two buildings connected by 12” of
barragesmaybeselected.Thisscenariomustbe entrenchments, is allowed.  These must be at
playedalong,notacross,thetable. least24”fromthedefender’stableedge.
 
ScenarioSix–AttackonanObjective The attacker has 2D6 points of support.  The
Thisbattlerepresentsthefinalattackonthemain defenderhas1D6pointsofsupport.Armourmay
objective and, as such, it is behind the enemy bepresent,butnoartilleryheavierthaninfantry
maindefensivelines. guns may be present on the table.  No artillery
 barragesmaybeselected.Thisscenariomustbe
Inadditiontothemainobjective,thedefender playedalong,notacross,thetable.
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
























21
 255

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
By the end of 1917, the Great War in Europe stopped there.  To compound the manpower
seemed no closer to a conclusion than it had at problem further, Lloyd George committed,
the end of 1914.  Advances made in the west, withoutconsultingwithHaig,theBritishArmyto
whilstsignificant,hadbeenpaidforinbloodand takeresponsibilityforanadditionalthirtymilesof
the political capital of Field Marshall Haig was the front from the French.  It was to prove a
running low.  In the French sector, open mutiny dangerouscombination.
had been seen during Nivelle Offensive resulting 
in Petain assuming command with a tacit OntheGermanside,theendof1917wasatime
understanding that France would stand on the for mixed feelings.  At home, the Royal Navy
defensive,atleastfortheimmediatefuture. blockade was biting, causing real shortages and
 some political mutterings from the Left.  The
In London, the government of Lloyd George was involvement of the USA in the war was seen, at
intent on pursuing a strategy based on winning all levels, as a disaster.  Fortunately, Pershing’s
the war against the Ottomans; certain that the insistence on his Army taking the best part of a
deadlock in the West could not be broken.  To year to train before being committed to action
that end he began starving the British Army in allowedabreathingspacebeforetherealimpact
France of replacements, keeping a quarter of a wasfelt.Whatwasmore,eventsintheEast,with
millionmeninuniforminUKdepots. Soviet Russia abandoning the war, turned this
 breathing space into a window of opportunity.
Haig,ontheotherhand,believedfirmlythatthe TheDivisionsreleasedfromRussiacouldnowbe
warcouldnotbewonanywhereotherthaninthe transferred to the West to allow one final great
West.  He was equally convinced that, with the offensive to be launched, aimed at removing
French surrendering the initiative, the war could Britain,nowthekeyenemy,fromtheWar.Itwas
certainly be lost in the West if the British Army afinaltossofthediceinwhichLloydGeorgeand
was not kept up to strength.  In November of thepoliticianshadnaivelyconspiredtostackthe
1917hereportedasmuchtotheWarOfficeand oddsagainstHaigandtheBritishArmy.
statedthat,ofthe57Divisionshehadunderhis 
command, 15 of them would need to be broken For the previous two years of the war, the
upinordertobringtheremainderuptostrength. Germans had spent their time on the defensive.
The politicians disagreed.  Despite the strongest In the same way that the Entente powers had
objections from their military advisors, they developed more sophisticated offensive tactics,
insistedthatalltheDivisionsshouldberetained, theGermanshadbeenabletohonetheirskillsof
butwithareductionofthenumberofbattalions defence to a fine art.  Concepts such as the
fromtwelveperDivisiontojustnine. “elastic defence” had been developed which
 wouldsetthestandardfortheGermanArmyup
This pronouncement rode roughshod over the to1945,andformanyothersbeyondthatpoint.
way in which the Army had been equipped and Aware that their own manpower shortages,
trained to fight but, as always, the politicians combined with the German glut of
believedtheyknewbest.However,theyhadn’t reinforcements,meantthatthenextphaseofthe

22

warwouldbedefensive,theBritishattemptedto
mimic the German system of a deep defensive
belt, of the kind they had encountered at
Paschendaele.  In January 1918 they took over
the additional areas of the front where they
found that the French defences were woefully
inadequate.  The British set about constructing
defences comprised of a Forward Zone and a
BattleZone;theformertohamperandbreakup
the coherence of any attack, the latter being
wheretheactualbattlewouldbefought,against,
intheory,adisorganisedenemy.

On paper, the defensive plan was sound.  All
participants knew that an attack supported by a
powerful barrage was almost unstoppable.
However, as soon as the attack began and
contact was lost with the supporting artillery,
plans began to unravel.  In an ideal world, the
German attackers would have lost their artillery
supportbythetimetheyadvancedintotheBattle
Zone,whereastheBritishwouldhavetheground
carefullysurveyedandtheirartilleryrangedinto
provideoverwhelmingsupport.
 To the South West of St Quentin, the British
In practice, the old French front line trenches,
designedastheyweretoprovideonecontinuous
firing line, with two or three supporting lines,
were lightly garrisoned with outposts based
around platoon “keeps”; strong defensive
outpostswellprotectedbywire.Immediatelyto
their rear, each British sector of the Forward
Zone had one redoubt.  It was hoped that the
Germanbarragewouldfallonthelightlymanned
outposts, thereby minimising casualties, whilst
theredoubtsurvivedtoprovidetherealpointof
forwardresistance.
 Battalion Royal Inniskilling Fusiliers in the
To the rear, the Battle Zone was more open,
providinglesstrenchesthroughwhichtheenemy
could infiltrate, but contained another redoubt,
again well protected by wire.  With the newly
“triangulated” British Divisions, one battalion
would hold the Forward Zone, a second on the
BattleZoneandathirdwouldbekeptinreserve
in order to intervene decisively.  It was a fine
theory.
 includingtheRacecourseRedoubt.Totheirrear,
In practice, the British Army had been over
extended by the extension of its frontage, and
that meant that the defenders were spread too
23
256
thinly.  The British relied too much on their
artillery to do the job of supporting their
strongpoints, often leaving them isolated and
without the interlocking fields of fire which the
Germans saw as the key to their system of
defence in depth.  It was a fault which was to
have major consequences on the 21st of March
1918.



REDHANDDEFENDERS
sector was manned by the 36th Ulster Division
whosedefencestypifiedtheentireBritishsector.
Originally the Division had been made up of
Loyalist volunteers from the Ulster Volunteer
Force who had assembled to oppose Home Rule
in Ireland.  By 1918 the Division had changed
significantly,beingmadeupofmenofabroader
background.TheRegimentalhistorian,CyrilFalls,
stated that “UlsterScot and Celt intermingled
andreceivedEnglishrecruitsaswell”.

On their left, the 109th Brigade had the 2nd
Forward Zone, their defences centred on the
BoadiceaRedoubttotheSouthofGiffecourt.In
the Battle Zone the 1st Battalion of the
Inniskillings were to the North of the St Quentin
CanalbasedaroundtheRicardoRedoubt.The9th
BattalionInniskillingsformedthereserve.

In the centre, the 107th Brigade had the 15th
Battalion, Royal Irish Rifles in the Forward Zone
the 1st Battalion of the same Regiment held the
Battle Zone and the Quarry Redoubt and the 2nd
Battalionwasinreserve.
 257

extremely misty.
The initial
bombardment saw
trenchmortarsbeing
used on the forward
positions with
artillery firing a mix
ofH.E.andPhosgene
gas onto the
redoubts.TheBattle
Zone and the
crossings over the
Canal de St Quentin
were shelled by the
105mm, 150mm and
210mm guns.  The
absence of the
standard German
Field Guns, the
7.7cm gun, from the
barrage was
noteworthy, with
these being held
ready for the
advance to support
the advanced
infantry elements.
Before the actual
 attack, the gas component of the barrage was
Finally, on the right, the 108th Brigade had the reducedandtheH.E.shellsalonecontinued.
12th Battalion, Royal Irish Rifles in the Jeanne 
d’Arc Redoubt and the Forward Zone, the 1st At0830theattackcame.OntheDivision’sright,
Battalion, Royal Irish Fusiliers was in the Station wheretheyjoinedwiththe14thDivision,theline
Redoubt in the Battle Zone and the 9th Battalion took a sharp right turn at Sphinx Wood; the line
ofthatsameRegimentwasinreserve. which had been running approximately West to
 East turning to approximately North to South.
In the Forward Zone, the arrangement was The German main point of effort was at that
common across all three Brigades.  The Forward junction and the troops attacking the 36th
Zone outposts would be held by two companies Division came in from the East, flanking the
inplatoonsizedoutposts. Supportingthesewas forward outposts, as opposed to hitting them
athirdcompanywhichwasavailabletocounter head on.  The first troops simply bypassed the
attack against any German inroads.  Finally, the outposts and pushed onwards through the mist,
fourth Company was in the Forward Zone leaving the forward positions to be mopped up;
redoubt,designated(remarkably)asthe“passive there were even reports of the Race Course
resistance company” where it guarded the Redoubtbeingattackedbeforetheoutpostline.
BattalionHQ. With the arrival of the second German wave, a
 numberofsmallprivatebattlesbeganacrossthe
KAISERSCHLACHT frontofthe36thDivision.Isolatedunitsfoughton
The much anticipated German attack came on withvaryingdegreesofsuccess.Inonereportwe
the morning of the 21st of March which, not hear that one platoon was almost entirely
unusually for that time of year in this area, was devastated by a single heavy shell and was

24

overcome with no resistance; at other points
resistance continued on into the afternoon.  At
severalpointstheliftingofthefog,happeningat
around 1300, saw German reinforcements
pushing forward along the main roads being
literallymowndownbydefenderswhohadbeen
bypassedinitiallybuthadnotthenbeencleared
outbysubsequentfollowuptroops.Itwasonly
at around 1630, when the Germans brought up
some captured Mark I tanks, that the outposts
ForwardZonewaseventuallycleared.
 standing firm and the division was able to shift
The Forward Zone redoubts fared somewhat
better.  Jeanne d’Arc fell at about midday,
whereas Racecourse and Boadicea both held on
until about 1730, albeit in very different
situations.  At the Racecourse Redoubt fighting
was intense as Colonel ColeHamilton and his
men fought at close quarters with the attackers.
Lieutenant Edmund D Wind was awarded the
Victoria Cross for his bravery in repelling
numerousattacks,buthewasnotalone.Captain
Stewart, the Battalion adjutant, held back the
Germans for some time, armed only with a rifle
grenade projector.  In the end, however,
resistancewasovercomeinthelastcornerofthe
redoubt.
 longer fighting as part of the Division and had
In the Boadicea Redoubt, the British defenders
held out for just as long, but largely, it would
seem,duetothereticenceoftheGermanfollow
up troops to bring the matter to a conclusion.
Casualties among the defenders there are
remarkably light, with no officers being killed.
German records recount the tale that once
sufficientheavymortarshadbeenbroughtup,an
ultimatum was delivered to the garrison.  Its
commander agreed to surrender on the proviso
thattwoofhiscarrierpigeonscouldbereleased
bearing a letter from the senior German officer
present to attest to the fact that he had fought
gallantly.
 allocated to “mop up” had found themselves
Whatiskeytonotehereisthatthepressurewas
beingappliedfromtheright.Itisnocoincidence
that Jeanne d’Arc fell first, for the fact is that a
gap had been torn between the 14th and 36th
DivisionsandtheUlsterDivision’srightflankwas
beingrolledup.By1300Urvillershadfallenand
theroadssouth,nownolongershroudedinmist,
wereseentobeteamingwithadvancingGerman
25
258
troops.  Manufacture Farm, on the Northern
outskirts of Essigny fell and the Station Redoubt
cameunderattack.However,theLewisgunsand
Machine Guns were now able to fire effectively
andwereholdingofftheGermanadvance.

On the left, the 109th Brigade was holding its
Battle Zone, although 30 Division to the North
had been obliged to call in artillery onto its own
Battle Line redoubts before midday.  Ricardo
Redoubt, commanded by Colonel Crawford was
thereservebattalioninthissectortopropupthe
rightflank.

At this point it is worth taking a break from the
action and assessing where things stood at
around1600.Firstly,itisclearthatthemisthad
completelyruinedtheBritishdefensiveplan.The
Machine GunBattalionshaddeployed their men
in nests right across the front, but these small
groupshadlargelybeenovercomewithoutfiring
even a handful of rounds.  The Forward Zone
troops were very effectively surrounded and
entirelylosttotheDivision,evenwheretheyheld
onheroicallyformanyhours.Ultimately,byearly
afternoon three out of nine battalions were no
been reduced, largely, to a isolated pockets of
resistance.  In the main Battle Zone, the 36th
Division’s redoubts may well be holding the
enemyatbay,butwithcontactlostwiththe14th
and 30th Divisions on the flanks these could be
isolated and ignored by the German attackers
whocouldoutflankandisolatetheminturn.

From a German perspective, the strengths and
weaknesses of their stormtrooper tactics were
clearly on display.  Their initial attack had been
successful in bypassing the British outposts, but
theyhadnotshatteredthedefendersindoingso,
but rather had left them intact.  The troops
fightingfullscalebattleswiththeintactoutposts,
ajobwhichinmanycasehadprovedtobemore
than they could achieve on the schedule they
were given.  Indeed the remnants of the British
Forward Zone outposts were successful in
stoppingreservesandsupportunitsadvancingto
assistthefirstwaveandtheirabsencewaswhat

was halting the advance before the Station
Redoubt.
 three Forward Zone battalions were completely
Until the Forward Zone was cleared by the
secondwave,themainadvancewasindangerof
running out of energy.  It is especially worth
commentingontheGermancrewedMarkItanks,
an incredibly rare commodity in the German
Army which should have been at the spearhead
of the advance, being used to clear out the
residueoftheoutpostslateintheafternoon.
 The decision was taken to blow the bridges on

Aswecansee,theday’seventsmatchedneither
side’splansbut,fortheBritish,thefragmentation
of the front presented the greatest challenge.
Towards evening the fall of the Ricardo Redoubt
26
259
exposed by the retreat of the 30th Division,
presentedtheBritishwithacriticaldecision.All
lost.  Some men from Crawford’s 1st Royal
Inniskilling Fusiliers fought their way out of the
Ricardo Redoubt but, essentially, this was a
fourth battalion wiped off the rolls.  The
battalions in the Station and Quarry Redoubts
had both been reduced to around 250 men,
meaningthatwhatremainedoftheDivisionwas
nowapproachinganoldBrigadesizedformation.
theCanaldeStQuentinandthentopullbacktop
new positions behind the Canal and the Somme
betweenHamandStSimon.The16thRifleshad
been preparing new positions since lunchtime
and the arrival of the 61st Brigade, released by
ArmyHQtojointhe36thDivision,meantthatthe
Divisioncouldwithdrawtolicktheirwounds.

On the German side, the Kaiser was confident
thattheresultsofthefirstdaywereindicativeof
thecollapseoftheBritishfront,butcoolerheads

couldseethattheBritishmaybebatteredbut,as
yet, were not broken.  For the British, the first
day of the Kaiserschlacht was a terrible shock.
ThankstoLloydGeorge,26BritishDivisionsfaced
overseventyGermanDivisions.IntheFifthArmy
sector, Hubert Gough’s men were outnumbered
byfivetooneandtheGeneralwasshockedthat
the attack was at all points across the front,
thereby leaving no quiet area from which he
could move troops to support hard pressed
sectors.  And this was just the first day.  What
was to follow was a remarkable tale of heroism
and sacrifice on both sides.  Whether the
“Kaiser’s Battle” came close to defeating the
Britishandendingthewarisamootpoint.Forus
this,thefirstday,givesustheopportunitytoplay
an interesting and challenging campaign with
Through the Mud & the Blood, either in its
original format or with the Chain of Command
variationpresentedinthisSpecial.Ineithercase,
thecampaignwillbeplayedoutusingtheAtthe
SharpEndCampaignSupplement.
 wewillusealadderformatheretorepresentthe

 openedforusebyadvancingGermanunits.
The Campaign
For anyone with an interest in gaming the Great
War, the German Spring Offensive of 1918, the
KaiserschlachtorKaiser’sBattle,hasarealdraw.
By this time both sides are fighting according to
theirownversionofmoderninfantrytacticsand,
foronce,thepromiseoftheopenbattleprovides
acontrasttothemudandbloodofthetrenches.
 2
To a degree this promise is illusory; the ground
foughtoverwasverymuchthesameoldground
which had been fought across in previous years
astheEntentepowersedgedEastwards.Theold
Somme battlefield, abandoned to its ghosts and
the small Army of deserters who lingered
amongst its old dugout, was once again in the
frontline.
 thefourthscenariointhisladderwilldependon
This campaign is designed to represent the first
day of Operation Michael in the British 36th
27
260
Division’s sector.  In a thick morning mist the
stormtroopershaveinfiltratedthroughtheBritish
Forward Zone and are looking to break through
totheBattleZonewherethemoreopenground
will allow them to advance rapidly and bring
forward support units to assist them overcome
Britishresistance.Assuch,theGermanobjective
istoreachthevillageofGrandSeraucourtwhich
willthenallowthem tocapturecrossingsonthe
CanaldeStQuentin.

However,thingsarenotassimpleastheGerman
plan suggests.  In order to bring forward both
artillery support and fresh troops, the Germans
need their second wave to clear out the British
ForwardZonerapidly.Resistancetherecanleave
thefirstGermanwavestarvedoftheassistanceit
needs to maintain the initiative and keep the
offensivepushingforward.

TWINLADDERS
AswithallcampaignsbasedonAttheSharpEnd,
overallbattlebeingfoughtbythefirst waveand
then their reinforcements.  However, a second,
shorter,ladderisalsousedtorepresentthefight
in the Forward Zone.  How long it takes the
Germans to overcome resistance here will
determine how quickly the roads South can be

OntheCampaignMasterMap,themainladderof
the attack is represented by four games with
tables indicated by the numbers 1 to 4 and
connectedbysolidarrows.Theseareasfollows:

Rung Name Scenario
1 Infiltrating the Forward 2
Zone
IntotheBattleZone 4
3 Attack on the Quarry 3
Redoubt
4 GrandSeraucourt ?

Ascanbeseen,thescenariosfollowthestructure
in Chain of Command with the amendments
suggested in the accompanying article in this
Special.  The first three scenarios are set whilst
what successes the Germans have had at this
point.IftheGermanshavecompletedscenarios
 The Campaign Master Map

28
261

A and B in the second ladder, below, then the
fight at Grand Seraucourt will be a Flank Attack,
Scenario Five in the main Chain of Command
rules.IftheyhavenotclearedbothAandB,this
game will be Scenario Six, an Attack on an
Objective.
 additional cards to the Game Deck.  With the
The second, supporting, ladder is shown on the
mapasadashedarrow,connectingtablesAand
B.  These represent the second wave of German
forces attempting to clear the British Forward
Zoneandareasfollows:
 OrderofPlay
Rung Name Scenario
A FlankingtheForwardZone 5
B ADayattheRacecourse 3
 successfully with a German victory, the second
Thisisashortandsimpleladder,withAhavingto
be cleared before B is attacked.  To reflect the
significance of these positions, the amount of
support and type of support that the German
player may call for on the main ladder will be
determined by what is happening at A and B.
Broadly, clearing A will allow infantry to move
forward in small numbers to support the main
attack.  Clearing B will allow greater numbers of
infantry and heavier support options to move
forwardandtakepartinthemaineffect.
 enemyresistance.
 campaign, barrages are allocated to specific
SETTINGUPTHECAMPAIGN
The Kaiserschlacht Campaign is designed to be
playedwith astandard1918InfantryPlatoonon
the British side whilst on the German side the
29
262
main attack ladder always used a Stosstruppen
Zug and the supporting ladder uses an Infantry
Zug. Ifplayerswish,theymayusetwoplatoons
perside,buttheywillneedtoincreasethetable
sizes to 6’ by 5’ to do so.  If this option is taken
with Through the Mud & the Blood simply add
ChainofCommandGreatWaramendments,each
platoon will have its own set of Command Dice
and use the rules in Big Chain of Command for
runningmultipleplatoons.

The first scenario to be played is Scenario One
with the Germans holding the initiative at the
start of the campaign.  Once this is completed
wave will start attempting to clear the Forward
Zone, with scenario A being played.  After that
the scenarios will alternate until either ladder is
cleared.

So,iftheGermanswinScenario1,thenextgame
will be Scenario A.  Win or lose at A, the next
gamewillbeScenario2,withScenarioA,orBifA
has already been won, following.  Two
consecutivegamesmaynotbefoughtonanyone
ladderuntiltheotherladderhasbeenclearedof

In theory it is possible for the Germans to
complete the main ladder whilst the support
ladder is still being fought over.  In practice it is
far more likely that the Germans will clear the
supportladderandthengoontofinishthemain
ladderinsequence.

Toreflecttheimportanceofclearingthesupport
ladder, the Germans will be limited to their
selectionofsupportoptionsuntilScenariosAand
Bhavebeenwon.Thisworksasfollows:

MAINLADDERINITIALSUPPORTOPTIONS
Thefollowingsupportoptionsareavailableatthe
startofthecampaignonthemainladder,before
Scenarios A and B have been won.  For this
scenarios as they have been preplanned in
advance.


 263

GERMANSUPPORTLIST GERMANSUPPORTLIST
LISTONE LISTONE
EngineerWireClearingTeam,3men EngineerWireClearingTeam,3men
Adjutant Antitankriflewithtwocrew
TrenchblockorFrenchWire Adjutant
OneM1916Granatenwerfer TrenchblockorFrenchWire
Add two trench brooms to one rifle or OneM1916Granatenwerfer
AssaultGruppe Add two trench brooms to one rifle or
Add one captured Lewis gun to one LMG AssaultGruppe
Gruppe Add one captured Lewis gun to one LMG
LISTTHREE Gruppe
Maxim 08 MMG with five crew and Junior LISTTWO
Leader Light 7.85cm Minenwerfer  firing from off
Flamethrowerteam,threemen table
 SniperTeam
MAINLADDERENHANCEDSUPPORTOPTIONS LISTTHREE
Thefollowingsupportoptionsareavailableonce Maxim 08 MMG with five crew and Junior
ScenarioAhasbeenwon. Leader
 OneLMGorAssaultGruppeandJuniorLeader
GERMANSUPPORTLIST OfftableMachineGun
LISTONE Flamethrowerteam,threemen
EngineerWireClearingTeam,3men LISTFOUR
Adjutant Maxim 08 MMG with armour piercing
TrenchblockorFrenchWire ammunition.FivecrewandJuniorLeader
OneM1916Granatenwerfer LISTFIVE
Add two trench brooms to one rifle or 7.62cmInfantryGunor7.7cmNahkampfGun
AssaultGruppe withfivecrewandJuniorLeader
Add one captured Lewis gun to one LMG 7.7cm Field Gun with five crew and Junior
Gruppe Leader
LISTTWO LISTSIX
Light 7.85cm Minenwerfer  firing from off MarkIVtankwithJuniorLeader
table 
SniperTeam SUPPORTLADDERSUPPORTOPTIONS
LISTTHREE The support ladder will be restricted to what
Maxim 08 MMG with five crew and Junior supportitmaycalloninitially,butwhenScenario
Leader A is won and the main support options are
OneLMGorAssaultGruppeandJuniorLeader releasedtoadvancefromStQuentinitwillhavea
Flamethrowerteam,threemen greaterselectiontochoosefrom.Thesesupport
optionsareasfollows:
LISTFOUR 
Maxim 08 MMG with armour piercing 
ammunition.FivecrewandJuniorLeader 
LISTFIVE 
7.62cmInfantryGunor7.7cmNahkampfGun

withfivecrewandJuniorLeader

MAINLADDERCOMPLETESUPPORTOPTIONS
Thefollowingsupportoptionsareavailableonce 
ScenariosAandBhavebeenwon. 

30
 264

SUPPORTLADDERAOPTIONS CAMPAIGNSPECIFICRULES
TheseoptionsareavailableforScenarioA: The following rules apply specifically to this
 campaign.

GERMANSUPPORTLIST BritishForces
LISTONE The British defenders in this campaign are
Adjutant representinganumberofplatoonsizedpositions.
TrenchblockorFrenchWire Assuch,afreshplatoonwillbepresentforeach
OneM1916Granatenwerfer scenario.WheretheBritishloseagame,theywill
Add one captured Lewis gun to one LMG have a fresh platoon available for the next
Gruppe scenario.If,however,theBritishwinagamethe
nextactionwillbefoughtatthesameplaceand
LISTTWO their force will be reduced to reflect casualties
Light 7.85cm Minenwerfer  firing from off suffered.UsethestandardcasualtysysteminAt
table the Sharp End at the end of the action.  This
SniperTeam allows lightly wounded men to return to their
LISTTHREE position, something which is possibly a little bit
Maxim 08 MMG with five crew and Junior unrealistic when considering the time scale, just
Leader oneday,overwhichthiscampaignisfought.We
OneLMGorRifleGruppeandJuniorLeader rationalisethatbyassumingthestragglersonthe
OfftableMachineGun battlefield will join up with outposts still holding
Flamethrowerteam,threemen out.  It is, admittedly, a fudge, but it does make
 forsomegoodgameswhilstretainingtheoverall
feeloftheaction.
SUPPORTLADDERBOPTIONS 
TheseoptionsareavailableforScenarioB: Britishsupportoptionsareasfollows:
 
GERMANSUPPORTLIST BRITISHSUPPORTLIST
LISTONE LISTONE
EngineerWireClearingTeam,3men Minefield
Adjutant StaticBarbedWire
TrenchblockorFrenchWire Adjutant
OneM1916Granatenwerfer TrenchblockorFrenchWire
Add one captured Lewis gun to one LMG
Gruppe LISTTWO
2”“ToffeeApple”mortarfiringfromofftable
LISTTWO Stokes3”mortarfiringfromofftable
Light 7.85cm Minenwerfer  firing from off
SniperTeam
table
LISTTHREE LISTTHREE
SOSbarrage
Maxim 08 MMG with five crew and Junior
VickersMMGwithfivecrew
Leader
OfftableMachineGun
OfftableMachineGun
Woodandsandbagbunker(hardcover)
OneLMGorRifleGruppeandJuniorLeader
Flamethrowerteam,threemen LISTFOUR
LISTFIVE Concretebunker
7.7cm Field Gun with five crew and Junior LISTFIVE
Leader 13 pounder Field Gun with five crew and
LISTSIX JuniorLeader
MarkIVtankwithJuniorLeader 

31
 265

GermanForces
TheGermanplayerwillbeginthecampaignwith
two forces; one Stormtrooper platoon attacking
on the main ladder and one Infantry platoon
attacking on the support ladder.  For the forces
on the main attack ladder, these represent a
single platoon at the spearhead of the advance.
As a result this unit will fight from scenario to
scenario with its losses carrying over from game
to game.  However, once Scenario A is won, the
playeronthemainladdergainstheabilitytocall
for replacements once during the remainder of
thecampaign.
 representations as, with any game involving
Once Scenario B is won, the player on the main
laddergainstheabilitytocallforReinforcements
duringtheremainderofthecampaign.
The Infantry platoon attacking on the support
ladder represents one Infantry platoon in the
secondwave.OnceScenarioAiswontheplayer
gains the ability to call for one platoon of
reinforcements for subsequent games on the
supportladder.
 shown with the blue arrow, the British with the
Reinforcements or Replacements for one ladder
maynotbeusedontheotherladder.
Characters&Personalities
For those gamers wishing to enhance their
gaming experience by adding characters to the
campaign, we would point you to the 2012
Summer Special and Sidney Roundwood’s article
“Just the Right Sort of Chap” which gives the
same type of Great War backgrounds as At the
SharpEnddoesforWWII.

THEBATTLEFIELDS
The following illustrations show all six tables
which will be used in the campaign.  We have
intentionally left these as schematic
trenches, the layout the gamer actually uses will
largelydependontheterraintheyhaveavailable.
Try to get as close to the diagrams as possible,
but having the wire represented is the most
important part.  The ground should be liberally
scarred by shell holes but is firm and does not
impedemovement.

TheGermanPatrolMarkerdeploymentoptionis
red.  All Patrol Phases are undertaken as
indicated in the rules.  The support options for
eachscenarioarenotedbeloweachmap.Where
a second platoon on each side is used to get a
larger game, increase the support level by 50%
forbothsides.

Scenario1


TheGermanplayerhasatotalofsevenpointsto
spend on a barrage with a further ten points on
othersupports.TheBritishplayermayselecttwo
pointsofsupport.
 
 If this scenario is played more than once, on
 subsequent plays increase the German support

32
 266

by three whilst reducing the British support by on other supports.  This number is reduced to
oneeachtime. twelve if Scenario B has not been won and to
 eightifScenarioAhasnotbeenwon.TheBritish
Scenario2 playermayselecteightpointsofsupport.

If this scenario is played more than once, on
subsequent plays increase the German support
by three whilst reducing the British support by
oneeachtime.

Scenario4


The German player has a total of four points to
spend on a barrage with a further ten points on
other supports, with this number halved if
Scenario A has not been won by the Germans.
The British player may select three points of
support.
 
If this scenario is played more than once, on This table represents a damaged French village
subsequent plays increase the German support behind the main British lines, so the buildings
by three whilst reducing the British support by should reflect that.  Add suitable bricabrac to
oneeachtime. thetableforfences,supplydumps,cartsandthe
 generaldetritusofwar.

The German player has no barrage but has
sixteen points of supports.  This number is
reduced to ten if Scenario B has not been won
and to six if Scenario A has not been won. The
Britishplayermayselecttwopointsofsupport.
If this scenario is played more than once, on
subsequent plays increase the German support
by three whilst reducing the British support by
 oneeachtime.
Scenario3 
ScenarioA


The German player has a total of two points to 
spendonabarragewithafurthersixteenpoints

33
 267

TheGermanplayerhasatotalofsevenpointsto
spend on a barrage with a further six points on
othersupports.TheBritishplayermayselecttwo
pointsofsupport.
 have not captured Grand Seraucourt within six
If this scenario is played more than once, on
subsequent plays increase the German support
by three whilst reducing the British support by
oneeachtime.
 
ScenarioB

The German player has a total of five points to
spend on a barrage with a further twelve points
onothersupports.TheBritishplayermayselect
eightpointsofsupport.

If this scenario is played more than once, on
subsequent plays increase the German support
by three whilst reducing the British support by
oneeachtime.

However,therearetimeconstraints.TheBritish
are already constructing new defences on the
Canal line and will be diverting reserves to hold
thisline,soalacrityisimportant.IftheGermans
games on the main attack ladder (i.e. not
includinganygamesonthesupportladder),then
night will have fallen and the canal line
reinforced.
For the British, the game is about delaying the
Germanswhereverpossible,butvictoriesonthe
supportladderaredoublyimportant.Whilethe
Forward Zone is still held, the Germans will find
the amount of support they can call upon
reduced and critical replacements and
reinforcementswillnotgetthrough.

We recommend that the PostBattle tracking
system is used as morale will play a vital role in
determiningtheoutcomeofthecampaign.


 
WINNINGTHECAMPAIGN 
For the Germans, victory is about breaking
through the British Forward and Battle Zones to
reachtheopen,defenceless,groundtotherear.



34

In 1914 the armies of Europe went to war with
one common feature; their fighting men were
almost universally equipped with the magazine
fed bolt action rifle, supported by small
detachments of machine guns crewed by men
trained specifically for that task. For the most
part, the armies of the great Empires were
comprised of conscripts; even Britain, with the
long-service regulars of the British Expeditionary
Force, was obliged to rapidly train up huge bodies
of men with no military experience in order to
fight a war on the continent.
In many respects the training undertaken by
these largely conscript armies was typified by the
initial training undertaken by Britain's rapidly
enlarged Army. Musketry, full pack marching and
square bashing were the order of the day, with
an emphasis on fire and movement of the type
we looked at in the 2013 Christmas Special; very
much based on the existing pre-war drill manuals.
Sub units manoeuvring forward under covering
fire; pinning the enemy with rifle and artillery fire
before an assault with the bayonet were common
fare for men of almost all nations.
After the initial war of movement on the Western
Front the lines began to solidify as the spade and
entrenching tool rapidly became the soldier's
primary weapon. From the Channel to the Swiss
border a solid front line ensured that the conflict
swiftly began to approximate the conditions of
siege warfare and, as a consequence, the tools
Page 28
268
which had previously been the preserve of the
Engineer began to find their way into the hands
of the infantryman. Typical of this development
was the arrival of the hand grenade in the
trenches.
In 1902, with a prescience which now appears
somewhat remarkable, the British War Office
declared that the hand grenade had no place in
modern warfare. The origins of this weapon are
shrouded in the mists of time. Some date them
back to Byzantium and the use of Greek Fire in
the early middle-ages, we know for certain that
grenados were used in the English Civil War and
that across the 18th and 19th centuries their use
became synonymous with the intricacies of siege
warfare. Indeed, within two years of the War
Office's declaration of obsolescence, the events
of the Russo-Japanese War obliged a significant
rethink.
Over the next few years hand grenades were
designed according to the whims of a handful of
self-promoting parties, each seeking to have their
design approved and adopted. The net result
was that the British adopted the Hand Grenade
Mark 1 in 1908, but by the time war broke out six
years later only tiny numbers were available.
This was a situation mirrored across Europe. In
Germany the total stock of grenades were in the
Engineering stores of the frontier fortresses,
ready to be used in their defence. The French
Army had only small number of similar devices,

manufactured in the mid 19th century to a design
which was standardised in the 18th century.
For all nations the emergence of a new form of
static warfare created demands for new
weapons. Initially the response was to make do,
with Pioneers and Engineers being called upon to
provide improvised devices generally termed
"hair brush grenades" as they tended to use a
wooden handle to which an explosive charge was
strapped, giving it the appearance of a lop-sided
stick grenade. However, by 1915 all major
nations were responding to the demand and
well-designed models based on practical
experience were finding their way to the front. It
is no coincidence that the iconic German stick
grenade, the Stielhandgranate, the British Mills
bomb and the French F1 grenade were all
designed in that first full year of the Great War.
With the formalisation of production and supply,
came the recognition that low-level infantry
tactics should be amended in order to reflect the
new addition to the infantryman's arsenal.
Much has been written about the development
of infantry tactics during the Great War,
especially the evolution of German stormtrooper
tactics which are seen, somehow, as the pinnacle
of the art. In truth all three major nations on the
Western Front spent the majority of the war
learning from each other. Capitain André
Laffargue's seminal work of 1915, Étude sur
l'attaque dans la période actuelle de la guerre,
which has been seen by many as being the first
serious work to consider infiltration tactics, was
translated into English and German within
months of it being published. Indeed, an analysis
of the training manuals used by United States
forces on their entry into the war confirm just
how much cross-fertilisation was prevalent with
British French and German manuals being
repackaged and distributed wholesale by the
Army War College in Washington.
It is clear from reading the tactical manuals of all
the major powers how the grenade was rapidly
embraced as the new weapon of warfare. For
Page 29
269
the British they rapidly adopted a policy of
deploying five bombing squads, each of nine
men, within each infantry company. This was
later formalised with one section in each platoon
being made up of bombers. The British had
originally adopted the term "grenade" but the
objections of the Grenadier Guards to men of
other units being titled grenadiers led to the
adoption of the term "Bomb", hence the use of
the Mills Bomb in both World Wars.
The bombing party specified in the 1915
publication The Training and Employment of
Grenadiers was led by an N.C.O. and made up of
two bayonet men who would take the lead when
attacking down a trench. Behind them would
come two bomb throwers who would be
supported by two bomb carriers, largely carrying
their supply of bombs in buckets and two spare
men carrying more bombs. The spare men were
tasked with keeping the bomb carriers well
supplied with bombs, but also to be ready to
deploy to replace losses as required. Behind
them would come the remainder of the platoon
with sandbags, spades and shovels, ready to
consolidate any gained ground.
On the schematic shown below, the bayonet
men, indicated by B1 and B, precede the lead
grenade thrower, T1, who is sheltered behind the
traverse. He is supported by Carrier one, C1, who
is immediately to hand, ready to provide more
bombs. Immediately behind them, controlling
the action, is the N.C.O. shown by the letter L. To
the rear are the second thrower, his carrier and
the two spare men. The rest of the platoon is
deployed behind that as discussed above.
As soon as the party enters the trench the
process of rolling up the position begins. The
Leader directs the first thrower to begin and he
throws multiple grenades as rapidly as possible
into the trenches at points X and Y. The leading
bayonet man is then ordered forward with the
command of "Report" and he moves into X and Y
to ensure that they are clear. The whole party
then advance forwards to repeat the same

process at the next traverse. Where a
communication trench is encountered, as we see
at Traverse 7 on the schematic, a second team
will be deployed to work its way up that trench.
Ideally, these will be men from a fresh section of
bombers, but if these are not available the
original bombing party will be split and Thrower
two and his second team will be detached to
undertake the task.
In defence, the British saw the grenade as a
weapon supplementary weapon. Even in 1915,
at the height of the "Cult of the bomb" which was
gripping the attention of the Army, it was
stressed that the primary weapons of defence
were the rifle and machine gun. However, it was
recognised that parties of bombers should be
deployed in the trenches to aid any counter
attack against enemy troops who had broken into
the front line trench. It was recommended that
the best way in which this could be undertaken
was by providing a second bombing trench
parallel to the front line trench and 20 yards to its
rear. From this position the Mills bomb could be
launched into a captured trench and an attack
repulsed, or at least blunted.
The French were remarkably similar in their
structure, with an N.C.O., usually a Corporal,
heading the Grenadier squad. This was made up
of two throwers, two carriers, two assistants and
Page 30
270
one spare man. The grenadiers generally were
selected from men with an "aptitude for sport"
whilst the assistants were "alert...good shots and
skilful in the use of the bayonet". Originally the
assistants had been termed riflemen, but the
French attempted to foster a sense of esprit de
corps within the grenadier squad, tasked as they
were with spearheading any attack. As a result
the term grenadier, with all that conveyed within
French military tradition, was adopted.
Where necessary the squad could break into two
teams, very much as we have seen the British
fighting in the above example, where four men
worked forward. However, their manual suggests
this was not the norm. Typically one assistant
would precede the thrower as in the British
model. Both throwers would position themselves
at the traverse supported by the carriers to their
rear. When they attacked one man would
engage the nearest enemy with grenades whilst
the second would seek to hurl his grenades deep
into the enemy trenches to stop the forward
movement of grenades through to the men
defending the position. This was an indication of
how the grenade was seen as the ultimate
weapon of trench clearance in French service. In
all other respects their function was identical to
the British plan of attack.

In the defence, the French saw the grenade as
providing a barrage which was capable not so
much of killing an enemy, but of blocking a route;
the French word barrage meaning to block or
dam. Key points in the defensive system were to
have a party of bombers provided. These were
specifically identified as salients, machine gun
positions and the junctions of communication
trenches. By defending these points any enemy
advance would be held up to allow a counter-
attack to be launched by reserves.
For the Germans, the Handgranatentrupp was
originally six men but by late 1915 this was
already seen as too weak and was increased to
eight men me plus a Leader, again normally a
junior N.C.O. This was divided into two distinct
teams, the first being made up of two bombers
and two carriers, the second of four men with
rifles, bayonets and 25 sandbags each. The first
group would operate under the command of the
N.C.O. who would personally take position at
point checking forward down the trench. On his
command the two bombers would deploy using a
very similar technique to the French, with one
bomber engaging the immediate foe, whilst the
second attempted to throw deeper in order to
stop any reinforcements or fresh supplies of
grenades being brought up. Only when the
advance was halted would the N.C.O. shout the
order "Sandsache Vor!" and the second team
would begin blocking the trench to the rear of the
bombers. Once the trench block was complete
the lead bomber team would withdraw to safety.
Page 31
271
On the diagram above the German method is
shown with the Leader being at point b, the
bombers at a, the carriers at c and the second
team at d.
Like the British, the Germans emphasised that
the best weapons in the defence were the rifle
and machine gun. However, they also saw them
as the primary weapon of counter-attack once
the enemy had gained the front line trench. As
with the French doctrine, the Germans stressed
the importance of having bombing parties at key
points, they to stressed the importance of
defending machine gun positions and the
junctions of communications trenches. Their
doctrine of elastic defence, keeping
Eingreiftruppen - troops dedicated to the
counter-attack - ready for immediate deployment
was very much based on the aggressive use of
the grenade as opposed to the French barrage
which simply retarded any advance.
As we can see, all three drills are remarkably
similar in the attack, reflecting the common
doctrine established through cross-pollinisation
of ideas. However, this is to focus on the
similarities which exist in the area of trench
clearance. Important as this is, and in 1915 it is
pretty much the norm for all participants, it does
not reflect the key differences in attitude towards
the grenade going forward. As we have seen
with the defensive doctrines differences begin to
emerge which are key.

As early as 1915 the Germans were
experimenting with specialist assault troops. The
origins of these appear to be partially built on a
desire to develop and learn new techniques.
Many such units were, at the outset at least, seen
as a nucleus which would be taught "best
practice" and then disseminate that information
among their comrades. However, as the idea
developed it became a case of developing highly
trained units equipped for very specific tasks.
Hauptmann Willi Rohr Sturmabteilung of the
Garde Schutzen Bataillon was equipped with a
veritable arsenal of support weapons as early as
the Summer of 1915. This was to provide an
early indication of how, rather than spreading a
homogenous message through the German Army
as a whole, elite units would be allowed to
flourish and ensure an uneven spread of
resources.
What was equally important was the emphasis
these assault units placed on the hand-grenade
as their primary weapon of attack. The image of
the stormtrooper, laden with sandbags full of the
ubiquitous stielhandgrenaten present the
enduring image of the spring offensive of 1918.
The very name of Ernst Junger's opus "Storm of
Steel" reinforces that image further. Here we see
a distinct contrast with the British Army who,
despite a major emphasis on the bomb in 1915
and early 1916, were coming to very different
conclusions about its employment.
Even before the battle of the Somme, training
Pamphlet SS110, Preliminary Notes on the
Tactical Lessons of Military Operations, stressed:
"It must be realised by all ranks that the rifle
and bayonet is the main infantry weapon.
Grenades are useful for clearing small lengths
of trench and for close quarter fighting after a
trench has been rushed; but no great or rapid
progress will ever be made by bombing, and an
assault across the open after adequate
preparation will usually be a quicker and in the
long run less costly operation than bombing
attacks on a large scale"
Page 32
272
Indeed, the concern was that by encouraging the
bomber to hide behind the traverse was hardly
an effective way of encouraging an offensive
spirit. Indeed, evidence suggested that when
firm opposition was met, and particularly one
who themselves had a supply of grenades, a
stalemate would result which would end any
progress for either side. Unlike the Germans, the
British attempted to seek a solution which was
less dependent on one singular approach. In July
1918 the British moved from their distinctive
platoon organisation with four mutually
complimentary sections of rifles, bombers, rifle
bombers and Lewis guns, to a structure which
saw all of those weapons incorporated into mixed
sections where the bomb was simply one option
which could be selected in a specific tactical
situation.
Reflecting after the war, Erich Ludendorf stated:
"The excessive use of hand grenades came
about because these could be usefully and
safely employed from behind shelter, whereas
a man using a rifle must leave cover...When it
came to hand-to-hand fighting, the superiority
of the enemy in men was much too great. The
infantry soldier had forgotten his shooting
through use of grenades"
By the time war broke out again in 1939, the
armies of the world had adopted the British
approach, recognising the importance of the
grenade, but not its absolute primacy. A
situation which remains today.
Gaming with Grenades
The grenade in the context of the Great War was
a useful tool for what the French defined as five
specific situations. Firstly, the defence of a
trench in close range fighting; secondly, the
systematic clearance of a trench; thirdly, the final
preparation for an assault on a hostile trench;
fourthly, mopping up troops in dugouts and
bunkers and, finally, when raiding a trench.
These are very specific situations, indeed I would

go so far as to suggest that there is a whole lot of
overlap going on with several of those.
We do, of course, have two options here.
Through the Mud & the Blood are, of course,
devoted to platoon sized skirmishes in the period,
but we introduced the idea of using Chain of
Command with them in a hybrid in the last
Special . That concept is still very much a work in
progress but one which I feel is worth pursuing.
The emphasis on the specialist teams and squads
in the Great War makes the Chain of Command
option all the more appealing. However, here
was can look at both options
What we attempted to do in the Summer Special
was to present a playable order of battle for the
main nations on the Western Front. Part of that
was to abstract the role of bombers slightly by
representing most of a bombing party as riflemen
whilst the dedicated bombers represent the
business end of the unit. To my mind this
abstraction works pretty well, but if we want a
more precise and less generic approach to
grenades we can certainly add some different
national characteristics to our games.
The Hardware
Of course, when we discuss grenades in the Great
War we are not comparing apples with apples.
There are some significant differences which
affect the way in which they were deployed. The
German stick grenade was primarily a concussion
grenade, where a thin jacket of metal housed the
explosive charge and produced a limited amount
of shrapnel. In the confined space of trenches,
the effect of the explosion alone was usually
sufficient to kill of render ineffective anyone
within close proximity. The addition of the
wooden handle aided the thrower so that despite
being 1lb 5oz (around 600g) in weight, distances
of 40 yards could be achieved.
This performance contrasts significantly with the
Mills Bomb which was a fragmentation grenade,
reliant on a shower of shrapnel for killing. With a
weight of 1lb 110z (around 750g) the Mills bomb
Page 33
273
had a throwing range of around 30 yards as an
absolute maximum, with 20 yards being more
likely. With a danger zone of 100 yards created
by the shrapnel this meant that the user needed
to be sure of having cover from which to operate
from.
The French F1 grenade was, essentially, a smaller
version of the Mills Bomb, reliant on
fragmentation for effect but being slightly lighter
it could achieve greater ranges. "All except
awkward men" being able to achieve a range of
30 yards.
If we want to better represent the specific
weapons, we can translate these ranges into
inches and consider the explosive and shrapnel
effect if the weapons. This gives us the following
results for Mud & Blood.
Weapon Range Effect
Stielhandgrenate 12" As rules
Mills Bomb 8" +1 Shock
F1 9" As rules
In Chain of Command we are faced with a slightly
different mechanism as the throwing of grenades
is somewhat randomised. For the Great War,
where men were allocated to, and trained for,
specific roles, it seems reasonable to allow
dedicated bombers to be rather more reliable. I
would suggest that for these men we Should
simply apply the same range bands as Mud &
Blood. However, when untrained men have
simply been issued with grenades in the hope of
stemming the tide of an enemy attack (as often
happened) then we revert to the main rules in
Chain of Command, but simply limit the
maximum range to those shown. So, an
untrained man with a Mills bomb rolling double
5, for example, would be capped at a range of 8".
The Units
We can, of course, simply use the bombing
sections or parties identified in CoCking Up
Through the Mud & the Blood article in the
Christmas 2014 Special. However, if we wish we

can field more specific teams, as outlined above,
to see how they function on the battlefield.
These we can structure as follows:
GERMANY
RIFLE GRUPPE ONE
Gefreiter, Junior Leader, with rifle
Eight riflemen
Two untrained bombers
ASSAULT GRUPPE ONE
TEAM ONE
Gefreiter, Junior Leader, with rifle
Two bombers
two carrier
TEAM TWO
Four riflemen with sandbags and entrenching
tools
Germany has two types of units here. Firstly the
rifle Gruppe in an infantry platoon. These count
as untrained bombers so use the grenade rules in
Chain of Command. The second unit, the Assault
Gruppe in a stormtrooper unit, represent bomber
specifically trained for that task and use the rules
shown above.
FRANCE
GRENADIER-VOLTIEGUR SQUAD
Caporal, Junior Leader, with rifle
Two bombers
Two carriers
Three riflemen
This force may be deployed as two teams as
follows:
One Junior Leader with rifle
One bomber
One carrier
One rifleman
This French unit replaces the Grenadier-Voltigeur
squad in the standard platoon. The French
should have a new national characteristic rule,
"Barrage", which allows them to block a 6"
section of trench between 3" and 9" from the
position of a Grenadier-Voltigeur squad or any
squad equipped with grenades in an emergency.
This does not kill any enemy, but that area of
trench is blocked with cotton wool or similar to
Page 34
274
indicate the barrage being deployed there. No
troops may move into this area.
BRITISH
BOMBER SECTION
Corporal, Junior Leader, with rifle
Two bombers
Two bayonet men
Two carriers
Two spare men with rifles
Information on US organisation is hard to find. It
is an accepted fact that the bomber section
contained twelve men, but how they were
structured it is difficult to be sure. This is not
least the case because of the large amount of
manuals which were issued based on the
experience of the British, French and Germans.
Amongst that it is difficult to ascertain how, or
even if, a particularly American doctrine
emerged. What is certain is that all twelve men
in the bomber section would not be specialist
bombers and that, undoubtedly, some would be
operating as bayonet men and some as carriers.
My suggestion would be to use the structure
shown below, although, much to my annoyance,
this is utter conjecture:
SECTION ONE
Corporal, Junior Leader, with rifle
Three bombers
Four Riflemen
Four carriers
The US forces were predominantly issued with
the Mk II "Pineapple" grenade which had a very
similar performance to the French F1.
Conclusion
Of course we can add very specific rules to cover
particular weapons or situations, as will be seen
in the Loos scenario below. However this article
does cover a broad sweep of the war from late
1915 onwards as the distinct doctrines emerged
and, I hope, will add some variety to our games.

The Battle of Loos in September and October of
1915 is noteworthy for several reasons. It saw
the first British use of poison gas as well as being
the first large scale engagement to involve
elements of the New Army which had responded
to Kitchener's call and joined the ranks. Here
these one-time civilians would prove they had
the pluck of the regular troops who remained
from the original British Expeditionary Force.
The attack was planned as part of a joint Anglo-
French offensive which was, somewhat hopefully,
determined to end trench warfare and restore a
war of manoeuvre, with the French advancing
north in to Belgium and the British supporting
them by driving a wedge into the German lines
South of the La Bassée Canal.
As a third "first", the offensive saw the first major
use of specialist British tunnelling units who
planted mines under the German front line
trenches as well as digging Russian saps into No-
Man's-Land to provide cover for the advancing
troops. On the one hand the attack at Loos had
all of the hallmarks of innovation and original
thinking, yet, on the other hand, there is clear
evidence that the British were being obliged to
put the politics of their alliance with the French
before stark military realities.
Since the beginning of the war, British industry
had been unable to keep up with the demand for
artillery shells. By mid-1915 the shortages were
Page 35
275
extreme and the politicians were embarrassed
when newspapers rightly flagged up the failure of
the attack at Aubers Ridge in May on the
government's apparently inability to resolve this
issue.
By September 1915 the newly created Ministry of
Munitions was addressing the crisis, new
factories were being built and laws were passed
which ensured that sufficient labour was
available. However, the solution had yet to reap
benefits and when planning for the attack at Loos
it was clear that insufficient artillery shells were
available to provide the desired initial
bombardment. What was more, with chlorine
gas a new addition to the British arsenal, there
were insufficient supplies available to provide the
screen which was desired. At many places smoke
was to be used in an attempt to give the
impression of a gas cloud.
Despite attempts by British commanders to get
plans changed, the reality was that the French
Army leadership under General Joffre was
determined to take the offensive in order to deny
the Germans the initiative. Despite the
misgivings of Sir Douglas Haig, commanding 1st
Army and tasked with heading the offensive in
the British sector, political expediency took
precedent over stark military logic when Lord
Kitchener insisted that the British role as
subordinate partner at this stage of the war, was

to support the French wherever they could. The
attack was scheduled for the 25th of September.
As a sop to Haig's misgivings, it was announced
that the attack would be supported by a gas
attack in order to compensate for the shortage of
shells. Despite the shortage, the British had
learnt at Aubers Ridge that only the heaviest of
guns could breach the German wire. Over 100
pieces were assembled with what shells could be
amassed for the task. Even so, it was accepted
that the materiel to hand was insufficient, making
the gas component essential. This saw a reliance
on the weather come to the fore as a positive
forecast for wind was required.
The Attack Begins
At this stage of the war the British were keen to
comply with the Hague Convention which
outlawed the use of gas shells. As a result the
140 tons of Chlorine gas which were to proceed
the attack were released from containers dug
into the parapet of the British positions, a
method entirely dependent on the weather. At
0500 on the morning of the 25th, Haig was still
unconvinced that the conditions were right. An
RFC weather specialist had declared them to be
favourable, but in the end the General was
obliged to get a staff officer to light a cigarette in
order to observe the drift of the smoke towards
the German lines. Only then did Haig order the
gas to be released at 0550.
In the northern sector of the battlefield Hubert
Gough's I Corps was to initiate the battle by
detonating mines under the German mines on
the northern side of the canal before attacking
the lines to their front. The (9th Scottish) Division
was to take the Hohenzollern Redoubt, shown on
the map by a red letter H. The 7th Division on
their right was then to advance in sequence with
the 9th to secure the Lens road between Hulluch
and Haisnes.
To the South Sir Henry Rawlinson's IV Corps was
to attack with the 1st Division was to strike out
for the Lens La Bassée road around Hulluch whilst
Page 36
276
to their South the 15th (Scottish) Division would
attack Loos village before moving on to Hill 70 on
the ridge behind it. Finally the 47th (London)
Division was to seize the double Crassier, a huge
mound of mining spoil, which the Germans were
using for observation and which would for a flank
guard once seized.
Once these forces had broken into the enemy
positions the British reserves would be unleashed
to advance into the open ground beyond,
exploiting the victory. Sir Richard Haking's XI
Corps was accompanied by the Cavalry Corps and
the Indian Cavalry Corps in forming this reserve
but, unusually, control of this body was not given
to Haig but retained by Sir John French,
commander of the B.E.F.
To the north, in I Corps sector, 2 Division attacked
along both banks of the La Bassée Canal but were
met with heavy fire which completely halted their
attack. With no hope of pushing on to form the
flank guard along the canal, they fell back to their
start position and took no further part in the
action.
To their South, the 9th (Scottish) Division were
enfiladed by fire from the German strongpoint at
Mad Point, marked with an M on the main map,
some units, such as 8 Black Watch, suffering
grievous casualties, but made much better
headway against the Hohenzollern Redoubt
where the wire had been cut efficiently by
artillery fire. This allowed them to bomb their
way through the redoubt before progressing on
towards Fosse 8, the pit head which provided the
German artillery with their main spotting
position. Soon after 0800 some elements had
progressed as far at Pekin trench on the outskirts
of Haisnes but were unsupported due to
confusion which led other Battalions to believe
that that position had been captured and was
held in strength.
Across 9th Division's front what had been a
strong opportunistic advance was now left
incoherent and pinned down as small but

efficient German reinforcements were brought
forward in the late morning.
The Southernmost Division in I Corps sector was
the 7th Division which struggled to move forward
due to lingering gas combined with inefficient gas
hoods. The 1 South Staffordshires and 2 Royal
Warwicks lost around three-quarters of their
strength to artillery and machine gun fire before
they got to the German front lines. Yet
elsewhere other units were more successful.
Before 0900 some men were crossing the Lens
road and moving into Hulluch and against
German positions at Cite St Elie. However, this
was to be the high water mark in this sector as
German reinforcements meant that the troops
could not push on without reinforcements.
In IV Corps sector, the 1st Division had mixed
fortunes. The 1st Brigade advanced through
heavy fire to capture their objectives, but to their
South the 2nd was delayed when gas drifted back
Page 37
277
over their lines where the troops were assembled
ready for the assault. The enemy wire was then
discovered to be undamaged and the attack
stalled when attempts to cut the wire were
thwarted by German machine gunners. As the
gas and smoke cleared the whole Brigade's attack
was stalled and, unsupported the 1st Brigade cold
not push on any further.
To the South of the 1st Division, 15 (Scottish)
Division was badly delayed when the gas cloud
failed to move forward with the anticipated
speed. In the end the infantry were obliged to
advance through the gas cloud to emerge into
the open with over a hundred yards still to cross
before they reached the German lines. Machine
gun and artillery fire decimated the ranks of the
attackers but aggressively led parties of men
worked their way forward and rolled up the front
line trench with bombs, opening the route
forward to capture Loos village which fell by
0800. The main Lens-La Bassée road was reached

by 0915 and elements of the Division were able
to take up the flank guard position which, as yet,
had not been assumed by the 47th Division.
On the extreme right, in the 47th Division's sector
the gas cloud moved according to plan with the
Germans caught before they realised what was
happening. The Double Crassier was secured and
However, units pushing forward were badly
handled by machine gun fire and localised
counter attacks with grenades stopped them
seizing their target position South of Loos where
they were to have formed a flank guard.
The highlight of the morning in IV Corps sector
came when the 15th Division seized the redoubt
at Hill 70 to see the Germans retreating in poor
order. These troops began to advance down the
far side of Hill 70 but fire from the German
secondary positions brought this to a halt at
around 10.30, with many British troops exposed
with little or no cover. Now a lack of shells
prevented the British reacting with adequate
force to the newly identified German positions
which were beginning to cause significant
casualties. What was desperately needed were
reinforcements to provide some additional
impetus.
Command or Control?
Sir John French, commander in chief of the B.E.F.,
was no fool, he had secured a reputation as a
competent leader in the Boer War, a theatre
where reputations were more often lost than
made. As early as 0845 on the 25th of September
Haig had sent a messsage to French requesting
the release of XI Corps to support the attacks. All
of the Corps reserves had been committed by
that point and it was clear that progress was
being made but that it was patchy.
Unfortunately French had abandoned his
headquarters and his staff to be as close to the
battle as possible and, with limited
communications, this proved to be a disaster.
Whilst French agreed to release Haking's force he
drove to deliver the order in person. There is
Page 38
278
much debate about the positioning of the reserve
at Loos, suffice to say that in a situation where
any delay was critical, this served to retard the
move forward considerably. What was more,
French retained command of the Corps until the
point when it arrived in the front trenches, only
then could Haig issue his orders. As the force
advanced along communications trenches these
were found to be crammed with wounded men
and it was 1320 before the Corps informed Haig
that they were under his command.
By now 15 (Scottish) Division which had been so
successful in taking Hill 70 had been ejected from
that position by a counter-attack and a line of
machine gun positions established along the La
Bassée to Lens road. Fresh attacks against Hill 70
were repulsed during the afternoon without
problem.
To the North of Hulluch the 1st Division was
obliged to withdraw due to casualties, leaving
only a screen of men holding their positions.
However, it was not all bad news. At 1430 four
hundred men of the German 157th Infantry
Regiment surrendered, opening up a fresh route
for the reserves to use. Two Divisions from XI
Corps were ordered to push through between
Hulluch and Cite St Auguste, but again delays
meant that these orders were not issued down to
Brigade level until 1700. By the time the orders
were processed down to battalion level it was an
hour later and darkness was approaching. What
was more the men had not been provided with
any food. Orders were now issued by First Army
for the men not to advance beyond the Le Bassée
road that night, but again it was nearly 0200 on
the 26th before that got through. This nicely
illustrated the issues faced by commanders
without effective means of communicating with
their subordinates, especially once an advance
got underway and fixed wire telephones were left
behind.
By the end of the day, I Corps had made no
progress in the North as far as Mad Point, but had
seized the Hohenzollern Redoubt from where

they held a line, albeit a tenuous one, out
towards Hulluch. IV Corps Held its ground from
the Double Crassier in the South, had captured
the village of Loos and held outposts facing
Hulluch.
For Haig and the British forces the 26th was to be
the moment when XI Corps would make a
difference but, as was so often the case, the
opportunity for real gains only came when the
attacker benefitted from initial surprise. In fact
21 and 24 Divisions spent most of the night
struggling forward whilst the Guard Division had
not even arrived on the battlefield by the
following morning.
British attempts to break through at Loos
continues for two more days but with little
success. The following two weeks saw the
Germans counter-attack in order to try to regain
the ground lost. History considers Loos to be a
stalemate, indeed if one considers the casualties
over the period of the battle to the 15th of
October when fighting finally fizzled out, the
British lost significantly more men than the
Germans, 59,000 men to 26,000. However, it is
worth considering that the French attack at Lens
on the 25th was launched not in synchronicity
with the British attack, but around six hours later
at midday. By the time the Germans reacted to
the French offensive, the British had reached
their high water mark and were, to all intents and
purposes retreating. Had the roles been reversed
and the British attacked at midday, it is unlikely
that German reserves could have been spared
with a major French offensive occurring in the
same sector of the front.
As it was, the poor positioning of reserves too far
to the rear and the insistence of Sir John French
on retaining control of these leaves Loos as one
of the great "what if's" of the Great War. At 1240
on the afternoon of the 25th of September the
British 3rd Cavalry Division was ordered to move
forward to achieve the longed for breakout. As it
was its commander, Major-General Briggs,
recognised that the opportunity was not quite
Page 39
279
what it seemed and declined to advance. Had XI
Corps been in the reserve trenches that morning
rather than several miles to the rear there is
undoubtedly the illusive chance that Loos would
be remembered as a great success as opposed to
simply another stage in the learning process
which would, eventually, see the British Army
develop the right range of skills required to gain
that final breakthrough some three years later.
The Seaforth Highlanders - A Case Study
All of this is, of course, very much the "big
picture" which provides us with the context of
the overall battle, or at least the critical first day.
As we know, Mud & Blood and Chain of
Command focus more on the detail at the tactical
end of the operation where was can replicate the
nuances of conflict at this stage of the war. To
my mind, it is only by looking at the fine detail of
any conflict that we can truly understand its
unique features and that involves taking a more
focussed approach on what is happening at the
sharp end.
To do this we will look at the 7th battalion
Seaforth Highlanders who attacked as part of the
26th Brigade of the 9th (Scottish) Division against
one of the most formidable points in the line, the
Hohenzollern Redoubt. Here I shall turn to their
Regimental History to set the scene:
"The morning of September 25th broke dull
and grey. The wind was light and variable,
veering between south-west and south, and
seemed little favourable to the use of gas,
which it had been decided to employ for the
first time against the enemy. Until the last
moment there was some doubt whether the
original programme would be followed out.
Nevertheless at ten minutes to six a.m. the
gas cylinders were turned on. After some ten
minutes a smoke screen was sent up from the
British trenches. Then after an interval, the
cylinders were turned on again full blast. Two
minutes before the time fixed for the assault,
the gas was stopped ; the air was thickened
up by triple smoke candles ; and our men

climbed out of the trenches and lined up
behind the smoke barrier in readiness for the
attack, which had been timed for twenty
minutes past six.
(T)he 7th Battalion left their trenches over
against the Hohenzollern Redoubt. As they
advanced at a steady walk behind clouds of
smoke, machine-gun fire was opened on
them and a few men went down under it.
Then, quickening their pace, they bore down
upon the Redoubt. At its first trench they lost
a good many of their officers. Nevertheless
they continued to advance, and bombed their
way up the communication trenches leading
from the Redoubt to the main German
trench; pressed forward and went right on to
the Trois Cabarets between Fosse 8 and the
village of Haisnes. Here they stayed and
waited until the two front companies had
been reinforced by the remainder of the
battalion. It was now half-past seven, and the
Page 40
280
8th Gordons, who had been in support, went
through them and carried on the attack. The
7th Seaforths had orders to stay where they
were and convert their trench into a fire
trench, at the same time making ready to
deal with a counter-attack. They had lost
touch with the Camerons on their left in the
course of their advance, and their position on
that flank was insecure until a battalion of the
Black Watch came into line with them. They
had lost their colonel and their adjutant at
eight o'clock that morning. All four company
commanders had been killed or wounded
early in the action, and most of their officers
had become casualties. All day they were
exposed to a murderous shrapnel fire, but
the behaviour of the men was beyond all
praise."
The battalion had first advanced against the West
Face trench of the redoubt, shown on the
detailed trench map above. The machine gun fire

they had encountered was from German
positions in the Big Willie trench which was not
engaged in the first stage of the operation.
With the West face cleared they bombed their
way through the redoubt's trenches, clearing
dugouts as they went, following which they
bombed up the communication trench to the
main German front line trench. There they
entered the area of the Corons, cottages built by
the mining companies in the area to house their
workers. This area was made up of five rows of
cottages which were partially fortified as part of
the German defences. Here machine gun fire
from the North West swept the streets but the
Seaforths cleared the area and continued their
advance through the colliery at Fosse 8 and on to
the crossroads at Les Trois Cabaret where they
went firm and assumed a defensive stance. As
attested to in the passage above, it had been a
hard day, with high officer casualties, and yet the
battalion had endured and fought its way deep
into the enemy defences.
All stirring stuff, but what appeals most to me
about the Seaforth's day is that they end up
fighting through some very different terrain. The
initial assault is a classic attack along a front line
trench, clearing dugouts as they go. Next is the
attack down the communication trench, again a
task for bombers, before they move on to a semi-
fortified street clearing operation in the Corons
and then a fight for an open industrial area. This
is a chance to sample some very different fighting
in a small, pint sized, campaign!
CUIDICH'N RIGH - HELP THE KING
This is a four stage ladder campaign in the style of
the Pint Sized campaigns and takes its name from
the Regimental motto of the Seaforth
Highlanders. It's a short campaign, set over just a
few hours and in a particularly Great War
environment, so consequently has some
peculiarities to it. As a result you really don't
need At the Sharp End to play this through;
indeed if preferred you could simply play through
Page 41
281
the four scenarios presented as stand-alone
games.
THE CAMPAIGN LADDER
The Master Map, shown below, shows the four
"rungs" of the campaign. These are as follows:
Rung Name Scenario
1 Attack on the Redoubt 3
2 Bombing down the line 4
3 Through the Corons 4
4 Taking the Colliery 5
SETTING UP THE CAMPAIGN
This campaign looks at the spearhead of the
attack and is very much about the British
attempting to keep up the momentum of their
attack to complete the campaign. If they clear
the colliery at Rung Four within five games, they
will automatically take up their position at Les
Trois Cabarets and win the campaign.
On the German side, their job is to cause attrition
which will slow down the Seaforths to the point
where they fail to push through to their objective
by the end of Game Five. As such the margin of
error for the British is a slim one.
The British player has three platoons available for
the game, representing the fact that large
numbers of men were delayed in clearing out the
Hohenzollern Redoubt and, in the chaos of
trench warfare, the cohesion of the battalion was
lost and small groups pushed on to achieve their
objectives on their own initiative. Only one
platoon may be committed to attack in each
campaign turn. No platoon may attack in
consecutive turns; however a player may defend
in any number of consecutive turns.
There are no reinforcements available to the
British during the campaign, nor may the player
amalgamate any platoons during the campaign.
The German player has one platoon at the start
of the campaign and may deploy a second
platoon as reinforcements at any point in the
 282

campaign. When this fresh platoon deploys the
original platoon is removed from play.
At the end of each game, casualties are
determined according to the rules in At the Sharp
End, but with the time available being limited no
wounded men will ever return to their units
during the course of the campaign. If not using
At the Sharp End, simply count one man in every
three lost in any game as simply having been
shaken and allow him to immediately return to
duty. Round up for any odd numbers.
At any point in the campaign where they hold the
initiative, the Germans may not launch a counter-
attack but they may add one point of additional
defences to their table for the next game only.
This will then surrender the initiative to the
British who must then attack.
ARMY LISTS
The following basic platoon lists along with the
accompanying support lists are used for this
campaign.

INITIATIVE
The campaign will being with the British player
holding the initiative and attacking in Game One.
After that, who holds the initiative will depend on
the result of the previous game.

Page 42
 283

BRITISH
Command Dice: 5
PLATOON HEADQUARTERS
Lieutenant, Senior Leader, with pistol
Sergeant, Senior Leader, with rifle
RIFLE SECTION ONE
Corporal, Junior Leader, with rifle
Ten riflemen
BOMBER SECTION
Corporal, Junior Leader, with rifle
Two bombers
Two bayonet men
Two carriers
Two spare men with rifles
RIFLE SECTION TWO
Corporal, Junior Leader, with rifle
Ten riflemen
RIFLE SECTION THREE
Corporal, Junior Leader, with rifle
Ten riflemen
If the British player wishes, he may equip one or
two riflemen in each Rifle Section with bombs.
However, these men will be untrained bombers.
The following very limited Support Options are
available for this campaign:
BRITISH SUPPORT LIST
LIST ONE
Engineer Wire Clearing Team, 3 men
Adjutant
Trench block or French Wire
LIST TWO
Stokes 3” mortar firing smoke from off-table
The Stokes mortar was used for the first time at
Loos to deliver smoke. This option is only
available in Game One and will allow the player
to place a 12" square section of smoke anywhere
on the table at the start of Turn One. Troops
moving in smoke may never do so at the double.
The British are using the Mark 1 hand grenade for
this game which should be treated as the German
stick grenade as covered in the Handgranaten
article.
BRITISH NATIONAL CHARACTERISTICS
THE PLAYING FIELDS OF ETON
The British Army’s emphasis on sports and
physical fitness, combined with their officers
being chaps who know how to play the game,
will allow any assault lead by a British officer
using two Command Initiatives to add an
additional D6 of movement. This will not
count as an additional dice of movement
when calculating the defender’s close combat
dice.
BRITISH BRIEFING
This is a major attack and it is absolutely critical
that we advance to achieve our objectives as
rapidly as possible. We must clear the
Hohenzollern Redoubt, advance down the
communication trench to the enemy's main front
line trench before moving into the coal mine,
clearing the workers cottages before taking the
colliery itself. Remember, the bomb is your
friend in close quarters but the rifle and bayonet
will do the work when we get to the open. Good
luck!
GERMAN
Command Dice: 5
PLATOON HEADQUARTERS
Sergeant, Senior Leader, with rifle
RIFLE GRUPPE ONE
Gefreiter, Junior Leader, with rifle
Eight riflemen
RIFLE GRUPPE TWO
Gefreiter, Junior Leader, with rifle
Eight riflemen
RIFLE GRUPPE THREE
Gefreiter, Junior Leader, with rifle
Eight riflemen
RIFLE GRUPPE FOUR
Gefreiter, Junior Leader, with rifle
Eight riflemen

Page 43
 284

The following support options are available. GERMAN NATIONAL CHARACTERISTICS

GERMAN SUPPORT LIST HANDGRANATEN!

LIST ONE The German army used the hand grenade as
Adjutant their close quarter weapon of choice.
Trench block or French Wire
LIST TWO To reflect this, when a Leader attached to a
Sniper Team Team or Squad uses two Command Initiatives,
Reserve case of grenades he may lead a charge against any enemy
LIST THREE within 12” preceded by a hail of grenades.
SOS barrage Roll 1D6, subtracting 1 if the enemy is in light
Maxim 08 MMG with five crew and Junior cover, 2 if in hard cover. On a roll of 1 or 2,
Leader one hand grenade has hit the target unit; on 3
Off-table Machine Gun or 4, two grenades hit; on 5 or 6, three
Wood and sandbag bunker (hard cover) grenades hit the target. Roll for the effect of
LIST FOUR these and the Team or Squad may then move
Concrete bunker with up to 3D6 to try to initiate Close Combat.

The off-table machine gun option may only be

selected for Scenarios 1 and 2.
The reserve case of grenades is sufficient to equip
two men as untrained bombers for that one
game. It must be placed at a key point on the
table, in a bunker, at a trench junction or
machine gun position. The Gruppe which wishes
to convert two riflemen to bombers must move
to that point in order to take advantage of this
option.
Where buildings are present, the wood and
sandbag bunker option can be used to convert
one to a strongpoint, as opposed to building a
separate bunker.
GERMAN BRIEFING
The British are attacking and the Devils are using
gas! You must attempt to delay them for as long
as possible as you are certain that a counter-
attack will be launched quickly. At every
opportunity inflict maximum casualties on the
Englanders!
You have one chance for reinforcements during
this campaign. Choose well when to call for
these.
THE SCENARIOS
The scenarios below are not designed to present
perfectly balanced forces on both sides, we do
not quote the Platoon Force Ratings for each
scenario, but we have used these to determine
the level of support available. For each scenario
we have provided the players with the total
Support Points which they may use to select from
the campaign specific support lists.
GENERAL TERRAIN NOTES
We have provided specific but limited terrain
notes for each scenario but some general
remarks will prove helpful. This is summer of
1915 where a shell shortage has been gripping
the British Army for nearly a year. As a result this
is not the shell shattered landscape which many
people associate with the Great War. Instead a
few shell holes should be randomly distributed
around key points, such as crossroads or the main
colliery complex, but largely the ground is
undisturbed grassland with trenches carved into
the chalk. If you want to be very specific, for a
game at a show or convention for example, all
the trenches should have white chalky spoil
around them where they have been dug out.
Any buildings present are largely intact. Roll a
dice for each house and on a 6 it should have

Page 44
 285

suffered some fairly major damage, but the rest Scenario 1

are largely intact.

Any roads are dirt tracks or cinder but all are hard
ground and good going at this time of year.

All of the scenarios in this supplement can be

played on a 4' by 4' board. We have found that a
smaller table suits the close quarter actions of
the sort represented here.

Chain of Command Option

For the Patrol Phase in any game in this
campaign, limit the movement of the Patrol
Markers to 9" with the maximum gap between
them limited to 9" as well. A 12" distance from
the enemy still locks down the Patrol Markers

The table represents the West Face of the

Mud & Blood Option
Hohenzollern Redoubt. The short "tabs" coming
Use Blinds as normal with Mud & Blood.
off the trench running towards the North show
The following illustrations show all four tables
the entrance to dugouts which will need to be
which will be used in the campaign. We have
cleared.
intentionally left these as schematic
representations as, with any game involving
Roll 1D3 (D6 halved) for the support available for
trenches, the layout the gamer actually uses will
both sides. If the German player selects a Maxim
largely depend on the terrain they have available.
MMG he play place one strongpoint anywhere on
Try to get as close to the diagrams as possible
the table to house this.
with what you have.
There is no Patrol Phase played for this game.
The German Patrol Marker deployment option is
The Germans begin the game placing three jump-
shown with the blue dotted area, the British with
off points anywhere on the table within the blue
the red arrowed line. All Patrol Phases are
dashed area. The British then place three Jump-
undertaken as indicated in the rules with the
off points anywhere on their table edge. These
changes outlined opposite. The support options
should be a minimum of 7" from the front line
for each scenario are noted below each map.
trench, so they cannot deploy directly into the
trench on Phase One.
In the Christmas Special for 2014 we outlined
some specific additions to the basic scenarios for
This game begins in a cloud of gas and smoke.
using Chain of Command for the late Great War.
For the first turn, both sides must wear gas
These revolved around adding fortifications to
masks, this means that no troops can move at the
the battlefield. Ignore those for this early war
double in that turn and all firing (and spotting if
campaign, any instructions for additional
using Mud & Blood) is done with a -1 to hit. This
fortifications will be included in the notes for
does not affect bombing.
each scenario.
All gas and smoke disperse at the end of the first
Turn and do not return for the rest of the
campaign.

Page 45
 286

Scenario 2 This represents the British attack through the

mining cottages, carons as they are know. The
buildings are in relatively good order (dice to see
which are damaged). It doesn't matter whether
these are single or double storey buildings - use
whatever you have in your collection. In reality
they were small cottages of two storeys standing
in gardens which were now overgrown or full of
the detritus of war. Add piles of chalk where
trenches have been dug through the area as well
as ammunition stockpiles and similar.

Roll 1D3 (D6 halved) for the support available for

both sides but add +2 to the German score. This
is a delaying action and all of the normal scenario
rules apply.

Scenario 4
This game represents the British player
attempting to clear the German communication
and main front line trench.

Roll 1D3 (D6 halved) for the support available for

both sides but add +2 to the German score. If the
German player selects a Maxim MMG he play
place one strongpoint anywhere on the table to
house this.

The British player must move down the

communications trench and leave the table via
the point marked with the red star. He may elect
to clear out the main trench which goes off to the
West or may simply block that section of trench
with a suitable trench block. This is a delaying
action and all of the normal scenario rules apply.
This table represents the colliery yard and should
Scenario 3 look pretty industrial and grimy. The railway line
running through should have piles of coal and
boxes stacked alongside and the area should
generally be busy with piles of rubbish and
mining gear. This is not an empty parade ground!

This is a flank attack, as indicated by the

deployment areas shown.

WINNING THE CAMPAIGN

For the British, victory is about breaking through
the German positions to reach the open ground
to the rear. However, there are time constraints.
If the Germans can stop the British completing
that task by the end of Game Five then they will
have held for long enough for reinforcements to
arrive. If they do that then they win the
campaign.

Page 46